Indra: Total Sheet

Total Sheet 633
Vendor’s name : EBARA CORPORATION

Company 's name : Nghi Son Refinery and Petrochemical LLC.
Purchaser : JGCS Consortium
Responsible OC : CHIYODA CORPORATION
Plant Location : Nghi Son, Vietnam
Project name : NSRP Complex Project
P / Order No. : PC2158-104-E1
Equipment/Material name : Centrifugal Pump (OH, BB2, VS4) and Driver
Item number : Common
Document title : Operation/maintenance manual for pump
NSRP Complex Project ( JOB No.: 0-6495-20 )

DOCUMENT CLASS: O
ISSUE PURPOSE: FC
RESULT CODE: ( A )
NEXT STATUS: ( --- )
RESUBMISSION DATE: ( --- )
RESPONSIBLE DEPT./PERSON: ( ROT/BPP/YH/TU )
Review Date: ( 05-Apr-2016 )
A: Approved without Comment; B: Approved with Comment
R: Not Approved; F: Not Subject to Review
Approval or review hereunder shall not be construed to relieve Vendor/ Subcontractor of his responsibilities
and liability under the Contract
Purchaser ORIG. PURCHASE ORDER NO. SERIAL REV.
DOC. No. V C2158-104-E- 802 2
Rev Date Page Description Prep'd Chk'd App'd

6
5
4
3
2 04/Mar/16 - For Construction T.Jia S.K S.Kurasawa
1 30/Oct/15 - Revised S.Kuarasaw - S. Kurasawa
0 14/Jul/15 - First Issue K.Sanada - S.Kurasawa
EBARA CORPORATION
EBARA Serial No. R130555101~16
EBARA DOC No. : R130555101 - 017 Rev. 2
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
KS - BGP- Deflector-English
EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 1
EBARA MODEL “KS” PROCESS PUMP

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Item No. Service Model Ebara Ser. No.

020-P-002/102/202 Raw Feed Pump 250X200KSM52 R130555101
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
2 / 633
0
W
CONTENTS
1. Preface P. 3
1.1 General
2. Operation P. 3
2.1 Preparation for Operation
2.2 Before Starting Operation
2.3 Start Up
2.4 Normal Operation
2.5 Shut-down
3. Maintenance P. 7
3.1 Bearing Lubrication
3.2 Required Tools and Measuring Instruments
3.3 Periodic Maintenance and Maintenance Cycle
3.4 Periodic Maintenance of Standby Pump
3.5 Allowable Tolerances
4. Disassembly, Assembly P.17

4.1 Cautions for Disassembly
4.2 Disassembly Procedure
4.3 Inspection After Disassembly
4.4 Assembly
5. Trouble Shooting Guide P.21
6. Service P.23
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
3 / 633
0
W
1. Preface
This instruction manual covers operation and maintenance of EBARA model KS pump.
This pump has been designed and manufactured under strict quality control to provide safe and
reliable operation. It should be noted, however, that incorrect operation or maintenance can result
in failure of the pump to fully perform or unexpected trouble to occur.
Improper maintenance or operation may be cause for pump guarantee to become invalid in which
case the manufacturer would assume no product liability.
As this instruction manual contains items necessary for routine operation and maintenance, the
user is requested to read this booklet carefully and keep it on hand for future reference.
1.1 General
The EBARA model KS pump is a horizontal single stage, double suction, and center supported
process pump.
This pump is based on API standards.
It has been designed and manufactured with great care so as to withstand high temperature and
high pressure, and also to obtain optimum performance under severe conditions in petroleum
refineries and petrochemical and chemical plants.
Please refer to the submitted Drawings and Documents for required maintenance.
2. Operation
(1) Fill the bearing housing with lubricating oil to the specified level. Check that Oil
Rings[067] have not separated from Oil Ring Retainer[271] during transportation or due to
improper reassembly works. Check and correct Oil Rings[067] positions by removing air
breather or plug on the Bearing Casing[051].
(2) Install a strainer on the suction side of the pump, to prevent entry of foreign objects at
start of operation.
Also install pressure gauges to the front and rear of the strainer to monitor pressure drops
caused by possible strainer clog by foreign material.
Monitor suction pressure.
(3) Ensure that the discharge valve is fully closed.
(4) Check cooling, flushing, and sealing line for proper installation, if provided.
(5) Before coupling driver to pump, check driver rotation by operating driver only. Direction
of pump rotation is Clockwise when viewed from driver end.
After checking direction of rotation, install and tighten the shaft coupling bolts and the shaft
coupling guard.

(1) If cooling, flushing, and sealing lines are provided, open each valve and check for
proper pressure and flow.
(2) Be sure to use antifreeze solution in cooling and quenching line during winter or when
operating in a cold area.
(3) Check a smooth hand turning of the rotor. If abnormal sound is heard such as caused by
sand inclusion or rotation is not smooth, disassemble the pump and check rotating
components such as case wear ring and impeller wear ring.
(4) Pump Priming
Ensure suction valve is fully open. Fill the pump with liquid before operation and evacuate air
or other gases within pump through the opened air vent valve on the customer’s piping by
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
4 / 633
0
W

hand turning the rotor. Open casing air vent valve if provided.
(5) Again check a smooth hand turning of the rotor.
(6) Fully close the air vent valve.
Note1) Install a by-pass line, whose flow rate matches that on the data sheet so the
pump does not operate at less than minimum flow. Another alternative is to open the discharge
valve part way. This is especially important for pumping liquids having high vapor pressure.
2)
Note Perform sufficient warming prior to operation when using pump with liquids over
120℃.
2.2.1 Warm Up Casing

If high temperature liquid is suddenly introduced into a cold pump casing, the large temperature
difference can cause uneven thermal expansion.
Resultant distortions between the casing and rotary components can result in seizure at the start
of operation.
When the pump is used as a spare, it should be sufficiently warmed so that the casing
temperature is uniform.
If the pump is drained for repair or inspection and the casing is filled with high temperature liquid
after it has been cooled, it must be sufficiently warmed.
Operate the pump only after the casing temperature becomes uniform.
Item No. Warming Quantity Guideline (m3/hr)
The standard of the warming method is as follows.

The temperature - rise limitation Within 2℃/ min.
Then sudden temperature - rise Within 50℃
The temperature difference between the upper and lower casing surface
Within 20～30℃
The temperature difference between the specified liquid temperature and the
casing surface Within 30℃
Do not turn the rotor during the warming period.
Warming is inevitably necessary for pumps which handle the liquid of 120℃ or over. Circulate
the warming liquid from lower part of pump casing (through drain holes) and from upper part
of pump casing (through discharge side of customer’s piping).
2.3 Start Up
(1) Fully open the valve on the minimum flow line, if provided.
(2) Ensure that the suction valve is fully opened and discharge valve is fully closed.
Turn on the switch, and then turn off after four or five seconds.
During this time, ensure that rotating direction is correct, and the air vent valve on the
discharge piping is open. Ensure that all gas in the casing has been evacuated.
Perform start/stop operation 2 or 3 times to ensure that pump and prime mover are operating
normally. Pump should never be operated without being primed.
(3) Turn on the switch again.
Open the discharge valve while monitoring discharge pressure. Then, set the pump for
continuous operation. It is also important to note suction pressure changes as capacity is
increased by opening discharge valve. If the suction pressure is below the value shown on the
data sheet, the cause should be determined and corrective action have to be taken.
(4) As shut - off operation increases liquid temperature in the pump resulting in vapor
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
5 / 633
0
W

emission, generates noise and vibrations, and causes corrosion with chemical liquids, such
operation shall be avoided.
However, shut - off operation, with hydrocarbons having high vapor pressure should never be
allowed even for a moment. Also, if noise and vibrations increase and flow decreases gradually
to about half of maximum efficiency, pump operation shall be stopped.
(5) Even if operation begins in the same manner as above with hydrocarbons having high
vapor pressure, the discharge pressure may increase at first, and then decrease suddenly to
nearly equal to the suction pressure. This is a result of a vapor lock in the suction pipe which
prevents pumping action.
Stop pump operation immediately and purge the gas again in the aforementioned manner and
start operation again.
(6) Check respective pump and driver components.
Current, voltage, lubricating of each component, rotating sound, vibration, discharge
pressure, suction pressure, etc. Should be monitored during start - up.
(7) To prevent entry of foreign substances at start of operation, install a temporary strainer at
suction side just before the pump. Install a pressure gauge between the strainer and the pump
in order to check the change in pressure drop due to the strainer at the start of operation.
As increased pressure drop is caused by a clogged strainer, stop the pump, and clean the
strainer. If the pressure drop increases and the suction pressure of the pump is inadequate,
the pump may be burnt.
(8) Check items in previous para.(7) again 30 to 60 minutes after start and check bearing
temperature.

Unusual pressures, current fluctuations, vibration or noise are indications of trouble.
Check for the cause and take necessary steps at early stages.
It is desirable to record daily operating conditions in detail as follows :
(1) Check items
(a) Suction and discharge pressure (Refer to pump data sheet )
(b) Current value and any fluctuation (Refer to motor data sheet or name plate)
(c) Bearing temperature (Refer to para.(2))
(d) Oil level (Refer to 3. Maintenance)
(e) Vibration (Refer to Fig.2.1, Fig.2.2)
(f) Noise
(g) Condition of shaft seal
Peak to Peak Unit μm

Position
1 2 3
Direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial
Fig.2.1 Vibration
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
6 / 633
0
W

(2) Allowable Limit of Operating Conditions
(a) Bearing Temperature
Allowable temperature - rise and maximum allowable temperature shall be as per the
following table.
When operating temperatures exceed the allowable temperature rise, stop the pump and
check for the cause.
Bearing temperature rises gradually during continuous operation and is then stabilized after
a certain time (1～2hours).
The bearing temperature is normal if the bearing housing can be touched by hand.
If necessary install a thermometer on the surface of the bearing housing.
Air Cooled Bearing Jacket
A l l o w a b l e T e m p . R i sM
e ax. Allowable Temp.
Ambient temperature Ambient temp.

80℃
h i g h e r t 20℃
han +40℃
A m b i e n t t e m p e20℃
rature Ambient temp.
80℃
or lower +50℃
With bearing Jacket Cooling

Allowable Temp. Rise Max. Allowable Temp.
Whichever of ambient temperature or cooling water
80℃
t e m p e r a t u r e i s +40℃
higher
(b) Vibration
Allowable vibration limits are indicated in Fig.2.2
If vibration exceeds value ”B”, stop pump and inspect. Vibration value “A” indicates normal
operation.
(3) Cautions on indications of meters
(a) Check readings of the suction and discharge pressure gauges, and ammeter.
(b) Particularly check the conditions on the suction side.
When a strainer is installed on the suction side, check the movement of the pressure gauge
pointers at the downstream side of the strainer.
(c) Open the gauge valve only when checking pressure gauge reading.
The gauge valve should be closed at all other times ; otherwise, the life of the gauge is
shortened.
(4) Frequency of start/stop operation
Frequent start/stop operation will damage the pump (motor).
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
7 / 633
0
W
2.5 Shut - down

(1) If a minimum flow by - pass line is not provided, gradually close the discharge valve while
stopping operation until flow reaches minimum, and then turn off the switch.
After the driver has completely stopped, fully close the discharge valve.
(2) If a minimum flow by - pass line is provided, fully close the discharge valve after making
sure the valve on the by - pass line is fully open, and then turn off the switch.
(3) Continue cooling, flushing, and sealing for a while after the pump has completely stopped.
To protect the mechanical seal o - ring, stop cooling, flushing, and sealing after pump
temperature falls below 80℃, especially for high pumping temperature services.
Then, fully close each valve.
(4) When temporarily stopping a pump handling caustic liquid soda or other liquid which can
partially solidify, continue flushing and sealing at all times.
(5) If the pump has stopped due to power failure, turn off the power switch and then close the
discharge valve.
This will prevent the pump from starting suddenly when power is recovered.
(6) In event of emergency stop, turn off the power switch and then close the discharge valve.
3. Maintenance
To ensure proper operation of the pump, perform the following maintenance and inspections.

Turbine oil ISO VG32 is generally used with oil bath lubricating system.
Oil should be replaced after 300 hours of initial operation.
Then, it should be replaced every 3 months if necessary.
After the pump is placed in continuous operation, change oil every 6 months.
Replenish oil with the constant level oiler. Proper oil level of 7.2 mm above the center of the
short leveling pipe is controlled by the oil level adjustment mechanism assembly of “TRICO
Oiler” set to the lowest position. (Fig.3.1)
Fill the constant level oiler as follows.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
8 / 633
0
W

(a) Loosen the set screw.
(b) Remove the glass reservoir of the constant level oiler.
(c) Fill the reservoir with lubricating oil.
(d) Rapidly insert into the surge chamber.
(e) If replenishment from the reservoir is not sufficient, replenish oil again according to
steps (a) through (d).
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
9 / 633
0
W

Generally, required tools and measuring instruments for installation, disassembly, assembly
and inspection are as follows.
Files, sand paper, oil stones, etc. are always necessary.
(1) Tools Required for installing and Aligning Base on Foundation.
Tools and Measuring Instruments Use

Open ended spanner
For bolts
For ISO metric size nuts
Pipe wrench For auxiliary piping
Adjustable angle wrench For bolts
Level For mounting base
Vernier calipers For centering
Lead hammer For centering
Dial gauge For centering
(2) Tools Required for Disassembly and Assembly.

Open ended spanner
For bolts
Hexagon key wrench For hexagon socketed set screws
Screw driver For slotted set screw
Vernier calipers For mechanical seal setting
Bearing puller For bearing
Bearing wrench For bearing nut
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
10 / 633
0
W

Pump checks are periodically required to prevent occurrence of damage.
Periodic inspections listed in the table are recommended.
Table 3.1
Inspection Interval
Check Item
Daily 300 hr. 2,000 hr 4,000 hr 8,000hr
Oil Level ○
Oil Leakage ○
Oil Quality ○
Oil Change ○
Vibration ○ ○
Bearing Temp. ○ ○
Noise ○ ○
Leakage of Pumped Liquid ○ ○
Leakage of Mechanical Seal ○ ○
Flow Rate of Cooling Water ○
Leakage of Cooling Water ○
Wash and Clean of Seal Cooler
○
(if provided)
Suction Pressure ○ ○
Discharge Pressure ○ ○
Differential Pressure ○ ○
Current ○ ○
Voltage ○ ○
Overhaul ○
Overhaul and inspections are recommended after 8,000 hrs. operation.
When the pump has been used under unusual conditions, it should be disassembled for
inspection, even before 8000 hours of operation.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
11 / 633
0
W

For inspection, follow the procedures shown in Table 3.2.
Table 3.2
Inspection Items Inspection Procedure Remarks
Replace after two years
Visually check retainer for abnormal operation.
Ball Bearing
wear, and balls for damage. Should be free from unusual
defects and flaws.
Visually check for abnormal operation.
Sleeve Bearing
wear and damage. Should be free from unusual
defects and flaws.
Gaskets for Pressure
Check for leaks. Replace.
Containing Parts
Visually check for abnormal erosion
Casing and Casing
and wear. Check by liquid No defects or damage.
Cover
penetrant inspection.
Impeller and damage. Check by liquid No defects or damage.
Check key , deformation , etc.
Shaft and Key Check by liquid penetrant Replace if abnormal.
inspection.
Visually check for abnormal wear
and flaws.
Shaft sleeve Replace if abnormal.
Check by liquid penetrant
inspection.
Check its wearing surface for
scratch , cracks , etc., and its Lap it again or replace with
Mechanical Seal
shaft packing for normal new one. Replace its packing.
condition by visual.
Mechanical Seal Cooler Perform visual inspection and
No defects or damage.
if provided washing of pipe.
Run - out of Rotating
See paragraph 3.5. Repair or replace.
Components
Operating Clearances See paragraph 3.5. Repair or replace.
The above replacement intervals apply to normal operation of the pump.

If standby pump is to be started up early, it is recommended the following items be
checked.
(1) With the suction valve on the standby pump fully open, the pump is filled
with liquid, and suction pressure is imposed.
In case the discharge valve remains open, reverse flow is prevented by the check
valve only.
Restart operation in such condition.
(2) For a stand - by pump handling liquid which freezes at ambient temperature,
a reverse flow should be maintained from the discharge side of the pump in
operation.
(3) Warm the casing before operating.
Warming is inevitably necessary for pumps which handle the liquid of 120℃ or over.
Circulate the warming liquid from lower part of pump casing (through drain holes)
and from upper part of pump casing (through discharge side of customer’s piping).
(4) Operate every month to confirm that the pump can be operated without
abnormality.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
12 / 633
0
W

Before operating the pump, confirm a smooth hand turning of the rotor.
The maintenance cycle of operating pump applies correspondingly to stand - by
pump also.
If pump is off duty and fully drained, then it is recommended the following items be
applied.
(5) If the pump is subject to freezing conditions, be sure to open the drain valve
and air vent valve to drain all liquid from the pump casing. This prevents the casing
from a damage.
When the bearing and gland are water cooled, all cooling water must also be drained
from the water - cooling chamber and the piping.
(6) If the pump is to be idled for an extended period, drain all liquid from the
pump casing and coat the casing inside and pump outside with anticorrosive oil.
(7) Confirm every month a smooth hand turning of the rotor.

During maintenance, carefully check the following items to insure proper operation.
It is recommended to record on the following and to keep.
(1) Run - out of shaft, impeller ring and sleeve.
Allowable limits are indicated in Table 3.3(a).
If values are exceeded, items must be repaired or replaced.
Recommended recording sheet No. IR - 01.
(2) Clearance between impeller wear ring and case wear ring.
Recommended limits of clearance are indicated in table 3.3(b), as long
as pump performance meets specifications.
(3) Alignment
Allowable values are indicated in table 3.4.
(4) Operation Record
It is necessary to measure vibration and bearing temperatures during
test operation after reassembly.
See paragraph 2.4, for each allowable limit.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
13 / 633
0
W
Run - out and Clearances
Allowable Run - Out (T.I.R.) Unit : mm

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦
0.05 0.05 0.05 0.07 0.10 0.10 0.07
Table 3.3 (a)
Allowable Clearance (Diametral) Unit : mm

Clearance “A” Clearance “B” Clearance “C”
Item No.
Design Allowable Design Allowable Design Allowable
0.64～ 0.64～ 0.126～
020-P-002 1.41 1.41 0.21
0.772 0.772 0.160
0.64～ 0.64～ 0.126～
020-P-102 1.41 1.41 0.21
0.772 0.772 0.160
0.64～ 0.64～ 0.126～
020-P-202 1.41 1.41 0.21
0.772 0.772 0.160
Table 3.3 (b)
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
14 / 633
0
W
Allowable Tolerances of Alignment
Table 3.4 Unit mm

Item No. All Item
Parallel Offset
0.10
T.I.R.
Angular Offset
0.05
T.I.R.
Distance Distance
Item No. “A “
Item No. “A“
020-P-002 250±0.5
020-P-102 250±0.5
020-P-202 250±0.5
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
15 / 633
0
W
INSPECTION AND TEST RECORD Sheet No. IR-01

Run-out and Clearance Record Date . .
Item No. Serial No. Model Measured by
RUN - OUT (T.I.R.) UNIT : mm
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦
Clearance UNIT : mm
Inside Diameter A C
Outside Diameter B D
Clearance A-B C-D
Clearance UNIT : mm
Inside Diameter E G
Outside Diameter F H
Clearance E-F G-H
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
16 / 633
0
W

Alignment Record Date . .
Alignment Unit mm
a b c d
Parallel Offset
Angular Offset
Axial Deflection A
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
17 / 633
0
W

Operation Record Date . .
Vibration Peak to Peak μm

Position
① ② ③
Direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial
Bearing Temperature Unit ℃

Time Ambient Temp. A B C
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
18 / 633
0
W
4. Disassembly, Assembly
Disassembly and assembly must be performed correctly in reference to the assembly
diagrams.
Prepare card - board or the like upon which the disassembled components are placed.
Never put them on a concrete floor or the ground and do not stack components.
Disassemble components with care so as not to scratch or damage them.
Gaskets for Casing [001], Shaft Sleeve [042], and O-ring and/or V - ring for Mechanical
Seal [111] cannot be used again in principle once they are removed.
Accordingly, it is recommended to prepare spares in advance.
Turn off the power switch before disassembly (if a motor driven valve is provided, it
should be closed in advance).
Next, close the discharge valve and suction valve (if minimum flow bypass piping is
provided, the piping valve should be closed), then open the casing drain valve to fully
discharge all liquid.

(1) When disassembling, special care should be taken to protect the casing and
precision rotating components from damages.
(2) To remove the spigot and fitted components, use the installed push -bolts and a
plastic hammer. Never use a chisel or a screw - driver.
(3) Remove the rotor assembly from the casing with care.
Do not damage the bearings.
(4) To remove rotating components from the main shaft, remove nut and washer and
pull off the parts gently.
Note that components may be seized to the main shaft after operation for long periods.
If the shaft coupling, impeller and sleeve cannot be removed easily, do not use a
hammer as this can damage the main shaft.
In such case, remove rust, by using solvent.
If they cannot be removed even after using solvent, they should be heated uniformly with
care by a blow torch or welding torch.
Avoid to heat the main shaft, which should be remain cooled.
(5) The main shaft should not be bent.
(6) Do not disassemble the pump for transportation.
When it becomes necessary to ship the pump to EBARA, it should be assembled in one
unit.
4.2 Disassembly procedure

(1) Remove the flushing pipe and cooling pipe around the pump.
(2) Drain oil from bearings.
(3) Remove the spacer of coupling.
(4) Push set plates into the groove of mechanical seal sleeves of both side.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
19 / 633
0
W

[Procedure of disassembly for opposite side parts of coupling]
1) Remove Bearing Cover [053].
2) Remove upper half Bearing Casing[051-1], and then remove upper half Sleeve
Bearing[052]. Remove lower half Sleeve Bearing[052] by rotating the sleeve bearing
around the shaft until it is free.
3) Remove Oil Ring [067] from Bearing Casing [051-1].
4) Remove lower half Bearing Casing[051-1] by rotating from the Bearing Bracket[057].
Remove Shaft nut [129], Washer [136] and Oil Ring Retainer [271-1].
Remove Ball Bearing [056] together with Distance Piece [045] using bearing puller.
Remove Deflector [093] after loosening its set screw.
5) Loosen set - screw of Sleeve Retainer and remove it.
6) Loosen Nuts [120-2] fastening the Seal End Plate [016].
7) Remove mechanical seal cartridge.
Mechanical seal cartridge consists with Mechanical Seal [111], Seal End Plate [016]
and Mechanical Seal Sleeve [042] etc.
[Procedure of disassembly for coupling side parts]

1) Loosen set - screw of Deflector [093] and remove Deflector [093] of coupling side.
2) Remove upper half Bearing Casing[051-2], and then remove upper half Sleeve
Bearing[052]. Remove lower half Sleeve Bearing[052] by rotating the sleeve bearing
around the shaft until it is free.
3) Remove lower half Bearing Casing[051-1] by rotating from the Bearing Bracket[057].
4) Loosen set - screw of Deflector [093] and remove Deflector [093].
5) Loosen set - screw of Sleeve Retainer and remove it.
6) Remove Nuts [120-2] fastening Seal End Plate [016].
7) Pull out mechanical seal cartridge.
[Procedure of entire disassembly]

1) Remove Gland Cover [018] together with Bearing Bracket [057] from Casing [001].
2) Remove Shaft [031] together with Impeller [021], Distance Sleeve [043] and Impeller
Nut [048] toward opposite coupling side.
3) Remove Impeller Nut [048], Impeller [021] and Distance Sleeve [043] from Shaft
[031].
Now, all the disassembly is completed.

However, if the parts are made of austenitic stainless steel, be careful since they are
easily subjected to galling when they are pulled out.
4.3 Inspection after Disassembly

(1) Check clearance between casing and impeller for wear and galling.
(2) If any of the above have occurred, check for bent shaft.
(3) If ball bearing and sleeve bearing are worn, replace.
(4) Check impeller for corrosion, wear, and cracks.
(5) If damage or wear is found on shaft sleeve and/or mechanical seal, replace.
(6) Measure the run - out of shaft, impeller wear rings, and mechanical seal sleeve by
dial gauge. The tolerances are indicated in attached table.
4.4 Assembly
The pump shall be assembled in the reverse order of disassembly.
When assembling, be sure to observe the following points.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
20 / 633
0
W
4.4.1 Cautions
(1) When replacing parts, check them thoroughly before assembling.
(2) Wash each part with oil.
Check for corrosion and damage before assembling.
(3) All gaskets and o - ring should be replaced with new ones.
(4) Austenitic stainless steel is easily damaged.
The contact surfaces of the impeller nut, main shaft, sleeve and impeller should be
coated with lubricant such as Molikote to prevent seizure.
(5) Ensure that the lock screw and set - screw are fully tightened to prevent the loosing.
(6) Install the mechanical seal in reference to the mechanical seal instruction manual.
4.4.2 Bearing Casing Assembly.

(1) Axial end play
This axial end play is factory - adjusted when it is assembled.
(2) Assembly of thrust Ball Bearing [056].
C
C
C=0.05～0.1mm
Assemble it as shown on the above figure. Insert thrust Ball Bearing [056] into the main
shaft before inserting into the bearing casing. Either outer race should be turned smoothly
when holding the other side by hand with shaft nut being clamped.
(3) Mount Bearing Cover [053] while setting the throttled groove setting just upward.
Throttle
Groove (053)
4.4.3 Checking Main Shaft Deflection

After installing the main shaft in the bearing casing, check the deflection of the main shaft as
shown Table 3.3.
To assemble, follow the disassembly procedures in reverse order.
4.4.4 Be careful not to clamp Gland Cover [018] unevenly. Clamp Gland Cover until it
makes contact with the casing closely, since spiral wounded gasket is employed.
4.4.5 Check dimensions carefully before assembly when replacing parts.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
21 / 633
0
W
4.4.6 Don’t turn the Shaft before pull out the Set Plates from groove of Mechanical Seal
Sleeve [042].
4.4.7 Shaft Alignment

Shaft alignment shall be performed in case of replacement bearing, shaft or wear parts.
Make shaft alignment by following procedure:
(1) Assemble Casing
(2) Install the Bearing Casing[051] lower half.
(3) Carry out shaft alignment in the following manner:
(a) Set a dial gauge in a position near stuffing box where circumference of Shaft[031]
can be measured. Set dial gauge on 0 with Shaft down.
(b) Then, read dial gauge with Shaft all the way up.
(c) Assemble lower half of Sleeve Bearing[052] only in the Bearing Casing[051], and
raise Shaft from zero position by gauge reading under (A) to a position with a value
0.5 - 0.6 times the gauge reading under (B).
In this state, position the Bearing Casing so that clearances of the wear parts
matches at both sides and hold it with a knock-pin in that position.
Refer to following figure.
4.4.8 Deflector shall be fixed to Shaft [031] by sets - screws.

For their mounting positions, see the following figure.
4.4.9 After completion of assembly, check the interior for signs of touching or other defects
by turning the pump rotor by hand. Slowly turn the shaft with mechanical seal assembled.
When the main suction and discharge pipes are reassembled, turn the pump rotor by hand
to check it for smooth turning after connecting these pipes.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
22 / 633
0
W

5. Trouble Shooting Guide
Should trouble occur during operation, take necessary steps immediately.
The table below can be used as a guide to diagnose troubles that may occur at any time.
If you encounter any uncontrollable problems, contact our service station.
Symptoms Probable Causes Remedies

(1)Liquid not Insufficient deaeration or degassing. Vent air and gas again.
pumped Difference too small between suction Check real available NPSH.
and vapor pressures.
Gas pocket in suction pipe. Vent gas/air.
Rotating speed too low. Check with tachometer.
Wrong direction rotation. Check and correct.
Correct direction is clock - wise viewed from
driver.
Transpose two of the three phase leads at
motor terminal box.
System total head higher than design Re - examine the system.
head.
Pump combination improper for parallel Re - examine the system.
operation.
Air leaks through gland. Check gland packings and sleeve.
Electric power is not supplied. Check the power line.
Valve is closed. Check the pipeline.
(2)Insufficient Pump and suction pipe not filled with Vent air and gas again.
capacity liquid.
Difference too small between suction Check real available NPSH.
and vapour pressures.
Gas/air mixed in liquid. Vent gas/air.
Gas pocket in suction pipe or gland. Vent air/gas.
Air leaks in suction pipe.
Air leaks from stuffing box. Check suction line flanges.
Rotating speed too low. Check, adjust gland pakcing/mech. Seal.
Wrong direction rotation. Check with tachometer.
Check and correct.
System total head higher than design driver.
head. Re - examine the system.
Liquid viscosity different from design
value. Re - examine the system.
Impeller choked with foreign material.
Worn case wear ring. Clean.
Check clearance between case wear rings and

Damaged impeller. impeller. Refer to Table 3.3. Repair/replace.
Check for corrosion and erosion of impeller.
Repair/replace.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
23 / 633
0
W

(3)Driver Excessive operating speed. Check with tachometer.
overload Wrong direction rotation. Check and correct.
driver.
System total head lower than design Throttle discharge valve.
head.
Specific gravity and viscosity of Re - examine the system.
pumped liquid different from design
value.
Rotating component in contact with Internal pump check and remedy defect.
stationary component. Refer to Table 3.3.
Worn case wear ring. Check and replace.
Mechanical seal/gland packing Check and replace mechanical seal/gland
improperly assembled. packing.
(4)Abnormal Pump or suction pipe not filled with Prime again.
vibration and liquid.
noise Cavitation. Check real available NPSH.
Operating capacity excessively Operate at capacity exceeding minimum flow.
reduced. Check alignment.
Incomplete/defective centering. Check shaft run - out. Refer to Table 3.3.
Bent shaft. Repair/replace.
Internal pump check. Repair/replace.
Rotating component in contact with
stationary component. Check and repair/replace.
Worn bearing. Check for corrosion and erosion of impeller.
Damaged impeller. Repair/replace.
Check and correct.
Wrong direction rotation. Correct direction is clock - wise viewed from
driver.
Check for unbalance and remedy defect.
Vibration due to unbalanced rotating
component. Change oil and replace bearing.
Bearing corroded by water in bearing
housing.
(5)Overheated Incomplete/defective centering. Check alignment.
bearing Bent shaft. Check shaft run - out. Refer to Table 3.3.
Repair/replace.
Improper bearing installation or Check assembly condition, and repair as
assembly necessary.
Vibration due to unbalanced rotating Check for unbalance and remedy defect.
component.
Abnormal axial thrust. Check suction pressure and remedy defect.
Excessive lubricating oil in bearing Check oil is at proper level.
housing.
Shortage of cooling water. Adjust cooling water flow rate.
Insufficient lubrication. Add lubricant.
Dirty bearing. Change oil and replace bearing if damaged.
Bearing corroded by water in bearing Change oil and replace bearing.
housing.
Bent shaft Check run - out of shaft.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
24 / 633
0
W

(6)Galling or Deaeration or degassing insufficient. Vent air and gas again.
pump Difference too small between suction Check suction pressure and remedy defect.
overheat and vapour pressures.
Foreign material in pump. Clean.
Operating capacity too small. Operate at minimum flow or more.
Rotating component in contact with Check centering and run - out of rotating
fixed component. components and remedy defect.
(7)Service life Flushing line for mechanical seal Wash and clean flushing line.
of mechanical clogged.
seal Mechanical seal improperly assembled. Check, adjust or replace.
shortened Excessive vibration.
due to Check shaft run - out, centering, bearing wear
leakage and unbalance of rotating parts.
No cooling water supplied to stuffing Remedy defect.
box. Supply cooling water.
Mechanical seal surface damaged due
to foreign material. Replace/repair.
Wearing surface of seat or face not flat.
The flatness is measured with optical flat, and it
When using high temperature liquid, shall be less than 3 bands.
cooling water for mechanical seal Re - lap seal face by maker.
cooler not sufficient. Adjust temperature of flushing liquid by
Mechanical seal gaskets damaged. increasing cooling water. Temperatures are
indicated in mechanical seal drawing.
Replace.
6. Service
If you wish to contact us for questions, order spare parts etc., please advise the following
items to EBARA Corporation Tokyo Office.
Pump Manufacturing No.

Pump Type
Attention
EBARA Corporation
Head Office
11-1, Haneda Asahi-cho, Ohta-ku,

Tokyo 144-8510, Japan
Phone: 81-3-3743-6111
Fax: 81-3-3745-3356
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
25 / 633
0
W
R2D - KSBG- Deflector-English
EBARA MODEL “R2D” PROCESS PUMP


020-P-406A/B RHDS Diesel Product Pump 150X100R2DM40 R130555103
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
26 / 633
0
W
CONTENTS
1. Preface P. 3
1.1 General
2. Operation P. 4
2.3 Start Up
2.5 Shut-down
3. Maintenance P. 9

4.4 Assembly
6. Service P.25
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
27 / 633
0
W
1. Preface
This instruction manual covers operation and maintenance of EBARA model R2D pump.
1.1 General
The EBARA model R2D pump is a horizontal two stage, double suction, and center supported
process pump.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
28 / 633
0
W
2. Operation
(1) Fill the bearing housing with lubricating oil to the specified level. Check that Oil
Rings[067] have not separated from Oil Ring Retainer[271] during transportation or due to
improper reassembly works. Check and correct Oil Rings[067] positions by removing air
breather or plug on the Bearing Casing[051].
start of operation.
coupling guard.

(4) Pump Priming
1)
Note Install a by-pass line, whose flow rate matches that on the data sheet so the
Note2) Perform sufficient warming prior to operation when using pump with liquids over
120℃.

of operation.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
29 / 633
0
W
Item No. Warming Quantity Guideline (m3/hr)

Within 20～30℃
Warming is inevitably necessary for pumps which handle the liquid of 120℃ or over. Circulate
the warming liquid from lower part of pump casing (through drain holes) and from upper part
of pump casing (through discharge side of customer’s piping).
2.3 Start Up
discharge piping is open. Open casing air vent valve if provided. Ensure that all gas in the
casing has been evacuated.
increased by opening discharge value. If the suction pressure is below the valve shown on the
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
30 / 633
0
W

temperature .

(1) Check items
(f) Noise

Position
1 2 3
Direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial
Fig.2.1 Vibration

following table.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
31 / 633
0
W


80℃
h i g h e r t 20℃
han +40℃
80℃
or lower +50℃

80℃
higher
(b) Vibration
operation.
shortened.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
32 / 633
0
W
2.5 Shut - down

discharge valve.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
33 / 633
0
W
3. Maintenance

A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
34 / 633
0
W


Open ended spanner
For bolts

Open ended spanner
For bolts
Bearing puller For bearing
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
35 / 633
0
W

Table 3.1
Inspection Interv al
Check Item
Daily 300 hr. 2,000 hr 4,000 hr 8,000hr
Oil Level ○
Oil Leakage ○
Oil Quality ○
Oil Change ○
Vibration ○ ○
Noise ○ ○
Leafage of Mechanical Seal ○ ○
Wash and Clean of
○
Seal Cooler (if provided)
Current ○ ○
Voltage ○ ○
Overhaul ○
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
36 / 633
0
W

Table 3.2
Ball Bearing
wear, and balls fordamage. Should be free from unusual
defects and flaws.

Containing Parts
Casing and Casing
Cover


inspection.

and flaws.
inspection.

scratch , cracks , etc., and its Wrap it again or replace with
Mechanical Seal

Components

checked.
valve only.
a reverse flow should be maintained from the discharge side of the pump in
operation.
Circulate the warming liquid from lower part of pump casing (through drain holes)
and from upper part of pump casing (through discharge side of customer’s piping).
abnormality.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
37 / 633
0
W

pump also.
applied.
from a damage.

Allowable limits are indicated in Table 3.3(a).
Recommended limits of clearance are indicated in table 3.3(b), as long
(3) Alignment
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
38 / 633
0
W
Unit : mm
Allowable Run - Out (T.I.R.)
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩
0,05 0,05 0,05 0,07 0,10 0.10 0.08 0.10 0.10 0.07
Table 3.3 (a)
F : 0.3～1.7mm, G : 0.3～1.7mm Unit : mm
Clearance (Diametral)
Item No. Design Allowable
A B C D E A B C D E
0.61～ 0.61～ 0.55～ 0.64～ 0.64～
020-P-406A/B 1.34 1.34 1.20 1.41 1.41
0.732 0.732 0.65 0.772 0.772
Table 3.3 (b)
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
39 / 633
0
W
Table 3.4 Unit mm

Item No. All Item
Parallel Offset
0.10
T.I.R.
Angular Offset
0.05
T.I.R.
Distance Distance
Item No. “A “
Item No. “A“
020-P-406A/B 200±0.5
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
40 / 633
0
W

UNIT : mm
Run - Out (T.I.R.)
① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩
Clearance UNIT : mm
Inside Diameter
Outside Diameter A ＢＣＤ
Clearance
Inside Diameter
Outside Diameter E F G
Clearance
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
41 / 633
0
W

Alignment Unit mm
a b c d
Parallel Offset
Angular Offset
Axial Deflection A
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
42 / 633
0
W


Position
① ② ③
Direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial

A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
43 / 633
0
W
diagrams.

unit.
4.2 Disassembly procedure

(1) Remove the flushing pipe and cooling pipe around the pump.
(2) Drain oil from bearings.
(3) Remove the spacer of coupling.
(4) Push set plates into the groove of mechanical seal sleeves of both side.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
44 / 633
0
W
[Procedure of disassembly for opposite side parts of coupling]

1) Remove Bearing Cover [053-1].
Loosen set - screw of deflector [093-2] to remove Bearing Cover [053-2] so that it will be
hung over the shaft.
3) Remove Bearing Casing [051-1]. Remove Shaft nut [129], Washer [136] and Oil Ring
Retainer [271-1].
Remove Ball Bearing [056-1] together with Distance Piece [045-1] using bearing puller.
Remove Bearing Cover [053-2] and Deflector [093-2] in order.
4) Loosen set - screw of Sleeve Retainer [049] and remove it.
5) Loosen Nuts [120-6] fastening the Seal End Plate [016-1].
6) Remove mechanical seal cartridge.
Mechanical seal cartridge consists with Mechanical Seal [111], Seal End Plate [016]
and Mechanical Seal Sleeve [042] etc.
[Procedure of disassembly for coupling side parts]

1) Loosen set - screw of Deflector [093-1] and remove Deflector [093-1].
2) Remove Bearing Cover [053-3].
4) Loosen set - screw of Deflector [093-2] to remove Bearing Cover [053-2] so that it will
be hung over on the shaft.
5) Remove bolts of Bearing Cover [053-2].
6) Remove bolts of Bearing Casing [051] and remove Bearing Casing [051].
7) Loosen set - screw of Oil Ring Retainer [271-2] and remove Oil Ring Retainer [271-2].
8) Remove Roller Bearing [055] together with Distance Piece [045-2].
9) Remove Bearing Cover [053-2] with Deflector [093-2].
10) Loosen set - screw of Sleeve Retainer [049] and remove it.
11) Remove Nuts [120-6] fastening Seal End Plate [016].
12) Pull out mechanical seal cartridge.
[Procedure of entire disassembly]

1) Remove Gland Cover [018-2] together with Bearing Bracket [051-3,4] from Casing
[001].
2) Remove set-screw of the Impeller Nut [048-2] and then Impeller Nut [048-2] by
wrench.
3) Pull out 2nd stage Impeller [021-2] by extruder.
4) Remove bolts fastened Stage Disk [073].
At this time, use a hexagon wrenches key.
5) Remove Stage Disk [073].
6) Pull out Shaft [031] together with 1st stage Impeller [021-1], Stage Sleeve [087] and
Impeller Nut [048-1] in the opposite direction to coupling.
7) Remove set-screw of the Impeller Nut [048-1] and then Impeller Nut [048-1] by
furnished wrench.
8) Remove 1st stage Impeller [021-1] and Stage Sleeve [087].
Now, all the disassembly is completed.

However, if the parts are made of austenitic stainless steel, be careful since they are
easily subjected to galling when they are pulled out.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
45 / 633
0
W

(3) If ball bearing is worn, replace.
(6) Measure the run - out of shaft, impeller wear rings, and mechanical seal sleeve by
dial gauge. The tolerances are indicated in attached table.
4.4 Assembly
4.4.1 Cautions
(3) All gaskets and o - ring should be replaced with new ones.
(5) Ensure that the lock screw and set - screw are fully tightened to prevent the loosing.
4.4.2 Bearing Casing Assembly.

(1) Axial end play
This axial end play is factory - adjusted when it is assembled. Be assure to match mark
when disassembling since the thickness of Distance Piece [045-2] on the coupling side
and [045-1] on the opposite coupling side may differ.
(2) Assembly of thrust Ball Bearing [056-1].
0.05～0.10mm
Bend this washer

without fail
after clamping
Shaft nut
Assemble it as shown on the above figure. Insert thrust Ball Bearing [056-1] into the main
shaft before inserting into the bearing casing. Either outer race should be turned smoothly
when holding the other side by hand with shaft nut being clamped.
(3) Assembly of radial Roller Bearing [055].
Correct Wrong
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
46 / 633
0
W

Position the outer and inner races using Distance Piece [045-2] so that their centers
coincide with each other. It is not necessary to adjust the distance place as long as it is
not replaced.
(4) Mount Bearing Covers [053-2] and [053-3] facing their return grooves of oil to
downward.
Mount Bearing Cover [053-1] while setting the throttled groove setting just upward.
Groove
(053-2)
(052-3)
Throttle
Groove (053-1)

After installing the main shaft in the bearing casing, check the deflection of the main shaft as
shown Table 3.3.
4.4.4 Be careful not to clamp Gland Cover [018] unevenly. Clamp Gland Cover until it
makes contact with the casing closely, since spiral wounded gasket is employed.
4.4.5 Check dimensions carefully before assembly when replacing parts.
4.4.6 Don’t turn the Shaft before pull out the Set Plates from groove of Mechanical Seal
Sleeve [042].
4.4.7 Deflector [093-1] and [093-2] shall be fixed to Shaft [031] by sets - screws.
For their mounting positions, see the following figure.
4.4.8 After completion of assembly, check the interior for signs of touching or other defects
by turning the pump rotor by hand. Slowly turn the shaft with mechanical seal assembled.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
47 / 633
0
W

When the main suction and discharge pipes are reassembled, turn the pump rotor by hand
to check it for smooth turning after connecting these pipes.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
48 / 633
0
W


driver.
motor terminal box.
System total head higher than design Re – examine the system.
head.
Pump combination improper for parallel Re – examine the system.
operation.
capacity liquid.
Rotating speed too low. Check, adjust gland pacing/mech. Seal.
Check and correct.
head. Re – examine the system.
value. Re – examine the system.
Check clearance between case wear rings and

Damaged impeller. impeller. Refer to Table 3.3. Repair/replace.
Repair/replace.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
49 / 633
0
W

driver.
head.
Specific gravity and viscosity of Re – examine the system.
value.
Check and correct.
driver.
housing.
Repair/replace.
assembly necessary.
component.
housing.
housing.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
50 / 633
0
W

Replace.
6. Service

Pump Type
Attention
EBARA Corporation
Head Office

Phone: 81-3-3743-6111
Fax: 81-3-3745-3356
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
51 / 633
0
W
UCW 8th - BDB-Flinger-Deflector-English
EBARA MODEL “UCW” PROCESS PUMP


020-P-405A/B Fractionator Pumparpound 250X150UCWM57 R130555102
Pump
020-P-601A/B Flare KO Drum Pump 100X80UCWM32 R130555104
020-P-603A/B Condensate Pump 50X40UCWM25 R130555111
020-P-141A/B WHB Circulation Pump 100X80UCWM25 R130555108/09
&241A/B
020-P-106A/B Recycle Gas Compressor 80X50UCWM32N R130555112/13/14/15
&206A/B Condensate Pump
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
52 / 633
0
W
CONTENTS
1. Preface P. 3
1.1 General
2. Operation P. 3
2.3 Start Up
2.5 Shut-down
3. Maintenance P. 7

4.4 Maintenance after Disassembly
4.5 Assembly
6. Service P.24
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
53 / 633
0
W
1. Preface
This instruction manual covers operation and maintenance of EBARA model UCW pump.
1.1 General
The EBARA model UCW pump is a horizontal single stage, single suction, and center supported
process pump.
2. Operation
(1) Fill the bearing housing with lubricating oil to the specified level.
start of operation.
coupling guard.

(4) Pump Priming
1)
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
54 / 633
0
W

2)
140℃.（A7,A8）/170℃（S6,C6,S8）

of operation.
Pump Suction Flange Normal Dia. Warming Quantity Guideline
3
1.1/2"、2" 0.6m /h
3"、4"
3
6" 1.0m /h
3
8" 1.3m /h
3
10"、12" 2.0m /h
Within 20～30℃
Use the drain cock to make the temperature uniform if the upper and lower casing
temperature difference does not reach the prescribed value. (When warming liquid is injected)
2.3 Start Up
increased by opening discharge valve. If the suction pressure is below the value shown on the
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
55 / 633
0
W

temperature.

(1) Check items
(f) Noise

Position
1 2 3
Direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial
Fig.2.1 Vibration
following table.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
56 / 633
0
W


80℃
h i g h e r t 20℃
han +40℃
80℃
or lower +50℃

80℃
higher
(b) Vibration
operation.
shortened.
The pump should be started as shown below.
Prime mover output Starting frequency
7.5 kW or less Less than 6 times per hour
11 ～22 kW Less than 4 times per hour
26 kW or more Less than 3 times per hour
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
57 / 633
0
W

2.5 Shut - down
discharge valve.
3. Maintenance

A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
58 / 633
0
W

Open ended spanner
For bolts

Open ended spanner
For bolts
Box spanner For impeller nut
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
59 / 633
0
W

Table 3.1
Check Item
Daily 300 hr. 2,000 hr 4,000 hr 8,000hr
Oil Level ○
Oil Leakage ○
Oil Quality ○
Oil Change ○
Vibration ○ ○
Noise ○ ○
Wash and Clean of
○
Current ○ ○
Voltage ○ ○
Overhaul ○
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
60 / 633
0
W

Table 3.2
Ball Bearing
wear, and balls for damage. Should be free from unusual
defects and flaws.

Containing Parts
Casing and Casing
Cover


inspection.

and flaws.
inspection.

Mechanical Seal

Components

checked.
valve only.
3
a reverse flow (about 1 m /h) should be maintained from the discharge side of the
pump in operation.
Circulate the warming liquid from lower part of pump casing (through drain holes).
abnormality.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
61 / 633
0
W

pump also.
applied.
from a damage.

Allowable limits are indicated in Table 3.3.
Recommended limits of clearance are indicated in table 3.3, as long
(3) Alignment
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
62 / 633
0
W
Table 3.3 Unit mm
Diametral Clearance
Allowable Run-out T.I.R
Item No. Design Maximum Allow
1 2 3 4 5 A B A B
020-P-405A/B 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.07 0.72～0.861 1.58 0.72～0.861 1.58
020-P-601A/B 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.07 0.56～0.673 1.23 0.56～0.673 1.23
020-P-603A/B 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.07 0.43～0.534 0.96 0.43～0.534 0.96
020-P-141A/B 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.07 0.46～0.573 1.03 0.46～0.573 1.03
020-P-241A/B 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.07 0.46～0.573 1.03 0.46～0.573 1.03
020-P-106A 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.07 0.43～0.543 0.97 0.43～0.543 0.97
020-P-106B 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.07 0.43～0.543 0.97 0.43～0.543 0.97
020-P-206A 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.07 0.43～0.543 0.97 0.43～0.543 0.97
020-P-206B 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.07 0.43～0.543 0.97 0.43～0.543 0.97
T.I.R.：Total Indicated Reading
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
63 / 633
0
W
Table 3.4 Unit mm

Item No. All Item
Parallel Offset
0.10
T.I.R.
Angular Offset
0.05
T.I.R.
Distance Distance
Item No. “A “
Item No. “A“
020-P-405A/B 300±0.5
020-P-601A/B 140±0.5
020-P-603A/B 140±0.5
020-P-141A/B 140±0.5
020-P-241A/B 140±0.5
020-P-106-A 140±0.5
020-P-106B 140±0.5
020-P-206-A 140±0.5
020-P-206-B 140±0.5
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
64 / 633
0
W

Run- out UNIT : mm
1 2 3 4 5
Run-out T.I.R
Clearance UNIT : mm
Inside Diameter A C
Outside Diameter B D
Clearance A-B C-D
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
65 / 633
0
W

Alignment Unit mm
a b c d
Parallel Offset
Angular Offset
Axial Deflection A
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
66 / 633
0
W


Position
① ② ③
Direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial

A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
67 / 633
0
W
diagrams.

unit.

(1) Drain pump and remove all flushing and cooling lines.
(2) Remove the shaft coupling bolts.
(3) Remove a coupling spacer. (Fig. 4.1)
Fig. 4.1
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
68 / 633
0
W

(4) Remove Stay [095] on the bearing housing.
(5) Remove Nuts and Bolts from Casing [001] and Grand Cover [018-1].
(6) Remove Bearing Housing [051], Gland Cover [018-1] and rotating components from
the casing.
Use jack screw on the Gland Cover [018-1] to facilitate the disassembly.
(7) Remove the Set Screw [120-18] securing Impeller Nut [048] and the Impeller.
Note that Set Screw [120-18] is left hand thread. So that it should be turned Set
Screw [120-18] in the opposite direction as pump rotation to remove.
Hold Impeller [021] and turn the impeller nut in the same direction as pump rotation to
remove.
(8) Remove Impeller [021] from Shaft [031].
(9) Remove Impeller Key [039-1] from Main Shaft [031].
Disassembly procedure, when mechanical seal is used.

(1) Remove Nuts and Bolts securing Gland Cover [018-1], Seal End Plate [016], Bearing
Housing and Gland Cover respectively.
Set the Set Plate to groove of Mechanical Seal Sleeve in case of cartridge seal
before loosing Bolts and Nuts [120-6].
Remove Seal End Plate from Gland Cover and slide toward the bearing side about 5
mm.
(2) Remove bolts and nuts [120-7] from Gland Cover [018] and Bearing Housing [051].
(3) Carefully remove Gland Cover [018-1] from Shaft [031]. Care should be taken not to
damage main shaft threads.
(4) Remove Seal End Plate [016] and Mechanical Seal [111] together with Shaft Sleeve
[042] as cartridge set from the shaft.
As the mechanical seal carbon is fragile, be careful not to hit it against other
components.
Do not damage the seal on the edge of the shaft threads.
In any case when using gland packing or mechanical seal

(1) Remove coupling from Shaft [031] with the coupling puller.
(2) Loosen Deflector set-screw [12-20] and remove the deflector [093] from the main
shaft.
(3) Remove Bearing Cover [053] on the prime mover side and on the opposite side.
(4) Remove Shaft [031] together with Ball Bearings [056-1],[056-2] from bearing housing
by pulling toward drive side.
(5) Remove Bearing Nut [129] on the driver side from Shaft [031] by turning in the same
direction as normal rotation.
(6) Remove Ball Bearings [056-1],[056-2] from the shaft.

4.4 Maintenance after Disassembly

When the impeller wear ring is worn or damaged, it should be replaced using the following
procedure.
(1) Impeller Wear Ring
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
69 / 633
0
W

Remove the set screw and Impeller Wear Ring [025] (Fig. 4.2)
To install, reverse the foregoing procedure. Impeller Wear Rings [025] and Impeller
[021] are assembled and drilled together for the screw.
Fig. 4.2(Please refer to Sectional Drawing)

(2) Case Wear Ring
Case Wear Ring [107] is set in Casing [001]/Gland Cover [018-1] and secured with a
set-screw.
To remove the wear ring, by cracking with a chisel or grinding off with a grinder.
To install, reverse the foregoing procedure. Spot facing for the counter-sunk screw is
necessary. (Fig. 4.3)
Fig. 4.3(Please refer to Sectional Drawing)

4.5 Assembly
4.5.1 Cautions
(3) All gaskets should be replaced with new ones.
(5) Ensure that the lock screw and set-screw are fully tightened to prevent the loosing.
4.5.2 Bearing Housing Assembly

(1) Install the ball bearings on Main Shaft [031] at both sides, prime mover side and
opposite side, as shown in Fig. 4.4.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
70 / 633
0
W
Fig. 4.4
(2) Secure Ball Bearing [056] with Bearing Nut [129], then lock the nut by bending the
claw of Bearing Washer [136]. (Fig 4.5)
Fig. 4.5
(3) Insert the shaft assembly into Bearing Housing [051] from the prime mover side.
(4) Install the bearing cover gaskets and the bearing covers on the prime mover and
opposite side in the bearing housing.
Gasket thickness is 0.2 mm.
(5) When Deflector [093] is used, set the axial gap of the deflector to 1 mm.
The groove in the bearing cover shall come to down. (Fig 4.6)
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
71 / 633
0
W
Fig. 4.6

After installing the main shaft in the bearing housing, check the deflection of the main
shaft or the flange surface of the bearing housing, as shown in Fig.4.7.
See Table 3.3.
Run-out of 1＜0.05mm
Run-out of 2,3＜0.05mm
Fig. 4.7
4.5.4 Tightening Gland Cover or Flange

The gland cover must be tightened uniformly.
Ensure the 2 bolts located symmetrically to the main shaft are tightened alternately.
The other 2 bolts located at right angles are also tightened alternately. All the bolts must
be tightened uniformly. When 8 or 12 bolts are used, they should be tightened in the order
shown in Fig.4.8.
When 16 and 24 bolts are used, the flange must also be tightened in the same manner.
Tightening Sequence for 12 Bolts Tightening Sequence for 8 Bolts

Fig. 4.8
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
72 / 633
0
W

4.5.5 Upon completion of assembly, turn the rotor by hand to ensure that it turns smoothly
without contact between rotating and stationary components.
After suction and discharge piping have been connected, turn the rotor by hand once
again to check for smooth rotation.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
73 / 633
0
W


driver.
motor terminal box.
head.
operation.
capacity liquid.
Air leaks in suction pipe. Check suction line flanges.
Air leaks from stuffing box. Check, adjust gland pacing/mech. Seal.
driver.
head.
Liquid viscosity different from design Re - examine the system.
value.
Impeller choked with foreign material. Clean.
Worn case wear ring. Check clearance between case wear rings and
impeller. Refer to Table 3.3. Repair/replace.
Damaged impeller. Check for corrosion and erosion of impeller.
Repair/replace.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
74 / 633
0
W

driver.
head.
value.
reduced.
Incomplete/defective centering. Check alignment.
Bent shaft. Check shaft run - out. Refer to Table 3.3.
Repair/replace.
Rotating component in contact with Internal pump check. Repair/replace.
stationary component.
Worn bearing. Check and repair/replace.
Damaged impeller. Check for corrosion and erosion of impeller.
Repair/replace.
driver.
component.
housing.
Repair/replace.
assembly necessary.
component.
housing.
housing.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
75 / 633
0
W

shortened Excessive vibration. Check shaft run - out, centering, bearing wear
due to and unbalance of rotating parts.
leakage Remedy defect.
No cooling water supplied to stuffing Supply cooling water.
box.
Mechanical seal surface damaged due Replace/repair.
to foreign material.
Wearing surface of seat or face not flat. The flatness is measured with optical flat, and it
shall be less than 3 bands.
When using high temperature liquid, Re - lap seal face by maker.
cooling water for mechanical seal Adjust temperature of flushing liquid by
cooler not sufficient. increasing cooling water. Temperatures are
Mechanical seal gaskets damaged. indicated in mechanical seal drawing.
Replace.
6. Service

Pump Type
Attention
EBARA Corporation
Head Office

Phone: 81-3-3743-6111
Fax: 81-3-3745-3356
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
76 / 633
0
W
UCS 8th - BDB-Flinger-Deflector-English
EBARA MODEL “UCS” PROCESS PUMP


020-P-502 Filtered Water Pump 150X100UCSM20 R130555116
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
77 / 633
0
W
CONTENTS
1. Preface P. 3
1.1 General
2. Operation P. 3
2.3 Start Up
2.5 Shut-down
3. Maintenance P. 7

4.4 Assembly
6. Service P.24
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
78 / 633
0
W

1. Preface
This instruction manual covers operation and maintenance of EBARA model UCS pump.
1.1 General
The EBARA model UCS pump is a horizontal single stage, single suction, and center supported
process pump.
2. Operation
(1) Fill the bearing housing with lubricating oil to the specified level.
start of operation.
coupling guard.

(4) Pump Priming
1)
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
79 / 633
0
W

2)
140℃(A7,A8)/170℃(S6,C6,S8).

of operation.
Pump Suction Flange Normal Dia. Warming Quantity Guideline
3
1.1/2"、2" 0.6m /h
3"、4"
3
6" 1.0m /h
3
8" 1.3m /h
3
10"、12" 2.0m /h
Within 20～30℃
Use the drain cock to make the temperature uniform if the upper and lower casing
temperature difference does not reach the prescribed value. (When warming liquid is injected)
2.3 Start Up
increased by opening discharge value. If the suction pressure is below the valve shown on the
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
80 / 633
0
W

temperature.

(1) Check items
(f) Noise

Position
1 2 3
Direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial
Fig.2.1 Vibration
following table.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
81 / 633
0
W


80℃
h i g h e r t 20℃
han +40℃
80℃
or lower +50℃

80℃
higher
(b) Vibration
operation.
shortened.
26 kW or less Less than 3 times per hour
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
82 / 633
0
W

2.5 Shut - down
discharge valve.
3. Maintenance

A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
83 / 633
0
W

Open ended spanner
For bolts

Open ended spanner
For bolts
Box spanner For impeller nut
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
84 / 633
0
W

Table 3.1
Check Item
Daily 300 hr. 2,000 hr 4,000 hr 8,000hr
Oil Level ○
Oil Leakage ○
Oil Quality ○
Oil Change ○
Vibration ○ ○
Noise ○ ○
Wash and Clean of
○
Current ○ ○
Voltage ○ ○
Overhaul ○
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
85 / 633
0
W

Table 3.2
Ball Bearing
wear, and balls fordamage. Should be free from unusual
defects and flaws.

Containing Parts
Casing and Casing
Cover


inspection.

and flaws.
inspection.

Mechanical Seal

Components

checked.
valve only.
3
a reverse flow (about 1 m /h) should be maintained from the discharge side of the
pump in operation.
Circulate the warming liquid from lower part of pump casing (through drain holes).
abnormality.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
86 / 633
0
W

pump also.
applied.
(5) If the pump is subject to freezing conditions, be sure to open the drain valve and
air vent valve to drain all liquid from the pump casing. This prevents the casing from
a damage.
(6) If the pump is to be idled for an extended period, drain all liquid from the pump
casing and coat the casing inside and pump outside with anticorrosive oil.

Allowable limits are indicated in Table 3.3.
(2 Clearance between impeller wear ring and case wear ring.
Recommended limits of clearance are indicated in table 3.3, as long
(3) Alignment
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
87 / 633
0
W
Run-out and Clearances
A
Distance
3 Piece
1 2
Note :
Clearance between Impeller and Casing shall be adjusted within the following specified value by
control the thickness of Distance Piece.
Measurement of the clearance “A” can be done to insert lead wires between Pump Casing and
Impeller Vanes before temporary assembly.
Disassembly to measure the thickness of inserted lead wires which indicate the clearance.
Table 3.3 Unit mm

Allowable
Allowable Run-out T.I.R.
Item No. Clearance
1 2 3 A
020-P-502 0.05 0.05 0.06 0.4±0.05
T.I.R.：Total Indicated Reading
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
88 / 633
0
W
Table 3.4 Unit mm

Item No. All Item
Parallel Offset
0.10
T.I.R.
Angular Offset
0.05
T.I.R.
Distance Distance
Item No. “A “
Item No. “A“
020-P-502 140±0.5
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
89 / 633
0
W

1 2
Run- out UNIT : mm

1 2 3
Run-out T.I.R
T.I.R. : Total Indicated Reading
Clearance UNIT : mm
Inside Diameter A
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
90 / 633
0
W

Alignment Unit mm
a b c d
Parallel Offset
Angular Offset
Axial Deflection A
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
91 / 633
0
W


Position
① ② ③
Direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Axial

A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
92 / 633
0
W
diagrams.

In they cannot be removed even after using solvent, they should be heated uniformly with
unit.

(1) Drain pump and remove all flushing and cooling lines.
(2) Remove the shaft coupling bolts.
(3) Remove a coupling spacer. (Fig. 4.1)
Fig. 4.1
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
93 / 633
0
W

(4) Remove Stay [095] on the bearing housing.
(5) Remove Nuts and Bolts from Casing [001] and Grand Cover [018-1].
(6) Remove Bearing Housing [051], Gland Cover [018-1] and rotating components from
the casing.
Use jack screw on the Gland Cover [018-1] to facilitate the disassembly.
(7) Remove the Set Screw [120-18] securing Impeller Nut [048] and the Impeller.
Note that Set Screw [120-18] is left hand thread. So that it should be turned Set
Screw [120-18] in the opposite direction as pump rotation to remove.
Hold Impeller [021] and turn the impeller nut in the same direction as pump rotation to
remove.
(8) Remove Impeller [021] from Shaft [031].
(9) Remove Impeller Key [039-1] from Main Shaft [031].
Disassembly procedure, when mechanical seal is used.

(1) Remove Nuts and Bolts securing Gland Cover [018-1], Seal End Plate [016], Bearing
Housing and Gland Cover respectively.
Set the Set Plate to groove of Mechanical Seal Sleeve in case of cartridge seal
before loosing Bolts and Nuts [120-6].
Remove Seal End Plate from Gland Cover and slide toward the bearing side about 5
mm.
(2) Remove bolts and nuts [120-7] from Gland Cover [018] and Bearing Housing [051].
(3) Carefully remove Gland Cover [018-1] from Shaft [031]. Care should be taken not to
damage main shaft threads.
(4) Remove Seal End Plate [016] and Mechanical Seal [111] together with Shaft Sleeve
[042] as cartridge set from the shaft.
As the mechanical seal carbon is fragile, be careful not to hit it against other
components.
Do not damage the seal on the edge of the shaft threads.
In any case when using gland packing or mechanical seal

(1) Remove coupling from Shaft [031] with the coupling puller.
(2) Loosen Deflector set-screw [093] and remove the deflector from the main shaft.
(3) Remove Bearing Cover [053] on the prime mover side and on the opposite side.
(4) Remove Shaft [031] together with Ball Bearings [056-1],[056-2] from bearing housing
by pulling toward drive side.
(5) Remove Bearing Nut [129] on the driver side from Shaft [031] by turning in the same
direction as normal rotation.
(6) Remove Ball Bearings [056-1],[056-2] from the shaft.

4.4 Assembly
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
94 / 633
0
W

4.5.1 Cautions
(3) All gaskets should be replaced with new ones.
(5) Ensure that the lock screw and set-screw are fully tightened to prevent the loosing.
4.5.2 Bearing Housing Assembly

(1) Install the ball bearings on Main Shaft [031] at both sides, prime mover side and
opposite side, as shown in Fig. 4.2.
Fig. 4.2
(2) Secure Ball Bearing [056] with Bearing Nut [129], then lock the nut by bending the
claw of Bearing Washer [136]. (Fig 4.3)
Fig. 4.3
(3) Insert the shaft assembly into Bearing Housing [051] from the prime mover side.
(4) Install the bearing cover gaskets and the bearing covers on the prime mover and
opposite side in the bearing housing.
Gasket thickness is 0.2 mm.
(5) When Deflector [093] is used, set the axial gap of the deflector to 1 mm.
The groove in the bearing cover shall come to down. (Fig 4.4)
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
95 / 633
0
W
Fig. 4.4
After installing the main shaft in the bearing housing, check the deflection of the main
shaft or the flange surface of the bearing housing, as shown in Fig.4.5.
See Table 3.3.
Run-out of 1＜0.05mm
Run-out of 2,3＜0.05mm
Fig. 4.5
4.5.4 Tightening Gland Cover or Flange
The gland cover must be tightened uniformly.
Ensure the 2 bolts located symmetrically to the main shaft are tightened alternately.
The other 2 bolts located at right angles are also tightened alternately. All the bolts must
be tightened uniformly. When 8 or 12 bolts are used, they should be tightened in the order
shown in Fig.4.6.
When 16 and 24 bolts are used, the flange must also be tightened in the same manner.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
96 / 633
0
W
Tightening Sequence for 12 Bolts Tightening Sequence for 8 Bolts

Fig. 4.6
4.5.5 Upon completion of assembly, turn the rotor by hand to ensure that it turns smoothly
without contact between rotating and stationary components.
After suction and discharge piping have been connected, turn the rotor by hand once
again to check for smooth rotation.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
97 / 633
0
W


driver.
motor terminal box.
head.
operation.
capacity liquid.
Rotating speed too low. Check, adjust gland pacing/mech. Seal.
Check and correct.
head. Re - examine the system.
value. Re - examine the system.
Check clearance between casing and impeller.

Damaged impeller. Refer to Table 3.3. Repair/replace.
Repair/replace.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
98 / 633
0
W

driver.
head.
value.
Check and correct.
driver.
housing.
Repair/replace.
assembly necessary.
component.
housing.
housing.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
99 / 633
0
W

Replace.
6. Service

Pump Type
Attention
EBARA Corporation
Head Office

Phone: 81-3-3743-6111
Fax: 81-3-3745-3356
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
100 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English
EBARA MODEL “VPSS” PROCESS PUMP


CLOSED BLOW DOWN
020-P-602A/B 100VPSS4M29 R130555105
DRUM PUMP
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
101 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English
Introduction
This instruction manual describes the installation of the VS4-type vertical shaft
pump.
We advise you to read this manual carefully to ensure its maximum performance
and trouble-free operation.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
102 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English
CONTENTS
1 Operation P. 4
1-1 Preparation and Checking prior to operation
1-2 Start-up
1-3 Normal Running
1-4 Stoppage and Post Stoppage
1-5 Operation
1-6 Stop
2 Maintenance P. 7
2-1 Lubrication for Thrust Bearing
2-2 Periodical Maintenance and Maintenance Cycle
2-3 Periodical Maintenance of Stand-by Machine and
Maintenance Cycle
2-4 Trouble shooting
2-5 Disassembly and assembly
2-6 Allowable tolerance for maintenance and
Recommended from of recording sheet
2-7 Required tool and measuring devices
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
103 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English
1. Operation
1-1 Preparation and Checking prior to Operation
(1) Fill the bearing with specified amount of oil.

Use the turbine oil VG-46 for pump bearing.
(2) Check if flushing and internal lubrication pipings are proper.
(3) Just before coupling, check the rotating direction by turning only the motor.
(4) Check if the shaft turns lightly when rotating it by hand. If abnormal sound is heard such as
sand or the like being inside the pump, or if rotation is smooth, then disassemble the pump
and check the sliding parts such as intermediate bearing.
(5) Open the discharge sluice valve a little before starting the pump, in order to not operate under
shut-off conditions. (Refer to Item 1-2.(4).)
1-2 Start-up
(1) Fully open the valve on the minimum flow piping if provided.
(2) Turn on the switch, and then turn it off after four or five seconds.
During this time, check whether the turning direction is correct.
(4) Open the discharge valve gradually while paying attention to the discharge pressure.
As the shut off operation causes advance of the liquid temperature in the pump, which leads to
the generation of steam, or promotes corrosion of the machine when chemical liquid is treated,
do not conduct shut-off operation more than one minute.
1-3 Normal Running
(1) Check each part of the pump and the motor. Check electric current, voltage, lubrication,
revolving sound, vibration and temperature in the bearings and stuffing box.
If the bearing temperature is 80℃ or less, it is safe to operate.
(2) After operating 30 minutes to one hour, conduct checking of each part again.
(3) When the overheat in bearings, or vibration or abnormal noise is developed, stop the pump
immediately or switch over to a standby pump, and check the cause of trouble.
(4) When the operating level drops and draws in the air through the suction pipe, the machine
sometimes utters an abnormal noise.
Pay attention to noises.
(1) When a by-pass line is not provided, close the discharge valve gradually while stopping
operation until the flow reaches the minimum flow, and then turn off the switch.
(2) After the driver has stopped completely, close the discharge valve.
(3) When a by-pass line is provided, close the discharge valve fully making sure the valve on the
by-pass line is fully open, and then turn off the switch.
(4) Further, keep the discharge valve completely open and the back pressure is stopped by the
check valve, and pump can be started as it is upon automatic operation.
(5) When stopping the operation, perform draining after the discharge, and minimum flow line
valves have been closed.
(6) In any reason pump restart procedure is as shown (1-1) to 1-4).
(7) Special care should be taken to prevent rust formation on finished machined surfaces of shaft,
coupling, etc. for long time stoppage.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
104 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English
1-5 Operation
(1) Do not throttle the suction valve during operation. Note that the pump is running for a while
after the switch is turn off. The suction valve should be throttled after the pump is stopped.
(2) Check the temperature of the motor bearing.
(3) Also, check the minimum device for proper operation.
following table.
Bearing temperature rises gradually during continuous operation and is then stabilized
after a certain time (1～2hours).

80℃
h i g h e r t 20℃
han +40℃
80℃
or lower +50℃

80℃
higher
(b) Vibration
operation.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
105 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English

When a strainer is installed on the suction side, check the movement of the pressure
gauge pointers at the downstream side of the strainer.
shortened.
1-6 Stop
(1) When the minimum flow line is not provided, slowly close (do not fully close) the discharge
valve until it reaches the minimum flow point.
(2) After the driver has stopped completely, fully close the discharge valve and then fully close the
suction valve.
(3) When the minimum flow line is provided, check that the minimum flow line valve is fully open
and then fully close the discharge valve. Next, turn off the switch.
(4) When the pump is left unused, fully close the suction valve, discharge valve, minimum flow line
valve and gas extraction piping valve.
(5) Stop of cooling, flushing and sealing.
These should be stopped for a brief time while after the pump has stopped.
Do not stop the quenching line of the pump operated at low temperature (N2 gas quenching).
(6) Fully open the suction valve and equalizing valve of the auxiliary pump which is not operating.
(7) When the pump is to be left unused for a long period of time, care should be taken with regard
to corrosion of the bearing and coupling.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
106 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English
2. Maintenance
2-1 Lubrication of thrust bearing

Turbine oil ISO VG46 is used with oil bath lubricating system.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
107 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English
2-2 Periodical maintenance and Maintenance cycle

The pump is required to be checked for its perfectness periodically to prevent undesirable
damages to occur.
Periodical inspection and repair as listed in next table is recommended to be carried out
such purpose.
It is necessary to overhaul the pump after 16000 hr. operation.
Inspection Interval
Check Item
Daily 300 hr. 2,000 hr 16,000 hr
Vibration ○
Bearing Temp. ○
Noise ○
Mechanical Seal Leakage ○
Flange Gasket Leakage ○
Suction Pressure ○
Discharge Pressure ○
Differential Pressure ○
Current ○
Voltage ○
Overhaul ○
Oil Change ○

Replace seal face with spares.
(Spares should be checked with
optical flat to ensure their flatness.
Mechanical Seal Check seal face and gasket for damage. They should be within 3 light bands.
If the flatness exceed this limit, they
should be rapped.)
Replace gaskets with new ones.
Visually check for wear and flaws due to Should be free from wear and flaws.
Casing and suction cover
erosion. Repair if necessary.
Should be free from wear and flaws.
Impeller Check impeller for wear and erosion.
Repair if necessary.
Check key and key way for depression and
Shaft and Key Replace with new one if damaged.
deformation.
Gasket - Replace with new one.
Rotor Run-out See paragraph 2.6.
Running Clearance See paragraph 2.6.
Replace after two years operation.
Visually check retainer for abnormal wear
Ball Bearing Should be free from unusual defects
and balls for damage.
and flaws.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
108 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English
2-3 Periodical Maintenance of Stand-by Machine and Maintenance Cycle

It is recommended to perform following items for stand by machine which is under
situation of being able to start up always.
* Vent air and gas from the pump perfectly, and to fill up liquid.
* In case that the pump start up automatically, open the discharge valve or minimum flow
line if provided so as not to operate at shut-off.
* In case that pumping liquid may frozen, reverse flow from discharge side.
* Be sure to confirm that rotational parts turn smoothly by hand every week.
* Operate every month to confirm that the pump can be operated without abnormity.
It is recommended to perform following items for stand by machine drained perfectly.
* Apply rust preventive oil in the pump and to the outer surface.
* Turn rotational parts by hand every week.
The maintenance cycle of stand by pump applies correspondingly to operating pump.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
109 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English
2-4 Troubleshooting
When trouble arises with the pump, check the cause of it referring to the following table.
(1) Liquid not pumped up

Cause Counter Measure
Deaeration of degasing
Vent air and gas again
insufficient.
Difference too small
between suction and vapor Check the real available NPSH
pressures.
Gas pocketed in suction
Vent gas.
pipe.
Rotating speed too slow. Check with tachometer.
Check the direction. Correct direction is
Wrong turning direction.
clock-wise viewed from motor.
Total head of system higher
Re-examine the project.
than design head.
(2) Capacity too low
Pump and Suction pipe not
filled with liquid
between Suction and vapor Check the real available NPSH
pressure
Gas mixed in liquid Vent gas.
Gas pocketed in Suction
Vent air and gas from gas pocket
pipe
Check flanges and plunges etc. of suction
Air leaks into Suction pipe
line
Rotating speed too slow Check with tachometer
Wrong turning direction
than design head
Liquid viscosity different
from design value
Impeller slots choked with
Inspect the inside
foreign material
Worn wear ring Check the clearance between wear ring
Check the corrosion and erosion of
Damaged Impeller
Impeller
Check the clearance between throat
Worn throat bushing
bushing
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
110 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English
(3) Motor overload

Turning speed too high. Check with tachometer.
Total head of system lower
Throttle the discharge valve.
than design head.
Specific gravity and viscosity
of sucked liquid different Re-examine the project.
from design value.
Rotationary part in contact
Check the inside.
with fixed part.
Worn wear ring. Check the clearance between wear ring.
Mechanical seal improperty Check the set dimension of Mechanical
assembled. seal.
Check the clearance between throat
Worn throat bushing.
bushing.
(4) Abnormal vibration and noise of Pump

Pump or suction pipe not
Prime them again.
filled with liquid.
Cavitation occure. Check the real available NPSH.
Operating capacity too Operate at capacity more than minimum
small. flow.
Incomplete centering. Check alignment.
Bent shaft. Check the run-out of shaft.
Check the inside.
with fixed part.
Check balls and retainer of bearing for
Worn bearing
motor.
Check the corrosion and errosion of
Damaged Impeller.
Impeller.
Vibration due to unbalanced
Check the unbalance of rotationary parts.
rotationary part.
(5) Overheated Bearing

Incomplete centering. Checkk alignment
Bent shaft. Check run-out of shaft.
rotationary part.
Abnormal axial thrust. Check the suction pressure.
Shortage of cooling water. Adjust flow rate of cooling water.
Poor lubrication. Add lubrication greese.
Change grease and replace bearing if
Dust in bearing.
damaged.
Bearing corroded by mater
Change lubricant grease and replace
penetrated in bearing
bearing.
housing.
Damaged throat bushing. Changed throat bushing.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
111 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English
(6) Galling or overheat in pump

Deaeration or degasing
Vent air and gas again.
insufficient.
between suction and vapor Check suction pressure.
pressure.
Foreign material in pump. Check inside of pump.
Operating capacity too
Operation at minimum flow or more.
small.
Rotary part in contact with Check centering and run-out of rotary
fixed part. parts.
(7) Service life of Mechanical seal short due to leaky Mechanical seal.

Flushing pipe for
Wash and Clean the flushing pipe.
Mechanical seal choked.
Mechanical seal improperly
Check the setting position.
assmebled.
Check the run-out of shaft, centering,
Excessive vibration. w ear of bearing and unbalance of rotary
parts.
Cooling w ater not supplied
Flow the cooling w ater.
to stuffing box.
w earing surface of
Mechanical seal damaged Replace it w ith new one.
due to foreign material.
The flatness is measured w ith optical flat,
Wearing surface of seat or
and it shall be less than 3 bands. Wrap
face not properly flated.
again the seal face.
When using high Adjust the temperature of the flushing
temperature liquid, cooling liquid by increasing cooling w ater. The
w ater for Mechanical seal temperature is indicated in the mechanical
cooler not sufficient. seal draw ing.
Gasket for Mechanical seal
Replace them w ith new one.
damaged.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
112 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English
(1) In advance to the pump disassembly, close each valve of piping.

(2) For replacement of the bearing and mechanical seal only, see the follow step (a) through (f).
(a) Insert two setting plates into the slot of the mechanical seal sleeve and secure them to the
mechanical seal cover with bolts. Next, loosen all the set screws (2 rows) of the sleeve
retainer about 1mm.
Mechanical Seal Cover
Fig. 3-2
(b) Make sure that there are match marks on the spacer (140-2) and pump half coupling
(140-1). Then remove the coupling bolts on the pump side and driver side, and remove the
spacer.
(c) Remove the motor mounting bolts and remove the motor.
(d) Remove the detent screw from the coupling nut (128-1), and remove the coupling nut.
Then remove the pump half coupling (140-1) and the key (039-3).
(e) Drain out the lubricating oil inside the bearing housing, and remove the constant level oiler.
Next, remove the deflector (093-1) and bearing cover (053).
Then draw the bearing adapter (044), with the ball bearing attached, off the shaft,
and draw out the bearing housing (051) with oil reservoir (064) attached, via the driver stand
window.
Finally, draw the distance piece (045-6) off the shaft.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
113 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English
(f) Remove the injection piping, etc., attached to the mechanical seal cover, then draw the
mechanical seal cover, shaft sleeve and mechanical seal off the pump shaft together as a
unit.
Fig. 3-3
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
114 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English
DEFLECTOR
(093-1)
Fig. 3-4
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
115 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English
Fig. 3-5
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
116 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English

(3) Pump body has been lifted from tank.
(ⅰ) Take off the coupling bolts.
(ⅱ) Take off the motor.
(ⅲ) Dismantle the discharge piping from the pump and haul out the pump from tank.
(ⅳ) Because of its great length, the pump body, once lifted out, must be supported in a
horizontal position so it is not subjected to excessive stresses.
(4) Disassembling coupling
(ⅰ) Insert the two setting plates in the groove of the mechanical seal sleeve and bolt to the
seal mechanical seal cover.
Lessen by about one millimeter the two rows of screws holding the sleeve retainer.
(ⅱ) Check the aligning marks engraved on motor side coupling and pump side coupling set
bolts.
(ⅲ) Unless otherwise specified, the spacer coupling should remain fixed to the motor side
coupling. Remove the motor flange hold down bolts and pull out motor.
(ⅳ) Remove the coupling nut and pump half coupling.
(ⅴ) Measure and record the distance between the upper surface of the driver stand and shaft
end surface.(To see fig. dimension A)
(5) Disassembling bearing parts

(ⅰ) Remove the sand collar (118) and bearing cover (053).
(ⅱ) Pull out the locknut (128-3) and bearing adapter (044) with ball bearing(056).
(ⅲ) Take off the bearing housing (051) with oil seal (114).
(ⅳ) Take off the driver stand (162).
(6) Disassembling mechanical seal
(ⅰ) Detach liquid injection pipe from the mechanical seal cover.
Remove nuts and detach the mechanical seal cover, mechanical seal sleeve and
mechanical seal as one unit, from pump shaft.
(ⅱ) After completion of the above, shift the, setting plates in order to remove the mechanical
seal and mechanical seal cover. Avoid scratches or damage to seal faces and periphery of
sleeve.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
117 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English

(7) Disassembling inner case
(ⅰ) Remove the suction cover (012), loosen the set screw of the impeller nut (048-1) and pull
out the impeller (021). When connection between the discharge pipe (174) and the column
pipe (173) is disconnected, the casing (001) can be taken away. Draw out the casing softly
without forcing the intermediate bearing bushing (081-6).
(ⅱ) The disassembly will be completed in the order of the column pipe (173), intermediate
bearing housing (057) and the pump shaft (032).
(ⅲ) When extracting coupling, impellers and sleeve, never strike them with a metal hammer as
this could damage pump shaft:
After long operation, parts may strongly adhere to shaft. In this event application of rust
removing solution is recommended.
(ⅳ) If this is not effective, apply moderate heat to the periphery of the part with a blow torch or
welding torch. Heat uniformily and refrain from heating the pump shaft which must remain
cold. Utmost care must be taken, when dismounting the pump so as not to damage
finished machined surfaces of pump body and rotating elements.
(8) Assembly
(ⅰ) It is necessary to arrange sheet packings, 0-rings, gaskets, etc., in advance to
disassembly.
(ⅱ) The assembly is to be carried out in the reverse order of disassembly.
(ⅲ) Assembling the inner case and column pipe
(ⅳ) Check the axial play between the casing and the rotating elements.
(ⅴ) Also check the pump by hand turning.
(ⅵ) Reassembling the mechanical seal
Position the mechanical seal on the mechanical seal sleeve and fix the mechanical seal onto
mechanical seal cover with the setting plates and insert on pump shaft.
Be careful not to damage the o -ring, located in the seal end plate on the box, and
carefully and evenly tighten bolts.
(ⅶ) Assembly of thrust ball bearing
Assemble it as shown on below. Insert the thrust ball bearing into the main shaft
before inserting into the bearing housing. Either outer race should be turned smoothly
when holding the other side by hand with the being clamped.
This axial end play is factory-adjusted when it is assembled the distance pieces
(045-6).
0
0.03～0.05mm
Bend this stopper without
fail after clamping
DISTANCE PIECE
(ⅷ) Place the whole assembly in tank.

According to the method described in installation manual.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
118 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English

Detail of shaft assembly
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
119 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English
(Ⅸ) Final setting of mechanical seal

(a) The mechanical seal which has been installed by the procedures noted in the previous item,
should be set the shaft.
(b) The mechanical seal and mechanical seal sleeve are secured to the seal end plate by the
setting plate, and is not connected to the shaft.
(c) The sleeve is provided with set screws for holding the shaft and the sleeve retainer, and it
also provided with set screws and bolts for holding the mechanical seal sleeve and the
sleeve retainer.
Loosen the set screws and the bolts to remove the sleeve retainer and check that the
sleeve is fitted with a gasket.
After checking, insert the sleeve retainer and tighten the set bolts firmly, then tighten set
screws.
(d) Next, remove the setting plate as illustrated below.
(e) The setting plate should be stored in the opposite side of mechanical seal cover.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
120 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English

2-6 Allowable Tolerance for Maintenance and Recommended form of Recording Sheet
At the maintenance, be careful of following items for good operation especially.
And it is recommended to record them on recording sheet as follows.
(1) Run-out of the shaft
Allowable limits are indicated table I.
In case of exceeding them, it is required to repair or renew.
Recommended recording sheet is sheet No. IR-01.
(2) Alignment
Recommended recording sheet is Sheet No. IR-02.
(3) Operation record
It is necessary to measure the vibration and bearing temperature at test operation after
reassembled.
Recommended recording sheet No. IR-03.
2-7 Required Tool and Measuring Devices

Generally, required tool and measuring devices for installation, disassembly, assembly and
inspection are as follows. But, files, sandpapers, oil stones etc. are always necessary.
(1) For mounting base on foundation and alignment

Tools and measuring devices Parts for use
Open ended spanner For bolts
Level gauge For mounting base
Dial gauge (Small gauge) For centering
Vernier caliper For centering
(2) For disassembly and assembly

Hexagon bar spanner width For hexagon socketed set screws
across flat is 4mm, 3mm
Screw Driver For slotted set screw
Wrench For sleeve nut (If furnished)
Vernier caliper For mechanical seal setting
(3) For inspection

Vernier caliper For measuring clearance
Inside micrometer For measuring clearance
Dial gauge For measuring run-out
V block For measuring run-out
(4) For test running

Measuring devices Parts for use
Thermo-meter For bearing temperature
Hand vibrograph For vibration
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
121 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English

ALLOWABLE CLEARANCE AND RUN-OUT
ITEM NO. 020-P-602A/B
0.15～0.193
1.
/0.343
0.53～0.653
2.
/1.183
0.83～1.37
3,5,7
/2.2
Clearance
0.51～1.2
( Design / 4,6,8
/1.71
Max. Allowable )
0.51～0.97
Ⅰ
/1.48
0.175～0.221
Ⅱ
/0.396
Allowable Run-Out
Max. 0.05 mm / 1m
( Shaft Only )
Allowable Run-Out
Max. 0.10 mm / 1m
( With Rotational Parts )
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
122 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English
ITEM NO. 020-P-602A/B INSPECTION & TEST RECORD

DIMENSIONAL
SERIAL NO. R130555105 SHEET NO.
INSPECTIONN
MODEL 100VPSS4M29 IR-01
(UNIT：mm)
INTERNAL DIA EXTERNAL DIA CLEARANCE RUN-OUT (T.I.R)
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
123 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English

ALIGNMENT
RECORD
T.I.R
a b c d
D1
A (mm)
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
124 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English

OPERATION
RECORD
VIBRATION (μm)
1 2 3
HORIZONTAL
VERTICAL
AXIAL
BEARING TEMP. (℃)
TIME AMB. TEMP A B C
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
125 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English
LIFTING DETAIL
LIFTING BOLTS
（４ＰＣＳ）
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
126 / 633
0
W
VPSS-10th English

If you want to contact with us for question, spare parts ordering etc., please inform the following

Pump Type
Attention
EBARA Corporation
Tokyo Office
11-1 Haneda Asahicho, Oota-ku,

Phone :Tokyo (03) 3743-6111
Cable :EBARA Corp. Tokyo
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
127 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
EBARA PROCESS PUMP P.1
EBARA MODEL “VPW” PROCESS PUMP


AMINE BLOW DOWN
020-P609A/B 50VPWM229N R1305575110
DRUM PUMP
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
128 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
Introduction
This instruction manual describes the installation of the VS4-type vertical shaft
pump.
We advise you to read this manual carefully to ensure its maximum performance
and trouble-free operation.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
129 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
CONTENTS
1 Operation P. 4
1-1 Preparation and Checking prior to operation
1-2 Start-up
1-3 Normal Running
1-5 Operation
1-6 Stop
2 Maintenance P. 7
2-1 Lubrication for Thrust Bearing
2-2 Periodical Maintenance and Maintenance Cycle
2-3 Periodical Maintenance of Stand-by Machine and
Maintenance Cycle
2-4 Trouble shooting
2-6 Allowable tolerance for maintenance and
Recommended from of recording sheet
2-7 Required tool and measuring devices
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
130 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
1. Operation
1-1 Preparation and Checking prior to Operation
(1) Fill the bearing with specified amount of oil.

Use the turbine oil VG-46 for pump bearing.
(2) Check if flushing and internal lubrication pipings are proper.
(3) Just before coupling, check the rotating direction by turning only the motor.
(4) Check if the shaft turns lightly when rotating it by hand. If abnormal sound is heard such as
sand or the like being inside the pump, or if rotation is smooth, then disassemble the pump
and check the sliding parts such as intermediate bearing.
(5) Open the discharge sluice valve a little before starting the pump, in order to not operate under
shut-off conditions. (Refer to Item 1-2.(4).)
1-2 Start-up
(1) Fully open the valve on the minimum flow piping if provided.
(2) Turn on the switch, and then turn it off after four or five seconds.
During this time, check whether the turning direction is correct.
(4) Open the discharge valve gradually while paying attention to the discharge pressure.
As the shut off operation causes advance of the liquid temperature in the pump, which leads to
the generation of steam, or promotes corrosion of the machine when chemical liquid is treated,
do not conduct shut-off operation more than one minute.
1-3 Normal Running
(1) Check each part of the pump and the motor. Check electric current, voltage, lubrication,
revolving sound, vibration and temperature in the bearings and stuffing box.
If the bearing temperature is 80℃ or less, it is safe to operate.
(2) After operating 30 minutes to one hour, conduct checking of each part again.
(3) When the overheat in bearings, or vibration or abnormal noise is developed, stop the pump
immediately or switch over to a standby pump, and check the cause of trouble.
(4) When the operating level drops and draws in the air through the suction pipe, the machine
sometimes utters an abnormal noise.
Pay attention to noises.
(1) When a by-pass line is not provided, close the discharge valve gradually while stopping
operation until the flow reaches the minimum flow, and then turn off the switch.
(2) After the driver has stopped completely, close the discharge valve.
(3) When a by-pass line is provided, close the discharge valve fully making sure the valve on the
by-pass line is fully open, and then turn off the switch.
(4) Further, keep the discharge valve completely open and the back pressure is stopped by the
check valve, and pump can be started as it is upon automatic operation.
(5) When stopping the operation, perform draining after the discharge, and minimum flow line
valves have been closed.
(6) In any reason pump restart procedure is as shown (1-1) to 1-4).
(7) Special care should be taken to prevent rust formation on finished machined surfaces of shaft,
coupling, etc. for long time stoppage.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
131 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
1-5 Operation
(1) Do not throttle the suction valve during operation. Note that the pump is running for a while
after the switch is turn off. The suction valve should be throttled after the pump is stopped.
(2) Check the temperature of the motor bearing.
(3) Also, check the minimum device for proper operation.
following table.
Bearing temperature rises gradually during continuous operation and is then stabilized
after a certain time (1～2hours).

80℃
h i g h e r t 20℃
han +40℃
80℃
or lower +50℃

80℃
higher
(b) Vibration
operation.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
132 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English

When a strainer is installed on the suction side, check the movement of the pressure
gauge pointers at the downstream side of the strainer.
shortened.
1-6 Stop
(1) When the minimum flow line is not provided, slowly close (do not fully close) the discharge
valve until it reaches the minimum flow point.
(2) After the driver has stopped completely, fully close the discharge valve and then fully close the
suction valve.
(3) When the minimum flow line is provided, check that the minimum flow line valve is fully open
and then fully close the discharge valve. Next, turn off the switch.
(4) When the pump is left unused, fully close the suction valve, discharge valve, minimum flow line
valve and gas extraction piping valve.
(5) Stop of cooling, flushing and sealing.
These should be stopped for a brief time while after the pump has stopped.
Do not stop the quenching line of the pump operated at low temperature (N2 gas quenching).
(6) Fully open the suction valve and equalizing valve of the auxiliary pump which is not operating.
(7) When the pump is to be left unused for a long period of time, care should be taken with regard
to corrosion of the bearing and coupling.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
133 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
2. Maintenance
2-1 Lubrication of thrust bearing

Turbine oil ISO VG46 is used with oil bath lubricating system.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
134 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
2-2 Periodical maintenance and Maintenance cycle

The pump is required to be checked for its perfectness periodically to prevent undesirable
damages to occur.
Periodical inspection and repair as listed in next table is recommended to be carried out
such purpose.
It is necessary to overhaul the pump after 16000 hr. operation.
Inspection Interval
Check Item
Daily 300 hr. 2,000 hr 16,000 hr
Vibration ○
Bearing Temp. ○
Noise ○
Mechanical Seal Leakage ○
Flange Gasket Leakage ○
Suction Pressure ○
Discharge Pressure ○
Differential Pressure ○
Current ○
Voltage ○
Overhaul ○
Oil Change ○

Replace seal face with spares.
(Spares should be checked with
optical flat to ensure their flatness.
Mechanical Seal Check seal face and gasket for damage. They should be within 3 light bands.
If the flatness exceed this limit, they
should be rapped.)
Replace gaskets with new ones.
Visually check for wear and flaws due to Should be free from wear and flaws.
Casing and suction cover
erosion. Repair if necessary.
Should be free from wear and flaws.
Impeller Check impeller for wear and erosion.
Repair if necessary.
Check key and key way for depression and
Shaft and Key Replace with new one if damaged.
deformation.
Gasket - Replace with new one.
Rotor Run-out See paragraph 2.6.
Running Clearance See paragraph 2.6.
Replace after two years operation.
Visually check retainer for abnormal wear
Ball Bearing Should be free from unusual defects
and balls for damage.
and flaws.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
135 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
2-3 Periodical Maintenance of Stand-by Machine and Maintenance Cycle

It is recommended to perform following items for stand by machine which is under
situation of being able to start up always.
* Vent air and gas from the pump perfectly, and to fill up liquid.
* In case that the pump start up automatically, open the discharge valve or minimum flow
line if provided so as not to operate at shut-off.
* In case that pumping liquid may frozen, reverse flow from discharge side.
* Be sure to confirm that rotational parts turn smoothly by hand every week.
* Operate every month to confirm that the pump can be operated without abnormity.
It is recommended to perform following items for stand by machine drained perfectly.
* Apply rust preventive oil in the pump and to the outer surface.
* Turn rotational parts by hand every week.
The maintenance cycle of stand by pump applies correspondingly to operating pump.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
136 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
2-4 Troubleshooting
When trouble arises with the pump, check the cause of it referring to the following table.
(1) Liquid not pumped up

Deaeration of degasing
insufficient.
betw een suction and vapor Check the real available NPSH
pressures.
Gas pocketed in suction
Vent gas.
pipe.
Rotating speed too slow . Check w ith tachometer.
clock-w ise view ed from motor.
than design head.
(2) Capacity too low

Pump and Suction pipe not
filled w ith liquid
betw een Suction and vapor Check the real available NPSH
pressure
Gas mixed in liquid Vent gas.
Gas pocketed in Suction
Vent air and gas from gas pocket
pipe
Check flanges and plunges etc. of suction
Air leaks into Suction pipe
line
Rotating speed too slow Check w ith tachometer
Wrong turning direction
than design head
Liquid viscosity different
from design value
Impeller slots choked w ith
Inspect the inside
foreign material
Worn w ear ring Check the clearance betw een w ear ring
Check the corrosion and erosion of
Damaged Impeller
Impeller
Check the clearance betw een throat
Worn throat bushing
bushing
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
137 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
(3) Motor overload

Turning speed too high. Check w ith tachometer.
Total head of system low er
Throttle the discharge valve.
than design head.
Specific gravity and
viscosity of sucked liquid Re-examine the project.
different from design value.
Check the inside.
w ith fixed part.
Worn w ear ring. Check the clearance betw een w ear ring.
Mechanical seal improperty Check the set dimension of Mechanical
assembled. seal.
Check the clearance betw een throat
Worn throat bushing.
bushing.
(4) Abnormal vibration and noise of Pump

Pump or suction pipe not
Prime them again.
filled w ith liquid.
Cavitation occure. Check the real available NPSH.
Operating capacity too Operate at capacity more than minimum
small. flow .
Incomplete centering. Check alignment.
Bent shaft. Check the run-out of shaft.
Check the inside.
w ith fixed part.
Check balls and retainer of bearing for
Worn bearing
motor.
Check the corrosion and errosion of
Damaged Impeller.
Impeller.
rotationary part.
(5) Overheated Bearing

Incomplete centering. Checkk alignment
Bent shaft. Check run-out of shaft.
rotationary part.
Abnormal axial thrust. Check the suction pressure.
Shortage of cooling w ater. Adjust flow rate of cooling w ater.
Poor lubrication. Add lubrication greese.
Change grease and replace bearing if
Dust in bearing.
damaged.
Bearing corroded by mater
Change lubricant grease and replace
penetrated in bearing
bearing.
housing.
Damaged throat bushing. Changed throat bushing.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
138 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
(6) Galling or overheat in pump

Deaeration or degasing
Vent air and gas again.
insufficient.
betw een suction and vapor Check suction pressure.
pressure.
Foreign material in pump. Check inside of pump.
Operating capacity too
Operation at minimum flow or more.
small.
Rotary part in contact w ith Check centering and run-out of rotary
fixed part. parts.
(7) Service life of Mechanical seal short due to leaky Mechanical seal.

Flushing pipe for
Wash and Clean the flushing pipe.
Mechanical seal choked.
Mechanical seal improperly
Check the setting position.
assmebled.
Check the run-out of shaft, centering,
Excessive vibration. w ear of bearing and unbalance of rotary
parts.
Cooling w ater not supplied
Flow the cooling w ater.
to stuffing box.
w earing surface of
Mechanical seal damaged Replace it w ith new one.
due to foreign material.
The flatness is measured w ith optical flat,
Wearing surface of seat or
and it shall be less than 3 bands. Wrap
face not properly flated.
again the seal face.
When using high Adjust the temperature of the flushing
temperature liquid, cooling liquid by increasing cooling w ater. The
w ater for Mechanical seal temperature is indicated in the mechanical
cooler not sufficient. seal draw ing.
Gasket for Mechanical seal
Replace them w ith new one.
damaged.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
139 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
(1) In advance to the pump disassembly, close each valve of piping.

(2) For replacement of the bearing and mechanical seal only, see the follow step (a) through (f).
(a) Insert two setting plates into the slot of the mechanical seal sleeve and secure them to the
mechanical seal cover with bolts. Next, loosen all the set screws (2 rows) of the sleeve
retainer about 1mm.
Fig. 3-2
(b) Make sure that there are match marks on the spacer (140-2) and pump half coupling
(140-1). Then remove the coupling bolts on the pump side and driver side, and remove the
spacer.
(c) Remove the motor mounting bolts and remove the motor.
(d) Remove the detent screw from the coupling nut (128-1), and remove the coupling nut.
Then remove the pump half coupling (140-1) and the key (039-3).
(e) Drain out the lubricating oil inside the bearing housing, and remove the constant level oiler.
Next, remove the deflector (093-1) and bearing cover (053).
Then draw the bearing adapter (044), with the ball bearing attached, off the shaft,
and draw out the bearing housing (051) with oil reservoir (064) attached, via the driver stand
window.
Finally, draw the distance piece (045-6) off the shaft.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
140 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
(f) Remove the injection piping, etc., attached to the mechanical seal cover, then draw the
mechanical seal cover, shaft sleeve and mechanical seal off the pump shaft together as a
unit.
Fig. 3-3
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
141 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
DEFLECTOR
(093-1)
Fig. 3-4
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
142 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
Fig. 3-5
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
143 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
(3) Pump body has been lifted from tank.

(ⅰ) Take off the coupling bolts.
(ⅱ) Take off the motor.
(ⅲ) Dismantle the discharge piping and auxiliary piping to seal system from the pump and
take off the seal system individually. Then, haul out the pump from tank.
(ⅳ) Because of its great length, the pump body, once lifted out, must be supported in a
horizontal position so it is not subjected to excessive stresses.
(4) Disassembling coupling
(ⅰ) Insert the two setting plates in the groove of the mechanical seal sleeve and bolt to the
seal mechanical seal cover.
Lessen by about one millimeter the two rows of screws holding the sleeve retainer.
(ⅱ) Check the aligning marks engraved on motor side coupling and pump side coupling set
bolts.
(ⅲ) Unless otherwise specified, the spacer coupling should remain fixed to the motor side
coupling. Remove the motor flange hold down bolts and pull out motor.
(ⅳ) Remove the coupling nut and pump half coupling.
(ⅴ) Measure and record the distance between the upper surface of the driver stand and shaft
end surface.(To see fig. dimension A)
(5) Disassembling bearing parts

(ⅰ) Remove the deflector (093-1), labyrinth (113) and bearing cover (053).
(ⅱ) Pull out bearing adapter (044) with ball bearing(056) and oil flinger (084).
(ⅲ) After pulling out constant level oiler (256), take off the bearing housing (051) with
oil reservoir (064) and oil bushing (084).
(ⅵ) Take off the driver stand (162)
(6) Disassembling mechanical seal
(ⅰ) Detach liquid injection pipe from the mechanical seal cover.
Remove nuts and detach the mechanical seal cover, mechanical seal sleeve and
mechanical seal as one unit, from pump shaft.
(ⅱ) After completion of the above, shift the, setting plates in order to remove the mechanical
seal and mechanical seal cover. Avoid scratches or damage to seal faces and periphery of
sleeve.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
144 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English

(7) Disassembling inner case
(ⅰ) Remove the suction cover (012), loosen the set screw of the impeller nut (048-1) and pull
out the impeller (021). When connection between the discharge pipe (174) and the column
pipe (173) is disconnected, the casing (001) can be taken away. Draw out the casing softly
without forcing the intermediate bearing bushing (081-6).
(ⅱ) The disassembly will be completed in the order of the column pipe (173), intermediate
bearing housing (057) and the pump shaft (032).
(ⅲ) When extracting coupling, impellers and sleeve, never strike them with a metal hammer as
this could damage pump shaft:
After long operation, parts may strongly adhere to shaft. In this event application of rust
removing solution is recommended.
(ⅳ) If this is not effective, apply moderate heat to the periphery of the part with a blow torch or
welding torch. Heat uniformily and refrain from heating the pump shaft which must remain
cold. Utmost care must be taken, when dismounting the pump so as not to damage
finished machined surfaces of pump body and rotating elements.
(8) Assembly
(ⅰ) It is necessary to arrange sheet packings, 0-rings, gaskets, etc., in advance to
disassembly.
(ⅱ) The assembly is to be carried out in the reverse order of disassembly.
(ⅲ) Assembling the inner case and column pipe
(ⅳ) Check the axial play between the casing and the rotating elements.
(ⅴ) Also check the pump by hand turning.
(ⅵ) Reassembling the mechanical seal
Position the mechanical seal on the mechanical seal sleeve and fix the mechanical seal onto
mechanical seal cover with the setting plates and insert on pump shaft.
Be careful not to damage the o -ring, located in the seal end plate on the box, and
carefully and evenly tighten bolts.
(ⅶ) Assembly of thrust ball bearing
Assemble it as shown on below. Insert the thrust ball bearing into the main shaft
before inserting into the bearing housing. Either outer race should be turned smoothly
when holding the other side by hand with the being clamped.
This axial end play is factory-adjusted when it is assembled the distance pieces
(045-6).
0
0.03～0.05mm
Bend this stopper without
fail after clamping
DISTANCE PIECE
(ⅷ) Place the whole assembly in tank.

According to the method described in installation manual.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
145 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
146 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
(Ⅸ) Final setting of mechanical seal

(a) The mechanical seal which has been installed by the procedures noted in the previous item,
should be set the shaft.
(b) The mechanical seal and mechanical seal sleeve are secured to the seal end plate by the
setting plate, and is not connected to the shaft.
(c) The sleeve is provided with set screws for holding the shaft and the sleeve retainer, and it
also provided with set screws and bolts for holding the mechanical seal sleeve and the
sleeve retainer.
Loosen the set screws and the bolts to remove the sleeve retainer and check that the
sleeve is fitted with a gasket.
After checking, insert the sleeve retainer and tighten the set bolts firmly, then tighten set
screws.
(d) Next, remove the setting plate as illustrated below.
(e) The setting plate should be stored in the opposite side of mechanical seal cover.
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
147 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English

2-6 Allowable Tolerance for Maintenance and Recommended form of Recording Sheet
At the maintenance, be careful of following items for good operation especially.
And it is recommended to record them on recording sheet as follows.
(1) Run-out of the shaft
Allowable limits are indicated table I.
In case of exceeding them, it is required to repair or renew.
Recommended recording sheet is sheet No. IR-01.
(2) Alignment
Recommended recording sheet is Sheet No. IR-02.
(3) Operation record
It is necessary to measure the vibration and bearing temperature at test operation after
reassembled.
Recommended recording sheet No. IR-03.
2-7 Required Tool and Measuring Devices

Generally, required tool and measuring devices for installation, disassembly, assembly and
inspection are as follows. But, files, sandpapers, oil stones etc. are always necessary.
(1) For mounting base on foundation and alignment

Tools and m easuring devices Parts for use
Pipe w rench For auxiliary piping
Adjustable angle w rench For bolts
Level gauge For mounting base
Dial gauge (Small gauge) For centering
Vernier caliper For centering
(2) For disassembly and assembly

Adjustable angle w rench For bolts
Hexagon bar spanner w idth For hexagon socketed set screw s
across flat is 4mm, 3mm
Screw Driver For slotted set screw
Pipe w rench For auxiliary piping
Wrench For sleeve nut (If furnished)
Vernier caliper For mechanical seal setting
(3) For inspection

Vernier caliper For measuring clearance
Inside micrometer For measuring clearance
Dial gauge For measuring run-out
V block For measuring run-out
(4) For test running

Measuring devices Parts for use
Thermo-meter For bearing temperature
Hand vibrograph For vibration
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
148 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
ALLOWABLE CLEARANCE AND RUN-OUT
TABLE.1
CLEARANCE (DESIGN/ALLOWABLE MAX. CLEARANCE)
ITEM NO. PUMP TYPE 1 2 3 4
020-P-609A/B 50VPWM229N 0.43～0.534 0.43～0.534 0.175～0.221 -
/0.964 /0.964 /0.396 -
Allowable run-out (Shaft only) MAX. 0.05 (T.I.R.) / 1m
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
149 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English

DIMENSIONAL
INSPECTIONN
MODEL 50VPWM229N IR-01
(UNIT：mm)
INTERNAL DIA EXTERNAL DIA CLEARANCE RUN-OUT (T.I.R)
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
150 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English

ALIGNMENT
RECORD
T.I.R
a b c d
D1
A (mm)
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
151 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English

OPERATION
RECORD
VIBRATION (μm)
1 2 3
HORIZONTAL
VERTICAL
AXIAL
BEARING TEMP. (℃)
TIME AMB. TEMP A B C
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
152 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English
LIFTING DETAIL
LIFTING BOLTS
（４ＰＣＳ）
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
153 / 633
0
W
VPW-10th English

If you want to contact with us for question, spare parts ordering etc., please inform the following

Pump Type
Attention
EBARA Corporation
Tokyo Office
11-1 Haneda Asahicho, Oota-ku,

Phone :Tokyo (03) 3743-6111
Cable :EBARA Corp. Tokyo
A EBARA CORPORATION
INDRR
-2016
06-A
PM
P
1
154 / 633
0
W
TEC-8850
HANDLING MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL SEAL

ROTARY MOUNTED MULTI-SPRING SEAL
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 155 / 633
TEC-8850
C o n t e n t s
1. Introduction 1
2. Feature of Mechanical Seal 1
3. Handling of Mechanical Seal 1
3-1.Inspection before Seal Assembling 1
A. Inspection of Pump 1
B. Inspection of Seal 3
3-2. Installation of Seal to Pump 5
3-2-1 Installing Non-cartridge type Mechanical Seal 5
3-2-2 Installing cartridge type Mechanical Seal 6
4. Notes in Operation 7
5. Failure of Mechanical Seal and Its Cause 8
5-1 Cause for Leakage from Seal Face 8
5-2 Cause for Leakage from Other Parts 9
5-3 Early Wear of Seal Face Material 9
5-4 Excessive Torque 9
6. Maintenance 10
6-1.Replacement of Mechanical Seal 10
6-2.Disassembling of Mechanical Seal 10
7. Long term preservation
7-1 Storage of O ring 10
7-2Storage of Mechanical Seal 10
7-3 Environment 10
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 156 / 633
TEC-8850
1. Introduction
This instruction manual describes operation, maintenance, disassembling and

assembling of mechanical seals for pumps.
A mechanical seal is precision machine part and therefore special attention is required
for its handling. Seal faces of a mechanical seal are delicate and utmost care is
necessary in assembling and disassembling.
Not only damages on the seal faces or the gaskets but also more than designed value
solids and impurities in the pumping fluid will damage the seal face and good sealing
condition cannot be achieved.
Dimensional accuracy of the equipment where the seal is installed is another important
factor for good sealing condition. This instruction manual picks up and explains
necessary points to achieve good sealing condition. Through operation under
appropriate handling and maintenance, the mechanical seal performs as expected.
2. Feature of Mechanical Seal

This mechanical seal is rotary mounted multi-spring and contacting wet seal.
3. Handing of Mechanical seal

3-1.Inspection of Mechanical Seal Before Assembling
A. Inspection of Pump
Before installing the mechanical seal, inspect the pump in the following
procedure.
① Shaft or Sleeve Vibration
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-1-
157 / 633
TEC-8850
② Concentricity of Shaft and Stuffing Box
③ Squareness of Shaft and Stuffing Box
④ Shaft Travel in Thrust Direction
Shaft end play is the acceptable play

of the bearing. It occurs only at pump
start-up and shaft travel shall not
happen in normal operation.
⑤ Finish Accuracy of Shaft, Flange and Stuffing Box

⑥ Is chamfering done?
a. Portions of the shaft and the sleeve where O-rings and packings are
inserted
b. End of the flange where the stationary ring is placed
⑦ Any dents or scars? Especially on the contacting surfaces of O-rings and
packings
⑧ Any foreign matters such as flashes?
a. Edges of the shaft and the sleeve where O-rings and packings are
inserted
b. Edges of the flange where the stationary ring is placed
c. Inner surface of the stuffing box
⑨ Is the length of the stud bolt appropriate for the thickness of the flange?
⑩ Any foreign matters such as dusts and scales in the piping system
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-2-
158 / 633
TEC-8850
B. Inspection of Seal
Inspect the Primary seal in the following procedure.
① Are there any foreign matters such as dust and scales adhered on the
parts? If Yes, remove it by clean soft cloth. Special attention is required if
the seal face is cleaned. Put the cloth in Methyl, Ethyl, Ketone end clean
the dusts by the cloth. Do not touch the cleaned parts by hands.
② Is the nose height of the seal face appropriate?
Standard nose height of the carbon face is designed to be 2 (1.5) mm.
When the nose height becomes 1.3 (1.0) mm or less after re-lapping,
replace the face by a new one.
Rotating seal face can be lapped as long as its thickness is greater
than the original value-0.5mm.
③ Are there any chipping or scar on the seal face(carbon)? Chipping of

carbon is acceptable as far as it is within 1/5 of the seal face total width. If
it is greater than such, replace it by a new one.
A B
1
B≦ A
5
④ Are there any scar or deformation on O-rings or packings?

a. If a serious scar exists on the contacting surface, replace it by a new
one.
b. O rings and Packings are replaced new with one.
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-3-
159 / 633
TEC-8850
⑤ Are flatness and finish roughness of the seal face appropriate?
Flatness and finish roughness of the seal face shall be as below. Be
careful not to give scars on the sealing face when inspection is carried out.
★ Flatness
Within 3 bounds under helium light. Within 10 bounds if they are
concentric.
★ Finish Roughness
Within 1.5μ in case of carbon
Within 0.8μ in case of silicon carbide and tungsten carbide
D R A -4-
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 160 / 633
TEC-8850
3-2. Installation of Seal to Pump
3-2-1. Installing Non-cartridge type Mechanical Seal
A. Installing Static Ring
a. Apply a thin coat of grease of good quality to the packing(O ring), and fit the
packing on the mating ring.
b. With notch of the mating ring aligned to the dowel pin in the seal cover by pushing
by hands.
B. Installing Rotary Ring Assembly
a. Apply a thin coat of grease of good quality to the packing(O ring), and install the
rotary over the shaft or sleeve.
b. With end face of the collar aligned to the installing position, tighten the set screw
securely. Retighten more than twice.
c. Move the rotary ring installed on the shaft or sleeve by hand and see if it smoothly
slides.
C. Precaution
The sliding surface is wiped with clean unraised cloth which is wet with MEK,
acetone,etc. Do not use oil in principle when assembling the mechanical seal.
Grease is absolutely prohibitive.
D. Installing Over Machine Shaft
a. Apply a thin coat of grease of good quality to the packing.
b. Holding with sliding surface toward the process side, install the seal cover over the
machine. Since the seal cover has the static ring installed in it, use care not to
damage it.
c.Install the sleeve with rotary ring over the machine shaft.
d.Install the stuffing box in place.
e.Tighten nut to fix stuffing box and hearing body.
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-5-
161 / 633
TEC-8850
3-2-2. Installing cartridge type Mechanical Seal
Assemble the rotating ring assembly (including sleeve) and the stationary ring assembly
(including flange) before mounting in the pump. Cartridge seal unit is assembled by
making use of locating set plates. Apply a thin coat of grease of good quality to the
packing. Then, install them in the pump as the mechanical seal assembly. The sleeve is
secured with the set screws (including loctite)※ and hex.bolts in place after the shaft
has been completely located in the correct position. The locating set plates are removed
after sleeve is fixed on the shaft. And keep the set plates and bolts for next service.
★About the grease used for Oring

FKM, FFKM(Kalrez)・・・Use the silicon grease or mineral type grease.
EPDM(Etylene Propylene Ruber)・・・Use the silicon grease. Don’t use the Oil type grease.
FVMQ(Fluoro Silicon Ruber)・・・Use the grease for low temp. Don’t use the silicon grease.
※In case of Shrink disc

a.Clean sufficiently the each parts.
b.Apply machine oil to installation department and Shrink disc.
c.Assemble each parts according to the drawing.
d.Tighten the hex.head bolts to the opposite angle with 3 stages torque according to the
drawing.
D R A -6-
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 162 / 633
TEC-8850
4. Notes in Operation
A. Before Operation
a. check the pipings to confirm that connections of flushing, cooling and
quenching are correctly made.
b. Inspect the gauges.
c. Turn the shaft by hands to confirm that excessive torque does not
exist and noise is not generated.
d. check the rotating parts to confirm the rotating direction and centering.
e. Gas in the pump must be drained out. If it is liquefied gas, completely
drain it.
f. Confirm that no leakage occurs from the seal and the pipings.
B. During Operation
a. Start running after complete priming. Never make dry running. If the
priming is not completely done, dry running of the mechanical seal
may occur.
b. If slight leakage is observed after the operation starts (initial leakage),
continue operation for a while. After fitting running, leakage will
decrease.
c. Confirm that operating condition such as temperature and pressure is
in compliance with the designed specification. It is impossible to run
the mechanical seal in the reverse pressure.
d. Confirm that the pump makes no excessive vibration, noise or heat
and the gauges are in stable condition.
e. In the case of the dual seal, if the liquid in the reservoir or accumulator
tank getting less, it can continue the operation of the pump by refilling
the liquid. And if the liquid in the reservoir or accumulator tank getting
full, it can continue the operation of the pump by draining the liquid.
C. At Stoppage
a. If the seal liquid solidifies under room temperature, drain out the liquid
from the pump chamber or replace the liquid to the other kind so as to
prevent the liquid from solidifying at the mechanical seal area.
b. If the operation is stopped for a long period, the pump liquid must be
drained out. In winter, drain out the cooling water for prevention of
freezing.
★External flushing, carbon cooling, jacket cooling or quenching must be
provided before the pump starts if they are required in the mechanical
seal drawing.
★ It is recommended to periodically inspect and record the followings
during operation because they will be of help for investigation of a cause
for trouble if occurred.
Pressure: Suction Pressure, Discharge Pressure, Box
Pressure
Temperature: Pumping Temp., Flushing Temp., Cooling Water
Temp., Bearing Box Temp., Atmospheric Temp.
Vibration, Rotating Speed, Noise, Quenching or Cooling if provided
Leakage Condition of Mechanical Seal
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-7-
163 / 633
TEC-8850
5. Failure of Mechanical Seal and Its Cause
Mechanical seal failure includes leakage, early wear of the sealing face material and
excessive torque. If a failure occurs, it is required to check in the following category
and plan a corrective action.
5-1. Cause for Leakage from Seal Face
a. Excessive Wear of Seat Face Material
★ Entrapment of foreign matter and excessive face load
★ Dry running by operation miss
★ Poor material
★ Insufficient material combination (PV value)
★ Incomplete cooling or lubrication of seal (by flushing stop, etc.)
b. Seal Face Deformation
★ Excessive tightening of the gland cover, bolts and nuts or uneven
tightening
★ Poor lapping, warping by age
★ Excessive Pressure (operation miss of valve open/close)
★ Temperature being greater than designed value
c. Out of Squareness of Seal Face and Shaft
★ Poor installation of the seal cover (uneven tightening of nuts)
★ Poor manufacturing (squareness of the seal face and the flange)
★ Out of squareness of the end face of the stuffing box
d. Incorrect Installation Position
★ Excessively large or small face load
e. Loose Set Screw and Nut
★ Incomplete setting
★ Vibration (bearing, poor centering)
f. Excessive Vibration
★ Trouble at equipment (bearing, shaft)
★ Poor centering
★ Excessive rotating speed (critical shaft speed)
-8-
D R A
I N
06-A
RP- 2 0 16
164 / 633
TEC-8850
5-2. Leakage from Other Parts and Its Cause
a. Leakage from 0-rings and Packings
★ Damage
★ Insufficient material or dimension
★ Poor dimensions or finish of the seal cover, the shaft and the sleeve
★ Improper material selection
b. Leakage from Connection between Stuffing Box and Seal Cover
★ Incomplete tightening of the seal cover
★ Breakage of 0-rings and packings
★ Out of squareness or poor finish of the seal cover or stuffing box
★ Improper packing material selection
5-3. Early Wear of Seal Face Material

a. Dry Running
★ Excessive face load (poor setting)
★ Excessive pressure (operation miss of valve open/close)
★ Excessive spring load, poor finish, slip stick
★ Erosion, rust
b. Entrapment of Foreign Matter, Scale, Welding Flash, Slurry
c. Improper Seal Face Material Selection (against fluid and PV value)
d. Excessive Vibration, Poor Finish of Pump, Poor Centering
e. Poor Finish or Manufacture of Seal Face
5-4. Excessive Torque

a. Dry Running
★ Slips stick of the seal face
★ Erosion, rust
b. Bumping of Pump and Mechanical Seal
★ Improper dimension
★ Poor installation (setting)
-9-
D R A
I N
06-A
RP- 2 0 16
165 / 633
TEC-8850
6. Maintenance
6-1. Replacement of Mechanical Seal
A mechanical seal can be used until its leakage reaches the allowable limit of the
plant process. It is recommended, however, that continuous operation is
determined after the operating situation is reviewed.
It is recommended to periodically disassemble and check the mechanical seal at
least once a year.
6-2. Disassembling of Mechanical Seal

Disassembling shall be carried out in the reverse process of the setting. During the
disassembling, carefully handle the parts so as to prevent damage and
deformation by excessive force.

7-1. Storage of O ring
As shipped, the seal assembly and O rings are packaged in sealed plastic bags.
Do not tear plastic bags until installation. When inspecting inside of the bags, be
sure not to allow foreign material to enter between the seal faces. Do not pile
heavy item on the O ring. When it exceeds five years, it recommends exchanging.
7-2. Storage of Mechanical Seal

When the seal is to be stored, use the original container or some covered
container. Do not store the seal exposing it to the atmosphere. Do not pile heavy
item on the seal. Do not place the parts where dropping off is anticipated. When it
exceeds five years, it recommends checking before use.
7-3. Environment
When storing the seal, place the container in an environment free from dust, rain,
and direct sunshine, any solid or liquid contamination, excessive humidity, and
extreme temperature.
-10-
D R A
I N
06-A
RP- 2 0 16
166 / 633
TEC-8851

STATIONARY MOUNTED MULTI-SPRING SEAL
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 167 / 633
TEC-8851
C o n t e n t s
1. Introduction 1
6. Maintenance 10
7-1.Storage of O ring 10
7-2.Storage of Mechanical Seal 10
7-3.Environment 10
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 168 / 633
TEC-8851
1. Introduction


This mechanical seal is stationary mounted multi-spring and contacting wet seal.

procedure.
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-1-
169 / 633
TEC-8851


inserted
packings
inserted
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-2-
170 / 633
TEC-8851
Standard nose height of the carbon face is designed to be 2 (1.5) mm.
When the nose height becomes 1.3 (1.0)mm or less after re-lapping,

A B
1
B≦ A
5

one.
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-3-
171 / 633
TEC-8851
★ Flatness
concentric.
D R A -4-
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 172 / 633
TEC-8851
a. Apply a thin coat of grease of good quality to the packing(O ring).
b. With notch of the seal ring aligned to the dowel pin in the seal cover by pushing by
hands.
c. Move the static ring installed on the seal cover by hand and see if it smoothly
slides.
a. Apply a thin coat of grease of good quality to the packing (O ring), and install the
rotary over the shaft or sleeve
C. Precaution
damage it.
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-5-
173 / 633
TEC-8851


drawing.
D R A -6-
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 174 / 633
TEC-8851
A. Before Operation
drain it.
B. During Operation
may occur.
decrease.
C. At Stoppage
freezing.
seal drawing.
Pressure
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-7-
175 / 633
TEC-8851
★ Poor material
tightening
★ Poor centering
-8-
D R A
I N
06-A
RP- 2 0 16
176 / 633
TEC-8851
★ Damage

a. Dry Running
★ Erosion, rust

a. Dry Running
★ Erosion, rust
-9-
D R A
I N
06-A
RP- 2 0 16
177 / 633
TEC-8851
6. Maintenance
least once a year.



7-3. Environment
-10-
D R A
I N
06-A
RP- 2 0 16
178 / 633
TEC-8852

STATIONARY BELLOWS SEAL
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 179 / 633
TEC-8852
C o n t e n t s
1. Introduction 1
5-4Excessive Torque 7
6. Maintenance 8
6-1Replacement of Mechanical Seal 8
6-2Disassembling of Mechanical Seal 8
7-3 Environment 8
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 180 / 633
TEC-8852
1. Introduction


This mechanical seal is stationary bellows and contacting wet seal.

procedure.
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-1-
181 / 633
TEC-8852


inserted
packings
inserted
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-2-
182 / 633
TEC-8852
① Are there any foreign matters such as dust and scales adhered on the parts?
If Yes, remove it by clean soft cloth. Special attention is required if the seal face
is cleaned. Put the cloth in Methyl, Ethyl, Ketone end clean the dusts by the
cloth. Do not touch the cleaned parts by hands.
② Check if the sliding surface height is correct
The design standard height of the bellows seal’s sliding surface is X mm as
shown below.
X=2.4mm (D/H22～D/H42)
X=3.0mm (D/H48～)
Y=1.4mm (D/H22～D/H42)
Y=2.0mm (D/H48～)
When this height is reduced below Y mm through repeated lapping,the part

must be replaced with a new part.
Mating ring is reusable by repeated lapping, as long as the installed dimension
is within the permissible range.
③ Check the sliding components for cracks and scratches. The permissible range
of chipping on the sliding surface is up to 1/5 the full width. When the chipping
width is more than that,the part must be replaced.
B≦0.2A
④ Check the packings for surface damage

a. When there is a harmful surface damage on the contact surface, replace the
component.
b. Gaskets and packings should be replaced in principle.
⑤ Check the sliding surface for flatness and surface roughness
The permissible flatness and the roughness of the sliding surface are as given
below:
In checking the sliding surface, be very careful not to damage the surface.
a. flatness
Within 3 fringes under helium ray. However, up to 10 fringes when they are
concentric.
b. Surface roughness
Within 1.5μm for carbon, 0.8μm for tungsten carbide or silicon carbide.
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-3-
183 / 633
TEC-8852
a. Apply a thin coat of high quality machine oil or MoS2 on the Gasket, and fit the
packing on the static ring.Secure the static ring and gasket to seal cover with
hex.bolts.
b. Move the static ring installed by hand and see if it smoothly slides.
Apply a thin coat of high quality machine oil or MoS2 on the Gasket, and install the
rotary over the sleeve. Secure the rotary ring and gasket to sleeve with hex.bolts.
C. Precaution
a. Apply a thin coat of high quality machine oil or MoS2 on the Packing.
b. Holding with sliding surface toward the process side, install the seal cover with
static ring over the machine. Be care not to damage it.
c. Install the sleeve with rotary ring over the machine shaft.
d. Install the stuffing box in place.
e. Tighten nut to fix stuffing box and hearing body.

making use of locating set plates. Apply a thin coat of high quality machine oil or MoS2
on the Packing. Then, install them in the pump as the mechanical seal assembly. The
sleeve is secured with the set screws (including loctite)※ and hex.bolts in place after
the shaft has been completely located in the correct position. The locating set plates are
removed after sleeve is fixed on the shaft. And keep the set plates and bolts for next
service.
c.Assemble eath parts according to the drawing.
d.Tighten the hex.head bolts to the opposite angle with 3 stages torque according to
the drawing.
D R A -4-
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 184 / 633
TEC-8852
A. Before Operation
drain it.
B. During Operation
may occur.
decrease.
C. At Stoppage
freezing.
seal drawing.
Pressure
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-5-
185 / 633
TEC-8852
★ Poor material
tightening
★ Poor centering
-6-
D R A
I N
06-A
RP- 2 0 16
186 / 633
TEC-8852
★ Damage

a. Dry Running
★ Erosion, rust

a. Dry Running
★ Erosion, rust
-7-
D R A
I N
06-A
RP- 2 0 16
187 / 633
TEC-8852
6. Maintenance
least once a year.



7-3. Environment
-8-
D R A
I N
06-A
RP- 2 0 16
188 / 633
TEC-8853

ROTARY MOUNTED SINGLE-SPRING SEAL
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 189 / 633
TEC-8853
C o n t e n t s
1. Introduction 1
6. Maintenance 10
7-3 Environment 10
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 190 / 633
TEC-8853
1. Introduction


This mechanical seal is rotary mounted single-spring and contacting wet seal.

procedure.
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-1-
191 / 633
TEC-8853


inserted
packings
inserted
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-2-
192 / 633
TEC-8853
Standard nose height of the carbon face is designed to be 3 (2) mm.
When the nose height becomes 2 (1.3) mm or less after re-lapping,


A B
1
B≦ A
5

one.
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-3-
193 / 633
TEC-8853
★ Flatness
concentric.
D R A -4-
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 194 / 633
TEC-8853
a. Apply a thin coat of grease of good quality to the packing(O ring), and fit the
packing on the seal ring.
b. With notch of the seal ring aligned to the dowel pin in the seal cover by pushing by
hands.
a. Apply a thin coat of grease of good quality to the packing(O ring), and install the
rotary over the shaft or sleeve.
c. Move the rotary ring installed on the shaft or sleeve by hand and see if it smoothly
slides.
C. Precaution
damage it.
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-5-
195 / 633
TEC-8853


drawing.
D R A -6-
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 196 / 633
TEC-8853
A. Before Operation
drain it.
B. During Operation
may occur.
decrease.
C. At Stoppage
freezing.
seal drawing.
Pressure
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0
-7-
197 / 633
TEC-8853
★ Poor material
tightening
★ Poor centering
-8-
D R A
I N
06-A
RP- 2 0 16
198 / 633
TEC-8853
★ Damage

a. Dry Running
★ Erosion, rust

a. Dry Running
★ Erosion, rust
-9-
D R A
I N
06-A
RP- 2 0 16
199 / 633
TEC-8853
6. Maintenance
least once a year.



7-3. Environment
-10-
D R A
I N
06-A
RP- 2 0 16
200 / 633
TEC.No. 2614
Instruction Manual for Mechanical Seals Cooler
USER : Nghi Son Refinery and Petrochemiacl LLC.

PROJECT : NSRP COMPLEX PROJECT
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 201 / 633
TEC.No.2614
Instruction Manual for Mechanical Seals Cooler
This Is a coil-type cooler for mechanical seals, as shown in the attached drawing.
Coil-type heat transmission tubes are installed in the shell to exchange heat between the
coolant in the shell and the flushing solution in the heat transmission tubes, in order
to cool the flushing solution. The unit should be installed, maintained, cleaned and checked
in accordance with the instructions given below to ensure long term smooth running and
correct operation.
1.Installation
(1)Preventing Contamination
Remove transit polyethylene sheets and protective plates from the openings of the unit
immediately prior to Installation. Make sure that there is no foreign matter inside the
unit. Having removed the transit polyethylene sheets and protective plates, cover the unit
with vinyl or clean polyethylene sheets to prevent the ingress of rain or other
contamination.
(2)Installation
Locate the unit on the site for installation.
Take care of the pipes during installation.
Install pipe flanges or provide other suitable means to facilitate both connection and
disassembly of the cooler and pipes.
Level the unit and ensure that the unit is standing exactly upright in order to avoid any
unreasonable forces being applied to the unit.
(3)Pipes and Joints

If the unit is connected to equipment which vibrates, pulsation of the fluids and mechanical
vibration should not be allowed to be transmitted to the cooler.
2.Operation of the Cooler

Starting the Unit
(1)Open all ventholes, and supply coolant liquid only. Close the ventholes after confirming
that the unit is completely filled. Slowly supply the flushing solution by adjusting valves
to avoid any abrupt temperature rise. Close the ventholes after filling with the flushing
solution.
(2)Do not supply flushing solution with a high differential temperature in any quantity,
because this will cause thermal shock to the unit.
-1-
IN DR20A
16
PR- 202 / 633
06-A
TEC.No.2614
(3)Re-tighten all bolts and plugs before stating the unit, to prevent any leakage from joint
packings, etc.
Stopping the Unit

(1)To stop the cooler, first turn off the pump to stop the supply of flushing solution.
When it is required to stop the coolant, turn off the pump and stop the supply of flushing
solution simultaneously.
(2)Drain all fluids from the cooler to prevent freezing or corrosion. When necessary, blow
air into the unit after draining, to remove as much residual water as possible.
3.Checking the Cooler

(1)Check all pipes internally and externally for any signs of corrosion, cracking, clogging,
etc., and then clean all pipes.
(2)The internal walls of the shell are painted. Check that this paint is still intact.
To clean the internal walls of the shell, use rigid nylon hair brushes. Do not use metal
brushes. The heat transmission tubes should be cleaned with stainless steel wire brushes
or rigid nylon hairbrushes. Use alcohol or acetone as cleaning solutions.
(3)If there is extreme pressure loss or performance loss, first check if there is any air
remaining in the coolant side of the cooler, and then check all internal parts of unit.
(4)Check the pressure in the unit and also confirm the absence of any hazardous materials from
inside the unit, before checking and cleaning any internal parts of the unit.
(5)Do not allow the heat transmission tubes to strike against the internal painted walls of
shell when disassembling the unit.
(6)Be sure to perform periodical inspection. Confirm that the flushing solution is cooled to
the specified temperature or lower.
Performance of the cooler may be lost if:
①The heat transmission surface is contaminated.
②Air or other gases remain in the unit because of insufficiecnt venting.
③The unit is operated under conditions different from the specified design conditions,
etc.
-2-
IN DR20A
16
PR- 203 / 633
06-A
TEC-8870 Rev.00
EagleBurgmann Japan Co., Ltd.

1-12-15 Shiba-Daimon
Minato- ku, Tokyo
Japan 105-8587
Tel: +81-3-3432-0188
Fax: +81-3-3432-5448
OPERATING MANUAL
EAGLEBURGMANN SUPPLY SYSTEMS
PLAN 52
These instructions are intended for the assembly, operating and control
personnel and should be kept at hand on site
PLEASE READ this manual carefully and OBSERVE the information contained as to:
Safety Start up Removal

Storage Maintenance Repair
Installation
If there are any unclear points please contact EAGLEBURGMANN by all means
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 204 / 633
TEC-8870 Rev.00
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY .......................................................................................................................................... 3
2. MANUFACTURER .......................................................................................................................... 3
3. DESIGN........................................................................................................................................... 3
4. DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................ 3
5. FUNCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 4
6. TRANSPORT & STORAGE .......................................................................................................... 6
7. INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................... 6
8. SET-UP ........................................................................................................................................... 7
9. START-UP & OPERATION........................................................................................................... 7
10. SYSTEM CHECK & PROBLEM SOLVING .............................................................................. 8
11. MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................................................... 9
12. SHUT-DOWN & DISASSEMBLY .............................................................................................. 9
13. SPARE PARTS & REPAIRS ..................................................................................................... 9
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 205 / 633
TEC-8870 Rev.00
1. SAFETY
Please read these instructions carefully. Installation in accordance with the following instructions
will contribute to long and trouble free operation of the seal system.
For related mechanical seals, separate instructions are provided.
The ultimate user must ensure that personnel assigned to handle, install and operate the seal
system and related equipment is well acquainted with the design and operating requirements of
such equipment.
Damage to any of the seal system’s components may result in unsatisfactory performance, which
can eventually result in (excessive) seal leakage. The degree of hazard depends on the sealed
product and may have an effect on people and/or the environment.
Plant regulations concerning work safety, accident prevention and pollution must be strictly adhered
to:
• Wear designated personal safety equipment

• Isolate equipment and relieve any pressure in the system
• Lock out equipment driver and valves
• Consult plant Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) files for hazardous material regulations
• Installation in hazardous areas is dependent on the explosion protection of the
instrumentation.
The ultimate user must judge in case of conflicting standards.
2. MANUFACTURER
EagleBurgmann Japan Co., Ltd..

Minato-ku, Tokyo
Japan 105-8587
Tel: +81-3-3432-0188
Fax: +81-3-3432-5448
3. DESIGN
This system is designed and manufactured as per customer’s specifications.
4. DESCRIPTION
The system is delivered as a complete assembled unit.

Depending on customer requirements the system design and additional components may vary.
For the exact execution of the system, reference is made to the system assembly drawing.
On the flow diagram the design and operating conditions of the system can be found (pressure,
temperature and volume) as well as the instrument settings.
The system assembly consists of the following components:
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 206 / 633
TEC-8870 Rev.00
Reservoir
It contains the fluid to lubricate and cool the outboard seal of a non-pressurized dual mechanical
seal. The following options may be installed:
Cooler
Depending on the operating conditions an additional cooler might be required and will be supplied
with the system. This can be a cooling coil mounted into reservoir, a separate water cooler, finned
tubing used as part of the interconnecting piping or a forced draft air cooler.
Instrumentation
Various instruments can be fitted to the reservoir depending on the execution. Instrumentation is
used for measurements and detection of:
• Pressure: pressure indicator (PI), pressure switch (PS), pressure transmitter (PT);
• Level: level indicator (LI), level switch (LS), level transmitter (LT);
• Flow: flow indicator (FI), flow switch (FS);
• Temperature: temperature indicator (TI).
Valves
Valves are used for draining and filling the vessel, isolation of the vessel from the mechanical seal
and for isolation of the instrumentation.
The assembly drawing indicates the position of the valves that are supplied with the reservoir. The
valves might also be part of the plant piping.
5. FUNCTION
The function of a plan 52 system is:
A. To provide a buffer fluid for lubrication and cooling of the outboard seal of a non-
pressurized dual seal arrangement.
B. Monitoring of the mechanical seal performance by means of pressure, level, temperature
and/or flow indication.
A non-pressurized dual (or tandem) seal consists of a primary seal with a secondary back-up seal.
The primary seal will seal against the full pump seal chamber pressure. The secondary seal
normally operates near or at atmospheric pressure (flare pressure). In the event of complete
primary seal failure, the secondary seal will take over the function of the primary seal and will seal
against the full seal chamber pressure.
Whilst the primary seal is continuously flushed and cooled by the pump product, the secondary
seal requires a source of buffer fluid for cooling and lubrication. The buffer fluid is therefore
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 207 / 633
TEC-8870 Rev.00
contained in an atmospheric reservoir piped to the cavity between the seals, through the flow inlet
and flow outlet connections on the seal flange(s).
The secondary seal is executed with either an integral pumping device or an external circulation
pump, which will circulate the buffer fluid, to enable cooling of the seal faces.
Any leakage of the primary seal will be carried to the reservoir by the buffer fluid. Depending on the
vapor pressure of the pumped product at ambient temperature, this leakage will be in gaseous
form (volatile products) or as a liquid (non-volatile products).
Plan 52 reservoir for volatile products
Primary seal leakage will be carried to the reservoir as a gas and will be disposed of through an
orifice installed in the vent line, which may be connected to the flare depending on local
requirements. When the flow through the orifice exceeds its maximum rated value due to
excessive primary seal leakage, the pressure in the reservoir will increase and activate an alarm
(when installed)..
Plan 52 reservoir for non-volatile products with top-mounted orifice
Primary seal leakage will contaminate the buffer fluid and will circulate through the system. The
reservoir should be periodically drained to “safe minimum level” and refilled with fresh buffer fluid
to avoid a too high degree of contamination.
The leakage will cause a rise in level in the reservoir and will eventually activate a high level alarm
(when installed). The reservoir should be drained to safe minimum level and refilled with clean
buffer fluid to the normal operating level.
6. TRANSPORT & STORAGE
The plan 52 reservoir and related equipment must be transported and stored in the unopened,
original shipping box. The warehouse in which the reservoir and related equipment are stored must
be dry and free of dust. Avoid exposing equipment to large temperature fluctuations, high humidity
and radiation.
Reservoirs that have been dropped or have otherwise been subjected to heavy impacts during
transportation must not be installed. An inspection by EagleBurgmann or its appointed
representative is strongly advised.
After a storage period of 3 years the reservoir must be inspected for its “as new” properties. This
applies in particular to the instrumentation. An inspection by EagleBurgmann is mandatory.
If the equipment is to be preserved with the reservoir installed, the preserving medium must not
impair the function of the system by e.g. fouling and/or attack the secondary seals.
7. INSTALLATION
7.1. Mounting
Locate seal system as close to the seal as possible, while leaving sufficient room for operation and
maintenance.
To promote thermosyphoning in standby condition the reservoir must be mounted above the seal.
For horizontal pumps the reservoir must be mounted 45 to 60 cm (18” to 24”) above the shaft
centerline, for vertical pumps 45 to 60 cm above the seal gland inlet or outlet connection,
whichever is the highest (unless otherwise specified).
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 208 / 633
TEC-8870 Rev.00
7.2. Interconnecting piping
In a plan 52 system, a pumping device, which is included in the seal design or an external
circulation pump, generates the flow. The resistance in the system will determine the flow through
the system; therefore special attention must be paid to the execution of the interconnecting piping
between the reservoir and the mechanical seal. Piping instructions are detailed on the system
assembly drawing.
Minimize restrictions (e.g. use full port valves, limit the number of fittings). Unless otherwise
specified, the minimum pipe size to be used is ¾”, schedule 80S maximum. Piping must be clean
and free of burrs.
Total pipe length and number of bends should be kept to a minimum. Use smooth, large radius
bends, do not use elbows, tees, etc. Pipe runs should be sloped continuously up or down to allow
adequate circulation, proper venting and draining. Make sure that the loop, including seal flange,
does not include vapor traps.
Where applicable the following connections should be made. Note that the name of the
connections on the seal /system assembly drawing may differ from those used in these
instructions. In case of doubt please contact our EagleBurgmann representative.
Buffer fluid supply line to mechanical seal: The “to seal” connection should be connected to buffer
fluid inlet of the mechanical seal.
The “from seal” connection should be connected to buffer fluid outlet of the mechanical seal.
Flare connection/drain/disposal point connection: Depending on the execution of the plan 52

reservoir, the “vent / to flare” connection should be connected to a drain or a disposal point.
Cooling water connections coil Inlet and coil outlet: The cooling water inlet line should be
connected to the “cooling water in” connection and the cooling water outlet line should be
connected to “cooling water out” connection.
7.3. Electrical connections (if applicable)
Electrical connections for instrumentation should be wired in accordance with the applicable
instrument and plant requirements.
8. SET-UP
 Check whether the block bleed valve to the instrumentation is open (if applicable).
 Check whether the block valves of the level indicator are open and the drain and vent valves of
the level indicator are closed (if applicable).
 Check whether the block valve to the flare is open (if applicable).
 Check whether the block valve in the drain line is closed (if applicable).
 Open the fill line and fill the reservoir with clean buffer fluid until normal liquid level. Buffer fluid
may be specified on the reservoir assembly drawing. EagleBurgmann can supply information
on buffer fluid, temperature and flow requirements based on product type, seal size and
product temperature. Ensure that the buffer fluid is clean and compatible with the product.
 Check the functionality of the level transmitter during filling (if applicable).
 Close the block valve in the fill line (if applicable).
 Check for leakages at fittings and pipe work, rectify when necessary.
 Check functionality of the pressure transmitter (if applicable).
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 209 / 633
TEC-8870 Rev.00
9. START-UP & OPERATION
 If a water cooler is installed, apply cooling water (refer drawing for a degrade flow rate).
 If a forced draft air cooler is installed, make sure the fan is running.
 Pressurize the equipment in which the seals are installed, following the instructions supplied by
the equipment manufacturer.
 Check the seals, interconnecting piping and system for leakage, rectify when necessary.
 Dual non-pressurized (tandem) seals require the buffer fluid pressure to be maintained at a
value lower than the seal chamber pressure. Buffer fluid pressure is usually equal to
atmospheric or vapor recovery system pressure, unless otherwise specified.
 Start-up the equipment in accordance with the equipment’s operating procedures unless
specifically requested otherwise by EagleBurgmann. If the equipment is not operating properly
(e.g. seals and/or bearings running hot, cavitation, heavy vibration, etc.), shut down the
equipment, investigate and remove the cause.
If dual non-pressurized (tandem) seals are operated on a non-volatile product, the primary seal
leakage will not evaporate, resulting in contamination of the buffer fluid. Because the level in the
reservoir will rise over time, periodically drain the reservoir to the "safe minimum level" as indicated
on the reservoir or instructions and refill with fresh buffer fluid.
9.1. Refilling without a refill unit
• Close the valve between reservoir and flare (if applicable).

• Open a vent valve to de-pressurize the reservoir.
• Refill the reservoir with clean buffer fluid using the fill connection.
• Close the fill connection.
• Close the vent valve.
• Follow the instructions as per paragraphs 8
9.2. Refilling with a refill unit
In this case the vessel can be refilled without de-pressurizing the vessel (if connected
to a flare system). A refill unit can be a separate system that needs to be connected to the
reservoir or it can be a hand pump that is supplied with the reservoir.
• Open the shutoff valve in the connecting line between refill unit and reservoir.
• Operate the hand lever or operate the motorized refill unit, at the same time
checking the buffer fluid pressure by means of the pressure indicator.
• Upon completing the refill procedure, close the shutoff valve in the line between the
refill unit and the reservoir.
9.3. Refilling frequency

• Check the contamination degree of the buffer fluid once a month.
• Typical refill frequency is every 6 months. The frequency may differ depending on the operating
condition. Check the contamination degree of the buffer fluid once a month, and then confirm the
refill cycle.
Control Standard for Sealing Oil (Not applicable for water solution)
Change of rate of viscosity (@40℃) : ±10％
Water : below 0.2vol. ％
Total acid number : twice or three times as much as new oil
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 210 / 633
TEC-8870 Rev.00
10. SYSTEM CHECK & PROBLEM SOLVING
Checking of the system, limits itself to monitoring pressure, temperature, leakage and
consumption of buffer fluid.
• Check the buffer fluid pressure regularly (typically once a week). The buffer fluid
pressure must be equal to the flare/drain/disposal point pressure.
• Check the liquid level regularly (typically once a week). If the level is too high drain
the buffer fluid to safe minimum level, refill with clean buffer fluid.
• Check the seals, system and interconnecting piping for leaks, rectify when necessary.
• Check the buffer fluid for impurities by collecting a sample (typically once a month).
If dirty, drain the reservoir to safe minimum level and refill with clean buffer fluid.
•
Problem Solving
PARAMETER INDICATION (1) POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION

Pressure High • Too high primary seal leakage • Check primary seal
• Blocked orifice condition
• Check orifice
Liquid level Reducing fast (2) • Too high outboard seal • Check outboard seal
leakage condition
• Leakage in the system • Check connections for
leakage
High (3) • Too high primary seal • Check primary seal

leakage condition
Temperature High • In-sufficient circulation • Check blockages in

(if applicable) • Too high heat development of system, contamination,
mechanical seal circulation pump
• Cooler not working • Check seal condition
• Check cool water, air
flow
Notes:
(1) Indication can be done with an indicator or with an alarm
(2) The liquid level drop should be monitored over time. A too fast drop in liquid level compared to
previous measurements could be an indication for one of the mentioned possible causes.
(3) A high liquid level with a non-volatile product and a side-mounted orifice indicates a too high
primary seal leakage. W ith a top mounted orifice this is an indication that the reservoir needs to be
drained. The need for frequent draining is an indication of too high primary seal leakage.
11. SYSTEM CHECK & PROBLEM SOLVING
Renewal of buffer fluid
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 211 / 633
TEC-8870 Rev.00
• Stop and de-pressurize the equipment in which the seals are installed.
• Close the valve between the reservoir and the flare.(if applicable)
• De-pressurize the reservoir.
• Drain the reservoir.
• Refill the reservoir with clean buffer fluid.
• Check all components for damage of leaks and replace or repair when necessary.
• Follow instructions as per paragraphs 8 prior to re-starting the equipment.
12. SHUT-DOWN & DISASSEMBLY
The equipment can be shut down at any time. Before the reservoir can be removed the
equipment in which the seal is installed must be de-pressurized.
For (re)-installation, removal and maintenance work, the complete reservoir system must
be depressurized (and drained if required).
Product may be released during removal of the reservoir. Safety measures and protective
equipment is required as per the plant’s safety regulations.
13. SPARE PARTS & REPAIRS
The reservoir system is designed to provide reliable operation under a wide range of
operating conditions. However, repairs will be necessary when components of the system
reach the end of their normal life expectancy or when the system has been operated
outside of its design capabilities.
All liabilities and warranties to EagleBurgmann for damage incurred through the use of
non-original replacement parts and accessories will be rendered null and void.
Please note that special manufacturing and delivery specifications exist for all parts of our
products manufactured or produced by ourselves and the replacement parts are always
offered in accordance with the latest technology and with the most current regulations and
laws.
The information and specifications presented in this Operating Manual are believed to be
accurate, but are supplied for information purposes only and should not be considered
certified or as a guarantee of satisfactory results by reliance thereon.
Nothing contained herein is to be construed as a warranty or guarantee, express or

implied, with respect to the product. Although EagleBurgmann can provide general
application guidelines, it cannot provide specific information for all possible applications.
The purchaser/user must therefore assume the ultimate responsibility for the proper
selection, installation, operation & maintenance of EagleBurgmann products.
EagleBurgmann reserves the right to carry out technical modifications, which might
become necessary to improve our products, but are not incorporated in this manual yet.
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 212 / 633
OPERATING MANUAL
EAGLE BURGMANN
SEAL SUPPLY SYSTEM
The instructions are intended for assembly, operating

and monitoring personnel, and should be kept
available on site.
PLEASE READ this manual carefully and follow the instructions it contains concerning:
Safety Installation Maintenance

Storage Start-up Repair
If any instructions are unclear, contact EagleBurgmann before using the system!
D R A
N
I 06-APR 16
- 2 0 213 / 633 Rev.0
Operating Manual
TEC-8933 Page 2
 SAFETY
Any person at the user's shop being involved in assembly, disassembly, start up, operation and
maintenance of the EagleBurgmann buffer/barrier/barrier pressure system must have read and understood
this Instruction Manual and in particular the safety notes. We recommend the user to have this confirmed
by the respective persons.
It is essential for the operational safety of the system how the buffer/barrier pressure system is integrated into
the overall system. This is the task of the trained personnel being responsible for the complete plant.
In general it is recommendable for the user to integrate this manual into the superior manual to achieve a
good clarity.
EagleBurgmann buffer/barrier/barrier pressure systems are manufactured on a high quality level and keep
a high working reliability. Yet, if they are not operated in accordance with their intended purpose or handled
inexpertly by untrained personnel they may cause risks.
Any operation mode that affects the operational safety of the system is not permitted.
EagleBurgmann buffer/barrier pressure systems must be operated, maintained or repaired by authorized,
trained and instructed personnel only.
Any work to be done on the system is only permitted when the system is neither operating nor pressurized.
The responsibilities for the respective jobs to be done have to be determined clearly and observed in order
to prevent unclear competencies from the point of security.
The local regulations as well as the rules for the prevention of accidents have to be observed.
If there is any possibility of exceeding the maximum admissible operating pressure due to incorrect
operation, a fault or on account of the process in which the system is used, suitable protection is to be
provided that conforms to the regulations applicable at the installation site.
Unauthorized modifications or alterations which affect the operational safety of the seal supply system are
not permitted.
 MANUFACTURER
EagleBurgmann Japan Co., Ltd..
Minato-ku, Tokyo
Japan 105-8587
Tel: +81-3-3432-0188
Fax: +81-3-3432-5448
 INCORRECT USAGE
This supply system is intended solely for use in the specified application. Any other or more extensive usage
will be regarded as incorrect usage and the manufacturer shall not be liable for any damage caused.
Any usage not conforming to the conditions stipulated under “OPERATING LIMITS” will be regarded as
incorrect usage.
Operation of the System under different conditions or at a different location must first be discussed with
EagleBurgmann to ensure that such a usage is safe.
D R A
N
I 06-APR 16
- 2 0 214 / 633 Rev.0
Operating Manual
TEC-8933 Page 3
 MATERIAL
The materials used to construct the system are varied to suit the application and are order-specific. They
may therefore differ from those shown in the drawing.
 DESCRIPTION
GENERALL
EagleBurgmann systems with supply fluid (buffer/barrier fluid) are used to supply (pressure / lubrication /
cooling) multiple mechanical seals in back-to-back / face-to-face or tandem arrangement.
The way in which the system is incorporated into the higher level system will largely determine whether it is
safe to operate. The technician with responsibility for the overall system is also responsible for matching the
refill unit to that system.
 STATE OF DELIVERY
Before delivery the tightness and function of the buffer/barrier pressure system were tested at
EagleBurgmann.
 STORAGE
The kind of packaging depends on the way of transportation. The warning signs and notes on the packing
must be observed.
EagleBurgmann supplies the supply system fully assembled. It is purged and depressurized before delivery.
If the unit is to be stored for a few weeks or months, it MUST be kept indoors in a dry place that is protected
against dust and the weather. Even when stored indoors, the supply units tanks should be covered with
tarpaulins to protect against dust.
EagleBurgmann will not accept liability for damage caused by improper storage.
D R A
N
I 06-APR 16
- 2 0 215 / 633 Rev.0
Operating Manual
TEC-8933 Page 4
 BEFORE INSTALLATION
Before installation, the supply system has to be checked for visible signs of damage to the equipment and
instruments.
 INSTALLATION
Have assembly drawing with flow diagram on hand during installation. Installation must be carried out by
appropriately trained personnel. The regulations applicable at the installation site, particularly the accident
prevention regulations, must be followed. This applies both to erection of the individual system components
and to installation of the pipes and power supply.
The supply system must be set up to allow easy access for operation, monitoring and maintenance.
Please note the following points when installing the pipes:
 Extreme cleanliness is to be observed when installing and working on the pipe systems. For example,
each completed, bent pipe section must be thoroughly cleaned inside, e.g. using compressed air and
petroleum ether. (!CAUTION – flammable!)
 Pipe sections should be as short as possible and provide optimum flow conditions.
 Fasten the pipes in regular distances (max. 2 m) with sound-proof cleats so that screw connections and
fittings are free from oscillations and other mechanical forces.
 Relative movements between the system and the seals (elongation, vibrations) have to be considered
when mounting the piping.
 Control devices have to be connected to suitable alarm devices by the user, observing the connecting
values (see equipment list). Further linking is possible but has to be defined in accordance with the
complete system only.
All connecting points shall be connected in accordance to the drawing.
 START-UP
The manufacturer's start-up instructions should be followed for non- EagleBurgmann equipment.
The system may be started when:
 The complete piping system has been installed.
 The electrical installation has been completed.
 SAFE OPERATION
It is essential for the operational safety of the system how the buffer/barrier supply system is integrated into
the overall system. The set-up between the buffer/barrier supply system and the overall system is the task
of the trained personnel being responsible for the complete plant.
Recommendation:
 Periodic function check of the monitoring devices, compliance with the service notes and documentation
of the operations
 If the operation limit values and the instructions given in this manual are observed a trouble-free
operation of the buffer/barrier supply system can be expected.
 Open position of the shut-off valve in the mechanical seal circuit, if present.
D R A
N
I 06-APR 16
- 2 0 216 / 633 Rev.0
Operating Manual
TEC-8933 Page 5
 DISASSEMBLY
The system may only be assembled, serviced and disassembled by trained personnel
The whole seal system must be isolated and depressurized before disassembly work.
Local regulations as well as the rules for the prevention of accidents have to be observed.
Notice the following information for removing the system / pipes:
 Shut off the system and disconnect the electric wiring.
 If the buffer/barrier fluid cooled down, depressurize the system.
 Equipment disassembly can be done once the system depressurized.
 FAULTS
Do not switch off the system!
Identify and document the type of fault.
If there is a malfunction which you cannot correct on your own or if the cause of malfunction is not clearly
recognizable please immediately contact the nearest EagleBurgmann-agency, EagleBurgmann-service
centre or the EagleBurgmann-headquarters.
 MAINTENANCE
The system is maintenance-free. The following items must be regularly checked to ensure that the system
operates correctly: Pressure and temperature. The instructions for the mechanical seal should also be
followed.
 Working at Supply Systems is basically only allowed if the machine is shut down and in pressure less
state.
 The manufacturer’s maintenance instructions should be followed for non-EagleBurgmann devices.
 Every six months, check the entire system for leaks, loose pipe fixings and other damage. Defects must
be rectified immediately.
 REPAIR
To ensure that the system remains safe to operate, the operator should ideally not carry out any repairs on
the supply system.
In an emergency, if the system has to be repaired on site, entire system components (e.g. measuring
devices) may be replaced by the operator's own trained personnel.
The manufacturer's repair instructions should be followed for non-EagleBurgmann equipment.
D R A
N
I 06-APR 16
- 2 0 217 / 633 Rev.0
Operating Manual
TEC-8933 Page 6
 SPARE PARTS
Always use EagleBurgmann original spare parts, otherwise:
 There is a risk that the system and the connected seal will malfunction, which may represent a hazard to
people and the environment.
 The EagleBurgmann warranty will be invalidated.
 AFTER-SALES SERVICE
The range of services offered by EagleBurgmann includes technical support after commissioning, in
addition to advice during the planning stages.
The EagleBurgmann company has a world-wide network of foreign subsidiaries, partners, contact offices
and service centres for all sealing problems.
A list of addresses is given in all EagleBurgmann Design Catalogues and other EagleBurgmann
publications.
 COPYRIGHT
The EagleBurgmann has the copyright in this document. Buyer, planer and user of the product are
authorized for use in connection with their own documentation.
We reserve the right to carry out technical modifications which might become necessary to improve our
products but are not mentioned in this manual yet.
D R A
N
I 06-APR 16
- 2 0 218 / 633 Rev.0
FLEXIBLE DISK COUPLING
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Daido Precision Industries Ltd.
EBARA CORPORATION
D R A
M10U
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 219 / 633
1
P.1
This manual details the alignment and assembly of type AX, A4, AB, A5 and A6 4-bolt
couplings. Reasonable care in initial assembly and alignment will assure couplings
operate at full capacity, compensate for misalignment, and provide unlimited service
life.
1. Coupling Alignment
(1) Inspect shafts and hub bores and ensure they are free from burrs or defects.
(2) Check for proper fit of keys to shafts and hubs.
(3) After hubs are bored for interference fit, they should be heated in oil at 90-120 C
and then quickly installed on the shaft. Do not spot heat as this may cause
distortion.
CAUTION : GLOVES SHOULD BE WORN DURING THIS INSTALLATION

PROCEDURE.
(4) Insert the shaft in the hub so that shaft end is aligned with the end plane of the
hub. (Fig. 1)
Fig. 1
(5) Distance between Shaft Ends

Driver and equipment must be installed in the proper position. The distance
between flanges should be set within the allowable range of ±0.5 mm.
(6) Angular Misalignment (Fig. 2)
(a) Install a dial gauge on one hub as shown in Fig. 2, rotate the same hub, note
the minimum indication of the dial gauge, and set gauge to zero.
(b) Rotate the coupling on which the dial gauge is installed, 360 and adjust
position of the connected equipment until the indicator reading is within 0.10
mm.
EBARA CORPORATION
M10U
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 220 / 633
2
P.2
Fig. 2
(7) Parallel Misalignment (Fig. 3)
(a) Install the dial gauge on the driving side hub and check for parallel misalignment
(Fig. 3). Rotate the coupling on which the dial gauge is installed, 360 and
adjust height of the connected equipment until the indicator reading is within 0.1
mm.
(b) Recheck angular misalignment and paralell misalignment and ensure they does
not exceed the allowable misalignment.
(c) Peripheral section of dial gauge may show abnormal deflection at throw-hole
area of hub. This is due to flaring of during working. Avoid this area when
reading gauge.
Fig. 3
2. Assembly
Flexible disk couplings are assembled by various methods (the relation between the
assembly location of bolts and reamer holes). Each coupling is designed to be free of
defects from the viewpoint of strength and performance irrespective of whether bolts are
EBARA CORPORATION
M10U
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 221 / 633
3
P.3
tightened from the hub or spacer side. However, two bolts are tightened from both the
hub and spacer side, respectively on the individual flange planes in principle. Be careful
not to force these bolts from the spacer side since bolts cannot be inserted easily from
the spacer side. Also the coupling flanges cannot always be disassembled due to
interference of bolts, if the inter-axis size (D) is smaller than specified in Table1. In such
case, insert all bolts from the hub side while observing the following assembly procedure.
CAUTION : AS THESE COUPLINGS USE NYLON NUTS WHICH CANNOT BE

USED FOR DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY MORE THAN 10 TIMES, REPLACE
NUTS AS REQUIRED.
2.1 When the inter-shaft size is larger than specified in Table 1;

Insert two bolts through relief holes on both hub and spacer sides, respectively.
Table 1
Size D (mm) Size D (mm)
05 65 30 127
10 70 35 142
15 86 40 162
20 95 45 176
25 113 50 199
55 246
(1) Install thick washer (2) on each bolt with its curved surface facing the thread so
that the curved surface touches the element to be assembled later.
(2) Assemble the element by inserting two bolts into the relief holes of hub A. Install
thin washer (1) on each of these bolts with is curved surface touching the element,
and install the washer on the bolt threads slightly protruding from the element
surface. (Fig. 4)
Hub A
Element
Bolt
Washer (2)
Washer (1)
Fig. 4
EBARA CORPORATION
M10U
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 222 / 633
4
P.4
(3) Insert bolts into the relief holes of hub B, and assemble the element by the same
procedure as described in (2), and then, install washers (1).
(4) Install the spacer between hubs A and B. (Fig. 5)
A B
Spacer
Fig. 5
(5) Insert the assembled bolts in hubs A and B into the spacer side reamer holes after
aligning them with each other.
(6) Install nuts on each bolt, and tighten them lightly. (Fig. 6)
Hub A Spacer
Element
Bolt Nylon nut
Washer (2) Washer (1)
Fig. 6
Now, hubs A, B are temporarily assembled on the same shaft together with the spacer.
(7) Insert bolts from the relief holes on the spacer side with the washers (2) previously
installed, install thin washer (1) on each between the element and hub with its
curved surface touching the element after these bolts have passed through the
element. (Fig. 7)
EBARA CORPORATION
M10U
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 223 / 633
5
P.5
Hub A Spacer
Element
Nylon nut Bolt
Washer (1) Washer

(2)
Fig. 7
(8) Install nuts from the hub side, and tighten them lightly.
(9) After the above assembly, tighten the installed bolts at diagonal positions evenly
and alternately. Ensure that the tightening torque of all bolts meets the values
specified in Table 2. Now, assembly is completed.
CAUTION : CHECK AND READJUST THE DECLINATION, MISALIGNMENT, AND

TIGHTENING TORQUE OF COUPLING BOLTS, ONE OR TWO HOURS AFTER
STARTING OPERATION TO PROLONG COUPLING LIFE.
Table 2
Size 05 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
Width across flats
10 10 13 13 17 19 19 24 24 27 36
of bolt head (mm)
Fastening torque
9 9 22 22 41 72 72 160 160 220 570
(N・m)
2.2 When the inter-shaft size D is smaller than specified in Table 1;

Insert all bolts from the hub side.
(1) Insert two bolts into hub A reamer holes. Install thin washer (1) on each bolt with
its curved surface facing the threads so that the curved surface touches the
element to be assembled later, and then, assemble the element. It is
recommended to install each bolt into the element while turning it, and the bolt can
be inserted correctly along its threads. Push the bolts through the hub until the
threads slightly protrude from the element surface. (Fig. 8)
EBARA CORPORATION
M10U
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 224 / 633
6
P.6
Element
Hub A
Bolt
Washer (1)
Fig. 8
(2) Insert each bolt into hub B reamer hole, and assemble thin washer (1) and
element in the same way as described in (1).
(3) Install the spacer between hubs A and B. (Fig. 9)
Hub
Element
A B
Spacer
Fig. 9
(4) After aligning the bolts assembled on hub A with the relief holes of the spacer,
insert bolts toward the spacer side.
(5) Install thick washer (2) on each hub A bolt from the spacer side with its curved
surface touching the element, and tighten it lightly with the nut.
(Fig. 10)
(6) Insert the bolts assembled on hub B into the relief holes of the spacer in the same
way as described in (4).
(7) Install thick washer (2) from the spacer side onto each of hub B bolts, and install
nuts in the same way as described in (5).
EBARA CORPORATION
M10U
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 225 / 633
7
P.7
HubA Spacer
Element
Bolt Nylon nut
Washer (1)
Washer (2)
Fig. 10
Now, hubs A and B are temporarily assembled on the same shaft together with
the spacer.
(8) Install thick washer (2) on each of all residual bolts with its curved surface
touching the element, and insert the element from the relief hole of the hub.
(9) Install thin washer (1) between the element and the spacer with its curved surface
touching the element on each bolt. (Fig. 11)
HubA Spacer
Element
Bolt Nylon nut
Washer (2) Washer (1)
Fig. 11
(10) Install nuts from the spacer side, and tighten them lightly.
(11) After the above assembly, tighten the bolts installed at diagnonal positions evenly
and alternately. Ensure that the tightening torque of all bolts meets the values
specified in Table 2. Now, assembly is completed.
CAUTION : CHECK AND READJUST THE DECLINATION, MISALIGNMENT, AND

TIGHTENING TORQUE OF COUPLING BOLTS ONE OR TWO HOURS AFTER
STARTING OPERATION TO PROLONG COUPLING LIFE.
EBARA CORPORATION
M10U
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 226 / 633
Elliott YR Steam Turbines
Single Stage Turbine

Pre-Start Manual
February 2014
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 227 / 633
YR Steam Turbine – Pre-Start Manual
FOREWARD
This manual has been prepared to provide YR Steam Turbine owners with installation guidelines
and pre-start checks. The information presented is applicable to the YR Single Stage Steam
Turbine models noted. Specific details required for installation, operation, and maintenance of
the equipment actually purchased are covered by certified drawings, instruction books and other
data.
Questions relative to this manual or equipment should be directed to the nearest Elliott Group
office listed at the end of this manual.
LIMITATIONS
It is to be noted that none of the drawing or printed matter contained in this manual in any way
adds to, detracts from, voids or alters any of the conditions of the contract. Such drawings and/or
printed materials are for descriptive purposed only and are note to be construed as determining
the scope of supply or the performance of the equipment. Please consult your contract to
determine these particulars.
Such drawings shall be deemed to be and remain Elliott’s proprietary property and reproduction,
distribution or disclosure of any part of the contents is expressly forbidden without written
consent.
NOTICE
The sections of this manual covering lifting, unpacking and storage of the YR Steam Turbine
should be thoroughly reviewed prior to receipt of the unit.
CUSTOMER TRAINING
Elliott Group service personnel are available for training of the turbine operators and maintenance
personnel. Packaged training programs consist of slides, cassettes and workbooks are also
available for purchase. Contact the nearest Elliott Group office listed in the end of this manual if
interested in additional details on these programs.
SAFTEY
It is assumed that your company will have established safety program based upon a thorough
analysis of industrial hazards. Before installing and operating or performing maintenance on the
equipment described in this manual, it is suggested that your again review this program to be
certain that it covers the hazards arising from high speed rotating machinery.
It is also important that due consideration be given to those hazards which arise from the
presence of electrical power, hot oil, high pressure and temperature steam, toxic gases and
flammable liquids and gases. Proper installation and care of protective guards, shutdown devices
and overpressure protection should also be considered essential parts of any safety program.
Also essential are special precautionary measures to prevent the possibility of applying power to
the machine at any time when maintenance work is in progress. The prevention of rotation due to
reverse flow in dynamic machinery should not be overlooked.
In general, you should be guided by all basic safety rules associated with the equipment and the
process.
D R A© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
http://www.elliott-turbo.com
February 2014
i
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 228 / 633
-WARNING-
THE ELLIOTT GROUP CANNOT ASSUME ANY
RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGES OR PERSONAL
INJURY RESULTING FROM OPERATION OF THIS
EQUIPMENT WITH SAFETY AND/OR SHUTDOWN
DEVICES BEING ISOLATED, DISABLED OR BY-
PASSED.
-WARNING-
IT IS EESENTIAL THAT UNITS EQUIPPED WITH A
CURRENT TRANSFORMER HAVE EXPERIENCED
PERSONNEL PERFORM ITS INSTALLATION AND
TESTING. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS CAN
DEVELOP A LETHAL VOLTAGE AND SELF
DESTRUCT IF THE SECONDARY IS OPEN WHEN
PRIMARY CURRENT IS PRESENT.
-WARNING-
THE TURBINE MUST NOT BE MODIFIED IN ANY WAY
WITHOUT ELLIOTT GROUP’S APPROVAL. THIS IS
TO ENSURE THAT THE SAFETY, RELIABILITY, AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE TURBINE AND
ASSOCIATED SYSTEMS ARE NOT COMPROMISED.
DOC000000049294
February 2014
ii
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 229 / 633
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1
Turbine Casing 1
Packing Casing and Carbon Rings 2
Sentinel Valve 2
Nozzle Ring and Reversing Blade Assembly 2
Bearing Housing and Supports 3
Governor System 3
Journal Bearings 4
Rotor Locating Bearings 4
Overspeed Trip System 5
Rotor 5
Steam Chest 6
SHIPPING PREPARATION AND STORAGE 6

Long Term Storage / Standby 6
LIFTING AND HANDLING 6
UNPACKING 7
INSTALLATION 7
Introduction 7
Foundation 9
Foundation Preparation 12
Chock Blocks 12
Grouting 16
Setting the Equipment on Foundation 16
PIPING - GENERAL 17
Turbine Piping Recommendations 17
Turbine Steam Supply 19
Turbine Atmospheric Relief Valves 19
Miscellaneous Piping Connections 20
LUBRICATION SYSTEM 24
Basic Oil Requirements 24
Care of Oil 24
Methods of Lubrication 24
Selecting Lubricating Oils 27
PREPARING FOR INITIAL OPERATION 30

Shaft Alignment 30
Steam Supply 43
Safety Precautions 43
Preparing the Turbine for Initial Start Up: Multi YR & Standard YR frames 44
Preparing the Turbine for Initial Start Up: PYR 46
Autostart Recommendations 48
DOC000000049294
February 2014
iii
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 230 / 633
COMMON AUXILLARIES 57
Solenoid Trip 57
Tachometers 58
Blanket 59
R4 Gear Assembly 60
Ring Oil Circulation Systems 61
ATTACHEMENT #1 - ELLIOTT PRE-START CHECKLIST 62

Turbine Inspection 62
A. Alignment and Support Structure 62
B. Piping 63
C. Lubrication Systems 65
D. Controls, Governors, Trip System 66
E. Instrumentation 68
F. Operations - General, No Load, Loaded Checks 68
G. Miscellaneous 71
ATTACHEMENT #2 - ELLIOTT TECHNICAL TRAINING INFORMATION 72

YR Turbine 72
Mulitstage Multivalve Steam Turbine 72
Centrifugal Compressor 73
Lube and Seal Systems 73
Customized On-Site Training 74
Course Information 75
ATTACHEMENT #3 - GLOBAL SERVICE FOR TURBOMACHINERY 76
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1 SINGLE STAGE TURBINE CROSS SECTION 1

FIGURE 2 TURBINE CASING 1
FIGURE 3a SENTINEL VALVE 2
FIGURE 3b SENTINEL VALVE 2
FIGURE 4a NOZZLE RING AND REVERSING BLADE ASSEMBLY 2
FIGURE 4b NOZZLE RING AND REVERSING BLADE ASS EMBLY 2
FIGURE 5a BEARING HOUSING AND SUPPORTS 3
FIGURE 5b BEARING HOUSING AND SUPPORTS 3
FIGURE 6 GOVERNOR SYSTEM AND LINAGE 3
FIGURE 7a JOURNAL BEARINGS 4
FIGURE 7b JOURNAL BEARINGS 4
FIGURE 8 ROTOR LOCATING BEARINGS 4
FIGURE 9 OVERSPEED TRIP SYSTEM 5
FIGURE 10 ROTOR 5
FIGURE 11a STEAM CHEST 6
FIGURE 11b STEAM CHEST 6
FIGURE 12 LIFTING THE TURBINE 7
FIGURE 13 TYPICAL BASEPLATE MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT 9
FIGURE 14 SUGGESTED ANCHOR BOLT ARRANGEMENT 11
DOC000000049294
February 2014
iv
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 231 / 633
FIGURE 15 TYPICAL SOLEPLATE MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT 11

FIGURE 16 TYPICAL BASEMOUNTING ARRANGEMENT 12
FIGURE 17 TYPICAL CHOCK BLOCK 13
FIGURE 18 PREFERRED LOCATION OF CHOCK BLOCKS 14
FIGURE 19 PREFERRED LOCATION OF CHOCK BLOCKS 14
FIGURE 20 ALTERNATE LOCATION OF CHOCK BLOCKS 15
FIGURE 21 TYPICAL CHOCK BLOCK ARRANGEMENT 15
FIGURE 22 SUGGESTED STEAM PIPING ARRANGEMENT 19
FIGURE 23 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING CONNECTIONS 21
FIGURE 24 SUGGESTED PIPING ARRANGEMENT FOR WATER COOLED
BEARING HOUSINGS 21
FIGURE 25 SUGGESTED PIPING ARRANGEMENT FOR WATER COOLED
BEARING HOUSINGS AND END CAPS 22
FIGURE 26 SUGGESTED SEALING STEAM PIPING ARRANGEMENT
FOR CONDENSING TURBINES 22
FIGURE 27 RING OILED LUBRICATION 24
FIGURE 28 GLASS OILER 25
FIGURE 29 TYPES OF SHAFT MISALIGNMENT 30
FIGURE 30 AXIAL SEPARATION 31
FIGURE 31 AXIAL SEPARATION - DIAFRAM COUPLING 31
FIGURE 32 SHAFT ALIGNMENT MAP 33
FIGURE 33 PICTORIAL OF NOTE 3 ON ALIGNMENT MAP 34
FIGURE 34 PICTORIAL OF NOTE 4 ON ALIGNMENT MAP 34
FIGURE 35 MEASURING ANGULAR MISALIGNMENT 36
FIGURE 36 ANGULAR DISPLACEMTN 36
FIGURE 37 MEASURING PARALLEL OFFSET 37
FIGURE 38 REVERSE INDICATOR READING 38
FIGURE 39 TYPICAL DISPLACEMENT OF BENCHMARKS ON
FOUNDATION AND BEARING HOUSING 40
FIGURE 40 GRAPHICAL DETERMINATION OF SHAFT IN HOT
POSITION RELATIVE TO COLD POSITION 41
FIGURE 41 SOLENOID TRIP SYSTEM 48
FIGURE 42 SOLENOID TRIP SYSTEM AND PARTS LIST 48
FIGURE 43a DYNALCO SPD 100 TACHOMETER 49
FIGURE 43b TACHOMETER SWITCH POSITION 49
FIGURE 43c TACHOMETER - FRONT, TOP AND SIDE VIEWS 49
FIGURE 44 TURBINE BLANKET 50
FIGURE 45a ENCASED GEARS 51
FIGURE 45b ENCASED GEARS 51
FIGURE 46a LUBE SYSTEM - FRONT VIEW 52
FIGURE 46b LUBE SYSTEM 52
DOC000000049294
February 2014
v
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 232 / 633
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 OIL LEVEL RANGE, CAPACITIES 25

TABLE 2 GUIDELINES FOR SELECTING LUBRICATING OILS 26
TABLE 3 OPERATING LIMITS FOR TURBINES 27
TABLE 4 BEARING TEMPERATURE LIMITS 28
DOC000000049294
February 2014
vi
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 233 / 633
INTRODUCTION
This technical manual supplies information for the installation, operation, and maintenance for your Elliott
equipment. To avoid operational and maintenance difficulties, special attention should be given to the
precautionary instructions emphasized throughout the manual.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Elliott AYR, BYR, CYR, DYR, and BYRH Turbines are single stage steam turbines (Figure 1) controlled by
single steam admission valves. These turbines are used for numerous drive applications under various steam
conditions. Other than difference in physical size, CYR and DYR Turbines are similar in design and
construction. DYRM, and DYRN Turbines are identical to the DYR Turbine except for the location and size of
the turbine exhaust connection. The BYRH, BYRHH, CYRH and DYRH are of heavier construction with
more/different shaft seals to withstand the higher exhaust steam pressures and temperatures.
FIGURE 1
SINGLE STAGE TURBINE CROSS SECTION
TURBINE CASING
The horizontally split turbine casing (Figure 2) surrounds the rotating element of the turbine and supports the
stationary steam path parts. The steam end casing consists of the high-pressure steam ring and nozzle
chambers. The exhaust end casing contains the steam exhaust connection. The steam end casing and
exhaust end casings support the casing cover.
FIGURE 2 - TURBINE CASING
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 1
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 234 / 633
PACKING CASES AND CARBON RINGS

The turbines are furnished with two horizontally split packing cases. One packing case is bolted through a
vertical flange, to the steam end turbine casing and casing cover. The other packing case is similarly attached to
the exhaust end turbine casing and casing cover. The packing cases house the carbon rings, which seal the
casing and rotor shaft. These rings minimize steam leakage along the shaft when the turbine operates non-
condensing. Turbines operating condensing employ carbon rings, along with a sealing steam arrangement, to
prevent air leakage into the casing. The BYRHH turbine uses a labyrinth seal in combination with the carbon
rings and an intermediate leak-off port, which must be connected to a 75-to-125 psig (5.2 to 8.6 bar) header.
SENTINEL VALVE
This warning device, located on the top of the turbine casing, indicates excessive turbine casing pressure. In
the event the casing pressure exceeds a predetermined setting above the normal operating pressure, the valve
releases a small amount of visible steam to the atmosphere, causing a hissing sound. The sentinel valve,
shown in Figures 3a & 3b, does NOT serve as a relief valve. Full flow relief valves or other protective devices
are used to relieve the turbine of excessive casing pressure.
FIGURE 3a & 3b
SENTINEL VALVE
NOZZLE RING AND REVERSING BLADE ASSEMBLY

The nozzle ring is bolted to the inside of the steam end turbine casing. The nozzles, located in the nozzle ring
and shown in Figures 4a & 4b, direct the steam against the first rotating row of buckets. The reversing blade
assembly is positioned between the two rotating rows of buckets and is bolted to the nozzle ring. The reversing
blades reverse the steam flow as it exits the buckets on the first rotating row and directs the steam into the
buckets on the second rotating row.
NOZZLE
RING NOZZLE RING
REVERSING
BLADE
REVERSING
BLADE
FIGURE 4a & 4b - NOZZLE RING AND REVERSING BLADE ASSEMBLY
D R A© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 2
IN R- 16
2
06-A
0
P 235 / 633
BEARING HOUSINGS AND SUPPORTS

The steam end bearing housing (Figures 5a) is bolted and doweled to the steam end of the turbine casing. A
support, attached to the bottom of the steam end bearing housing, sustains the weight of the bearing housing
and allows for thermal growth of the casing. The bearing housing contains a journal bearing, rotor locating
bearing, two oil rings (if required), the over speed trip assembly, governor drive arrangement and a shaft sleeve
seal. The seal prevents oil leakage from the bearing housing, and restricts the entry of dust, dirt and moisture.
The exhaust end of the turbine is supported by the exhaust end-bearing pedestal, which is attached to the
turbine casing at the centerline. The bearing pedestal houses a journal bearing, two oil rings (if required) and
two shaft sleeve seals.
FIGURE 5a & 5b
STEAM END BEARING BEARING HOUSINGS AND SUPPORTS EXHAUST END
HOUSING BEARING HOUSING &
PEDESTAL
GOVERNOR SYSTEM
The turbines employ several types of governors to control the turbine speed. Figure 6, shows the the governer
(Mechanical T-Type) which positions the governor valve, via the governor linkage. The governor valve varies the
steam flow through the turbine, thereby matching the driven machine power and speed.
TG GOVERNOR
GOVERNOR LINKAGE
FIGURE 6
GOVERNOR SYSTEM
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 3
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 236 / 633
JOURNAL BEARINGS
Two journal bearings, shown in Figures 7a & 7b, radially position and support the rotor. One is located in the
steam end bearing housing, the other in the exhaust end-bearing pedestal. The bearings are Babbitt lined,
horizontally split, precision machined, steel sleeves. If tilt-pad journal bearings are utilized.
FIGURE 7a & 7b
JOURNAL BEARINGS
ROTOR LOCATING BEARINGS

The rotor locating bearing is mounted on the rotor shaft and positioned in the steam end bearing housing, shown
in Figure 8. The purpose of the locating bearing is to position the rotor axially within the turbine casing. Some
units utilize a double acting thrust bearing in place of the rotor locating bearing.
OIL RINGS
ROTOR LOCATING BEARING
ANTI-ROTATING TAB FIGURE 8

ROTOR LOCATING BEARING
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 4
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 237 / 633
OVERSPEED TRIP SYSTEM

The emergency over speed trip system (Figure 9) operates entirely separate from the governor system. The trip
system is designed to shut the turbine down at trip speed.
TRIP BODY
TRIP PLUNGER
FIGURE 9
ROTOR
Rotors, shown in Figure 10, used in YR Turbines are typically of the "built up" design whereby the disks are
keyed and shrunk on the rotor shaft. Two styles of disks are used on rotor assemblies; two separate straight-
sided disks, each having a row of, or one profile disk containing both rows of buckets. A shaft sleeve seal, rotor-
locating bearing (or thrust collar), over speed trip mechanism and the governor drive arrangement are mounted
on the steam end of the rotor shaft. The drive coupling and two shaft sleeve seals are mounted on the exhaust
end. Shrink rings are mounted outboard and between the disks on rotors equipped with straight disk
assemblies. All rotor assemblies are dynamically balanced to provide smooth operation.
FIGURE 10
ROTOR
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 5
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 238 / 633
STEAM CHEST
The steam chest (Figures 11a & 11b) is bolted to the steam end of the turbine casing. Steam flowing through
the steam inlet passes through a strainer in the steam chest, past the trip valve, then past the governor valve
and seat to the steam ring in the casing. In larger governor valves, part of the flow passes through the outer
seat and back through the hollow valve body providing reduced valve forces.
TRIP VALVE
INLET
FIGURE 11a & 11b GOVERNOR VALVE

STEAM CHEST
SHIPPING PREPARATION
The assembled turbine is mounted on a skid and covered with an open framework of light crating. The purpose
of the crating is to indicate the outside limits of the turbine, and to provide a means of visually identifying the
contents of the crate. The crating should not be regarded as protection against damage resulting from rough
handling. Internal surfaces and exterior unpainted machined surfaces of the turbine are coated with a rust
preventative compound. Turbines that are exported are boxed in containers having extra shoring and bracing.
The tops of the containers are waterproofed to provide additional protection against weather damage.
LONG TERM STORAGE

Rust preventative compound is applied to the turbine before shipment. This provides protection for up to 3
months outdoor storage, or six months indoor storage. The turbine should be stored indoors whenever
possible. The storage area should provide a clean dry environment, free from temperature extremes. The
turbine should be maintained in an approximate level position while in storage. The expected protection of the
rust preventative does not take into consideration extreme conditions resulting from outdoor storage. Storing
the turbine outdoors often subjects it to frequent temperature changes, excessive amounts of moisture and, in
some instances, salt laden air. All of these conditions reduce the effectiveness of the rust preventative and
should be avoided.
NOTES
Elliott recommends the application of Air or N2 purge to the packing case/bearing housing during long term
storage to prevent the ingress of moisture. During standby conditions, corrosion may occur if steam is permitted
to enter the turbine. The inlet and exhaust block valves must not leak steam into the turbine. Elliott recommends
the use of steam traps during standby as well as venting the casing to atmosphere or a vacuum source.
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 6
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 239 / 633
LIFTING AND HANDLING
-WARNING-
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO LIFT THE TURBINE BY THE EYEBOLT
LOCATED ON THE TURBINE CASING COVER. THIS EYEBOLT IS
FOR LIFTING ONLY THE CASING COVER. USING THIS EYEBOLT
TO LIFT THE ENTIRE WEIGHT OF THE TURBINE PRESENTS A
SERIOUS SAFETY HAZARD.
The turbine can be lifted safely by the use of slings under both ends of the turbine casing as shown in Figure 12.
When lifting the turbine, machined surfaces must be adequately protected and the turbine kept level. In general,
the lifting and handling of the turbine, and any associated equipment, must be planned around the facilities
available at the installation site. The exact procedures as to "How to handle the equipment” should be the
responsibility of those charged with the handling task. The estimated weight of the Turbine is provided on the
outline drawing that is located in the drawing section of this manual.
FIGURE 12
LIFTING THE TURBINE
UNPACKING
Remove the crating and check all items against the packing list. The lists that are provided are the main packing
list, a unit B/M, and a B/M of spares that have been shipped. The unit B/M and the spare parts B\M, which is
designated with an S at the end of the part number, are separated into columns. The first column is the Elliott
Group part number. The name of the part then follows in the second column. In the comments column the
location of the part is described. Ensure that parts are not missing or damaged. Handle all parts carefully. If
inspection shows that the turbine has been damaged during shipment, contact the carrier and file a damage
claim immediately. If any parts are missing from the shipment, contact the nearest Elliott Group Office.
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 7
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 240 / 633
INSTALLATION
INTRODUCTION
Proper installation of the machinery will contribute to long trouble-free operating life with minimum maintenance.
To aid in making a proper installation, this chapter describes a detailed procedure that has proven successful for
installing numerous turbines and the associated equipment. The following chapter contains the installation
methods recommended by Elliott Group. Other procedures do exist which can provide a satisfactory
installation; however, prior to using any of these alternate procedures, it is recommended that the purchaser
carefully investigate both the procedure and the ability of workers to produce a permanent and satisfactory
installation.
Elliott Service Representatives are experienced in installation procedures and can assist in providing a good
installation. The installation procedures contained in this section are as specific as possible but cannot possibly
cover all variations in field conditions. Therefore, the Elliott Service Representative may sometimes deviate
slightly from the published procedures. This is done to give
a better installation by using procedures to fit specific field and service conditions. Regardless of the procedure
used, first class materials and quality workmanship should be employed.
The procedure recommended by Elliott involves the following items:
1. Foundation
2. Chock Blocks
3. Grouting
4. Setting the equipment on foundation
5. Piping Recommendations
6. Shaft alignment
7. Coupling Installation
Included in this chapter is a detailed procedure for making "cold alignment" as well as methods for making
machine "hot alignment" checks. While many aspects of an installation are the responsibility of the purchaser or
his engineer, some suggestions are offered which may contribute to suitable installation. One such example is
whether to install the machine outdoors under only a roof, or in a completely enclosed building. While this class
of equipment can generally be installed outdoors, local conditions may suggest alternate arrangements.
Freezing or low ambient temperatures around machinery can create difficulties during start-ups and shutdowns;
for example, lubricating oil must be warm before starting equipment. Water and steam equipment must be
drained completely or heated during shutdown.
Alternately, in tropical areas, direct sun on one side of the foundation might cause expansions which, when
coupled with other factors in the system, could create unacceptable alignment.
In addition to operating considerations, maintenance and equipment inspections will be required - sometimes
scheduled and occasionally unscheduled. Regardless of which, weather conditions may not always cooperate.
Rain, snow, wind and low or high temperatures generally extend maintenance and inspection when workers are
exposed directly to these elements. In addition, quality of workmanship may be lowered to a point where work
accomplished is futile.
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 8
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 241 / 633
For inspection and maintenance, a permanent overhead crane or hoist is recommended. Casing top halves and
rotors have close clearances which must be protected, therefore, moves must be slow and positive. This is
seldom achievable with crawler or wheel-mounted cranes.
Installation of the machinery may be on either steel soleplates or a self-supporting fabricated steel baseplate.
The functional purpose of these intermediate supports is to provide a permanent mounting plate for the machine
feet that can be shimmed. When the foundation support is not continuous or is mounted directly on columns, a
self-supporting fabricated steel baseplate must be designed that will minimize deflections between contact
supports.
In most cases, soleplates usually provide support for only one machine or smaller equipment strings. A
baseplate is made to support larger equipment strings. Some baseplates are also designed to contain or
support lubrication and seal system piping and instrumentation in addition to the machinery. Baseplates with
the lubrication system built in may require less space and have lower installation cost, but are generally more
difficult to maintain.
Installations of a self-supporting baseplate on a reinforced concrete foundation should follow the

guidelines presented with only the sections indicated on the outline drawing left unsupported. When the
installation of a self-supporting baseplate is on structural steel or columns, care must be exercised to insure that
the mounting surfaces are machined level (from end to end and side to side there should be less that 0 , 6’
slope) and flat (each pad must be flat within .003” (.076mm)). Full
contact between the mounting surfaces is required without the use of step shimming. With this installation
arrangement, grouting is not used to fill in gaps, but other procedures presented in this chapter should be
followed. See Figure 13.
EQUIPMENT BASEPLATE
FOUNDATION BOLT
BASEPLATE PAD
SHIMS
STRUCTURE PAD
PLANT SUPPORTING STRUCTURE
FIGURE 13
TYPICAL BASEPLATE MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT ON STRUCTURAL STEEL
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 9
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 242 / 633
FOUNDATION
The principle function of the foundation is to provide a permanently rigid, non-warping support for the machinery.
In meeting these requirements, the foundation should:
hold machines in proper alignment under all operating conditions
support the machine's weight and load, and distribute it uniformly and evenly to the soil or main support
structure
maintain established equipment locations
minimize transmission of vibration to or from the machines.
While the responsibility for a successful foundation rests with the purchaser, the following suggestions are
offered for assistance and consideration:
1. The outline drawing provides equipment mounting surface areas, anchor bolt locations, main piping
connections, and other information necessary in designing a foundation.
2. A foundation of reinforced concrete should be of ample size and proportion for adequate support of the
machinery, as well as piping forces such as inlet and discharge piping.
3. Provision should be made in the foundation design for accessibility to all parts of the machine or its
auxiliaries during operation, inspection and maintenance.
4. The foundation should rest entirely on natural rock or entirely on solid earth. A foundation resting partly on
one or partly on another may warp due to settling of part of the foundation support. Distortion may also
occur due to unequal pressures created by differences in ground water level.
5. Foundations supported on pilings should have a rigid continuous cap over the pilings on which the
foundation rests.
6. Temperature surrounding the foundation should be uniform. Temperature differences between the top
slab and mat, for instance, can create substantial bending stresses in columns. Care must be taken to
reduce thermal distortion from radiation or uneven heating and cooling. Direct sunlight on outdoor tropical
installations is to be avoided. Steam lines passing close to the foundation should also be avoided; but
when unavoidable, the lines should be insulated and the foundation shielded.
7. Foundation should be isolated from all other structures and arranged so that outside vibrations are not
transmitted to it. Where foundations must be supported by floor beams, a vibration dampening material
should be interposed between the beams and the foundation.
8. Design of foundation structure should avoid resonant frequencies of operating speed, 40% to 50% of
operating speed, rotor critical speeds, and two times operating speeds.
9. It is recommended that concrete foundations be allowed to cure for approximately 28 days before loading.
This will allow for development of strength and reduction in shrinkage rate. Curing procedure should be in
accordance with American Concrete Institute recommendations.
10. Recommended size of foundation anchor bolts and projection above foundation is shown on the outline
drawing. Suggested installation of the anchor bolt is as shown in Figure 14. Use of a pipe sleeve around
anchor bolt allows for some shifting of the anchor bolt if found necessary during installation of equipment.
It allows for increased stretch length of anchor bolts.
11. When establishing the top elevation for the foundation, allow approximately 0.5 inch (12 mm) for removal
of top crust of concrete by chipping. Reinforcing rods, ties, or steel members should be sufficiently below
the surface to permit chipping away of approximately 1.00 inch (25 mm) of concrete without making
contact. A minimum space of 1.00 inch (25 mm) should be provided between foundation and chock block
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 10
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 243 / 633
to provide adequate room for insertion of grout. The maximum distance between the foundation and
soleplate or baseplate should not exceed 4.00 inches (100 mm).
Figure 15 is a cross-sectional view showing the location of a soleplate with chock blocks, chock block grout and
final grout. Figure 16 is similar but shows the location of a baseplate with chock blocks, chock block grout and
final grout.
BASEPLATE BOXBEAM CHIPPED HALF OF

ROUGH FOUNDATION
0.50 IN. (12 mm) + 1.5 D FINAL GROUT

4.00 IN. (100 mm) MAX. (DO NOT POUR UNTIL FINAL
BETWEEN BOTTOM OF ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENTS
BASEPLATE AND FOUNDATION HAVE BEEN MADE)
1.00 IN. (25 mm) MIN.

BETWEEN CHOCK BLOCK AND
9 x D MIN.
TOP OF ROUGH FOUNDATION
2 x D MIN.
D
CHOCK BLOCK 2 x D RADIUS
PIPE SLEEVE
5 x D MIN.
CONCRETE
FOUNDATION
7 x D MIN. REINFORCING ROD

(PLACE SUFFICIENTLY
BELOW FOUNDATION SURFACE
ANCHOR BOLT TO PERMIT NECESSARY CHIPPING)
FIGURE 14
SUGGESTED ANCHOR BOLT ARRANGEMENT
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 11
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 244 / 633
FOUNDATION BOLT
EQUIPMENT SOLEPLATE
PIPE SLEEVE
SHIMS
CHOCK BLOCK HOLD DOWN

SCREW
ROUGH
FOUNDATION
SURFACE
CHOCK BLOCK GROUT

LEVELING SCREWS
FIGURE 15
TYPICAL SOLEPLATE MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
FOUNDATION PREPARATION
When the foundation is constructed of reinforced concrete, it is not practical to pour the concrete block with the
necessary precision to permit setting the machinery directly onto the block. Therefore, the soleplate or baseplate
is set with a void between it and the foundation. After the soleplate or baseplate is positioned, machinery placed
and cold alignment check made, the soleplate or baseplate is cemented or grouted to the foundation. This
procedure essentially creates one continuous support for the machinery.
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 12
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 245 / 633
FOUNDATION BOLT
BASEPLATE PAD
PIPE SLEEVE
SHIMS
HOLD DOWN
CHOCK BLOCK SCREW
ROUGH
FOUNDATION
SURFACE
CHOCK BLOCK GROUT

LEVELING SCREWS
FIGURE 16
TYPICAL BASEPLATE MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
In order to obtain good bonding surfaces for the grout, all defective concrete, laitance, dirt, oil, wax, grease and
loose material must be removed from the mating surfaces. This can best be accomplished by chipping, bush
hammering or by other means until sound, clean surfaces are obtained. Removal of approximately 0.5 inch (12
mm) of the top concrete surface should provide a strong, laitance-free surface for bonding and anchoring of the
grout.
CHOCK BLOCKS
In this manual, the term "chock block" is used to describe steel or grout blocks that serve to level and support
the soleplate or baseplate prior to full grouting. The size of a steel chock block may vary, but the two sizes
shown in Figure 17 will generally satisfy most all conditions. When steel chock blocks are furnished by Elliott
Group, the blocks will conform to the information provided in Figure 17 or when desired this figure can be used
to make chock blocks. To provide for ease of installation and leveling, four jackscrews are furnished in the
chock block. A screw anchor in the center of the block is used to anchor the chock block securely until grouting
in of the blocks.
Chock Block
1. Material carbon steel plate
2. Machine both top and bottom flat
3. Break all corners and chamfer all holes
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 13
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 246 / 633
1.0 in.
25 mm 0.5 in.
13 mm
4.00 in.
8.00 in. OR 12.00 in. 101 mm
203 mm OR 305 mm
0.75 in.
19 mm
4 - SET SCREWS
1/2" - 13 x 1-1/2" LONG
OVAL POINT OR EQUIVALENT
MACHINE SCREW
1/4" - 20 x 3" LONG
FLAT HEAD OR EQUIVALENT
SCREW ANCHOR SHIELD TO
MATCH MACHINE SCREW
FIGURE 17
TYPICAL CHOCK BLOCK
Use of chock blocks allows the installation workmen to easily make a change in elevation at a soleplate or
baseplate support pad. The chock blocks also distribute the machinery weight and hold down nut force so that
deflections of the soleplate or baseplate due to these forces are minimized. With chock blocks, the soleplate or
baseplate can be easily shifted horizontally without disturbing established elevations.
For maximum effectiveness, two chock blocks should be positioned at each foundation anchor bolt as shown in
Figure 18. Machines mounted on baseplates generally have the foundation anchor bolts spread out and close
to only one edge; therefore, placement of chock blocks can usually be accomplished as shown in Figure 18.
For machines mounted on soleplates, the number of foundation anchor bolts increases while available surface
area decreases, therefore making effective placement of chock blocks more difficult.
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 14
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 247 / 633
ANCHOR BOLT
CHOCK BLOCK
BASEPLATE OR
APPROXIMATELY 4.00" (100 mm) SOLEPLATE
FIGURE 18
PREFERRED LOCATION OF CHOCK BLOCKS
Figure 19 shows a preferred arrangement when space is available, while Figure 20 illustrates an alternate
arrangement that may be used. The arrangement used should provide maximum support and minimize
deflection or warping to the soleplate or baseplate during installation work.
36.00 in. (900 mm)
12.00 in
(300 mm)
CHOCK BLOCKS
FIGURE 19
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 15
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 248 / 633
20.00 in (500 mm)
9.00 in
(320 mm)
TWO CHOCK BLOCKS
FIGURE 20
ALTERNATE LOCATION OF CHOCK BLOCKS
Figure 21 illustrates a typical arrangement with chock blocks positioned on either side of the foundation anchor
bolt. As described earlier, the foundation surface must be prepared by chipping or other means prior to setting
the chock blocks. The chock block surfaces, where a bond with the grout is desired, must also be cleaned prior
to setting. Surfaces must be free of oil, dirt and oxidation.
If the chock blocks have been coated with a catalyzed epoxy primer, the surface coating should not be removed
but surfaces should be cleaned with solvent to remove any oil or dirt prior to setting.
Foundation anchor bolt Obtain this dimension

Temporary plug from the certified
Seal outline drawing
Chock block
Leveling screws
Chock block Chipped foundation

grout surface
Form Seal
1.00 in (25mm) min.
Screw anchor
Hold down screw
Reinforcement rods
FIGURE 21
TYPICAL CHOCK BLOCK ARRANGEMENT
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 16
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 249 / 633
The chock block surfaces should be sandblasted if coated with rust or some other surface coating.
Sandblasting is best, but a disk grinder or other mechanical method can be used. If chock blocks
will be immediately grouted after setting, no further surface treatment is required. A clean, sandblasted surface
will provide a good bonding surface.
If grouting in of the chock blocks will be delayed after cleaning, the cleaned surfaces should be coated with an
epoxy primer or surface coating recommended by grout supplier.
Regardless of the method used, shimming should be used between the chock blocks and soleplate or baseplate
to correct any elevation variations required.
NOTE
Before making a check of chock block level and elevation, be sure anchor
screw is tight and all four leveling screws are making contact with the
foundation.
GROUTING
The procedure to be followed for grouting in of chock blocks, soleplates or baseplates is the same except for
quantity of grout placed. Elliott recommends that the grout used be a good quality epoxy grout system from a
reliable manufacturer of heavy machinery grouts. Epoxy grouts consist of an epoxy resin, hardener and graded
silica aggregate. The resin and hardener serve as the adhesive while the aggregate serves as a filler to reduce
cost, improve thermal expansion compatibility and absorb heat released by curing. With proper application, an
epoxy grout should provide a permanent, reliable installation. Use of sand-cement grout or sand-cement grout
with various additives may also provide an adequate installation, however both are generally lower in strength,
have more tendencies to shrink unevenly and are generally more susceptible to chemical attack and
deterioration by oils.
The prime purpose of grouting is to:

Fill all voids between the foundation and the soleplate or baseplate.
Provide a permanent bond between the foundation and the soleplate or baseplate.
To assist the foundation anchor bolts in preventing lateral movement.
Provide a solid, level base to which the machine can be anchored by the foundation anchor bolts to
prevent vertical movement.
Make the soleplate or baseplate more or less an integral part of the concrete foundation.
As anchor bolts are designed for hold down purposes, it is desirable to provide for some stretching of the anchor
bolt between the bottom of the sleeve and the bottom of the nut. Therefore, it is recommended that the sleeve
be filled with a pliable material such as silicone rubber, prior to final grouting.
SETTING THE EQUIPMENT ON FOUNDATION

Once the chock block grout has cured sufficiently to withstand static load, installation of the equipment on the
foundation may proceed.
If the soleplates or baseplates have been coated with a catalyzed primer, the surface coating should not be
removed but only the oil and dirt removed with solvent. If the surfaces that will come in contact with the grout
are coated with some other material or rust, the surfaces should be sandblasted. While sandblasting is best, a
disk grinder or some other mechanical method may be used. The cleaned surface should be coated with epoxy
primer or surface coating recommended by the grout supplier.
Prior to placing the soleplate or baseplate on the chock blocks, clean chock block contact surfaces and install
approximately 0.125 inch (3.0 mm) thick shim pack having an assortment of shim thicknesses on each chock
block. Shim pack should be full size, clean, smooth and rust free. This will provide a means of lowering any
portion of the machine or baseplate that requires adjustment during leveling.
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 17
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 250 / 633
Set the baseplate or soleplates on the shimmed chock blocks and tighten down all the foundation bolts. Check
for level and make necessary adjustments by adding or removing shims. Normally, it is best to start at the
middle and work towards the ends. All soleplate or baseplate leveling should be done using the machined
support foot surfaces.
NOTE
Shims and contact surfaces should be kept smooth, free of burrs and clean to
prevent erroneous alignment readings.
Check that coupling hubs have been mounted on their respective shaft ends before setting machinery on
soleplate or baseplate. If not, refer to coupling installation procedure in this chapter and the coupling
manufacturer's literature.
PIPING - GENERAL
TURBINE PIPING RECOMMENDATIONS

No part of the turbine installation is more important for successful operation than well-designed and properly
installed piping. There are two definite objectives for good piping:
1. To prevent the heated piping from imposing strains on the turbine casing and, thus, affecting the
alignment.
2. To connect and drain the turbine inlet and exhaust piping so that dry steam is furnished to the turbine and
that water accumulation in these lines is prevented.
A main steam isolation valve is recommended in the steam piping, preferably at a convenient accessible
location in the turbine room, between the steam header and the turbine inlet, to allow working on the turbine
without shutting down the boiler.
The turbine casing must be protected from piping weight and piping expansion strains. The weight of piping
should be carried by suitable supports. Expansion joints with limit rods or piping bends should be used adjacent
to the turbine flanges. Connections between the piping flanges and turbine flanges are made without forcing the
pipeline in any direction in order to make a satisfactory joint. Connections may be considered satisfactory if the
connecting pipe lines, when heated to operating temperature, do not shift out of line with the turbine flanges
when the bolting is withdrawn. Refer to NEMA standards for maximum forces and moments allowable. Before
piping is connected to turbine, mount at least two indicators from one coupling hub to the other coupling hub--
one to measure any vertical movement, the other to measure any horizontal movement. Then connect piping to
turbine. If movement shown on any indicator exceeds 0.002" (0.05 mm) loosen piping and re-fabricate, realign
or adjust anchors as required.
All steam piping between the turbine and boiler or steam header must be adequately "blown down" to remove
welding beads, scale, dirt, etc. During blow down, the piping should be disconnected and directed away from
the turbine. Blow down should be at maximum design turbine throttle flow
to obtain design steam temperature and velocity. The piping should be blown down several times, until a
polished metal plate held in the stream indicates the absence of foreign material.
If supplied, the trip and throttle valve always contain a permanent screen to guard against the ingestion of large
loose particles. In addition, many valves will also have a temporary screen installed around the permanent one.
The temporary screen should be removed after approximately one month of operation and should never be left
in longer than six months.
Note
Strainers do not take the place of a properly setup and conducted blow down.
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 18
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 251 / 633
TURBINE STEAM SUPPLY

Steam should at all times be free from moisture. A receiver type separator with ample drains should be
provided ahead of the stop valve to prevent slugs of water from entering the turbine. When a separator is not
provided, a blowoff valve or continuous drain should be connected to the lowest point of the steam inlet piping.
A strainer should be installed in the steam supply piping for protection against large particles of scale, welding
beads, etc. A strainer does not guard against abrasive matter, boiler compound or acid or alkaline substances,
which may be carried over in the steam. These substances will corrode, erode, or form deposits on the steam
parts, reducing efficiency and power. It is imperative that feed water treatment and boiler operation be carefully
controlled to insure a supply of clean steam at all times.
TURBINE ATMOSPHERIC RELIEF VALVES

An atmospheric relief valve must be installed between the turbine exhaust flange and the first exhaust line
steam isolation valve (See Figure 22) or check valve. The purpose of this relief valve is to protect the turbine
casing from excessive exhaust pressure or failure of exhaust valve. The relief valve must be of ample size to
pass the maximum quantity of steam flowing through the turbine without allowing the turbine casing pressure to
exceed the maximum designed pressure shown on the turbine nameplate. It is the user's responsibility to install
the relief valve in the piping. Failure to install relief valve may violate local or national codes and must be
approved by an officer of the company.
Condensing Turbines
The atmospheric relief valve should be sized so that it is capable of passing all of the steam which may reach
the exhaust with the pressure rising to a value not greater than 10 pounds per square inch gage. The relief
valve should be installed between the turbine exhaust flange and any shutoff valve. (Usually on the condenser
shell for direct connected condenser.)
Non-condensing Turbines
A relief valve should be installed between the turbine exhaust connection and the first steam isolation valve.
The valve should be designed for full relief of the maximum steam flow through the turbine with a pressure and
flow rating as shown on the turbine outline drawing located in Chapter 10 of this manual.
The sentinel valve located on the turbine casing cover, does not serve as a relief valve. The sentinel valve will
not pass sufficient steam to relieve the turbine casing of excessive exhaust pressure. The relief valve should be
set to open at the sentinel valve setting to give a visual or audible indication when the relief valve is starting to lift
and be fully open with an additional 10 psig or 10% whichever is greater.
If a high back pressure trip is furnished, the relief valve pressure should be raised 5 psig (.345 bar) and the high
steam pressure trip should be set at the "start to open" pressure.
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 19
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 252 / 633
LOOP IN STEAM PIPE

ABSORBS EXPANSION
AND RELIEVES TURBINE
OF STRESSES
Y STEA M
DR
SLOPE TOWARD
HEADER
STEAM
HEADER
DRAIN
EXHAUST STEAM ISOLATION DRAIN
VALVE
INLET STEAM
ISOLATION
VALVE
ATMOSPHERIC
RELIEF VALVE
BYPASS VALVE
(Mandatory for Turbine-
Generators)
SPRING SUPPORT
RELIEVES CASING
OF STRESSES
SPRING SUPPORT DRAIN
RELIEVES CASING
OF STRESSES
FIGURE 22
SUGGESTED STEAM PIPING ARRANGEMENT
MISCELLANEOUS PIPING CONNECTIONS

Considerable attention should be given to the installation of miscellaneous piping. Poorly planned and installed
piping may obscure drain line functions and lead to error when opening or closing drain lines during operation.
In addition, poorly installed piping will detract from the appearance of the installation. All drain and leakoff lines
should be installed in a neat and orderly manner. They should be grouped and brought to an open collector box
and, from there, piped to a common sump or sewer. These piping runs should also be adequately supported to
reduce strain. All valves should be conveniently grouped as close as possible to the collector box and all lines
should be tagged for identification. Drain lines connected through valves must have the valves tightly closed
during operation. On condensing units, these valves must not be opened unless the turbine casing is no longer
under vacuum. Leakoffs, connected without valves must be clean and piped to an open drain.
Turbine-generators will require precise speed control at no load, which may be difficult using only the governor
valve with full steam pressure. Therefore, an inlet steam isolation valve by-pass line and valve should be
included in the steam inlet piping system in order to reduce steam pressure and increase governor valve stroke
during start up.
NOTE
Turbine-generator installations must have an inlet steam isolation valve by-
pass line. For synchronous generator applications, a needle valve should be
used in the bypass line for startup control.
Refer to certified outline and connection drawings for the specific sizes of all connections and for their exact
locations. The pipe size must be the same as or larger than connecting sizes. All connections are brought
outside the jacket when the turbine is insulated and jacketed.
NOTE
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 20
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 253 / 633
All drains and leakoffs should be run as separate lines to an open collector
box.
NOTE
All drains and leakoffs must have sufficient flexibility to allow for thermal growth
of the turbine without excess strains.
The following identifies the most common miscellaneous piping connections that may be furnished and explains
their individual functions (Refer to figure 23). Refer to the certified outline and purchaser’s connection drawing
to verify the connection required.
1. Casing Drain (M): Connect through a suitable valve to an open drain. Open before starting the turbine;
close when water no longer emerges from the drain. Open when the turbine is shut down and the
exhaust valve is closed. On condensing turbines, do not open this valve while the turbine is under
vacuum.
2. Steam Chest Drains [M4, M5, and M1 (BYRH, HH only)]: Connect through high pressure piping and
suitable valves to an open drain. Open before starting the turbine to drain water from the steam chest.
Close when water ceases to flow from the drain lines. Open when the turbine is shut down. On
condensing turbines, do not open this valve while the turbine is under vacuum.
3. Shaft Packing Case Leakoff (L3): Connect to an open drain without a valve. Connect to a vacuum
source when applicable.
4. Trip Valve Stem Leakoff (L4): Connect to an open drain without a valve.
5. Governor Valve Stem Leakoff (L5): Connect to an open drain without a valve.
6. Cooling Water Connections to Bearing Housings (N5, N6, N9 and N10): These connections are located
on the side of the turbine bearing housings. See Figure 25. Connect to a cooling water supply, which
does not exceed 90oF (32oC). Pipe the cooling water through a stop cock and hand valve into N5, out
of N6, into N9, out of N10 through a one-foot head loop to an open drain. Adjust the stop cock to supply
water at a rate of 2 gpm (7.5 l/min.) when the hand valve is fully open. See Figure 25 for piping
arrangement of water cooled bearing housings and caps. These connections are not used on pressure
lubricated turbines.
NOTE
Cooling Water Pressure must not exceed 100 PSIG (6.89 BarG)
7. Shaft Packing Case Steam Piping (T1): Furnished only when the turbine is operated condensing. Connect
through a valve to a pressurized saturated steam supply. Admit steam to packing cases until a slight
amount of steam leaks out of L3. A typical arrangement is shown in Figure 26.
8. Nozzle ring gage connection (S1): A shut-off valve and gage arrangement may be installed in this
connection. The gage can be used for indicating the inlet steam pressure drop across the steam chest.
9. Intermediate leakoff (L3-1) for BYRHH only: Connect to a 75 to 125 psig (5.1 to 8.6 bar) header. The
leakoff line should have a gage located near each packing case. A valve should be used to isolate the
packing cases from the header.
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 21
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 254 / 633
N-8
N-7
N-6 N-11
N-12
N-5
L-4
N-10
N-9
M-5 S-1
M-4 L-5 M-1
L-3 T-1 M
* L3 LEAK OFF FROM SHAFT SEALING GLANDS N7 COOLING WATER TO STEAM END BEARING CAP
* L4 TRIP VALVE STEM LEAK-OFF N8 COOLING WATER FROM STEAM END BEARING CAP
* L5 GOVERNOR VALVE STEM LEAK-OFF N9 COOLING WATER TO EXHAUST END BEARING PEDESTAL
**M TURBINE CASING DRAIN N10 COOLING WATER FROM EXHAUST END BEARING PEDESTAL
**M1 HIGH PRESSURE STEAM RING DRAIN (BYRH, HH Only) N11 COOLING WATER TO EXHAUST END BEARING CAP
**M4 STEAM CHEST DRAIN (BELOW SEAT) N12 COOLING WATER FROM EXHAUST END BEARING CAP
**M5 STEAM CHEST DRAIN (ABOVE SEAT) S1 NOZZLE RING GAGE CONNECTION
N5 COOLING WATER TO STEAM END BEARING HOUSING T1 SEALING STEAM TO SHAFT PACKING CASE
N6 COOLING WATER FROM STEAM END BEARING HOUSING
* ROUTE TO OPEN DRAIN NO VALVE.
** ROUTE TO OPEN DRAIN WITH VALVE.
FIGURE 23
1ft.(30cm)
HEADLOOP
N10 N6
CONTROL VALVE
N9 N5
STOP
COCK
COOLING
OPEN
DRAIN WATER
FIGURE 24
SUGGESTED PIPING ARRANGEMENT FOR WATER COOLED BEARING HOUSINGS
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 22
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 255 / 633
1ft.(30cm) 1ft.(30cm)
HEADLOOP HEADLOOP
N12 N11 N7 N8
N10 N6
CONTROL VALVES
N9 N5
STOP COCK
OPEN
OPEN
COOLING DRAIN
DRAIN
WATER
FIGURE 25
SUGGESTED PIPING ARRANGEMENT FOR WATER COOLED BEARING HOUSINGS AND CAPS
EXHAUST END STEAM END

SEALING GLAND SEALING GLAND
TO DRAIN L3 TO DRAIN L3
T1
RELIEF VALVE
20 psig (1.35bar)
PRESSURE GAUGE
SHUT-OFF
VALVE
SHUT-OFF
VALVE
SEALING STEAM
FIGURE 26
SUGGESTED SEALING STEAM
PIPING ARRANGEMENT FOR CONDENSING TURBINES
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 23
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 256 / 633
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
This chapter describes the basic oil requirements, care of lubricating oils and the methods of lubricating YR
Turbines.
Proper lubrication is a primary factor in achieving maximum trouble-free operation. Only the best grades of oil
should be used for turbine lubrication. Using the best oils will help eliminate costly downtime due to bearing
failures and other lubrication related problems.
BASIC OIL REQUIREMENTS

Elliott Group does not recommend specific brands of oil. Elliott equipment owners should consult reliable oil
suppliers regarding their lubrication requirements. The oil should be a premium quality mineral-based lubricant
(PolyAlphaOlefin (PAO)-based when using synthetic oils), which will readily separate from water and have
minimum tendency to emulsify or foam when agitated. It should have high rust and oxidation resistance and
minimum sludge, lacquer, varnish or resin forming tendencies. In addition to these requirements, Tables 2 and
3 contain other necessary information to aid in selecting the proper lubricating oil for your turbine.
Turbines driving through speed reduction or increasing gears are often pressure lubricated by the gear
lubrication system. Refer to the gear manufacturer's instructions for gear oil requirements. (Consult Elliott
Group before deviating from the values shown on Table 2.)
Caution
Turbines designed for PAO-based synthetic oil must not use mineral
based oils. Use of oil other than a PAO-based synthetic oil may result in
severe damage to the bearing cases, bearings and rotor. Refer to the
data sheet in the front of this manual to determine which type of oil is
used on the unit.
CARE OF OIL
Lubricating oil should be maintained in first class condition by preventing contamination from moisture, dust, dirt
or other impurities. An oil maintenance analysis program is recommended for determining the frequency of oil
changes. Consult your oil supplier for assistance in establishing a program that will meet your specific
lubrication maintenance requirements.
METHODS OF LUBRICATION
The turbines are furnished with either a ring oiled lubrication system or a pressure lubrication system.
Pressure lubricated turbines equipped with a Class 1 or Class 2 rotor (rotor class designated on Turbine Data
page), are also furnished with oil rings. The oil rings provide bearing lubrication during turbine start-up and
shutdown. This arrangement employs a standpipe, installed in the bearing housing oil drain connection to
maintain the proper oil level for a ring oiled operation.
Turbines equipped with a Class 3 or higher rotors are pressure lubricated and use an auxiliary oil pump for
bearing lubrication during turbine start-up and shutdown. Standpipes and oil rings are not used with this
arrangement.
o
Turbines equipped with a Class 2 or lower rotor and/ having an exhaust temperature greater than 400 F (204
o
C) are designed for PAO-based lubrication if using a ring oiled lubrication system.
Ring Oiled Lubrication - Refer to Figure 27

Standard YR Turbines are ring oil lubricated. The ring oiled lubrication system is a simple system that employs
one (AYR, BYR) or two oil rings to deliver oil to each of the turbine bearings. The rings, approximately twice the
diameter of the shaft journals, are rotated by the journals and carry oil from the bearing housing reservoirs to the
top half bearing liners. Rotating journals carry the oil to the clearance between the bearing liners and the shaft
journals. Oil drains from the ends of each bearing liner and returns to the bearing housing reservoirs to be
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 24
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 257 / 633
cooled and recycled. Oil discharged from the steam end journal bearing floods the rotor locating bearing before
draining into the bearing housing reservoir. Table 4 gives the recommended Trip and Alarm settings for
monitoring bearing and oil temperatures.
A cooling water tube arrangement, as shown in Figure 27, is used to cool the oil in the bearing housing
reservoirs of ring oiled lubricated turbines.
Ring oiled lubrication systems have no means of filtering solids from the oil; therefore, frequent oil changes are
necessary to insure a clean oil supply to the bearings.
Shielded glass oilers (Figure 28) , installed on the sides of the bearing housings, maintain a constant reservoir
oil level when the turbine is ring oiled lubricated. Oil must be visible in the oiler bottles at all times during
operation. Empty bottles indicate possible low reservoir oil levels. Care must also be taken to avoid overfilling
the bearing housing reservoirs. High oil levels will restrict oil ring rotation that may cause inadequate bearing
lubrication.
INSPECTION PLUG
ROTOR SHAFT
OIL RING
JOURNAL
BEARING
OILER
OIL
RESERVOIR
COOLING
WATER
COOLING
CHAMBER
LUBRICATING OIL
COOLING WATER
FIGURE 27
RING OILED LUBRICATION
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 25
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 258 / 633
BOTTLE SHIELD
KNURLED
THUMB SCREW
“A” See Table 5-1

OIL LEVEL TAble 5-1
LOWER
RESERVOIR
LEVEL 1/8 in. WASHER

ADJUSTER (3.2 mm)
USED WITH THE CYR, DYR,
DYRM, BYRH, BYRHH
PLUG CROSS ARMS
FIGURE 28
GLASS OILER
TABLE 1
OIL LEVEL RANGE, CAPACITIES and FIGURE 29 ‘A’ DIMENSION
YR Frame Size Oil Level Range Quantity of Oil Figure 28
Dimension below unit Ring Oiled System “A” Dimension
centerline Pints (Liters)
per bearing case
AYR * 2.62” (66.5mm) to 1 (0.5) .50” (12.7mm)
2.74” (69.5mm)
BYR 2.62” (66.5mm) to 1 (0.5) .94” (23.9mm)
2.74” (69.5mm)
CYR, DYR, DYRM, 3.55” (90mm) to 3.68” 3 (1.3) .94” (23.9mm)
BYRH, BYRHH (93mm) with 1/8” washer
* AYR Re-Design Turbine Unit is easily recognized by “dog-legged” oiler lines (units manufactured after 1968).
Units manufactured prior to 1968, “A” dimension = .94” (23.9mm).
The oilers are adjusted at the factory, but should be checked during oil changes. To assure the oil level is
correct, turn the level adjuster cross arms to the height indicated in Table 1 (“A” dimension on Figure 28). Lock
the cross arms in place by tightening the upper cross arm. Insure 1/8" washer is present in the level adjuster
assembly as shown in Figure 28 for the CYR, DYR, DYRM, BYRH AND BYRHH frames.
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 26
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 259 / 633
Note
All checks should be made with the oil system at normal operating
temperature.
SELECTING LUBRICATING OILS
The following tables are to be used as guidelines in selecting lubricating oils for your YR Turbine. These
guidelines are not intended to restrict the oil supplier to a definite set of numbers to which he must adhere. It is
the intent to indicate the general service requirements and leave the particular recommendations to the oil
supplier.
TABLE 2
GUIDELINES FOR SELECTING LUBRICATING OILS
Method of Lubrication Ring Oiled Lubrication Pressure Lubrication

A B
(See Note 1) (See Note
2)
MINERAL BASED OILS
Viscosity, Saybolt Universal
284-352 135-164 135-352
Seconds (Approx. SUS at 100 F)
Approximate Metric Viscosity
63.2 – 78.8 28.8-35.2 28.8 – 78.8
(mm 2/s at 40 C)
ISO Viscosity Grade 68 32 32/46/68
Viscosity Index Above 94 Above 94 Above 94
400 F/ 400 F/
Minimum Flash Point 400 F/ 204 C
(204 C) (204 C)
Pour Point Under -10 F/-12 C -6 F/-21 C -10 F/-12 C
PolyAlphaOlefin (PAO)-BASED SYNTHETIC OILS (See Note 3)
Test Method
300-340 ASTM D2161
65.4-74.3 ASTM D445
(mm 2/s at 40 C)
55-65 ASTM D2161
8.8-11.5 ASTM D445
(mm 2/s at 99 C)
ISO Viscosity Grade 68 --
Viscosity Index Above 120 ASTM D2270
Minimum Flash Point 450 F (232 C) ASTM D92
Pour Point Under -
(-37 C) ASTM D97
35 F
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 27
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 260 / 633
Notes
1. Column "A" (Table 2) provides the general guidelines for turbines lubricated by a turbine shaft driven
pump or by the driven machine.
2. Column "B" (Table 2) shows the acceptable general guidelines for turbines lubricated from gear oil
systems. Consult Elliott Group before deviating from the values shown, to insure gear oil requirements
are compatible with the turbine.
3. The unit outline drawing and Turbine Data Sheet will specify if synthetic, PAO-based oil is to be used.
Tags on each bearing case will also indicate if synthetic oil is required. While PAO-based synthetic oil is
compatible with mineral oils it should not be mixed with mineral oil as mixing will degrade the oxidation
stability of the synthetic oil.
TABLE 3
OPERATING LIMITS FOR TURBINES
Method of Lubrication Ring Oiled Lubrication Pressure Lubricated

MINERAL BASED OILS
o o o o
Oil Reservoir 130 F 54 C 130 F 54 C
Operating Temperature to to to to
o o o o
190 F 88 C 160 F 71 C
o o o o
Minimum Oil Temperature 70 F 21 C 70 F 21 C
Before Starting
o o o o
Oil Temperature 140 F 60 C 130 F 54 C
From Bearings to to to to
o o o o
190 F 88 C 170 F 77 C
o o o o
Nominal Cooling Water 90 F 32 C 90 F 32 C
Temperature
o o o o
Maximum Cooling Water 100 F 38 C 100 F 38 C
Temperature
Nominal Cooling Water Flow 2 gpm 7.5 lpm Refer to Turbine Data Sheet
o o
Oil Temperature from n/a n/a 120 F 49 C
Cooler (to Bearings)
Normal Bearing Oil Pressure, Gage n/a n/a 7 psi 0.5 bar
Some units may run 15 psi (1.03 bar) to to
to 18 psi (1.24 bar), Refer to Turbine 9 psi 0.6 bar
Data Sheet
PAO-BASED SYNTHETIC OILS (See Note 3)
o o
Minimum Oil Temperature before 70 F 21 C n/a n/a
Starting
o o
Oil Reservoir 130 F 54 C n/a n/a
Operating Temperature to to
o o
200 F 93 C
o o
Oil Temperature from 140 F 60 C n/a n/a
Bearings to to
o o
210 F 99 C
o o
Nominal Cooling Water 90 F 32 C n/a n/a
Temperature
o o
Maximum Cooling Water 100 F 38 C n/a n/a
Temperature
Nominal Cooling Water Flow 2 gpm 7.5 lpm n/a n/a
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 28
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 261 / 633
TABLE 4
BEARING TEMPERATURE LIMITS
RING OILED Oil Temperature Bearing Shell Temperature*

MINERAL BASED OILS
Maximum
190 F 88 C 225 F 107 C
Continuous Operation
Alarm Setting 200 F 93 C 240 F 116 C
Trip Setting 220 F 104 C 260 F 127 C
PAO-BASED SYNTHETIC OILS
Maximum
200 F 93 C 235 F 113 C
PRESSURE LUBRICATION Oil Temperature Bearing Shell Temperature*
Maximum
170 F 76 C 225 F 107 C
*Temperature taken by contact type sensor on back of the bearing shell..
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 29
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 262 / 633
PREPARING FOR INITIAL OPERATION
INTRODUCTION
Turbine applications differ widely; therefore, operating procedures must be tailored to each particular
installation. Instructions in this chapter provide a recommended procedure for the initial start-up and serve as a
guide for establishing routine operating procedures.
Operating personnel must review this technical manual to become familiar with the safety precautions and
operating procedures for YR Turbines. Particular attention should be directed to the WARNINGS, CAUTIONS,
and NOTES in this chapter.
SHAFT ALIGNMENT
The turbine and the driven equipment are normally connected by flexible couplings. Flexible couplings are used
because changes in temperature and loadings during normal operation, start-up or shutdown can cause one
shaft end to move relative to its companion shaft end. For high-speed, high-performance applications such as
between compressors and turbines, the coupling is usually the gear, disk or diafram type.
All flexible couplings have limits within operation without failure or undue wear. Even when operating within the
design limits, these couplings generate some resistance to flexing. The force usually increases as the
misalignment increases, thereby increasing or decreasing bearing load fluctuations as the shaft rotates.
Furthermore, operating with collinear shafts at normal operating conditions minimizes tooth-sliding velocity or
diafram flexure while providing the maximum reserve for movement in any direction should it be required.
Experience indicates that excessive vibration of compressors and their drivers is often caused by improper shaft
alignment. Frequently, high or unusual bearing and seal wear can be traced to
improper shaft alignment. In extreme cases, poor alignment can precipitate a coupling, bearing or shaft failure.
For smooth operation and long trouble-free runs, good shaft alignment procedures are essential and cannot be
over-emphasized.
An understanding of good shaft alignment techniques must begin with a few basic definitions.
"Cold or ambient alignment" is the procedure that involves positioning the frames or casings of compressors and
other rotating machines while at standstill and ambient conditions. The "cold shaft alignment" is normally
accomplished using dial indicators, feeler gauges, micrometers or a combination of these instruments. This
positioning should allow for thermal growth and material deflections that will occur between ambient conditions
and stabilized operating temperatures. The incremental movement used to establish the cold shaft alignment
may be actual measurements made during start-up or shutdown, growths estimated by the machinery
manufacturer or estimates made by the installation man.
To calculate thermal expansion or contraction, multiply original length (generally distance from machine shaft
centerline to top of baseplate or soleplate) times expansion coefficient (0.0000067 for steel) times temperature
change in degrees Fahrenheit. (Expansion coefficient is 0.000012 for steel and temperature change in degrees
Celsius.)
L (change in length) = L (length) x 0.0000067 x T (change in temp. °F)
L (change in length) = L (length) x 0.000012 x T (change in temp. °C)
NOTE: L and L in same units.
Normally, the vertical movement is minimized by use of a bolted joint where the support foot attaches to the
casing. Therefore, the average temperature of the support foot may be considerably lower than the average of
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 30
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 263 / 633
adjacent casing temperature to foot temperature. A good "hot shaft alignment" will either verify or suggest
alternate growth figures to use.
"Hot shaft alignment" also known as operating shaft alignment or service alignment is a procedure for
monitoring the change in shaft alignment from cold or ambient conditions to normal operating conditions.
Knowing the "cold shaft alignment" and measuring the change, provides a method for determining if the shaft
alignment becomes collinear at normal operating conditions. This method is indirect, but if properly done,
provides the most reliable and acceptable method available.
A. COLINEAR ALIGNMENT
B. ANGULAR MISALIGNMENT
C. PARALLEL MISALIGNMENT
FIGURE 29
TYPES OF SHAFT MISALIGNMENT
A. Collinear alignment - In Figure 29 part A; the two machine shaft ends are considered to be "collinear
aligned" when the two shaft ends rotate about the same straight line (no misalignment). All machinery
shafts have some deflection; therefore, this reference is limited to the center of rotation of one shaft end
relative to the opposite shaft end. Each coupling must be analyzed individually.
B. Angular or Face displacement - In Figure 29 part B; indicates the amount of angular misalignment at a
shaft end. Normally, angular displacement is measured in mils of offset per inch (in mm of offset per
meter) of coupling diameter or axial separation.
C. Parallel offset - In Figure 29 part C; indicates the amount of parallel misalignment between the
centerlines of two adjacent shaft ends. Figure 29 part C, shows two shafts with only parallel offset.
"Axial separation". When the coupling connecting two shaft ends is a gear type, an axial separation of plus or
minus .0625 inch (1.60 mm) tolerance is usually acceptable. When the coupling connecting the two shaft ends
is a disk or diafram type, an axial separation as shown in Figure 30 of less than plus or minus .015 inch (0.40
mm) tolerance is usually required. Check coupling drawing and coupling instructions for precise limits.
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 31
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 264 / 633
When aligning disk or diafram type couplings, the dimension information shown on the coupling drawings must
be adhered too. Measurements should be taken with the equipment in normal thrust position (turbine rotor
toward exhaust). Usually, the critical dimension is a coupling flange face dimension as shown in Figure 31. For
further information on axial separation, refer to coupling vendor drawing and installation procedure.
AXIAL SEPARATION
cL cL
FIGURE 30
AXIAL SEPARATION
GUARDS
DIAFRAMS
CENTER TUBE
COUPLING FLANGE FACE TO

FLANGE FACE
FIGURE 31
AXIAL SEPARATION - DIAFRAM COUPLING
There are two similar procedures available for measuring parallel offset and angular displacement. The most
accurate measurements are obtained when one of the following recommended methods is used.
The "Rim and Face Method" is the preferred procedure when the distance between the two adjacent shaft ends
is less than one-half the coupling diameter (this assumes face readings are taken near outside diameter). This
procedure is also known as the "Hub and Face Method" or "Two Indicator Method."
The "Reverse Indicator Method" is the preferred procedure when the distance between the adjacent shaft ends
is greater than one-half the coupling diameter.
Shaft Alignment Map Instructions

Preparation and use of a "Shaft alignment map" for each installation is recommended. A typical shaft alignment
map is shown in Figure 32. Use of a shaft alignment map provides a convenient form on which to record
indicator readings and calculate equipment moves. Maintaining this information for comparison during
maintenance inspections or for reference, should problems develop, can provide valuable diagnostic
information.
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 32
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 265 / 633
In addition to providing machine identification information, date and shaft alignment method used, the shaft
alignment map provides a plan (top) and vertical (side) elevation of the machine shafts,
complete with all the important reference points identified. The horizontal or abscissa coordinate should be
scaled using some convenient scale such as 1.00 or 2.00 inches per division (25 or 50 millimeters per division).
All support feet and coupling faces should be located. When more than two machines are involved, a larger
map or graph may be advantageous. The vertical or ordinate coordinate should be an expanded scale such as
1 mil (0.02 millimeters) per division in order to clearly identify misalignment. Mark North compass direction in
plan view and corresponding compass directions in indicator reading circles so no confusion develops during
measurements.
When making shaft alignment corrections, it is usually advantageous to hold one machine in a fixed position and
align other machine or machines to the fixed machine. Some guidelines to determine the best machine to hold
stationary are as follows.
1. If the equipment consists of turbine driven compressor, it is generally preferred to level turbine and move
compressor into desired cold alignment.
2. If a gear is present, level and square the gear to the foundation or baseplate and move the other
machinery into alignment with the gear.
3. If the equipment string consists of three or more pieces of equipment, level the machine nearest the
center, square it to the foundation or baseplate, and move the other machinery into alignment with the
selected machine.
The solid, dark, heavy lines on the shaft alignment map represent the desired hot shaft alignment; i.e., collinear
alignment. Plot historical or calculated thermal expansion or contraction change for each support location on
shaft alignment map. Connect points plotted for each machine with a dashed line.
Use dashed line for desired "cold alignment setting". Read off differences between the two dashed lines in
vertical plane and record desired readings in circles so marked. Plan or horizontal alignment usually remains
unchanged from ambient (cold) of bottom reading. If system has a gear, the gear case is usually doweled or
keyed under the pinion and allowed to expand toward bull gear shaft thus requiring alignment allowances in plan
view at bull gear or low speed shaft end.
NOTE
(For All Rim Measurements)
Actual measurement is 1/2 TIR (Total Indicator Reading); therefore, value of
measurement shown on indicator reading circle should be twice the distance
indicated on plot.
Offset value is plus (+) if projected centerline of machine that indicator is

attached to is above coupling mark of the machine that indicator is riding on.
D R A
© Elliott Grouo
DOC000000049294
December 2013 33
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 266 / 633
YR Steam Turbine – PreStart Manual
SHAFT ALIGNMENT MAP

USER ABC Company SERVICE Propane Refrigeration EQUIP. NO. C508xxx / C5037xx DATE 10 / 95
COUPLING TYPE MP 153 LUBE Grease AMBIENT TEMP. 60 F NAME
NOTES: ALIGNMENT METHOD Reverse Indicator ALIGNMENT BAR SAG Negligible MILS/MM
1) Show North in Plan view of sketch.
2) Mark compass direction in circles.
LEFT 0 RIGHT LEFT 0 RIGHT
3) If offset value is plus, projected center
line of machine that the indicator was COMP TURB DESIRED COLD READING
attached to will be above the coupling -12.5 -12.5 +10 +10
W TO E W TO E -14 0 C/T ACT
mark of the opposite machine.
TURB COMP Vo = Bot - Top = -7
4) If offset value is minus, projected center 2
line of machine that the indicator was -25 +20 -4 -10
attached to will be below the coupling 0 0 Ho = Right - Left = +3
mark of the opposite machine. 2
COMP TURB
-10 -4 +7 +9
W TO E W TO E
ACTUAL COLD READING
TURB COMP
-14 +16
STEAM END FOOT EXHAUST FOOT DISCHARGE FOOT SUCTION FOOT
PLAN
DESIRED OPERATING LINE
MOVE 6 MIL WEST W
MOVE 22 MIL WEST N
SEPG5 E
38M4
STEAM TURBINE COUPLING
cL cL cL COMPRESSOR cL

VERTICAL
MOVE 3 MIL UP MOVE 17 MIL UP
48 " 14" 14" 18" 57"

PICK A CONVENIENT SCALE SCALE 2 inches PER DIVISION SUGGEST 1" OR 2" PER DIVISION
FIGURE 32
SHAFT ALIGNMENT MAP
EXAMPLE
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 267 / 633
Sometimes the work descriptions such as used on an alignment map can be confusing. Figure 33 is a pictorial
view of Note 3 on alignment map. It reads:
"If offset value is plus, projected centerline of machine that the indicator was attached to will be above the
coupling mark of the opposite machine."
FIGURE 33
PICTORIAL OF NOTE 3 ON ALIGNMENT MAP
Figure 34 is a pictorial view of Note 4 on alignment map. It reads:
"If offset value is minus, projected centerline of machine that the indicator was attached to will be below
the coupling mark of the opposite machine."
FIGURE 34
D R A
© Elliott Group http://www.elliott-turbo.com
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
DOC000000049294 February 2014
268 / 633
34
Rim and Face Method of Alignment

1. Use Rim and Face Method when distance between the two adjacent shaft ends is less than one-half the
coupling diameter.
2. Lubricate bearings before rotating shafts.
3. Mark both coupling hubs at four locations 90 apart so that their position is evident at all times during
alignment work.
4. All piping strain must be removed from machine. For initial alignment work during installation, all piping
should be left unconnected from machinery. After cold alignment has been secured, arrange dial
indicators between shaft ends, or between foundation and machine case such that any movement of
machine can be detected. Connect one flange at a time and observe indicator readings continuously.
Should movement exceed 2 mils (0.05 mm), piping strain is considered excessive. Reason for strain
should be investigated and condition corrected before proceeding with alignment.
5. Shift rotors to running position and determine that coupling spacer distance is as specified on coupling
drawing.
6. Mount dial indicator so indicator button rides near center of rotation. Rotate shaft against which button
rests to measure axial wobble. If unable to maintain axial wobble to less than 0.001 inch (.025 mm) on
either shaft, use of two face indicators 180° apart or multiple measurements is recommended.
NOTE
Axial shaft movement during face reading measurements can cause false
readings. Two dial indicators mounted 180° apart should be used when axial
float cannot be easily controlled. When using this setup, set dial indicators at
0° and 180° position and zero indicators. Dial indicator at 0° should be tagged
prime dial indicator. At each interval, subtract second dial indicator's reading
from prime dial indicator reading. Divide this result by two and record result in
prime's location. Be sure to retain proper plus or minus signs.
7. Measure angular misalignment with inside micrometer, feeler gauges or dial indicator such as shown in
Figure 36. This is best accomplished by marking measurement point at 0° and recording readings or
change in readings between 0° point and points at 90°, 180°, 270° and 360°.
On return to 0° position, indicator should return to zero or repeat measurement. Take several sets of
readings, to be sure no mistake has been made or something has moved that shouldn't have. When
taking measurements, rotate both shafts equal amounts to cancel out eccentricity and surface
imperfections.
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
35
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 269 / 633
DIAL INDICATOR WITH HOLE ATTACHMENT
0
INSIDE MICROMETER MEASUREMENT POINT
270 90
FEELERS
180
GUAGE BLOCK OR BAR STOCK
FIGURE 35
MEASURING ANGULAR MISALIGNMENT
8. Readings observed in step 7, above should be recorded on alignment map. As face readings provide the
slope of shaft on which dial indicator is mounted relative to coupling face of the opposite machine (See
Figure 35), use an indicator recording circle for an axial location equal to the "face reading measurement
diameter" away from the hub on which the indicator button is riding.
ANGULAR DISPLACEMENT
ANGULAR DISPLACEMENT DISTANCE EQUAL TO

MEASUREMENT DIAMETER
FIGURE 36
9. To measure Parallel Offset, attach the dial indicator to bracket mounted on machine that will be moved.
Set the indicator button to contact periphery of opposite coupling hub at top approximately 0.25 inch (6
mm) from edge (as shown in Figure 36). Set the indicator to zero at top, rotate both shafts together and
record dial readings on alignment map for 90°, 180°, 270°. On return to top position, the indicator should
return to zero. Repeat this procedure several times to be sure no mistake has been made or something
moved. These four readings will be TIR (Total Indicator Readings), and actual parallel offset is one-half of
indicator (TIR) readings.
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
36
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 270 / 633
o o
DIAL INDICATOR
FEELER GAGE
FIGURE 37
MEASURING PARALLEL OFFSET
10. Readings observed in Step 9 should be recorded on alignment map in indicator recording circle
corresponding to same axial location as dial indicator measuring location (fixed machines coupling).
11. Vertical offset (Vo) and horizontal offset (Ho) for projected centerline of machine to be moved at fixed
machine's coupling face can be determined by using alignment map Note 3 or 4.
12. Slope of machine's shaft to be moved relative to fixed machine is determined by (a) drawing a line
thorough point determined in Step 11 and parallel to fixed machine's centerline, (b) applying alignment
map Note 3 of 4 to face readings at the axial location previously determined in Step 8 above.
13. In each view, draw a straight line through points located in Step 11 and 12 with line extended to intersect
both supports of machine to be moved. Read off distance between line just completed and desired cold
shaft position (dashed line) at each support for component to be moved. This measurement represents
movement necessary to obtain correct cold alignment.
14. Make adjustments indicated in Step 13.
15. Repeat Steps 7 through 14 to verify adjustments made in Step 14 correct.
16. Unless otherwise noted, a final hot alignment should provide for an angular displacement between
machine coupling hub centerline and coupling spacer centerline of approximately 0.25 mil per inch (0.25
mm per m) at the coupling gear teeth or flex elements. This angular displacement is not a limit, but a
suggested alignment goal. Refer to coupling literature for more information on maximum allowable
misalignment.
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
37
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 271 / 633
Reverse Indicator Method of Shaft Alignment

1. Use the reverse indicator method of shaft alignment when distance between two adjacent shaft ends is
greater than one half the coupling diameter.
Note
For alignment purposes, the effective distance between shaft ends can be
increased by spanning the shaft end to obtain a dial indicator location inboard
of actual shaft ends. Key factor is to spread two indicators as far apart as
practical with negligible bracket sag. (As spread increases, so do possibilities
for bracket sag.)
The reverse indicator method of shaft alignment eliminates the need for taking face readings.
2. The reverse indicator method involves taking readings from one shaft to the rim surface on the hub of the
adjoining shaft and vice versa as shown in Figure 38.
READ HERE
SHAFT "A"
SHAFT "B"
FIRST SET OF READINGS
READ HERE
SHAFT "A"
SHAFT "B"
SECOND SET OF READINGS
FIGURE 38
REVERSE INDICATOR READINGS
3. Lubricate bearings before rotating shaft.
4. Mark both the coupling hubs at four locations 90° apart so that their position can easily be seen at all times
during the alignment work.
5.All piping strain must be removed from machine. For initial alignment work during installation, all piping should
be left unconnected from machinery. After cold alignment has been secured, arrange dial indicators between
shaft ends or between foundation and machine case such that any movement of machine can be detected.
Connect one flange at a time and observe indicator readings continuously. Should movement exceed 2 mils
(0.05 mm), piping strain is considered excessive. Reason for strain should be investigated and condition
corrected before proceeding with alignment.
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
38
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 272 / 633
6. When spanning the coupling gap with an indicator rig or bracket, zero sag is impractical to achieve;
therefore, the actual amount of sag should be determined and recorded on the alignment map. The
bracket should be sturdily constructed to minimize shifting and sag during use.
NOTE
For purposes of this explanation, the fixed machine is called shaft "A". The
shaft of machine to be aligned to shaft "A" will be called shaft "B". Therefore,
shaft "B" belongs to machine that will be moved.
7. Attach the indicator bracket to shaft "A".
8. Attach the dial indicator to the bracket so that the button will rest on the outer rim of coupling hub "B". The
indicator button should contact in about 0.25 inch (6 mm) from the hub face.
9. Position dial indicator at top dead center, in line with 0 marking on coupling "B" and zero indicator.
10. Rotate both shafts together and record dial readings on alignment map at 90°, 180° and 270° positions.
On return to top position, the indicator should return to zero. Repeat this step several times to be sure no
mistake has been made or something moved.
11. The accuracy of the readings may be verified by algebraically adding the side readings and comparing this
sum to bottom reading. The readings should be equal to or within 1 mil (.25 mm).
12. Remove the bracket from shaft "A" and install on shaft "B". Using the same procedure obtain indicator
readings from shaft "B" to the rim of coupling hub "A".
13. Using the two equations shown on the suggested shaft alignment map, calculate the vertical offset (Vo)
and the horizontal or plan view offset (Ho). Plot these results in the proper view and in the axial location
where indicator readings were taken. Note 3 or 4 on the alignment map can assist in determining the shaft
location above or below other shaft. When making this determination, it is sometimes helpful to locate
centerline of shaft end "B" first that is shaft end of machine to be moved, and then the projected centerline
of shaft end "B" at shaft end "A". In this explanation shaft end "A" is fixed and therefore shaft "B" must be
located relative to shaft "A".
NOTE
Correct the bottom reading for sag in the bracket by algebraically adding to
bottom indicator reading. No correction is needed on the side readings since it
is negative on both sides and will cancel out.
14. In each view draw a straight line through points located in Step 13, extending the line to intersect both
supports of machine "B". Read off distance between line just completed and desired cold shaft position
(dashed line) at each support for machine "B". This measurement represents movement necessary to
obtain correct cold alignment.
16. Repeat Steps 7 through 14 to verify adjustments made in Step 15 were correct.
17. Unless otherwise noted, a final hot alignment should provide for an angular displacement between
machine coupling hub centerlines and coupling spacer centerline of approximately 0.25 mil per inch 0.25
mm/m) at the coupling gear teeth or flex elements. This angular displacement is not a limit but a
suggested alignment goal. Refer to coupling literature for more information on maximum allowable
misalignment.
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
39
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 273 / 633
After cold alignment has been made, the soleplates or baseplates must then be grouted; refer to previous
section titled "Grouting". After final grouting is completed, cold alignment should be checked and adjusted if
necessary.
Hot Alignment Check

A hot alignment check should be made after the equipment string has operated with full load for several hours
and stable operating temperatures have been reached. This check will indicate any final adjustments necessary
to achieve collinear alignment of the turbine and driven equipment under operating conditions.
The purpose of the hot alignment procedure is to measure the movement of one shaft end relative to the
opposite shaft end. As the shaft rotates, it is not practical to measure the actual position of one shaft end
relative to its companion with dial indicators or similar instruments, as was the case during the cold alignment
procedure. Therefore, most Hot Alignment procedures make the assumption that the machine casing and
bearing housing expand uniformly in a radial direction from the shaft center of rotation and maintain this
relationship to the shaft center regardless of the casing temperature. This basic assumption appears to be valid
as compressors and turbines are nearly symmetrical about the shaft; therefore, distortions are minimized. Using
this principle, one of the following methods should be used to make a hot alignment check.
The "mechanical hot alignment" method uses accurate measurements between fixed reference points on the
foundation or base and the machinery bearing housings to indicate shaft movement between ambient and
normal operating conditions. This method assumes that the fixed reference points do not move between cold
alignment conditions and machinery operation. In general, this is a good assumption provided one side or area
of the foundation is not exposed to direct sun when the other is not. Unprotected hot steam and process lines
passing in close proximity to the foundation can also contribute to uncertainty in incremental movements.
This method eliminates the requirement for alignment brackets or bars by using permanent reference points
(called benchmarks) that are affixed directly to the foundation and to the bearing housing as shown in Figure 39.
All four reference points should lie in a plane perpendicular to the centerline of the machine shaft. Similarly
mounted reference points should be established at each bearing housing in the train.
Suggested benchmarks for this technique are 0.5-inch (12.7 mm) diameter precision balls. Because these
benchmarks become an integral part of the installation and the accuracy of alignment records over the long term
are dependent upon these references, it is recommended that the balls be made of stainless steel to prevent
corrosion and mounted solidly to avoid inadvertent movement. It is also recommended that the benchmarks be
protected with covers when not in use.
ROTOR SHAFT
BEARING HOUSING
A COLD B COLD
A' HOT B' HOT
BENCHMARKS
FOUNDATION
FIGURE 39 - TYPICAL DISPLACEMENT OF BENCHMARKS ON FOUNDATION AND BEARING HOUSING
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
40
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 274 / 633
NOTE
Acculign, Inc markets a tool kit designed specifically for the purpose of
conducting hot alignment checks by this method.
Following cold alignment of the equipment string, reference dimensions A and B and angles and are
determined at each bearing housing and recorded. Lubrication system should be operating and oil supply
temperature near design to minimize effect of bearing housing growth.
After the machine is brought to normal stabilized operating conditions, dimensions A' and B' are measured at
each position. With these two sets of data, the vertical and horizontal movement of each bearing housing of the
machines in the train can be determined relative to the foundation.
See Figure 40. Using common grid paper (5 x 5 grid is usually a convenient size), lay out reference vectors A
and B at angles and , having these vectors cross at one of the grid intersections. The intersection of these
vectors represents the centerline of the machine shaft in the cold position. Now refer to the cold and hot
measurements previously made (A, A', B, and B') and determine the movement of the bearing housing along
vectors A and B by taking the differences between cold and hot measurements ( A and B) for each location.
Lay out the movements along vectors A and B using any convenient scale, say 0.25 inch equals 0.001 inch (2
mm equals 0.01 mm), to establish points a and b.
VECTOR B H
VECTOR A
FINAL SHAFT
POSITION
90
a
b V
A
90
B
INITIAL SHAFT POSITION
FIGURE 40
GRAPHICAL DETERMINATION OF SHAFT IN HOT POSITION RELATIVE
TO COLD POSITION
Now draw lines through a and b perpendicular to vectors A and B. These lines represent arcs of radii A' and B'
drawn from the foundation benchmarks. The intersection of these lines defines the position of the machine shaft
centerline in the hot position relative to the cold position. To determine the movement in vertical and horizontal
directions, it is necessary only to scale off the dimensions referred to as H and V, using the same scale as
used in plotting A and B.
A similar plot for the data secured at each bearing housing can be compared to the alignment map information
for validity of the original estimates. Where differences exist, corrections should be made to the original
estimates used on alignment map and the machinery realigned.
With the permanent benchmark installed and the desired cold alignment reference dimensions recorded, this
information can also be used for resetting machines quickly or for maintenance checks.
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
41
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 275 / 633
Another hot alignment check is the "reverse hot alignment" method that uses the same basic principles as the
reverse indicator method of shaft alignment. Rather than mounting brackets off the coupling, the brackets are
mounted permanently off the bearing housing or casing.
Regardless of the measurement method used, several things should be kept in mind when making a setup.
1. The probes and indicating blocks should be positioned to measure both the horizontal and vertical
movement at the coupling of each machine. Generally, vertical movement is the most important; therefore,
placement of brackets or bars should favor making the most accurate readings in this direction (mount
along horizontal centerline).
2. The brackets or bars can either be located inside or outside the coupling guard.
3. Brackets or bars should be constructed and protected to minimize deflections due to thermal gradients and
local forces such as windage or high velocity lube oil (for brackets mounted in side coupling guard).
4. Regardless of where brackets or bars are mounted, it must be on a thermally stable part of the machine.
5. Regardless of where brackets or bars are mounted, it is recommended that a guard be provided to protect
them.
Normally, some variations can be expected in the hot alignment data observed for various operating conditions.
The central point about which most of the observations gather will normally indicate the desired operating
alignment.
Recording of the change in alignment data between ambient conditions and the central operating condition
(desired operating alignment) on the alignment map will provide confirmation of the original data or suggest
modifications to original data. The conclusion drawn from this analysis should be recorded for future use during
maintenance turnarounds.
Once the alignment bars have been properly installed and referenced to the cold alignment readings, the bars
can also be used for aligning the machines.
In addition to these methods, there are also other methods available for making a hot alignment check, such as
optical alignment, non-contact proximity probes mounted on water-cooled pedestals, etc. A hot alignment check
with optical equipment measures the movement of reference points (generally tooling balls mounted on the
bearing housing) by use of optics. When using this method for making a hot alignment check, great care should
be exercised as the line of sight between the measuring instrument and the reference point can be bent by
temperature gradients or air currents. Instrument stands and their supports are also subject to vibration and
distortions that can influence accuracy of data obtained. In general, it is recommended that measurements be
double-checked by making measurements from both sides of machines and comparing results. Any lack of
correlation should be resolved.
Use of non-contact proximity probes mounted on water-cooled pedestals with the probes looking at the shaft,
couplings, bearing housing or casing can also be used. When using one of these methods, great care should
be exercised to design pedestals and mounting such that temperature distortions are minimized.
Realign as Necessary
Regardless of the method used for making hot alignment check, it must be evaluated for accuracy of information
measured. Temperature variations and air currents can cause significant changes in support temperatures
between cold alignment conditions and operating conditions. Expansions, contractions and heat flow are
therefore seldom linear. This can and does contribute to introducing errors if care is not exercised in analyzing
results.
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
42
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 276 / 633
NOTE
Before making alignment changes based on hot alignment data, evaluate the
setup to be sure data is valid and logical.
When the hot alignment check confirms that the machines have been properly aligned, the machines should be
doweled as indicated on the outline drawing
STEAM SUPPLY
Steam should be free from moisture and preferably superheated. A receiver type separator with ample drains
should be provided upstream of the shut-off valve to prevent water from entering the turbine. When a separator
is not provided, a continuous drain must be connected to the lowest point of the steam inlet piping.
Caution
If continuous drainers are on the steam piping or turbine drains, check
frequently to verify that proper operation is maintained. Failure to drain
water from steam lines or turbine casing may result in erosion, thrust
failures and/or poor performance.
The steam strainer protects the turbine from large particles of scale, welding beads, etc. This strainer does not
protect against abrasive matter, boiler compound, acids or alkaline substances, all of which may be carried over
in the steam. These substances may corrode, erode or form deposits on the internal turbine parts, thus reducing
efficiency and power. Feed water treatment and boiler operation must be carefully controlled to verify a supply
of clean steam for long-term satisfactory operation.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1. Do not operate the turbine if inspection shows that the rotor shaft journals and/or shaft packing case areas
are corroded.
2. Before starting, verify the rotor rotates freely by hand and that it is not rubbing any stationary parts.
Caution
Do not rotate shaft until lubrication has been applied. Rotating the shaft
without lubrication may result in damage to the rotor shaft and bearing
liners.
If rubbing or vibration occurs during operation, immediately shut down

the turbine, investigate and correct the cause.
3. Verify all piping (steam, water, air) and electrical connections are made before operating the turbine.
4. Verify that all valves, controls, trip mechanisms and safety devices are in good operating condition.
-WARNING-
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD THE TRIP VALVE BE
BLOCKED OR HELD OPEN TO CAUSE THE TRIP SYSTEM TO
BECOME INOPERATIVE.
OVERRIDING THE TRIP SYSTEM AND ALLOWING THE TURBINE

TO EXCEED THE RATED (NAMEPLATE) TRIP SPEED MAY
RESULT IN FATAL INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND EXTENSIVE
TURBINE DAMAGE.
IN THE EVENT THE TRIP SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONS:
IMMEDIATELY SHUT THE TURBINE DOWN BY CLOSING THE
INLET STEAM SHUT-OFF VALVE.
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
43
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 277 / 633
5. Before initial start-up, after major maintenance and after an extended shutdown, do not leave the turbine
unattended at any time until proper operation with load has been demonstrated.
PREPARING THE TURBINE FOR INITIAL START-UP: SINGLE STAGE YR
Note
Complete installation work before attempting to operate turbine.
1. Disconnect the coupling between the turbine and driven machine. Turbines driving through reduction gears
can remain coupled to the gear and operated together.
2. Disconnect the steam inlet piping at the turbine and blow out the line with the supply steam to remove any
foreign material from the pipe. Use targets for determination of cleanliness. Refer to NEMA SM23 section
8.4 for additional details.
3. Verify the steam strainer is clean and properly installed in the steam chest inlet flange. If the trip and
throttle valve is furnished with a temporary start-up strainer, the unit should be run no more than seventy-
two hours with the start-up screen installed. Connect the pipe to the turbine as a permanent joint. Adjust
piping hangers to eliminate any unacceptable strain on the turbine in cold and hot conditions. Piping
strains must be calculated in agreement with current NEMA SM23 standards.
4. If operating a condensing turbine, clean rust preventative compound from internal turbine surfaces.
Caution
Rust preventative compound will foul surface condenser tubes if not
removed before operating the turbine.
Note
As an alternative to manually cleaning the turbine internals to remove rust
preventative compound, the turbine may be run for several hours while
exhausting to atmosphere.
5. Remove bolting from the steam end bearing cap and the exhaust end bearing cap. Remove the bearing
caps and roll out the bottom bearings by lifting up on the rotor and rotating the bearings toward the
positioning lugs. Take care not to damage the instrumentation or associated wires. Clean and inspect the
bearings. Keep the steam and exhaust end bearings separate.
6. Clean the rotor shaft journals and the bearing housings with clean, lint free rags. If turbine is equipped with
Kingsbury type thrust bearings, remove thrust bearings and clean.
7. Lift the weight off the rotor and roll the bottom bearings into place. Make certain the positioning lugs on the
bearings are correctly seated in the bearing housing locating grooves. Carefully route the instrumentation
wires into the proper slots in the bearing retainers. Take care not to pinch the wires. Seal any wire groove
with an oil resistant sealant (RTV) and allow to cure.
Caution
Verify that the steam end and exhaust end bearings are not
interchanged.
8. Place the top bearings on the shaft journals. Flood the shaft journals, thrust and journal bearings with oil.
(Refer to the LUBRICATION section for proper oil levels and lubrication requirements).
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
44
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 278 / 633
9. Replace the bearing caps. Verify that the positioning lugs on the top liners engage the grooves in the
bearing caps. Apply a very thin coat of sealant to the split line. Insert the dowel pins and tighten all bolts.
10. If supplied, review the driven machine instruction manual for pre-start inspection procedures.
11. Inspect the governor linkage.
12. Verify that all lube oil piping has been installed and the lubrication system has been flushed.
Caution
Verify orifice plugs are installed at the bearing housings. If orifice plugs
are not installed, oil leakage will occur.
13. Verify free movement and clearances of the trip system. Manually activate the overspeed trip pin to verify
the overspeed trip system is functional.
14. Fabricate a clamp or other blocking device to secure the coupling sleeve (if supplied) to the hub while
operating the uncoupled turbine.
Note
Use a balanced adapter to secure balanced gear type coupling hubs during
uncoupled operation.
15. Verify that the exhaust relief valve is installed correctly and operates at the correct pressure.
-WARNING-
THE TURBINE SHOULD NOT BE OPERATED UNLESS THE
ATMOSPHERIC RELIEF VALVE OR OTHER PROTECTIVE DEVICE
HAS BEEN INSTALLED BETWEEN THE TURBINE EXHAUST
CONNECTION AND FIRST EXHAUST ISOLATION VALVE (OR
CONDENSER, IF THE TURBINE IS A CONDENSING TURBINE).
THE ATMOSPHERIC RELIEF VALVE OR OTHER PROTECTIVE

DEVICE MUST BE DESIGNED FOR FULL RELIEF OF THE
MAXIMUM STEAM FLOW THROUGH THE TURBINE WITHOUT
EXCESSIVE EXHAUST PRESSURE.
FAILURE TO INSTALL THIS TYPE OF DEVICE MAY RESULT IN

SEVERE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR SEVERE INJURY OR
DEATH TO PERSONNEL.
16. Fill oil reservoir with proper oil.
17. Inspect and test all controls, alarms, trips and relief valves. Calibrate and install all instrumentation.
Note
It is recommended that a pressure gage with an instrument block valve be
installed to measure the nozzle ring pressure. (A plugged connection port is
available.) This data may be beneficial if operational problems are encountered
during the initial startup.
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
45
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 279 / 633
18. Roll the shaft by hand through several revolutions checking for possible binding or rubbing. Any sign of
binding or rubbing should be thoroughly investigated before attempting to start the unit.
19. If automatic controllers or regulators are supplied, do not enable during initial start-up; use only after the
general operation of the equipment has been determined satisfactory. The turbine speed is to be
controlled with the trip and throttle valve until the governor and trip system have been checked.
PREPARING THE TURBINE FOR INITIAL START-UP: PYR
Note
Complete installation work before attempting to operate turbine. (Refer to
the INSTALLATION section of this manual)
1. Disconnect the coupling between the turbine and driven machine. Turbines driving through reduction gears
can remain coupled to the gear and operated together.
2. Disconnect the steam inlet piping at the turbine and blow out the line with the supply steam to remove any
foreign material from the pipe. Use targets for determination of cleanliness.
3. Verify the steam strainer is clean and properly installed in the steam chest inlet flange. Connect the pipe to
the turbine as a permanent joint. Adjust piping hangers to eliminate any unacceptable strain on the turbine
in cold and hot conditions. Piping strains must be calculated in agreement with current NEMA SM23
standards.
4. Remove bolts from the steam end bearing cap and the exhaust end bearing cap. Remove each bearing cap,
and place in a protected area.
5. Clean ball bearings and the bearing housing oil reservoirs with clean, lint free rags. Flood the ball bearings
with oil. (Refer to the LUBRICATION section for proper oil levels and lubrication requirements). Verify oil
rings are in correct location.
6. Apply an oil resistant sealant to bearing cap and housing horizontal joint surfaces. Insert dowel pins and
tighten all bolts.
7. If supplied, review the driven machine instruction manual for pre-start inspection procedures.
8. Inspect the governor linkage.
9. Verify free movement and clearances of the trip system. Manually activate the overspeed trip pin to verify
the overspeed trip system is functional.
10. Fabricate a clamp or other blocking device to secure the coupling sleeve (if supplied) to the hub while
operating the uncoupled turbine.
Note
Use a balanced adapter to secure balanced gear type coupling hubs during
uncoupled operation.
11. Verify that the exhaust relief valve is installed correctly and operates at the correct pressure.
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
46
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 280 / 633
-WARNING-
THE TURBINE SHOULD NOT BE OPERATED UNLESS THE
ATMOSPHERIC RELIEF VALVE OR OTHER PROTECTIVE DEVICE
HAS BEEN INSTALLED BETWEEN THE TURBINE EXHAUST
CONNECTION AND FIRST EXHAUST ISOLATION VALVE (OR
CONDENSER, IF THE TURBINE IS A CONDENSING TURBINE).
THE ATMOSPHERIC RELIEF VALVE OR OTHER PROTECTIVE

DEVICE MUST BE DESIGNED FOR FULL RELIEF OF THE
MAXIMUM STEAM FLOW THROUGH THE TURBINE WITHOUT
EXCESSIVE EXHAUST PRESSURE.
FAILURE TO INSTALL THIS TYPE OF DEVICE MAY RESULT IN

SEVERE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR SEVERE INJURY OR
DEATH TO PERSONNEL.
12. Fill oil lubricators with proper oil. Refer to the LUBRICATION section of this manual.
13. Inspect and test all controls, alarms, trips and relief valves. Calibrate and install all instrumentation.
Note
It is recommended that a pressure gage with an instrument block valve be
installed to measure the nozzle ring pressure. (A plugged connection port is
available.) This data may be beneficial if operational problems are encountered
during the initial startup.
14. Roll the shaft by hand through several revolutions checking for possible binding or rubbing. Any sign of
binding or rubbing should be thoroughly investigated before attempting to start the unit.
15. If automatic controllers or regulators are supplied, do not enable during initial start-up; use only after the
general operation of the equipment has been determined satisfactory.
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
47
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 281 / 633
AUTOSTART GUIDELINES FOR YR TURBINES
Introduction
The use of steam turbines as emergency drivers requires complex automation and process planning. Unlike a
motor driven string that requires an electric starter, automatic start of a turbine requires valving, casing and
piping drainage, fault feedback, and control system logic.
The goal of this document is to provide an outline of the basic requirements for any turbine autostart system,
and to provide the user with a starting point from which to plan the system. This information should be used as
a guide only as each installation may have unique requirements or features that mandates detailed review.
Automatic start-up operations vary in complexity depending upon the installation. Consideration must be given
to the following issues for autostart operation:
1. Autostart Methods
2. Driven Machine Characteristics
3. Installation
4. Condensate Removal
5. Bearing Lubrication
6. Controls Systems and Safety
7. Environment
8. Special Considerations for Specific YR Frames
The general autostart process begins with review of the start and stop method and consideration for special
requirements due to the environment.
Unless otherwise specified, the customer will supply all required apparatus for the autostart application.
Autostart Methods
There are (3) general methods for autostarting a steam turbine: Cold Start, Slow Roll, and Open Exhaust. Basic
rules that apply to all three (3) methods are:
Basic Autostart Rules
1. Follow the turbine instruction manual when preparing the turbine for service.
2. Eliminate any chance of water slugging the turbine by ensuring that admitted steam is free of water.
3. Steam condensate must not be allowed to accumulate in the casing, steam chest, and/or connected
piping. All components that can trap steam or water such as steam lines, casing, valves, oil cooler, etc.
must be thoroughly drained after shutting down.
4. The bearings must be adequately lubricated any time the shaft rotates.
5. Never bypass the turbine trip or governor valves.
6. Minimize the change in temperature as seen by the turbine from stand-by service to on-line service to
approximately 500 °F. Review with Elliott Product Engineering if the temperature change is greater than
500 °F.
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
48
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 282 / 633
Method #1 - Cold Start
The preferred autostart method is to cold start the unit. This requires opening the steam inlet valve and starting
the turbine. All YR turbines are designed to support a cold start.
There are limitations for cold starting a turbine. As a general rule, units should not be cold started if the ambient
temperature is below -20 °F. This temperature limit is the standard API 611/ ASME BPVC material design limit
for all casing materials except Class IIIL (ASME A352 grade LCB). For all YR turbine frames, the change in
exhaust temperature from stand-by service to on-line service is limited to 500 °F. Consult Product Engineering
if the startup differential temperature is greater than 500 °F.
Misalignment between the turbine and the driven equipment will exist while the unit is starting up and until
thermal transients stabilize. Increased vibration is to be expected during this transition period.
Some method is required to ensure that the exhaust valve is open prior to opening of the inlet auto-start valve.
(This is a safety issue as the casing could be over-pressurized.) This can be done most easily by use of a
check valve in the exhaust header. All turbine drains must be trapped to collect and eliminate condensate that
will collect from leakage of the check valve.
Method #2 - Slow Roll
Slow rolling is the second best method for YR turbine autostart.
Standard YR turbine slow roll speed is minimum 500-600 rpm, minimum. The driven equipment must always be
considered for slow roll, or any other autostart installation. The driven machine load characteristics also affect
string performance. Verify with other project vendors that this slow roll speed is acceptable. For example, some
pumps may have a minimum slow roll speed greater than 600 rpm, and to slow roll at 500-600 rpm may
severely damage the pump bearings and seals.
There are two standard arrangements for slow rolling a turbine. These are through the use of a needle valve or
orifice in a steam inlet shutoff valve bypass.
Needle Valve
Bypass the inlet shutoff valve with a needle valve, or similar throttling valve. Make sure the needle valve will
positively shutoff steam, or install a positive shutoff gate valve before the needle valve. The needle valve bypass
method is the recommended method.
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
49
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 283 / 633
Orifice
Bypass the inlet with an orifice and positive shutoff gate valve. There is a chance that the orifice will not pass
enough steam to start the slow roll process. Open the primary inlet valve to start the string, and then close the
orifice bypass gate valve as the unit reaches slow roll speed. An additional consideration when using an orifice
is that the orifice steam flow rate is strongly influenced by the steam parameters, and they cannot be tuned
online to accommodate unforeseen steam parameter differences.
Method #3 - Open Exhaust
The least preferred method is to open the exhaust valve and expose the unit to exhaust header steam. This will
put limited heat into the casing and bearings; however, it also presents some risks that must be considered.
Since the shaft is not rotating, the user must make sure the carbon rings remain free to seat and are not fouled
from steam contaminants such as boiler carry-over, etc. Since the turbine will not reach operating temperature,
the shaft will not fully expand and the seal clearance at the carbon rings will be greater than when at normal
operating temperature. This additional clearance will result in excess steam leakage. Furthermore, fluctuations
in exhaust temperature will affect seal leakage. In order to reduce the risk of lube oil water contamination and
collection of condensate in the packing case, it is recommended that a gland vacuum device be used to
evacuate steam from the packing case. Either a water eductor or steam ejector is acceptable. The user is
cautioned that a water eductor may never be blocked, and that were water to flow into the turbine packing,
significant damage to the unit is probable (e.g. rotor bow, damage packing).
CAUTION
Since the turbine will not reach operating temperature, the shaft will not fully expand, and the seal clearance at
the carbon rings will be greater than design. The additional clearance will result in excess steam leakage.
Fluctuations in exhaust temperature will affect seal leakage. It is recommended that a gland vacuum device be
installed and run continuously to handle excess steam leakage.
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
50
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 284 / 633
Either a water eductor or steam ejector would be acceptable. The user is cautioned that a water eductor must
never be blocked, and that if water were to flow into the turbine packing and contact the shaft, significant
damage to the unit will occur. (I.e. bow rotor, damage packing).
Note: Regardless of which of the 3 methods is selected, it is necessary to have automatic

drain traps on the turbine drains, and inlet and exhaust piping.
Driven Machine Characteristics
The driven machine must apply a load to the turbine as the turbine accelerates. If the turbine and driven
machine (or gear and driven machine) are started unloaded, and the turbine is not loaded until the turbine
reaches rated speed, the turbine will inevitably trip out.
If no load is applied to the turbine when it is started rapidly, the inherent high starting torque of a single stage
turbine, combined with the governor valve being opened when the turbine is idle may result in an acceleration
rate which prevents any governor from controlling the turbine speed before the trip speed is reached.
Centrifugal pumps, fans, and compressors will usually provide sufficient load to prevent the unit from
accelerating beyond the speed governor setting. Electric generators require special consideration.
Alternating current electric generators require special consideration
Installation
See turbine instruction manual for details and recommended piping practice.
A tachometer with remote readout capability is recommended for mounting in the control room.
Vibration monitoring equipment is recommended if the installation is in critical service. The required turbine
utilities (ex. steam, air, water, oil) must be available for any autostart application.
Condensate Removal
Steam condensate must not be allowed to accumulate in the steam inlet piping, steam chest, casing, seal piping
(if applicable), or packing cases. If a turbine has been shut down, it will have condensate in it, and this must be
removed before the turbine is started. The turbine casing and steam chest drain connections must be equipped
with electric or pneumatic operated valves, or steam traps. The drain valves must be closed shortly after the
turbine is started when steam quality is good.
Steam traps are recommended for an autostart application as they are economic and reliable. Steam traps
cycle as required, so that the unit is always prepared for a quick autostart. The traps open when cold and close
when exposed to hot steam. If the steam temperate is low, however, the traps may not function properly. So if
the steam temperature is close to the condensate temperature, the operation of the trap must be verified; or it
may be necessary to use a more complicated system that utilizes solenoid operated valves on the drains.
When using these valves it will be necessary to furnish a control system that will open the valves and use a time
delay relay to allow for the draining of the casing before letting the turbine start.
When ambient temperature is below freezing and the casing is cold much of the steam may condense on cold
startup. The customer is advised to take the proper precautions for condensate removal.
The turbine drain connections are supplied to remove condensate from the turbine. Typical turbine drain
connections are:
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
51
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 285 / 633
M - Turbine casing drain. Connect through suitable valve and steam trap to open drain
M1 - High pressure casing drain (on BYRH, BYRHH and MYR). Connect through suitable valve and steam trap
to open drain
M4 - Below seat drain (steam chest). Connect through suitable valve and steam trap to open drain
M5 - Above seat drain (steam chest). Connect through suitable valve and steam trap to open drain
L3-1 - Intermediate leakoff header (BYRHH packing case only). Connect through suitable valve and steam trap
to an intermediate pressure header at 75-125 psig.
If present, the Trip and Throttle Valve (TTV) will also have drains. See the TTV vendor's recommendations for
these drains.
Never block the atmospheric leakoff connections (designated Lx on Elliott drawings). Leakoff connections must
be piped to an open drain with no obstructions in the line and the minimum length possible.
Packing cases
Removing leak off steam/ condensate from packing cases is a critical consideration on all units with a
backpressure greater than 100 psig and on all units when the Open Exhaust autostart method is used. This is
of particular importance on BYRH, BYRHH, CYRH, DYRH, MYR and condensing units. An alternative that
eliminates seal leakage is to use dry gas/ mechanical face seals. Elliott has experience with John Crane and
Flowserve mechanical face seals; however, Elliott does not recommend mechanical face seals for autostart
applications due to the potential for significant damage should condensate be ingested by the seal.
High backpressure
A vacuum sealing system is required for the packing case leakoff on high backpressure units having an exhaust
pressure greater than 100 psig. The vacuum system must operate any time the casing is pressurized. The
vacuum system must be in operation before the unit is started. The system should be sized to provide 0.5 psi
vacuum at the packing case leak off connection.
Water eductors or Steam eductors

The Elliott YR standard is to supply a water eductor as the primary vacuum device. Eductor must be run to an
open drain to avoid any possibility of water backing into the turbine packing cases. Water in the packing cases
will bow the rotor.
A steam ejector may be specified in lieu of a water eductor. Steam ejectors may be run to an open drain, or
they may be run to a condenser system. When supplied, the Elliott standard is to have a condenser first
system, which requires a seal pot height of 72 inches.
Condensing Turbines
On condensing units, sealing steam is required for the packing cases to prevent ingress of air into the steam
system. The sealing system may operate continuously, or it may be started with the unit. Automatic valves are
recommended for steam admission control. The rotor must be rotating when the sealing system is operating in
order to prevent a rotor bow.
Bearing lubrication
The turbine bearings must be lubricated any time the shaft rotates. Units with a steam inlet temperature greater
than 750F are typically furnished with an Auxiliary Oil Pump (AOP). Whenever an AOP is provided it must run
30-40 minutes after the unit is shut down to assist in cooling the turbine.
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
52
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 286 / 633
Oil Selection
Select a lubricating oil according to Elliott standard recommendations as specified in the turbine instruction
manual. For cold ambient temperature applications, a polyalphaolefin synthetic oil with high Viscosity Index
(VI) should be considered.
Ring oiled
If provided, oil rings will properly lubricate the bearings during start up as long as the oil viscosity is no too high.
Cooling water for the cooling water chamber in the bearing cases must be supplied when the turbine is started.
Automatic valves (either electric or pneumatic) are recommended for this application. When the turbine is idle,
water should not be circulated to the cooling water chambers in order to avoid atmospheric condensation in the
bearing cases.
A polyalphaolefin synthetic oil with a VI greater than 120 should be used to limit the increase in lubricating oil
viscosity with low temperature. The minimum oil temperature for startup of a ring-oil lubricated turbine is 40F. If
the temperature of the oil is expected to be below 40F it will be necessary to heat the oil prior to startup. This
can be accomplished by:
a. Running hot water through the bearing housing heat exchanger.
b. Wrapping the bearing housing and water supply lines with heat traced insulation.
c. Using immersion heaters located in each bearing housing sump.
Pressure lubricated
A force feed lubrication system is ideal for turbine autostart applications. However, other methods are also
acceptable. Cooling water for the oil cooler must be supplied when the turbine is started. For pressurized
lubrication, the minimum starting oil temperature is 70 F. The following features are necessary for a standby
service turbine pressure lube system:
1. Have a reservoir immersion heater to maintain proper oil temperature (steam or electric, at customer’s
discretion)
2. Have an Auxiliary Oil Pump that continuously circulates oil.
3. Shaft-driven or motor-driven Main Oil Pump (MOP). Pressure lubricated turbines are normally equipped with
a positive displacement oil pump driven from the turbine shaft. The pump suction line is furnished with a check
foot valve to maintain oil in the pump casing and inlet piping to assure normal pump operation when the turbine
is started.
4. Motor-driven AOP. An AOP is recommended to assure priming of the MOP when starting the unit. (If the
check valve in the MOP suction line fails, an AOP will assure priming and supply of the system.) When the unit
has an oil trip cylinder or a separate oil operated Trip and Throttle Valve, an AOP is required to pressurize the
cylinder in order to open the trip valve for start-up. The AOP may be electric, pneumatic or steam driven, per
customer’s specification.
Purge Oil Mist.

Purge oil mist provides a controlled, benign, atmosphere inside the bearing housing that prevents atmospheric
contaminants from entering the bearings and lubrication system. Unless specifically required by the customer,
purge oil mist is not a requirement for operation. The supplier of the purge oil mist system is responsible for
automatic start of the mist system, if required.
Pure Oil Mist Lubrication.

Pure oil mist lubrication is only applicable for units having rolling element bearings, and so is only possible for
the PYR. The supplier of the pure oil mist system is responsible for automatic start of the mist system. The
system must be active whenever the shaft rotates.
Either type system must be active whenever the shaft rotates.
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
53
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 287 / 633
Control Systems and Safety
Automatic Steam Admission Systems

The automatic steam inlet valve system as given in API 614 R3 Figure A-19, is the recommended autostart
setup. (This figure is provided below.) This system is composed of three branches: Automatic steam admission
branch, Manual inlet valve branch, and the Slow Roll branch.
Automatic steam admission branch (required)

The turbine may be started, stopped and restarted by control of this valve. The primary autostart line should
consist of a solenoid operated positive shutoff valve. The valve is to be isolated through upstream and
downstream block valves, with drain traps installed as required. (Additional steam traps may be required,
depending on the piping installation.) A solenoid valve, mounted in the air supply line to the turbine inlet steam
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
54
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 288 / 633
valve actuator, is to be three way, passing an air signal to the actuator when (energized / de-energized) and
exhausting the signal when (de-energized / energized).
Automatic Valve Details

The inlet control valve must be located no more the (5) feet upstream of the turbine inlet flange. The inlet valve
should open in (20) seconds and close in (2) seconds. The valve should be ANSI Class IV shutoff or better, and
should be sized to pass full steam supply with the minimum possible pressure drop. The pressure drop across
this valve must be considered in calculating the turbine steam rate.
Additional steam traps may be required, depending on the piping installation.
Manual inlet valve branch (recommended but optional)

This valve is the standard manual positive shutoff steam service block valve. This valve is used to manually
operate to unit.
Slow roll branch (recommended but optional)

See discussion on Slow Roll.
Turbine Governor Valve

The governor valve can be used to control steam flow when driving high inertia equipment. (In these
applications it is assumed any leakage past the governor valve will not be sufficient to cause the turbine to
rotate.)
Controls for Start up

Customer must specify to Elliott the action of each device in the autostart system. For example, does the unit
trip on loss of power, or would the unit start on loss of power?
Governor
The basic governor will assume control of the governor valve before the turbine has accelerated to rated speed,
provided there is sufficient load.
Mechanical hydraulic Governors

Mechanical hydraulic governors are generally oil relay type control systems. They are TG, PG and UG
governors. These governors have self-contained oil systems with a submerged oil pump, and are therefore self-
lubricated and self-priming. Governors must have the ability to maintain internal oil at an acceptable
temperature. Heaters or coolers may be required in some cases.
Electronic Governors
Electronic governors consist of an electronic control system and a pneumatic controlled governor valve
positioner. They are the Peak 150, 505 and Elliott EDG with a Fisher or Valtek positioner. It must be
remembered that governors with remote speed changers may require electrical or pneumatic power. All
electronic governors require a warm-up period of at least 10 minutes. In standby service, electronic governors
should be powered 100% of the time.
Air
The availability of operating air must be considered for governors with pneumatic speed changers, or for
electronic governors with pneumatic governor valve actuators.
Trip valve
Standard YR Trip Valve

The standard trip valve on YR turbines is a spring loaded trip valve. The standard YR trip valve is activated
through a mechanical plunger system. The standard YR trip activates on overspeed, per NEMA SM23 control
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
55
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 289 / 633
requirements. The standard mechanical trip cannot be reset from a remote location. A direct-connected,
pneumatic trip system (RCS) is an optional YR trip system, and may be remotely reset.
Separate Trip and Throttle Valve (Gimpel, Ebara)

The standard separate TTV is a Gimpel, spring loaded, oil operated valve. The valve is manually reset as
standard. Oil pressure is required to set the valve in the ready position. An auxiliary oil pump is required for all
applications with a separate TTV.
Environmental Considerations
Ambient temperature is the major factor to consider for autostart applications. Consult Elliott for cold weather
autostart applications.
Special Considerations for Specific YR Frames
Slow Roll of IMO Pumps

IMO does not recommend running three-screw pumps at speeds of 300-400 RPM. At these speeds, the
volumetric efficiency is off-the-chart in negative territory. This means that no fluid circulates from the pump
because of internal slip. The result is internal heat build-up, which will overheat the pump in a short period of
time.
On a positive displacement IMO G3DBST-250P, the minimum required speed to achieve at least 50%
volumetric efficiency is 1000 rpm at 65 SSU and 256 psig. Although the discharge pressure may not be 256
psig initially, it will eventually build to the relief valve set point. Also, the ambient temperature may affect the oil
temperature, which in turns affects the flow rate and volumetric efficiency. At 1000 RPM, the IMO G3DBST-
250P pump requires 10 BHP with 65 SSU oil at 256 psig. For proper orifice selection, Elliott would advise
customer the steam flow to produce 10 hp from the purchased unit.
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
56
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 290 / 633
COMMON AUXILLARIES
SOLENOID TRIP
The solenoid (Figure 41) disengages the trip latch and releases the spring loaded trip lever (2). The
trip lever striking plate (3) strikes pin (14), which disengages the hand trip lever from the trip valve-
resetting lever, closing the trip valve (all settings shown in Figure 42). The position of the solenoid trip
lever prevents the turbine trip lever from returning to the set position and being relatched. To relatch
the resetting lever onto the turbine trip lever, the circumstance that allowed the solenoid to activate
must be corrected and the solenoid trip lever must be returned to its original position.
-WARNING-
DO NOT BLOCK OPEN OR INTERFERE IN THE OPERATION OF
THE SOLENOID TRIP LEVER DURING OPERATION OF
MAINTENANCE OF THE TURBINE AND RELATED SYSTEMS.
FIGURE 41
SOLENOID TRIP SYSTEM
PARTS LIST
NO. DESCRIPTION QTY.
1 Solenoid 1
2 Solenoid Trip Lever 1
3 Strike Plate 1
4 Spring 1
5 Bracket 1
6 Capscrew 2
7 Lockwasher 2
8 Washer 4
9 Lockwasher 3
10 Capscrew 3
11 Capscrew 1
12 Washer 1
13 Lockwasher 1
14 Pin 1
15 Machine Screw 2
16 Nut 2 FIGURE 42 – SOLENOID TRIP AND PARTS LIST
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
57
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 291 / 633
TACHOMETERS (SPD-100)
Ground-free terminals have no polarity – easy installation. To calibrate and SPD 100 sown in Figure 43a,
remove the sealing plug on the back of the housing. Apply the calculated signal frequency to terminals 1 and 2.
Select the appropriate gate time range on the 4-position switch shown in Figure 31b. Adjust the vernier
potentiometer for the desired display.
FIGURE 43a FIGURE 43b

DYNALCO SPD 100 TACHOMETER TACHOMETER SWITCH POSITION
FIGURE 43c
TACHOMETER – FRONT, TOP AND SIDE VIEWS
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
58
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 292 / 633
THERMAL & ACCOUSTICAL BLANKET

When insulation is furnished, all purchasers’ connections are extended to the outside of the jacket, and the
packing case leakoff is manifolded and terminated in one connection outside of the jacket.
The turbine is covered by three blankets – cover, exhaust casing and steam chest. Maintenance access to the
interior of the turbine requires only removal of the blanket for the cover by cutting the wires.
The jacket is designed so that one man can remove the top half by unsnapping four latches. Removing the top
half permits access to the turbine without further dismantling of the jacket.
FIGURE 44
TURBINE BLANKET
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
59
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 293 / 633
GEARS (R4 SERIES)

The Elliott “C” line gears are used for speed reducing and speed increasing service. The upper limit that a “C”
line speed reducer is designed for is 10,000 rpm or 20,000 feet per minute pitch-line velocity. The upper limit for
a speed increaser is 10,000 rpm or 12,500 feet per minute.
The gears utilize gearing of the double helical design. The gear teeth are cut after the gear has been shrunk on
its shaft and ground to assure concentricity between pitch circle and bearing journals. Elliott holds tooth profile,
spacing, run out, and precise tolerances to assure quiet, trouble-free operation. After hobbing, the gear and
pinion are finish lapped. Finished gear assemblies are dynamically balanced to precision machinery standards.
All gear blanks are made from high alloy, high tensile steel.
Each unit is carefully inspected and tested before it leaves the factory. Standard testing includes running the
gear at operating speed with no load. During testing a check is made for housing vibration, bearing
temperatures, seal and lubrication piping leaks, lubrication system operation and, finally, tooth contact. When
specified, a detailed test of the gear at rated speed and 10% overspeed with no load, partial load or full load is
performed. Data recorded during this type test includes bearing temperatures, shaft and housing vibration
levels, oil flow and pressure, oil temperatures, and a complete sound level analysis.

ENCASED GEAR WITH OIL PUMP ENCASED GEAR WITH OIL PUMP
VIEWED FROM HIGH SPEED SHAFT VIEWED FROM LOW SPEED SHAFT
D R A
© Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
60
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 294 / 633
RING OILED CIRCULATION SYSTEMS

An oil circulation system is available for YR Turbine application where there is a need to extend the operation of
ring-oiled turbines from the present limit of 600oF to 750oF steam inlet temperatures. Since the units are ring-
oiled with attendant increased bearing clearances, the speed limit is still 5000 rpm.
The picture below shows a typical system. This scheme is properly classified as an "Oil Circulation System" as
opposed to a pressurized lubrication system for the following reasoning:
1. Bearing lubrication is by ring-oiling.

2. No oil tank is utilized.
3. Interconnecting oil piping between the steam end bearing case and exhaust pedestal is through
an oil cooler. In like manner the water piping between the water jackets is also served by the
oil cooler.
4. The fairly long thin oil cooler supplements and extends the oil cooling effect of the water
jackets.
5. The primary function of the small shaft driver pump is to promote oil circulation for maximum
heat transfer.
INSPECTION PLUG
ROTOR SHAFT CLOSED LOOP

JOURNAL OIL RING OILER
BEARING
OIL
RESERVOIR
COOLING
WATER
COOLING
CHAMBER
LUBRICATING OIL
COOLING WATER

LUBE SYSTEM – FRONT VIEW RING OILED CIRCULATION LUBE SYSTEM
D R A © Elliott Group
DOC000000049294
February 2014
61
IN R- 16
2
06-A
0
P 295 / 633
YR Steam Turbine Pre-Start Manual Attachment # 1
ELLIOTT PRE-START CHECKLIST
Turbine Inspection
Initials Date Completed
______ _____ Yes No 1. Are there signs of any shipping damage or mishandling.
______ _____ Yes No 2. Have pictures of any damage been taken and submitted.
______ _____ Yes No 3. Date that turbine and parts were received at site. ____________
______ _____ Yes No 4. Were parts inventoried.
______ _____ Yes No 5. Was Elliott advised of any shortages.
______ _____ Yes No 6. Are there signs of improper storage, rust, etc.
______ _____ Yes No 7. If yes to #6, when and by who.
When advised (Date) _________________________________
Advised by (Name) _________________________________
______ _____ Yes No 8. Is unit subject to environment extremes, dust, corrosives, moisture, etc..
______ _____ Yes No 9. Were spare parts inventoried.
______ _____ Yes No 10. Is the turbine rotation correct compared to the driven machine.
Comments:___________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
A. Alignment and Support Structure
______ _____ Yes No 1. Does the baseplate appear adequately rigid.
______ _____ Yes No 2. Baseplate properly shimmed and leveled.
______ _____ Yes No 3. Foundation and hold down bolts secure.
______ _____ Yes No 4. Turbine and driven machine properly leveled.
______ _____ Yes No 5. Turbine and driven machine mounted solidly to baseplate.
______ _____ Yes No 6. Full face stainless steel shims used.
______ _____ Yes No 7. Equipment checked for soft foot.
______ _____ Yes No 8. Proper shaft end spacing set and recorded.
62
D R A
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 296 / 633
______ _____ Yes No 9. Coupling properly fitted to shaft.
______ _____ Yes No 10. Coupling keys trimmed flush with coupling and filling entire keyway.
______ _____ Yes No 11. Coupling properly lubricated.
______ _____ Yes No 12. Coupling grease used. Type: ___________________________
______ _____ Yes No 13. Coupling is free to float.
______ _____ Yes No 14. Final coupling alignment checked in cold condition without piping.
______ _____ Yes No 15. Alignment readings monitored as piping is individually attached.
______ _____ Yes No 16. Is baseplate grouted. (Grout only after cold alignment)
______ _____ Yes No 17. Equipment final doweled.
Comments:___________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
B. Piping – Ref NEMA Standards SM-23
______ _____ Yes No 1. Does steam piping have sufficient drains and traps.
______ _____ Yes No 2. Are there any undrained low spots in steam piping.
______ _____ Yes No 3. Piping schematic drawn and submitted with service report.
______ _____ Yes No 4. Expansion joints used.
______ _____ Yes No 5. Piping support system reviewed.
Ref NEMA SM_23 for allowable forces & moments. Rule of thumb: Support location
spacing in feet is equal to pipe diameter plus 1.
______ _____ Yes No 6. Piping dead weight supported by hangers or springs.
______ _____ Yes No 7. Spring hangers set in cold position.
______ _____ Yes No 8. Shipping blocks removed from springs.
______ _____ Yes No 9. Shipping brackets removed from expansion brackets.
______ _____ Yes No 10. Inlet and exhaust steam line flanges must line up with turbine inlet and
exhaust casing connections when piping is not bolted.
63
D R A
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 297 / 633
(Note: Unit must be aligned before any steam piping is connected.)
______ _____ Yes No 11. If piping was out of alignment, were adjustments made.
______ _____ Yes No 12. All piping has sufficient clearance with foundation, pipe sleeves, etc.
______ _____ Yes No 13. Steam inlet pipe has to take off from main header to minimize moisture
induction.
______ _____ Yes No 14. Is there a piping run or dead leg beyond the take off.
______ _____ Yes No 15. Turbine adequately drained at all low points.
______ _____ Yes No 16. All piping drain valves accessible to operators.
______ _____ Yes No 17. All casing drain valves accessible to operators.
______ _____ Yes No 18. Traps vented to low pressure steam lines have isolation valves to
prevent steam blow back in casing during shutdown.
______ _____ Yes No 19. Back pressure exhaust lines have full flow relief valve between casing
and stop valve.
______ _____ Yes No 20. Full flow exhaust relief valve setting = ___________ psig
______ _____ Yes No 21. All casing drains and leakoffs independently piped and valves as
required.
______ _____ Yes No 22. Steam flow measuring elements removed from piping prior to steam
line blow down.
______ _____ Yes No 23. Steam piping thoroughly blown down with steam.
Ref. NEMA SM-23 for guidelines.
______ _____ Yes No 24. Steam line blow down targets inspected.
______ _____ Yes No 25. Steam strainer clean and properly installed.
______ _____ Yes No 26. Does installation use quick-open/auto-start valves.
______ _____ Yes No 27. Is main steam stop valve accessible.
______ _____ Yes No 28. Sentinel valve installed.
______ _____ Yes No 29. Sentinel valve setting = _____________ psig
______ _____ Yes No 30. Water cooling lines to bearing housing properly installed.
______ _____ Yes No 31. Water flow adjusting and shut off valve provided.
64
D R A
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 298 / 633
______ _____ Yes No 32. Does plant operation on same water supply cause a decrease in water
flow/pressure to turbine bearing housing?
______ _____ Yes No 33. Steam leakoff connections (packing case, governor valve stem, trip
valve stem) adequately piped, without restrictions, without manifolding, and
with no pipe size reduction.
______ _____ Yes No 34. Steam leakoff lines have proper slope.
Comments:___________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
C. Lubrication System
______ _____ Yes No 1. Turbine bearing oil supply orifices installed.
______ _____ Yes No 2. Pressure lube systems flushed per recommendations. Refer to
instruction book or SEB-G-2072.
______ _____ Yes No 3. Lube oil system flush completed and final screen/filter inspection
witnessed.
______ _____ Yes No 4. Reservois cleaned after flushing.
______ _____ Yes No 5. Oil pump rotation verified.
______ _____ Yes No 6. Relief valve settings checked.
______ _____ Yes No 7. Check valves properly installed.
______ _____ Yes No 8. Oil pressure regulating valves properly adjusted.
______ _____ Yes No 9. All piping/fitting oil leaks corrected after flush.
______ _____ Yes No 10. All piping/fitting inspected for oil leaks after unit commissioning and
leaks corrected.
______ _____ Yes No 11. Drain piping has sufficient slope -1/2” per foot.
______ _____ Yes No 12. Piping does not contain any blockage or restrictions, i.e. oversize
thermowells.
65
D R A
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 299 / 633
______ _____ Yes No 13. Pressure/temperature switches/transmitters calibrated and operation
verified.
______ _____ Yes No 14. Oil pressure regulating valve locknuts tightened correctly.
______ _____ Yes No 15. Protective devices verified.
______ _____ Yes No 16. Gimpel valve trip circuit orifice pressure drop checked.
______ _____ Yes No 17. Ring oiled unit oil level heights set.
AYR, BYR 2.62” to 2.74” from center line
CYR, DYR, BYRH 3.55” to 3.68” from center line
Multi-YR 3.18” to 3.25” from center line
Steam end oil level sight level __________ inches
Exhaust end oil level sight level __________ inches
______ _____ Yes No 18. Type of lubricating oil used: ___________________________
Comments:___________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
D. Controls, Governors, Trip System
______ _____ Yes No 1. Verify governor valve stroke properly set:
0.5” max TG Governors 0.6” max PG, UG, PE Governors
Actual Setting: _______________ inches
______ _____ Yes No 2. Governor valve and linkage moves freely.
______ _____ Yes No 3. Is governor filled with proper oil.
______ _____ Yes No 4. Is governor oil lever proper.
______ _____ Yes No 5. Type of governor oil used: ___________________________
______ _____ Yes No 6. Actuator used with electronic governors adjusted for span and stroke.
______ _____ Yes No 7. Governor valve opening signal = __________ mA psig
______ _____ Yes No 8. Governor valve max travel signal =________ mA psig
66
D R A
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 300 / 633
______ _____ Yes No 9. Full governor valve travel obtained with maximum control signal from
electronic governor to actuator.
______ _____ Yes No 10. TG13E/17E actuators supplied with start up levers.
______ _____ Yes No 11. Automatic hand valves properly piped, wired, and flow dampeners
installed.
______ _____ Yes No 12. Automatic hand valves stroked to verify operation.
______ _____ Yes No 13. Automatic hand valve flow controls adjusted to obtain proper stroke
time under load.
______ _____ Yes No 14. Signal wires from governor terminals to actuator terminals are shielded.
______ _____ Yes No 15. Overspeed trip valve linkage is free.
______ _____ Yes No 16. Overspeed trip lever resets easily and trips when operated by hand.
______ _____ Yes No 17. Hand trip lever resets when resetting lever is pulled above the knife
edge.
______ _____ Yes No 18. Proper knife edge engagement obtained.
______ _____ Yes No 19. Trip pin moves freely.
______ _____ Yes No 20. Clearance between trip pin and trip plunger = 0.062”.
Max allowable = 0.090”
______ _____ Yes No 21. Bearing case trip operation verified.
______ _____ Yes No 22. Trip and throttle valve hand trip operation verified.
______ _____ Yes No 23. Tomahawk of solenoid trip properly set and adjusted.
______ _____ Yes No 24. Microswitch properly adjusted to hand trip lever.
______ _____ Yes No 25. Operation of remote trips verified.
______ _____ Yes No 26. Low oil pressure trip operation verified.
______ _____ Yes No 27. Operation of any customer supplied trips verified.
______ _____ Yes No 28. Speed pickup probes properly set at 0.015” to 0.020”.
______ _____ Yes No 29. Interconnecting and trip circuit wiring diagrams reviewed for correctness
and clarity.
______ _____ Yes No 30. Electronic governor contacts inputs reviewed.
67
D R A
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 301 / 633
______ _____ Yes No 31. Governor I/O relays properly located and correct voltage.
______ _____ Yes No 32. Number of gear teeth programmed in governor match actual number of
gear teeth used on turbine.
______ _____ Yes No 33. Governor configuration recorded.
Comments:___________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
E. Instrumentation
______ _____ Yes No 1. Shaft vibration alarm and trip points set.
______ _____ Yes No 2. Thrust bearing alarm and trip points set.
______ _____ Yes No 3. Bearing temperature alarm and trip points set.
______ _____ Yes No 4. Pressure gauge locations visibly accessible.
______ _____ Yes No 5. Thermometer locations visibly accessible.
______ _____ Yes No 6. Local tachometer visually accessible for operators.
______ _____ Yes No 7. All trip and alarm switches adjusted and operation verified.
______ _____ Yes No 8. Pressure gauges calibrated.
______ _____ Yes No 9. Pressure and temperature transmitters calibrated.
______ _____ Yes No 10. Flow transmitters calibrated.
Comments:___________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
F. Operation – General, No Load, Loaded Checks
______ _____ Yes No 1. Turbine start up method reviewed and understood by customer.
68
D R A
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 302 / 633
______ _____ Yes No 2. Driven machine operations requirements reviewed and understood.
______ _____ Yes No 3. Steam conditions:
Inlet pressure ________ units of measure _______
Inlet temperature ________ units of measure _______
Exhaust pressure ________ units of measure _______
______ _____ Yes No 4. Is warm up technique satisfactory.
______ _____ Yes No 5. Is slow roll precaution (500 rpm) reviewed with and understood by
customer.
______ _____ Yes No 6. Equipment visually inspected prior to operation.
______ _____ Yes No 7. Oil at proper start up temperature (70°F).
______ _____ Yes No 8. Auxiliary and main oil pump operation verified.
______ _____ Yes No 9. Bearing oil supply pressure at proper levels.
______ _____ Yes No 10. Ring oiled unit have proper oil level.
______ _____ Yes No 11. Casing drains open.
______ _____ Yes No 12. Piping drains open.
______ _____ Yes No 13. Traps blocked in and operational.
______ _____ Yes No 14. Main steam and exhaust lines being warmed up.
______ _____ Yes No 15. Air supplied to governor actuators.
______ _____ Yes No 16. Governor at proper start up speed settings.
______ _____ Yes No 17. Driven machine properly lined up.
______ _____ Yes No 18. Condenser and sealing steam system lined up if required.
______ _____ Yes No 19. Close drains when building vacuum on condensing units.
______ _____ Yes No 20. Adjust sealing steam supply pressures as required.
______ _____ Yes No 21. Visually inspect unit and verify all pressures and temperatures are at
minimum required values.
______ _____ Yes No 22. Rest trip valve.
______ _____ Yes No 23. Begin slow roll operation at 500 rpm.
______ _____ Yes No 24. Verify the oil rings turn on the shaft and deliver oil.
69
D R A
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 303 / 633
______ _____ Yes No 25. Run in carbon rings as requird.
______ _____ Yes No 26. Verify operation of trip system by hand tripping.
______ _____ Yes No 27. Monitor and record all required operating parameters.
______ _____ Yes No 28. Bring turbine up to speed as required.
______ _____ Yes No 29. Does governor operate satisfactorily.
______ _____ Yes No 30. Bearing oil temperatures at speed.
Steam End Temperature ________ units of measure _______
Exhaust End Temperature ________ units of measure _______
Measured at sump Measured at bearing shell
______ _____ Yes No 31. Overspeed trip test conducted three (3) times.
Trip test 1: _____________ rpm
Trip test 2: _____________ rpm
Trip test 3: _____________ rpm
______ _____ Yes No 32. RPM variation at load = ________________ rpm
______ _____ Yes No 33. Turbine operates at rated speed.
______ _____ Yes No 34. Auxiliary equipment functions satisfactorily.
______ _____ Yes No 35. Oil levels satisfactory.
______ _____ Yes No 36. Steam leakage satisfactory.
At carbon rings Yes No
At valve stems Yes No
______ _____ Yes No 37. Is there no oil leakage.
______ _____ Yes No 38. Is unit loaded to nameplate data.
______ _____ Yes No 39. Hand valves in proper operating position.
______ _____ Yes No 40. Customer understands how to operate hand valves.
______ _____ Yes No 41. Operating data recorded.
Comments:___________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
70
D R A
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 304 / 633
G. Miscellaneous
______ _____ Yes No 1. Cold alignment figures measured and recorded.
______ _____ Yes No 2. Turbine doweled to baseplate.
______ _____ Yes No 3. driven machine doweled to baseplate.
______ _____ Yes No 4. If turbine drives a generator, was turbine generator installation and
start up check list consulted.
Comments:___________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
71
D R A
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 305 / 633
ELLIOTT TECHNICAL TRAINING INFORMATION
TECHNICAL TRAINING
ELLIOTT YR TURBINE
Length of Course: 3 days Dates: offered in Spring and Fall
Class size: 8 Min – 12 Max
Who Should Attend:

This course is designed for operations, maintenance, engineering and supervisory personnel responsible for the Elliott YR turbine.
This course is balanced between classroom lectures and hands-on workshops.
Objectives:
Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:
- Identify All the Major YR Components,
- Understand the YR Components’ Functions,
- Explain how Mechanical & Electronic Turbine Governors operate,
- Understand Mechanical & Electronic Overspeed Trip Systems,
- Disassemble a YR Turbine (with actual AYR Turbine),
- Assemble a YR Turbine (with actual AYR Turbine),
- Start-up & Shutdown of a YR Turbine, and
- Define Preventative Maintenance Procedures including Troubleshooting.
Course Overview:
YR Components & Function
Steam Turbine Governors & Servo Motors
Disassembly/Assembly of an AYR Turbine (including Workshops)
Start-Up & Operation
Safety Precautions
Proper Maintenance & Troubleshooting
ELLIOTT MULTI-STAGE MULTI-VALVE STEAM TURBINE

Who Should Attend:

This course is designed for operations, maintenance, engineers, and supervisory personnel responsible for Elliott MSMV Steam
Turbines.
Objectives:
- Understand Steam Turbine Theory & the Basic Thermodynamics of Steam Turbines,
- Identify All the Major Steam Turbine Components,
- Understand the Turbine Components’ Functions,
- Explain how Mechanical & Electronic Steam Turbine Governors operate,
- Understand the Function & Operation of Steam Turbine Servo Motors,
- Operate & Maintain an Elliott Steam Turbine (including Troubleshooting), and
- Learn Coupling Disassembly/Assembly.
Course Overview:
Steam Turbine Theory & Basic Thermodynamics
Steam Turbine Components and Function
Rotor Balancing
Operation & Troubleshooting
Preventative Maintenance
Workshops: Bearing Failures & Coupling Disassembly
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 306 / 633
72
ELLIOTT CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR

Who Should Attend:

This course is designed for operations, maintenance, engineers, and supervisory personnel responsible for Elliott Process
Compressors.
Objectives:
- Identify All the Major Compressor Components,
- Understand the Compressor Components’ Functions,
- Understand Basic Compressor Aerodynamics,
- Interpret Compressor Performance Curves,
- Explain how Compressor Controllers operate,
- Operate & Maintain an Elliott Compressor,
- Understand Rotor Balancing, and
- Learn Coupling & Iso-Carbon Seal Assembly/Disassembly.
Course Overview:
Compressor Components & Function
Basic Compressor Aerodynamics
Compressor Controllers including Anti-Surge Control
Operation, Maintenance, & Troubleshooting
Rotor Balancing
Workshops: Bearing Failures, Coupling Disassembly/Assembly, Iso-Carbon Seal Disassembly/Assembly
ELLIOTT LUBE & SEAL SYSTEM

On Day 2, class goes to our Lube Manufacturing Facility in
Belle Vernon, PA (About 40 minutes from Jeannette)
Who Should Attend:
This course is designed for operations, maintenance, engineering, and supervisory personnel responsible for Elliott Lube & Seal
Systems. It is recommended for anyone attending the Process Compressor or MSMV Turbine Course.
Objectives:
- Identify All the Major Lube/Seal System Components,
- Understand the Lube/Seal System Components’ Functions,
- Understand the Properties of Turbomachinery Lubricants
- Define Basic Instrumentation,
- Explain the principle Steps required for Lube System Commissioning, and
- Operate & Maintain an Elliott Lube System.
Course Overview:
Lubricating Oil Properties Review
Oil System Overview
Buffer Gas System Overview
Basic Instrumentation
Maintenance & Troubleshooting
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 307 / 633
73
Workshop: Cross-sectional Components
CUSTOMIZED ON-SITE PROGRAMS
When possible, Elliott recommends that training take place at Elliott – away from normal business and phone interruptions.
However, when distance makes travel prohibitive, when staff availability is a problem, or when it is best that training be carried out
at site (or using your own system configuration and equipment), Elliott will draw from its technical resources to prepare and present
a course to meet your specific needs.
For a quote for customized on-site training, please call the Technical Training Department or send the following information by email
to training@elliott-turbo.com.
1. Elliott Shop Order Number(s)

2. Desired Training Location
3. Number of Attendees
4. Attendees Job Statues (engineer, operator, maintenance,…)
5. Desired date(s)
6. Agenda Requirements
Please check out our website for additional training programs, locations nearest you,
and our “free” maintenance tip webinars:
http://www.elliott-turbo.com/new/service_train.html
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 308 / 633
74
COURSE INFORMATION
ENROLLMENT
To register for a course, contact the Elliott Technical Training Department in Jeannette, PA at 724-600-8521 or email:
training@elliott-turbo.com.
SEMINAR FEE
The prices indicated cover course tuition, training material & manual, lunches, dinner (one evening), refreshments, and attendance
certificate.
Travel and living expenses are the responsibility of each student. Elliott assumes no liability for any fees that may be incurred due
to the cancellation of any classes. We recommend that you book fully refundable air tickets or wait until the program is confirmed
before booking your reservations.
PAYMENT
Payment for all factory courses is to be made prior to the class. We accept company checks (payable to Elliott Company) or credit
card (Visa, MasterCard, or American Express).
COURSE LOCATION AND HOURS
All factory-training programs will be conducted at Elliott’s headquarters in Jeannette, Pennsylvania USA, unless otherwise noted.
The classes are held from 8:30 am to 4:00 pm daily.
ACCOMMODATIONS
A block of rooms has been set-aside at a local hotel in Greensburg, PA. Reservation information will be provided when class is
confirmed.
TRANSPORTATION
If you fly into Pittsburgh International Airport, it will take you approximately two hours to arrive at your hotel. Return flights should
be scheduled for 6:30 pm or later on the last day of class.
CANCELLATIONS AND REFUNDS
If you must cancel, please notify the Elliott Technical Training Dept as soon as possible. Cancellations less than fifteen (15) days in
advance of program are subject to one-half of the tuition fee. With prior notification, substitutions can be made.
There are no refunds for “No Shows”. Elliott reserves the right to cancel or reschedule any class. If Elliott cancels, a full refund for
tuition will be made.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 309 / 633
75
Chapter 3
Operation
CHAPTER THREE
OPERATION
INTRODUCTION
Turbine applications differ widely; therefore, operating procedures must be tailored to each
particular installation. Instructions in this chapter provide a recommended procedure for
the initial start-up and serve as a guide for establishing routine operating procedures.
Operating personnel must review this technical manual to become familiar with
the safety precautions and operating procedures for YR Turbines. Particular
attention should be directed to the WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and NOTES in
this chapter.
For location of parts described in the following text, refer to the Steam Chest Assembly
and Typical YR Turbine Assembly figures in Chapter 4.
STEAM SUPPLY
Steam should be free from moisture and preferably superheated. A receiver type
separator with ample drains should be provided upstream of the shut-off valve to prevent
water from entering the turbine. When a separator is not provided, a continuous drain
must be connected to the lowest point of the steam inlet piping.
CAUTION
If continuous drainers are on the steam piping or
turbine drains, check frequently to verify that proper
operation is maintained. Failure to drain water from
steam lines or turbine casing may result in erosion,
thrust failures, and/or poor performance.
The steam strainer protects the turbine from large particles of scale, welding beads, etc.
This strainer does not protect against abrasive matter, boiler compound, acids or alkaline
substances, all of which may be carried over in the steam. These substances may
corrode, erode or form deposits on the internal turbine parts, thus reducing efficiency and
power. Feed water treatment and boiler operation must be carefully controlled to verify a
supply of clean steam for long-term satisfactory operation.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1. Do not operate the turbine if inspection shows that the rotor shaft journals and/or
shaft packing case areas are corroded.
2. Before starting, verify the rotor rotates freely by hand and that it is not rubbing any
stationary parts.
3-1
D R A100q.chap03.7/3/2008
http://www.elliott-turbo.com/ 724-527-2811
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 310 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
CAUTION
Do not rotate shaft until lubrication has been applied.
Rotating the shaft without lubrication may result in
damage to the rotor shaft and bearing liners.
If rubbing or vibration occurs during operation,

immediately shut down the turbine, investigate and
correct the cause.
3. Verify all piping (steam, water, air) and electrical connections are made before
operating the turbine.
4. Verify that all valves, controls, trip mechanisms and safety devices are in good
operating condition.
-WARNING-
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD THE TRIP
VALVE BE BLOCKED OR HELD OPEN TO CAUSE THE
TRIP SYSTEM TO BECOME INOPERATIVE.
OVERRIDING THE TRIP SYSTEM AND ALLOWING THE

TURBINE TO EXCEED THE RATED (NAMEPLATE) TRIP
SPEED MAY RESULT IN FATAL INJURY TO
PERSONNEL AND EXTENSIVE TURBINE DAMAGE.

IMMEDIATELY SHUT THE TURBINE DOWN BY
CLOSING THE INLET STEAM SHUT-OFF VALVE.
5. Before initial start-up, after major maintenance and after an extended shutdown, do
not leave the turbine unattended at any time until proper operation with load has been
demonstrated.
PREPARING THE TURBINE FOR INITIAL START-UP
NOTE
Complete installation work before attempting to operate
turbine. (Refer to Chapter 2.)
1. Disconnect the coupling between the turbine and driven machine. Turbines driving
through reduction gears can remain coupled to the gear and operated together.
2. Disconnect the steam inlet piping at the turbine and blow out the line with the supply
steam to remove any foreign material from the pipe. Use targets for determination of
cleanliness. (Refer to NEMA SM23 section 8.4 for additional details.)
3-2
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap03.7/3/2008
http://www.elliott-turbo.com/
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 311 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
3. Verify the steam strainer is clean and properly installed in the steam chest inlet
flange. Connect the pipe to the turbine as a permanent joint. Adjust piping hangers
to eliminate any unacceptable strain on the turbine in cold and hot conditions. Piping
4. If operating a condensing turbine, clean rust preventative compound from internal

turbine surfaces.
CAUTION
Rust preventative compound will foul surface
condenser tubes if not removed before operating the
turbine.
NOTE
As an alternative to manually cleaning the turbine internals
to remove rust preventative compound, the turbine may be
run for several hours while exhausting to atmosphere.
5. Remove bolting from the steam end bearing cap and the exhaust end bearing cap.
Lift the caps approximately 1 inch (25 mm) and pry out the top bearing liners to
release the oil rings (if supplied). Remove the bearing caps and roll out the bottom
bearing liners by lifting up on the rotor and rotating the bearing liners toward the
positioning lugs. Clean and inspect the bearing liners. Keep the steam and exhaust
end bearing liners separate.
CAUTION
Attempting to remove the bearing caps without prying
out the top bearing liners can distort the oil rings.
Distorted oil rings will not rotate and fail to provide
adequate lubrication, resulting in bearing failures.
NOTE
Turbines with Class 3 (or higher) rotors are pressure
lubricated and may not have oil rings supplied. (Refer to
the Turbine Operating Data page located in the front of this
manual to determine the rotor class.)
6. Clean the rotor shaft journals, locating bearing, and the bearing housings with clean,
lint free rags. If turbine is equipped with Kingsbury type thrust bearings, remove
thrust bearings and clean; reassemble per Supplement 03-91, located in Chapter 8
Accessories.
7. Lift the weight off the rotor and roll the bottom bearing liners into place. Make certain
the positioning lugs on the liners are correctly seated in the bearing housing locating
grooves.
CAUTION
Verify that the steam end and exhaust end bearing
liners are not interchanged.
3-3
D R A100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 312 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
8. Place the top bearing liners on the shaft journals. If the turbine is ring oiled, position
oil rings in the slots of the top liners. Flood the rotor locating bearing, shaft journals,
and bearing liners with oil. (Refer to Chapter 5 for proper oil levels and lubrication
requirements.)
9. Replace the bearing caps. Verify that the positioning lugs on the top liners engage
the grooves in the bearing caps. Apply a very thin coat of sealant to the split line.
Insert the dowel pins and tighten all bolts.
10. If supplied, review the driven machine instruction manual for pre-start inspection
procedures.
11. Inspect the governor linkage. For specific details on preparing the governor for start-
up, refer to Chapter 6, and the governor manuals located in Chapter 8 Accessories.
12. Verify that all lube oil piping has been installed and the lubrication system has been
flushed.
CAUTION
If the turbine is pressure lubricated, verify orifice plugs
are installed at the bearing housings. If orifice plugs
13. Verify free movement and clearances of the trip system. Manually activate the
overspeed trip pin to verify the overspeed trip system is functional.
14. Fabricate a clamp or other blocking device to secure the coupling sleeve (if supplied)
to the hub while operating the uncoupled turbine.
NOTE
Use a balanced adapter to secure balanced gear type
coupling hubs during uncoupled operation.
15. Verify that the exhaust relief valve is installed correctly and operates at the correct
pressure.
-WARNING-
THE TURBINE SHOULD NOT BE OPERATED UNLESS
THE ATMOSPHERIC RELIEF VALVE OR OTHER
PROTECTIVE DEVICE HAS BEEN INSTALLED
BETWEEN THE TURBINE EXHAUST CONNECTION
AND FIRST EXHAUST ISOLATION VALVE (OR
CONDENSER, IF THE TURBINE IS A CONDENSING
TURBINE).
3-4
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 313 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation

PROTECTIVE DEVICE MUST BE DESIGNED FOR FULL
RELIEF OF THE MAXIMUM STEAM FLOW THROUGH
THE TURBINE WITHOUT EXCESSIVE EXHAUST
PRESSURE.
FAILURE TO INSTALL THIS TYPE OF DEVICE MAY

RESULT IN SEVERE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR
SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.
16. Fill oil lubricators (if ring oiled) or oil reservoir (if pressure lubricated) with proper oil.
(Refer to Chapter 5 for details.)
17. Inspect and test all controls, alarms, trips and relief valves. Calibrate and install all
instrumentation.
18. Roll the shaft by hand through several revolutions, checking for possible binding or
rubbing. Any sign of binding or rubbing should be thoroughly investigated before
attempting to start the unit.
19. If automatic controllers or regulators are supplied, do not enable during initial start-up;
use only after the general operation of the equipment has been determined
satisfactory.
INITIAL START-UP
1. Open drain valves to drain water from the steam inlet piping, turbine casing, steam
chest, and the exhaust piping.
2. Verify that the lube oil temperature is greater than 70°F (20°C).
3. If turbine is ring oiled, check that oil lubricators are filled. If turbine is pressure
lubricated, prime the oil pump(s) and verify that the oil reservoir is filled to the correct
level. Start the auxiliary oil pump (if supplied) and circulate the lubricating oil. Check
the oil piping for leaks and that oil is being delivered to the bearings.
4. Adjust the governor speed setting to minimum speed. (Refer to “Governor Operation”
in Chapter 6.)
5. Completely open the overload hand valves (if supplied). For further details review the
section on overload hand valves in this chapter.
6. Verify that the trip valve is closed and open the turbine exhaust isolation valve.
7. Verify proper oil pressure is present (pressure lubricated with auxiliary oil pump only).
8. Latch the trip valve resetting lever.
9. Commission the eductor/ejector (if supplied).
3-5
D R A100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 314 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
NOTE
When ejectors/eductors are used on packing case leakoff
lines, the customer can turn on at their discretion.
However, care must be taken to prevent steam from
blowing out of packing cases along the turbine shaft, which
may contaminate oil in bearing housings.
10. Close the intermediate leakoff valve (BYRHH and optional on BYRH turbines) and
maintain closed position until leakoff pressure builds to line pressure.
11. For condensing turbines, close all drain valves and commission main condenser
according to manufacturer’s instructions.
12. Slowly open the main steam isolation valve until the turbine reaches approximately
500 rpm.
CAUTION
Steam should not be admitted to the turbine casing by
partially opening the main steam isolation valve while
the rotor is stationary. This condition will cause
uneven heating of the turbine rotor and casing, which
may result in a distorted casing, bowed rotor shaft or
other related problems.
13. For condensing turbines, adjust the sealing steam supply valve to permit a slight
amount of steam to be discharged from the packing case leakoff drain lines. A
pressure of 3 to 5 psig (0.20 to 0.35 bar) is usually sufficient sealing steam pressure.
However, care must be taken to prevent steam from blowing out of the packing cases
and along the turbine shaft.
CAUTION
If sealing steam is allowed to leak into the bearing
housings, the lubricating oil may become
contaminated and form sludge and foam. To prevent
this condition, adjust the sealing steam accordingly.
14. Immediately verify operation of the trip valve by striking the trip lever. Close the main
steam isolation valve as the turbine speed decreases.
15. Latch the resetting lever and slowly open the main steam isolation valve to bring the
turbine back to 500 rpm. If the turbine is ring oiled, remove the inspection plugs from
the bearing caps and check to be sure the oil rings are rotating. Verify proper oil
pressure is present (pressure lubricated only). Monitor the speed carefully during the
low speed operation.
CAUTION
Do not leave the turbine unattended at any time during
the initial start-up.
3-6
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 315 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
16. Introduce cooling water to bearing housing cooling chambers or oil cooler (if supplied)
to prevent overheating. (Refer to Chapter 5 [Table 5-3], for recommended bearing
operating temperatures.)
17. Listen for any unusual noises, rubbing, or other signs of distress in the turbine. Do
not operate if any of these conditions are present. Monitor the turbine for signs of
overheating and excessive vibration. (Refer to the Troubleshooting Guide in Chapter
7 for possible causes and corrective actions for abnormal conditions which might
occur.)
18. When the turbine is thoroughly warmed up and low speed operation is determined to
be satisfactory, close the overload hand valves (if supplied).
19. For non-condensing turbines, close all drain valves provided no signs of condensate
are visible at all drain lines.
20. Proceed with wearing in of the carbon rings (if supplied). (Refer to Turbine Operating
Data Sheet located in the front of this manual, for steam seals supplied with this unit.)
a. Gradually increase turbine speed to 1000 rpm and hold for 10-15 minutes.
b. Reduce turbine speed to 500 rpm and hold for 5-10 minutes, allowing shaft to
cool.
c. Increase turbine speed by 1000 rpm and hold for 10-15 minutes.
d. Reduce turbine speed by 500 rpm and hold for 5-10 minutes, allowing shaft to
cool.
e. Continue increasing turbine speed by 1000 rpm and decreasing by 500 rpm until
rated operating speed as shown on the turbine nameplate is achieved.
NOTE
The stepped start up procedure (wearing in of the carbon
rings) must be done for the first 2 or 3 turbine starts, or
after installation of new carbon rings. Failure to do so may
result in improper wearing in of carbon rings and cause
excessive packing case steam leakage.
21. After the turbine is operating, closely observe oil pressures and temperatures. For
condensing turbines, adjust sealing steam to maintain 3 to 5 psig (0.20 to 0.35 bar).
22. Verify the overspeed trip by temporarily overriding the governor to actuate the
overspeed trip mechanism. (Refer to Control System, Chapter 6, for specific details
on overspeeding the turbine.)
CAUTION
Do not operate the turbine more than 2% above the
rated trip speed listed on the turbine nameplate. If the
overspeed trip does not operate within 2% of the
designated speed, shut the turbine down and make
necessary adjustments as described in Chapter 4,
Overspeed Trip System.
3-7
D R A100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 316 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
Three consecutive, non-trending trip speeds within the required range (refer to
Turbine Data sheet located in the front of this manual) must be recorded to verify safe
trip system operation. After a turbine trip and the speed decreases by 15-20% of
rated speed, the resetting lever may be relatched and the turbine brought back up in
speed.
-WARNING-
DURING TESTING OF THE MECHANICAL OVERSPEED
TRIP, THE FOLLOWING GUIDELINES MUST BE
ADHERED TO:
A. LIMIT PERSONNEL TO THE MINIMUM NUMBER

REQUIRED TO CONDUCT THE OVERSPEED
TESTS.
B. THE MAIN STEAM ISOLATION VALVE TO THE

TURBINE MUST NOT BE FULLY OPENED. IT
SHOULD ONLY BE OPENED AS FAR AS
NECESSARY TO REACH THE TRIP SPEED.
C. DURING THE TEST, TRAINED PERSONNEL MUST

OPERATE THE MAIN STEAM ISOLATION VALVE
TO THE TURBINE.
D. TWO SOURCES OF SPEED INDICATION ARE

PREFERRED. BOTH SHOULD BE OF KNOWN
ACCURACY AND CURRENT CALIBRATION.
23. Continue operating the turbine for approximately one hour, while carefully monitoring
bearing temperatures, turbine speed, vibrations levels, and listening for any unusual
noises.
24. Shut down the turbine upon satisfactory completion of the initial run. (Refer to
“Turbine Shut Down” at the end of this chapter.)
25. Couple the turbine to the driven equipment. If the turbine is used with a speed
reduction gearbox or other special equipment, follow all instructions pertaining to
those particular items.
ROUTINE START-UP
1. Verify proper oil pressure is present (pressure lubricated only).
3-8
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 317 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
level. Start the auxiliary oil pump (if supplied) and circulate the lubricating oil.
5. Completely open the overload hand valves (if supplied). For further details, review
the section on overload hand valves in this chapter.
NOTE
500 rpm.
CAUTION
uneven heating of the turbine rotor and casing which
amount of steam to be discharged from the packing case leak off drain lines. A
CAUTION
3-9
D R A100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 318 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
the bearing caps and check that the oil rings are rotating. If the turbine is pressure
lubricated, verify proper oil pressure is present.
to prevent overheating. (Refer to Chapter 5 [Table 5-3] for recommended bearing
occur.)
18. For non-condensing turbines, close all drain valves, provided no signs of condensate
19. Adjust governor to attain desired speed as load is applied to the turbine. (Refer to
“Control System”, Chapter 6). Close overload hand valves as required by turbine
operation. (Refer to the “Unit Outline” in Chapter 10, Technical Drawings, for
overload hand valve settings.)
OVERLOAD HAND VALVES (Optional)
Overload hand valves are used sometimes to control the steam flow through an extra bank
of nozzles. These valves can serve three functions:
a. When closed, the valves will provide more efficient turbine operation at reduced load
with normal steam conditions by reducing the nozzle area and also reducing the
steam flow.
b. In some applications, overload hand valves are used to develop the required power
by opening the valves when steam conditions are less than normal (such as
encountered during boiler start-up).
c. Sometimes overload hand valves are used to develop increased power for meeting
overload requirements with normal steam conditions.
(Refer to the “Turbine Outline” in Chapter 10, Technical Drawings, for overload hand valve
positioning versus turbine power, speed and operating steam conditions.) For the best
efficiency and speed control, open only the overload hand valves required for the actual
steam conditions present and power required.
3-10
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 319 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
TABLE 3-1
OVERLOAD HAND VALVES
Turbine Frame Size Number of Turns
AYR 7
BYR, BYRIH 9
CYR, CYRH 12
DYR, DYRH, DYRM, DYRN 12

DYR, DYRH, DYRM, DYRN
14
with 8" inlet
BYRH, BYRHH 12
NOTE
Overload hand valve must be positioned either completely
open or completely closed. Turning the stem
counterclockwise approximately 1½ turns will open the
pilot valve. (Refer to Table 3-1 for the correct number of
turns required to completely open the main valve disk.)
Open all overload hand valves during start-ups to verify
even heating of casing and prevention of valves binding in
the casing. The overload hand valves can be completely
closed if not needed when governor control is reached.
CAUTION
Operation of the overload hand valve, in anything
other than completely open or completely closed
position, can cause valve failure and possible internal
damage to the turbine.
For further information on Auto-Overload hand valves (if supplied), refer to Supplement
02-86-R1, in Chapter 8.
TURBINE SHUTDOWN
CAUTION
Before shutting down turbine, verify that the governor
system and trip system are in proper working order. If
the operational integrity is uncertain, shut off the main
steam isolation valve to stop the turbine.
1. Reduce the turbine speed to a minimum.
2. Shut down the turbine by striking the top of the trip lever by hand.
3-11
D R A100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 320 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
3. Observe the action of the trip valve and linkage.
4. Close the main steam isolation valve.
NOTE
Isolation valves, located in the turbine inlet steam piping,
must be closed after the trip valve has closed. Do not use
the trip valve as a long-term shut-off valve.
5. If non-condensing turbine, close the exhaust valve and open turbine casing drains.
6. If condensing turbine, shut down the condensing equipment, open the turbine casing
drains and close the sealing steam shut-off valve.
CAUTION
Do not apply sealing steam to the packing cases while
the turbine rotor is idle. This condition will cause
7. Allow the rotor to come to a complete stop and cool down for approximately 2 hours
before turning off the cooling water or stopping auxiliary oil pump, if supplied.
8. If the turbine is to be taken out of service for an extended period, follow the storage
instructions in Chapter 1.
OPERATION OF EMERGENCY AND STANDBY TURBINES
Emergency and standby turbines do not require a warm-up period before applying the load
and may be rapidly placed into service. However, it is important that turbines used for
emergency and standby services have drain lines open and isolating valves closed when
the turbine is idle. Turbines not used for extended periods should be inspected and
operated occasionally to verify good working condition.
Where impractical to operate the turbine, the rotor should be turned over by hand to
introduce oil to the journal bearings (oil ring lubricated turbines). If an auxiliary oil pump is
furnished (pressure lubricated turbines), oil can be supplied to the bearings by operating
the pump. To prevent corrosion, introduce dry, heated air into the casing during shutdown
periods.
CAUTION
uneven heating of the turbine rotor and casing, and
3-12
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 321 / 633

TECHNICAL MANUAL F402016-1, -2
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 322 / 633
Elliott Company
901 North Fourth Street
Jeannette, PA. 15644-1473
Phone; 724-527-2811
-WARNING-
Read this entire Instruction and Operation Manual
prior to installing, operating, or servicing this
equipment. Follow all plant and safety instructions.
Failure to comply can cause personal injury and/or
damage to property.
Technical Manual
Revision: 0
Date: 12/09/2015
Shop Order / Serial Number F402016-1, -2
Purchaser: EBARA CORPORATION

TOKYO, JAPAN
User: NGHI SON REFINERY AND PETROCHEMICAL LLC

NGHI SON, THANH HOA PROVINCE, VIETNAM
Customer Purchase Order Number: EP163T0053

Elliott Company General Order Number: F14062
Turbine Tag Number: 020-PST-106A, 020-PST-206A
Equipment Shop Order / Serial Number Frame / Model

YR Turbine F402016-1, -2 AYRT III
D R A
Form 3053 (9/30/02)
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 323 / 633
EQUIPMENT DATA INDEX
F402016-1, -2
Turbine Operating Data
Turbine As Build Data Sheet (API 611), 5003357, Rev.3
Turbine ISA Data Sheet (DS-ISA), 5003358, Rev.2
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 324 / 633
NON-CONDENSING TURBINE OPERATING DATA
SERIAL NUMBER/SHOP ORDER NUMBER F402016-1, -2
FRAME: AYRT III
SPEED:
Rated 2970 rpm
Maximum Continuous 3119 rpm
1st Calculated Critical 9600 rpm
Mechanical Overspeed Trip 3586 rpm
Trip Speed Range 3586 rpm to 3658 rpm
STEAM CONDITIONS - DESIGN CONDITIONS:

Inlet Pressure 299 psig 2060 kpag
Inlet Temperature 608 ºF 320 ºC
Exhaust Pressure 49 psig 340 kpag
STEAM CONDITIONS - MAXIMUM CONDITIONS:

Inlet Pressure 700 psig 4826.5 kpag
Inlet Temperature 750 ºF 398.9 ºC
Exhaust Pressure 101.5 psig 700 kpag
RELIEF VALVE SET: 83 psig 572.3 kpag

SENTINEL VALVE SET: 83 psig 572.3 kpag
ROTOR CLASS DESIGNATION: A-2

RATED POWER: 43.2 HP 32.2 KW
LUBRICATION SYSTEM: Ring Oiled

Type of Viscosity Grade ISO VG 68
TURBINE STEAM SEALS: Carbon Ring Seals
GOVERNOR TYPE: Woodward TG611-13

Governor Valve Travel: 0.23 inches (Set at 0.50 inches maximum)
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 325 / 633
JOB NO. F402016 ITEM NO. 020-PST-106/206A
PURCHASE ORDER NO. EP163T0053
GENERAL PURPOSE STEAM TURBINE DATA SHEET NO. 5003357
API 611 5TH EDITION DATA SHEET REVISION NO. 3 DATE 10-Dec-15
SI UNITS (KPA) PAGE 1 OF 3 BY T. BAUER
 CHECKED APPROVED
3 1 APPLICABLE TO: AS BUILT APPLICABLE STANDARD: API-611 UNITS OF MEASURE: SI UNITS (KPA)
2 FOR NGHI SON REFINERY AND PETROCHEMICAL LLC UNIT 020-PST-106/206A
3 SITE NGHI SON, THANH HOA PROVINCE, VIETNAM NO. REQUIRED 2
4 SERVICE DRIVEN EQUIPMENT General Duty Centrifugal Pump
5 MANUFACTURER ELLIOTT MODEL AYRT III SERIAL NO. F402016
6
7 OPERATING CONDITIONS
8 ABSORBED POWER, SPEED, OPERATING POINT / STEAM NO. HAND VALVES STEAM RATE
OPERATING POINT
9 KW RPM CONDITION OPEN KG/KW-HR
NORMAL / NORMAL
10 NORMAL 27.3 2970 CLOSED 44
CERTIFIED STEAM RATE
11 RATED 32.2 2970 RATED / NORMAL CLOSED 41.9
RATED @ MIN INLET & MAX

12 OTHER (6.1.4) OPEN 57.1
EXHAUST
13 DUTY, SITE, AND UTILITY DATA OTHER / NORMAL
14 APPLICATION IS: SPARED CONDITIONS
15 WIDE SPEED RANGE NO RAPID START NO APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS
16 SLOW ROLL REQUIRED NO HAND VALVES YES API 611 OTHER
17 OPERATION CONTINUOUS
18
19 CONSTRUCTION
20 LOCATION (6.1.14) OUTDOOR UNHEATED W/O ROOF TURBINE TYPE HORIZONTAL
21 AMBIENT TEMP MIN MAX C NO. OF STAGES 1 WHEEL DIA 355.6 MM
22 UNUSUAL CONDITIONS (6.1.14) SALT ATMOSPHERE ROTOR CONSTRUCTION BUILT UP
23 DUST ATMOSPHERE ARRANGEMENT BETWEEN BEARINGS
24 AREA CLASSIFICATION ATEX ZONE 2 GROUP IIC T3 BLADING 2 ROW
25 CASING SPLIT AXIAL
26 CASING SUPPORT CENTER LINE
27 CONTROL POWER V N/A PH HZ VERTICAL JACKSCREWS FURNISHED YES
28 AUX MOTORS V N/A PH HZ
1,2 29 COOLING WATER PRESS (MAX) 615 KPAG DP 27.6 KPAG
30 FLOW 7.6 LPM DT C TRIP VALVE INTEGRAL BODY
31 ALLOW. SOUND PRESS. LEVEL (6.1.12) 80 dBA @ 1M INTERSTAGE SEALS
32 STEAM CONDITIONS (6.1.4) END SEALS QTY: 4 CARBON RING
33 MAX NORMAL MIN QTY: 4
34 INLET PRESS 2470.0 2060.0 1710.0 KPAG
35 INLET TEMP 350 320 308 C TYPE RADIAL BEARINGS SLEEVE
36 EXHAUST PRESS 500.0 340.0 290.0 KPAG TYPE THRUST BEARINGS ANTI-FRICTION
37 STEAM CONTAMINANTS LUBE OIL VISCOSITY ISO GRADE 68
38 TURBINE DATA LUBRICATION RING OILED, ISO VG 68
39 ALLOW SPEEDS, RPM MAX 3119 MIN 2525 OIL MIST NO
40 MAX CONT SPEED, RPM 3119 OIL MIST SYSTEM
41 TRIP SPEED, RPM 3586 BLADE TIP VEL. 64.1 M/S BEARING HOUSING OILER TYPE CONSTANT LEVEL
3 42 FIRST CRITICAL SPEED, RPM 9600 BEARING HOUSING SEAL Bearing Isolation Seal
43 EXH TEMP NORMAL 260 C NO LOAD 301 C SEAL SUPPLIER
44 POTENTIAL MAX POWER 75 KW CASING DESIGN INLET EXHAUST
2 45 MAX NOZZLE STEAM FLOW 3201 KG/HR MAX ALLOWABLE PRESS 4826.5 700.0 KPAG
46 ROTATION FACING GOVERNOR END CLOCKWISE MAX ALLOWABLE TEMP 399 C
47 VERTICAL DRIVEN EQUIPMENT THRUST HYDRO TEST PRESS 9825.4 1206.6 KPAG
48 VERTICAL TURBINE THRUST CAPACITY
49 WATER PIPING REQUIRED YES
50 FURNISHED BY ELLIOTT REMARKS
51 OIL PIPING REQUIRED NO
52 FURNISHED BY N/A
53 AUTO DRAIN SYSTEM REQUIRED NO
D R
54
A FURNISHED BY
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 326 / 633
1 MATERIALS (6.12) ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT BY VENDOR

2 HIGH PRESSURE CASING ASTM A-216 GRADE WCB REMOTE TRIP SOLENOID NO
3 TURBINE TRIPPED SIGNAL NO
4 EXHAUST CASING ASTM A-216 GRADE WCB VACUUM BREAKER NO
5 NOZZLES AISI 410 GRADE AUTOMATIC STEAM SEALING SYSTEM NO
6 BLADING AISI 403 GRADE SEALING STEAM KPAG C
7 WHEELS ASTM 517 GRADE TYPE B GLAND VACUUM DEVICE WITH: N/A
8 SHAFT AISI 4140 GRADE SENTINEL WARNING VALVE NO
9 SHAFT COATING UNDER PACKING INSULATION, TYPE: ACOUSTIC BLANKET
10 MATERIAL STAINLESS STEEL TACHOMETER TYPE SELF POWERED
11 APPLICATION METHOD FLAME SPRAY MFR. DYNALCO SPD-100
12 THICKNESS 0.051 MM MOUNTED BY ELLIOTT
13 GOV. VALVE TRIM D2, NI-RESIST THERMAL RELIEF VALVES NO
14 INLET STRAINER YES MESH SIZE #8 MESH
1 15 MATERIAL 321 SS LOCAL GAUGE BOARD WITH PRESSURE GAUGES: NO
16 CONNECTIONS (6.4.2) THROTTLE STEAM NO FIRST STAGE NO
17 SIZE RATING FACING POSITION NOZZLE RING NO EXHAUST NO
1 18 INLET 3 300* RF RIGHT LIQUID FILLED GAUGES N/A
19 EXHAUST 6 150 RF LEFT INSTRUMENT PANEL NO
20 DRAINS HP SEE PURCHASER'S CONNECTION DRAWING
21 DRAINS LP SEE PURCHASER'S CONNECTION DRAWING
1 22 * - ELLIOTT SHALL SUPPLY INLET FLANGE ADAPTER EXTERNAL LUBE OIL SYSTEM
23 TYPE OF LUBE SYSTEM SUPPLIED
24 COUPLINGS (7.2) VENDOR FURNISH SYSTEM FOR
25 LOCATION TURBINE DRIVEN
26 MAKE OIL SYSTEM TO BE:
27 MODEL
28 RATING (HP/100RPM) REMARKS
29 LUBRICATION
30 LIMITED END FLOAT
31 SPACER LENGTH
32 SERVICE FACTOR VIBRATION AND POSITION DETECTORS (7.4.4.3)
33 COUPLING SPACER/HUBS MATL. FURNISH PROVISIONS FOR MOUNTING NON-CONTACTING
34 COUPLING DIAPHRAGMS (DISKS) MATL. VIBRATION PROBES NO
35 TURBINE VENDOR MOUNTS HALF COUPLING NO FURN. AXIAL POSITION PROBES NO NO. OF PROBES
36 COUPLING CONSTRUCTED TO MFR. MODEL
37 SEE SEPARATE DATA SHEET FURN. ONE EVENT PER REV PROBE NO
38 COUPLING BALANCED TO FURN. RADIAL PROBES NO NO. OF PROBES
39 TURBINE SHAFT STRAIGHT - SINGLE KEY MFR. MODEL
40
41 FURNISH BEARING METAL TEMP SENSORS FOR:
42 MOUNITNG PLATES RADIAL BEARINGS NO THRUST BEARINGS NO
43 TURBINE MOUNTED ON MAGNETIC SEISMIC PROBES NO
1 44 FURN. BY: OTHER PERMANENT SEISMIC PROBES PROVISION ONLY
45 EQUIPMENT TO BE MOUNTED MFR. MODEL
46 TURBINE VENDOR SUPPLIES MONITORS NO
47 UNGROUTED BASEPLATE AXIAL AND RADIAL PROBES NO
48 BEARING TEMPERATURE SENSORS NO
49 SUBPLATES REQUIRED SEE SEPARATE DATA SHEETS FOR DETAILS NO
50 REMARKS
51
52 GEAR BOX
53 GEARBOX REQUIRED
54 FURN. BY:
55 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION
56 GEARBOX DATA SHEET NUMBER
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 327 / 633
1 GOVERNING SYSTEM PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
2 GOVERNOR TYPE HYDRAULIC TURBINE, AUX. EQUIP. AND SPARE ROTOR PREPARED FOR:
3 GOVERNOR MANUFACTURER WOODWARD EXPORT BOX
1 4 GOVERNOR MODEL TG611-13 "NEMA A" OUTDOOR STORAGE NO LONGER THAN 6 MONTHS
5 SPEED RANGE 85% to 105% REMARKS
6 SPEED SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT
7 LOCAL HAND SPEED CHANGER YES
8 REMOTE SPEED SETPOINT NO
9 VARIABLE OPERATING RANGE CONTROL SIGNAL
10 SPEED TO RPM TO mA
11 SPEED TO RPM TO KPAG
12 GOVERNOR POWER SUPPLY N/A TESTS (8.3) REQ'D. WITN. (8.1.1) OBSVD.
13 HYDROSTATIC YES YES NO
14 REMOTE TRIP INPUT TO ELECTRONIC GOVERNOR NO DYNAMIC BALANCE YES YES NO
15 ELECTRONIC GOVERNOR SUITABLE FOR SLOW ROLL NO MECH. RUN 1 h YES YES NO
16 OVERSPEED TRIP MECHANICAL PERFORMANCE NO
17 None COMPLETE UNIT NO
18 No. ACTUATION DEVICES N/A GEAR NO
19 MANUFACTURER SOUND LEVEL YES YES NO
20 MODEL AUX. EQUIPMENT NO
21 REMARKS RESIDUAL UNBALANCE CHECK YES YES NO
22
23
1 24 REMARKS INSPECTION & TESTING IS IN ACCORDANCE WITH
1 25 ENGINEERING REQUIREMENTS SUBMITTED ITP VC2158-104-E-613(5003368)
26 SUPPLY ENGR. DATA FOR L.ATERAL/TORSIONAL ANALYSES
27 BY OTHERS NO DOCUMENTATION
28 CALCS AND/OR DATA FOR SEPARATION MARGIN NO PERFORMANCE CURVES YES
29 TRAIN TORSIONAL VIBRATION ANALYSIS NO PROGRESS REPORTS NO
30 TECHNICAL DATA MANUAL YES
31 WEIGHTS
1 32 PARTY HAVING UNIT RESPONSIBILITY DRIVEN EQUIP VENDOR TURBINE 365 KG
33 ROTOR RUNNING CLEARANCES ROTOR 52 KG
34 INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS TURBINE UPPER HALF CASING 53 KG
35 USE INSPECTORS CHECKLIST NO MAX MAINTENANCE (TUHC) 53 KG
36 100% UT INSPECTION AFTER ROUGH MACHINING (ROTATING) YES T&T VALVE KG
37 CASTING SURFACE INSPECTION YES BASEPLATE KG
38 MISC. KG
39 CASTING WELD REPAIR APPROVAL (REQUIRED) YES TOTAL SHIPPING WEIGHT 465 KG
40 WELD INSPECTION NO REMARKS
41 SPECIAL NDT INSPECTION NO
42
43 MAG. DYE RADIO- ULTRA- OBSER- WIT-
44 COMPONENT PART. PENET. GRAPHIC SONIC VED NESS
45 T&T VALVE NO NO NO NO
46 STM CHEST YES NO NO NO NO NO
47 CASING YES NO NO NO NO NO
48 STEAM PIPING YES NO YES NO NO NO
49 ROTOR WHEEL NO NO NO YES NO NO
50 ROTOR SHAFT NO NO NO YES NO NO
51
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 328 / 633
Owner: NGHI SON REFINERY AND PETROCHEMICAL LLC Revisions
Site: NGHI SON, THANH HOA PROVINCE, VIETNAM No. By Date Revision Contract:
Service: GENERAL DUTY CENTRIFUGAL PUMP 1. RK 5/15/2015 Initial Issue Date:
Purchaser: EBARA CORPORATION 2. RK 8/21/2015 Revised Tag Numbers
G.O.: F14062 3. TB 10/26/2015 Revised Tag Numbers By: T. BAUER
P.O.: EP163T0053 4. Chk'd: T. BAUER
S.O.: F402016 5. Appr: T. BAUER
P&I Sheet Data Sheet

Elliott Tag No. Description
No. No.
INSTRUMENT INDEX
020‐TG/TGW‐6328 & 020‐TG/TGW‐7328 Turbine Journal Bearing Temperature Gauge ( Steam End ) 1 3
020‐TG/TGW‐6327 & 020‐TG/TGW‐7327 Turbine Journal Bearing Temperature Gauge ( Exhaust End ) 1 3
020‐SE‐6312 & 020‐SE‐7312 Magnetic Speed Pick‐up (Tachometer) 3 4
020‐SI‐6312 & 020‐SI‐7312 Turbine Speed Indication (Tachometer) 3 5
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 329 / 633
INDUSTRIAL BIMETAL AND SHEET 3 OF 5
GLASS THERMOMETERS SPEC. NO. REV.
NO BY DATE REVISION 2
1. RK 5/15/2015 Initial Issue CONTRACT DATE
Revised Tag
2. RK 8/21/2015
Numbers
Revised Tag
3. TB 10/26/2015 REQ. - P.O.
Numbers
4. PRL031359-1
5. BY CHK'D APPR.
T. BAUER T. BAUER T. BAUER
THERMOMETER WELL
1. Stem: Threaded Plain Union 10. None Included By Others
Material 304 SS 11. Material: 304 SS 316 SS
2. Stem or Union Thread: 1/2 in. 3/4 in. Other
3. Stem Diameter: Std .250 in. .375 in. 12. Construction: Drilled Built-Up
4. Case Material: Std Other 304 stainless steel Other Straight
5. Dial Size 3" Color White with black Lettering Well Length Must Suit Stem Length.
6. Scale Length Color
7. Form: Fig. No. Adjustable
8. External Calibrator Herm Sealed Case
9. Mfr. & Model No. WIKA TI.32
Operating Lag.
Rev. Tag Number Range Temp Stem Length Well Conn. Ext. Service Notes
020-TG/TGW-6328 & 50-300 °F & 130 to 190 °F 1/2" NPT Turbine Journal Bearing Temperature Gauge ( Steam
1 2.5" N/A See below Notes
020-TG/TGW-7328 10-150 °C / 54 to 88 °C (Male) End )
020-TG/TGW-6327 & 50-300 °F & 130 to 190 °F 1/2" NPT Turbine Journal Bearing Temperature Gauge ( Exhaust
1 2.5" N/A See below Notes
020-TG/TGW-7327 10-150 °C / 54 to 88 °C (Male) End )
NOTES: 1. Accuracy: +/- 1.0% full scale value (ASME B40.3)

2. Flat instrument glass
3. Ingress protection IP 65
4. Pointer: Black aluminum
5. Dual: Fahrenheit (outer) and Celsius (inner)
6. Window Gasket: Neoprene
© 1981 ISA ISA FORM S20.14a
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 330 / 633
SHEET 4 OF 5
SPEC. NO. REV.
Revised Tag
2. RK 8/21/2015
Numbers
Revised Tag
3. TB 10/26/2015 REQ. - P.O.
Numbers
4.
5. BY CHK'D APPR.
01. Tag Number: 020-SE-6312 & 020-SE-7312
02. Tag Descriptions: Magnetic Speed Pick‐up (Tachometer)
03. Make: DYNALCO
04. Model Number: M-203
05. Output Voltage: 15V TO 17V PEAK TO PEAK
06. DC Resistance: 550Ω TO 650Ω
07. Typical Inductance: 260 mH Nominal
08. Output Polarity: PIN B Positive
09. Operating Temperature: -65°F TO 225°F (-54 TO 107 °C)
10. Compliance: CSA CLASS I, DIV. 1, GROUPS A, B, C, & D
11. Elliott Part Number: 436023-9
© 1981 ISA ISA FORM S20.3b
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 331 / 633
SHEET 5 OF 5
SPEC. NO. REV.
Revised Tag
2. RK 8/21/2015
Numbers
Revised Tag
3. TB 10/26/2015 REQ. - P.O.
Numbers
4.
5. BY CHK'D APPR.
01. Tag Number: 020-SI-6312 & 020-SI-7312
02. Tag Descriptions: Turbine Speed Indication (Tachometer)
03. Make: DYNALCO
04. Model Number: SPD-100
05 Magnetic Pick up input : 2.5-15 Vrms Signal, MPU Signal Limited to10 Vp-p
06 Input Impedance 100Ω in Series with a 6V Zener Diode
07. Frequency: 20KHZ Max
08. Output: Four Active Digits (0-9999), Non Blinking LCD Display.
09. Operating Temperature: -20 to 80 °C (-5 to 175 °F)
10. Mounting: Unit Mounting
11. Vibration: MIL Std 810C; Method 514.2; Curve Q; Procedure V; Modified to 500 Hz upper limit
12. 5 Hz to 10Hz at 0.5 cm D.A.
13. 10Hz to 18Hz at 1g (PEAK)
14. 18Hz to 57Hz at 0.15cm D.A.
15. 57Hz to 500Hz at 10g (PEAK)
16. Accuracy: One RPM Resolution within 0.5% under all combined Enviromental conditions
17. Gate Time Range: Field Selectable for 0.26 seconds to 5.7 Seconds
18. Weight: 0.45 kg
19. North American Compliance: CSA Class I, DIV. 1, Groups A, B, C, & D
20. Elliott Part Number: P82M471
21. Protection: NEMA 4X (IP 66)
© 1981 ISA ISA FORM S20.3b
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 332 / 633
Limitations, Warranty, and Safety
LIMITATIONS, WARRANTY, AND SAFETY
LIMITATIONS
It is to be noted that none of the drawings or printed material contained in this Technical
Manual in any way add to, detract from, void or alter any of the conditions of the contract.
Such drawings and/or printed materials are for descriptive purposes only and are not to be
construed as determining the scope of supply or the performance of the equipment.
Please consult your contract to determine those particulars.
Such drawings shall be deemed to be and remain Elliott Company’s proprietary property,
and reproduction, distribution or disclosure of any part of the contents is expressly
forbidden without written consent.
WARRANTY
Should any part of the machinery prove, under normal use and service, to have been
defective in material or workmanship, when shipped, the Company warrants, so far as said
part of its own manufacture, that it will repair or replace said part f.o.b. the Company
Works provided the Purchaser discovers said defect within eighteen months after date of
shipment or twelve months from date of start-up and notifies the Company in writing
thereof within five days after such discovery and on request of the Company returns the
part claimed to be defective, transportation prepaid, to the Company’s Works for
inspection. There are no other warranties, expressed or implied, except of title. The
Company shall not be liable for any damages or delays caused by defective material or
workmanship. No allowance will be made for repairs or alterations made by others without
the company’s written consent or approval. The company does not warrant that any part
of the machinery will resist the action of erosive or corrosive gases or liquids and no part
shall be deemed to be defective by reason of its failure to resist such action, unless
expressly agreed otherwise herein. The Company assumes no responsibilities for
damage to machinery caused by improper installation or by operation above its rated
capacity, intentional or otherwise, or by improper handling or maintenance. The foregoing
are Elliott Company’s standard terms and conditions of warranty. Please consult your
contract for any clarification, alterations and/or modifications thereto.
SAFETY
It is assumed that the safety department of the end user has an established safety
program based upon a thorough analysis of industrial hazards. Before installing and
operating or performing maintenance on the turbine, it is suggested that you review this
program to be certain that it covers the hazards arising from rotating machinery in general
and turbines in particular.
It is important that due consideration be given to those hazards developing from the
presence of electrical power, hot oil, high pressure and temperature steam, toxic gases,
and flammable liquids and gases. Proper installation and continued maintenance of
protective guards, shutdown devices and over pressure protection are also necessary for
safe turbine operation. The turbine should never be operated by bypassing, overriding or
in any way rendering inoperative, guards, protective shutdown equipment or other safety
devices.
R iA lws.turbine.3/18/2014
D
IN6-APR- 16
2724-527-2811
0 333 / 633
0
It is also essential that the turbine be isolated from all utilities to prevent the possibility of
applying power or steam to the turbine when internal maintenance work is in progress.
When performing internal turbine maintenance, always ensure that isolating valves in the
steam inlet and exhaust lines are locked closed and tagged, and all drains opened to
depressurize the turbine casing and steam chest. Precautions must also be taken to
prevent possible turbine rotation due to reverse flow through the driven machinery.
In general, you should be guided by all of the basic safety rules associated with the
turbine, driven equipment and plant process.
The turbine must not be modified in any way without Elliott Group's approval. This is to
ensure that the safety, reliability, and performance of the turbine and associated systems
are not compromised.
-WARNING-
THE ELLIOTT COMPANY CAN NOT ASSUME ANY
RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGES OR PERSONAL
INJURY RESULTING FROM OPERATION OF THIS
EQUIPMENT WITH SAFETY AND/OR SHUTDOWN
DEVICES BEING ISOLATED, DISABLED, OR
BYPASSED.
-WARNING-
Read this entire Instruction and Operation Manual
prior to installing, operating, or servicing this
equipment. Follow all plant and safety instructions.
Failure to comply can cause personal injury and/or
damage to property.
IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS
-WARNING- indicates a potentially hazardous

situation that could result in personal injury or death.
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation

that could result in damage to equipment.
SPECIFIC WARNINGS / CAUTIONS
CAUTION
Ensure that all threaded fasteners, joints, and piping
are tight. These connections may come loose during
shipment. Check all connections prior to startup.
D R A
lws.turbine.3/18/2014 ii
IN6-APR- 16
0
2http://www.elliott-turbo.com/
0 334 / 633
724-527-2811
-WARNING-
The turbine surface is hot and can cause severe burns.
Extreme caution must be taken to prevent contact with
exposed surfaces.
-WARNING-
All rotating surfaces including the shaft, coupling, and
all other rotating parts must be guarded to prevent any
contact.
-WARNING-
This turbine may have hydraulic or pneumatic
powered mechanisms that may move without warning
and create pinch points. Coming in contact with these
areas may result in serious injury.
-WARNING-
This turbine is equipped with an overspeed trip system
that is designed to stop the turbine in the event of a
turbine over-speed. It is extremely important that this
system be maintained in operating condition.
-WARNING-
Do not exceed the steam conditions (pressures and
temperatures) specified on the turbine nameplate.
Exceeding these conditions can result in serious
injury and/or damage to the turbine.
-WARNING-
Ensure all exhaust valves are open prior to starting the
turbine.
-WARNING-
The sentinel valve is an overpressure audible warning
device only. An atmospheric relief valve must be
installed for over-pressure protection. Check for
proper sizing and setting.
CAUTION
Ensure proper lifting
D R A
iii lws.turbine.3/18/2014
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 724-527-2811
0 335 / 633
OVERLOADING OF TURBINES
From the turbine standpoint, greater loads than contract commitments can usually be
carried without exceeding permissible variations in design steam conditions. This is
particularly true when provision is made to extract large quantities of steam at rated load
or to develop rated load under emergency initial steam conditions, and/or back-pressure
above design values. Such an increase represents an overload introducing increased
maintenance expense, reduction of useful life and the possibility of physical damage to the
machine.
Any operation of a turbine beyond the capacity specified in the contract is undertaken by
the purchaser at his own risk and responsibility.
WET STEAM
Many factors that affect the life of turbine nozzles, disks, and blades are beyond the
control of the Elliott Company and prevent the Elliott Company from assuming any
warranty obligations for corrosion or erosion.
Nozzle, disk and blade erosion and corrosion increases with increasing steam moisture
content. The inlet steam pressure, the inlet steam temperature and the exhaust pressure
fundamentally determine moisture content. Skill in the boiler operation and the installation
and maintenance of moisture traps affect the steam moisture content as well.
The presence of non-condensable gases such as carbon dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, sulfur
dioxide, etc., in the steam will affect the acidity and, therefore, the corrosiveness of the
steam. Industrial steam systems with high percentages of “make-up” water frequently
have high concentrations of these non-condensables. Boiler feed water treatment is the
responsibility of the user and is out of the realm of the Elliott Company’s responsibility.
D R A
lws.turbine.3/18/2014 iv
IN6-APR- 16
0
0 336 / 633
724-527-2811
Corrosion will occur if vapor is allowed to enter the machine when it is idle. When shutting
down for standby, be sure that the trip and throttle valve or inlet valve has a tight seat and
that an open drain valve is provided between the inlet valve and the steam chest. Also be
sure that all casing drains are open.
ALLOWABLE VARIATIONS FROM RATED STEAM PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE
The following variations are intended to allow for transient operating conditions only. To
eliminate the possibility of voiding the guarantee, steps should be taken to minimize their
occurrence and operate at design conditions.
INLET PRESSURE
The initial pressure at rated load shall average not more than rated pressure over any 12-
month operating period.
The turbine is capable of operating without damage at less than rated steam flow with an
average pressure of 105% of rated pressure. (This permissible variation recognizes the
increase in pressure with decrease in steam flow encountered during operation.)
The initial pressure shall not exceed 110% of rated pressure in maintaining these
averages except during abnormal conditions.
During abnormal conditions, the initial pressure may swing momentarily to 120% of rated
value. The aggregate of such swings shall not exceed 12 hours per 12-month operating
period.
INLET TEMPERATURE
The steam temperature at the turbine inlet flange shall average not more than rated
temperature over any 12-month operating period. In maintaining this average, the
temperature shall not exceed rated temperature plus 15°F (8°C) except during abnormal
conditions. During abnormal conditions, the temperature shall not exceed rated
temperature plus 25°F (14°C) for more than 400 hours per 12-month operating period, nor
rated temperature plus 50°F (30°C) for swings of 15 minutes duration or less, aggregating
no more than 80 hours per 12-month operating period.
EXHAUST PRESSURE FOR NON-CONDENSING TURBINES
The exhaust pressure shall average not more than rated exhaust pressure over any 12-
month operating period.
The turbine shall be capable of operating without damage at less than rated steam flow to
the turbine, provided that the exhaust pressure shall not exceed 110% nor drop below
80% of rated exhaust pressure.
EXHAUST PRESSURE FOR CONDENSING TURBINES
Any anticipated variations in the exhaust steam pressure should be specified by the user
so that it can be taken into consideration in the design of the turbine.
________________________________________________________________________
R vA lws.turbine.3/18/2014
D
IN6-APR- 16
2724-527-2811
0 337 / 633
0
COPYRIGHT
The information contained in this technical manual is the property of Elliott Company, and is furnished for use
by the assigned recipient only. Reproduction, disclosure or distribution of any part of the contents of this
manual is expressly forbidden without written consent of Elliott Company.
© ELLIOTT COMPANY 2008
Elliott Company
Jeannette, PA 15644
Phone Number 724-527-2811
FAX Number 724-600-8442
PRINTED IN THE U.S.A.
D R A
lws.turbine.3/18/2014 vi
IN6-APR- 16
0
0 338 / 633
724-527-2811
TABLE OF CONTENTS
AYR Turbine, “T” Governor System
Customer Order Information

Equipment Data
CHAPTER 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION
PAGE NO.
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 1-1

GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................. 1-2
Turbine Casing and Carbon Rings ...................................................................... 1-2
Sentinel Valve ..................................................................................................... 1-2
Nozzle Ring and Reversing Blade Assembly ...................................................... 1-2
Bearing Housings and Supports ......................................................................... 1-2
Governor System ................................................................................................ 1-2
Journal Bearings ................................................................................................. 1-5
Rotor Locating Bearing ....................................................................................... 1-5
Overspeed Trip System ...................................................................................... 1-5
Rotor ................................................................................................................... 1-5
Steam Chest ....................................................................................................... 1-5
FACTORY TESTS .......................................................................................................... 1-5
SHIPMENT ..................................................................................................................... 1-5
UNPACKING ................................................................................................................... 1-6
HANDLING ..................................................................................................................... 1-6
STORAGE ...................................................................................................................... 1-7
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS ................................................................................. 1-8
FIELD SERVICES ........................................................................................................... 1-8
FACTORY REPAIR ........................................................................................................ 1-8
CHAPTER 2 – INSTALLATION
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 2-1

FOUNDATION ................................................................................................................ 2-3
Foundation Preparation ....................................................................................... 2-6
CHOCK BLOCKS ........................................................................................................... 2-7
Chock Block ........................................................................................................ 2-7
GROUTING ..................................................................................................................... 2-11
SETTING THE EQUIPMENT ON FOUNDATION ........................................................... 2-13
COUPLING INSTALLATION ........................................................................................... 2-14
Installing a Straight Bore Coupling ...................................................................... 2-14
Installing a Tapered Bore Coupling ..................................................................... 2-15
SHAFT ALIGNMENT ...................................................................................................... 2-16
Shaft Alignment Map Instructions ....................................................................... 2-20
Rim and Face Method of Alignment .................................................................... 2-24
Reverse Indicator Method of Shaft Alignment ..................................................... 2-27
Hot Alignment Check .......................................................................................... 2-29
Realign as Necessary ......................................................................................... 2-33
D R A i
IN6-APR- 16
0
100qa.tofc.standard.5/15/2009
2 0
http://www.elliott-turbo.com/ 339 / 633 724-527-2811
Table of Contents
PAGE NO.
CHAPTER 2 – INSTALLATION
(Continued)
TURBINE PIPING RECOMMENDATIONS ..................................................................... 2-33

STEAM LINE BLOW DOWN ........................................................................................... 2-34
TURBINE STEAM SUPPLY ............................................................................................ 2-35
TURBINE ATMOSPHERIC RELIEF VALVES ................................................................ 2-35
Condensing Turbines .......................................................................................... 2-35
Non-condensing Turbines ................................................................................... 2-36
MISCELLANEOUS PIPING CONNECTIONS ................................................................. 2-36
VACUUM BREAKER FOR CONDENSING TURBINES ................................................. 2-40
CONNECTING TURBINE TO CONDENSER ................................................................. 2-40
TURBINE INSULATION .................................................................................................. 2-41
Turbine Jacketing ................................................................................................ 2-41
CHAPTER 3 – OPERATION
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 3-1
STEAM SUPPLY ............................................................................................................ 3-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................................... 3-2
PREPARING THE TURBINE FOR INITIAL START-UP ................................................. 3-3
INITIAL START-UP ......................................................................................................... 3-6
ROUTINE START-UP ..................................................................................................... 3-9
OVERLOAD HAND VALVES .......................................................................................... 3-11
TURBINE SHUTDOWN .................................................................................................. 3-13
OPERATION OF EMERGENCY AND STANDBY TURBINES ....................................... 3-13
CHAPTER 4 – MAINTENANCE
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 4-1

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ....................................................................................... 4-1
TURBINE CASING and MISCELLANEOUS JOINTS ..................................................... 4-3
TURBINE CASING and CARBON RING SERVICE ....................................................... 4-4
Packing Case Disassembly ................................................................................. 4-5
Carbon Ring Removal ......................................................................................... 4-5
Clearances .......................................................................................................... 4-6
Adjustments ........................................................................................................ 4-6
Packing Case Assembly ..................................................................................... 4-7
BEARING LINERS .......................................................................................................... 4-8
Disassembly ........................................................................................................ 4-8
Clearances .......................................................................................................... 4-8
To Check the Bearing Liner Clearances ............................................................. 4-8
Dimensional Method ........................................................................................... 4-8
Plastigage Method .............................................................................................. 4-9
Lift Check Method ............................................................................................... 4-9
Adjustments ........................................................................................................ 4-10
Assembly ............................................................................................................. 4-10
D
ii
R A
724-527-2811
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 340 / 633
Table of Contents
PAGE NO.
(Continued)
WATER COOLED BEARINGS ....................................................................................... 4-10

Disassembly ........................................................................................................ 4-10
Adjustments ........................................................................................................ 4-10
Assembly ............................................................................................................. 4-11
ROTOR ASSEMBLY ....................................................................................................... 4-12
Removal .............................................................................................................. 4-12
Clearances .......................................................................................................... 4-13
Adjustments ........................................................................................................ 4-13
Replacement ....................................................................................................... 4-13
EXHAUST PEDESTAL REPLACEMENT ....................................................................... 4-14
Disassembly ........................................................................................................ 4-14
Clearances .......................................................................................................... 4-14
Adjustments ........................................................................................................ 4-14
Replacement ....................................................................................................... 4-15
STEAM BEARING HOUSING REPLACEMENT ............................................................. 4-15
Disassembly ........................................................................................................ 4-15
Clearances .......................................................................................................... 4-16
Adjustments ........................................................................................................ 4-16
Replacement ....................................................................................................... 4-16
EXHAUST PEDESTAL AND STEAM BEARING HOUSING ALIGNMENT .................. 4-17
To Check Bearing Housing Alignment ................................................................ 4-17
To Correct any Misalignment .............................................................................. 4-18
ROTOR LOCATING BEARING....................................................................................... 4-19
Clearances .......................................................................................................... 4-19
Disassembly ........................................................................................................ 4-19
Adjustments ........................................................................................................ 4-19
Assembly ............................................................................................................. 4-19
NOZZLE RING and REVERSING BLADE ASSEMBLY .................................................. 4-20
Disassembly ........................................................................................................ 4-20
Clearances .......................................................................................................... 4-21
Adjustments ........................................................................................................ 4-21
Assembly ............................................................................................................. 4-21
SHAFT SLEEVE SEALS ................................................................................................. 4-22
Disassembly ........................................................................................................ 4-22
Replacement and Adjustment ............................................................................. 4-22
Clearances .......................................................................................................... 4-22
OVERSPEED TRIP SYSTEM ........................................................................................ 4-23
Disassembly, Standard YR Overspeed Trip Mechanism .................................... 4-23
Trip Body Removal .............................................................................................. 4-24
Plunger Assembly Replacement ......................................................................... 4-24
Trip Body Replacement ....................................................................................... 4-25
Assembly, Overspeed Trip Mechanism............................................................... 4-25
Adjusting the Trip Pin and Plunger Clearance .................................................... 4-26
Adjusting the Turbine Trip Speed ........................................................................ 4-26
Disassembly, Trip Valve ...................................................................................... 4-28
Guide Bushing Replacement .............................................................................. 4-28
Assembly, Trip Valve .......................................................................................... 4-29
Backseating the Trip Valve ................................................................................. 4-29
Trip System Linkage ........................................................................................... 4-29
Trip System Clearances ...................................................................................... 4-30
D R A
iii
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 341 / 633
Table of Contents
PAGE NO.
(Continued)
GOVERNOR VALVE....................................................................................................... 4-30

Disassembly ........................................................................................................ 4-30
Clearances .......................................................................................................... 4-31
Adjustments ........................................................................................................ 4-31
Assembly ............................................................................................................. 4-33
OVERLOAD HAND VALVE ............................................................................................ 4-33
Disassembly ........................................................................................................ 4-33
Adjustments ........................................................................................................ 4-33
Assembly ............................................................................................................. 4-34
CHAPTER 5 – LUBRICATION
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 5-1

BASIC OIL REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................... 5-1
CARE OF OIL ................................................................................................................. 5-1
METHODS OF LUBRICATION ....................................................................................... 5-2
RING OILED LUBRICATION .......................................................................................... 5-2
To change Oil in Bearing Housing Reservoir ...................................................... 5-4
PRESSURE LUBRICATION ........................................................................................... 5-5
Lubrication System Flushing ............................................................................... 5-5
Normal Maintenance .......................................................................................... 5-7
Turnaround Maintenance .................................................................................... 5-7
SELECTING LUBRICATING OILS ................................................................................. 5-7
CHAPTER 6 – “T” GOVERNOR SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 6-1

LUBRICATION ................................................................................................................ 6-1
OPERATION ................................................................................................................... 6-2
Principle of Operation .......................................................................................... 6-2
Initial Start-Up ..................................................................................................... 6-4
Routine Start-Up ................................................................................................. 6-4
MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................................. 6-5
Routine Maintenance .......................................................................................... 6-5
Governor Disassembly ........................................................................................ 6-5
Governor Removal .............................................................................................. 6-5
Clearances .......................................................................................................... 6-6
Governor Installation ........................................................................................... 6-6
Linkage Adjustments ........................................................................................... 6-7
D
iv
R A
724-527-2811
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 342 / 633
Table of Contents
PAGE NO.
CHAPTER 7 – TROUBLESHOOTING
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 7-1
CHAPTER 8 – ACCESSORIES
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 8-1

ACCESSORY LIST ......................................................................................................... 8-3
CHAPTER 9 – SERVICE/PARTS/SALES
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 9-1

SPARE PARTS ............................................................................................................... 9-1
Maintenance Parts List ........................................................................................ 9-1
Ordering .............................................................................................................. 9-2
Storage ................................................................................................................ 9-2
Returning Parts to the Factory ............................................................................ 9-3
FIELD SERVICE ASSISTANCE ..................................................................................... 9-3
CUSTOMER TRAINING ................................................................................................. 9-3
TECHNICAL MANUAL COMMENT SHEET ................................................................... 9-3
APPENDIX A - MAINTENANCE PARTS LIST
APPENDIX B - SALES AND SERVICE OFFICE LOCATIONS
APPENDIX C - TECHNICAL MANUAL COMMENT SHEET
APPENDIX D - ELLIOTT TECHNICAL TRAINING
CHAPTER 10 - TECHNICAL DRAWINGS

INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 10-1
NOMENCLATURE AND USE OF ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS .......................................... 10-1
DRAWING LIST .............................................................................................................. 10-3
D R A
v
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 343 / 633
Table of Contents
FIGURE NO. LIST OF FIGURES PAGE NO.
1-1 Typical AYR Turbine .................................................................................. 1-3

1-2 Lifting the AYR Turbine .............................................................................. 1-6
2-1 Typical Baseplate Mounting Arrangement on Structural Steel ................... 2-3

2-2 Suggested Anchor Bolt Arrangement ......................................................... 2-5
2-3 Typical Soleplate Mounting Arrangement .................................................. 2-5
2-4 Typical Baseplate Mounting Arrangement ................................................. 2-6
2-5 Typical Chock Block ................................................................................... 2-7
2-6 Preferred Location of Chock Blocks ........................................................... 2-8
2-7 Preferred Location of Chock Blocks ........................................................... 2-9
2-8 Alternate Location of Chock Blocks............................................................ 2-9
2-9 Typical Chock Block Arrangement ............................................................. 2-10
2-10 Flexible Couplings/Tapered and Straight ................................................... 2-15
2-11 Types of Shaft Misalignment ...................................................................... 2-18
2-12 Axial Separation ......................................................................................... 2-19
2-13 Axial Separation-Diagram Coupling ........................................................... 2-19
2-14 Shaft Alignment Map Example ................................................................... 2-21
2-15 Pictorial of Note 3 on Alignment Map ......................................................... 2-22
2-16 Pictorial of Note 4 on Alignment Map ......................................................... 2-22
2-17 Blank Alignment Map ................................................................................. 2-23
2-18 Measuring Angular Misalignment ............................................................... 2-25
2-19 Angular Displacement ................................................................................ 2-25
2-20 Measuring Parallel Offset ........................................................................... 2-26
2-21 Reverse Indicator Readings ....................................................................... 2-27
2-22 Typ. Displacement of Benchmarks on Foundation and Bearing Housing .. 2-30
2-23 Graph. Determination of Shaft in Hot Position Relative to Cold Position ... 2-31
2-24 Suggested Steam Piping Arrangement ...................................................... 2-36
2-25 Miscellaneous Piping Connections............................................................. 2-38
2-26 Suggested Piping Arrangement for Water Cooled Bearing Housings ........ 2-39
2-27 Suggested Piping Arrg’t For Water Cooled Bearing Housings And Caps .. 2-39
2-28 Suggested Sealing Steam Piping Arrg’t for Condensing Turbines ............. 2-40
2-29 Turbine Recommended Insulation Metal Jacketing ................................... 2-41
4-1 Horizontal Joint Detail ................................................................................ 4-4

4-2 Packing Case Arrangement ....................................................................... 4-4
4-3 Carbon Ring Seal Assemblies .................................................................... 4-5
4-4 Schematic View, Water Cooled Bearing Housing ...................................... 4-11
4-5 Rotor Disk Arrangements ........................................................................... 4-12
4-6 Journal Bearing and Rotor Shaft Contact ................................................... 4-18
4-7 Nozzle Ring and Reversing Blade Arrangement ........................................ 4-20
4-8 Overspeed Trip System .............................................................................. 4-27
4-9 Not Used
4-10 Governor Valve Packing Arrangement ....................................................... 4-32
4-11 Overload Hand Nozzle Valve Assembly ..................................................... 4-34
4-12 Typical YR Turbine ..................................................................................... 4-37
4-13 Steam Chest Assembly .............................................................................. 4-39
4-14 Cold Clearance Diagram for AYR Turbines ............................................... 4-40
D
vi
R A
724-527-2811
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 344 / 633
Table of Contents
LIST OF FIGURES
(Continued)
FIGURE NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.
5-1 Ring Oiled Lubrication ................................................................................ 5-3

5-2 Glass Oiler.................................................................................................. 5-3
6-1 Governor System Arrangement .................................................................. 6-1

6-2 “T” Governor Schematic ............................................................................. 6-3
6-3 “T” Governor ............................................................................................... 6-8
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.
3-1 Overload Hand Valves ............................................................................... 3-12
4-1 Scheduled Maintenance Guidelines ........................................................... 4-2

4-2 Min./Max. Carbon Ring Dimensions for Operating
Exhaust Temperatures to 750 ºF (400 ºC) AYR Turbines .......................... 4-6
4-3 Position of Locating Grooves ..................................................................... 4-16
4-4 Bolting Torque Requirements ..................................................................... 4-41
5-1 Oil Level Range, Capacities and Figure ’A’ Dimension .............................. 5-4
5-2 Guidelines for Selecting Lubricating Oils.................................................... 5-8
5-3 Operating Limits for Turbines ..................................................................... 5-9
5-4 Bearing Temperature Limits ....................................................................... 5-10
7-1 Troubleshooting Guide ............................................................................... 7-3
D R A
vii
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 345 / 633
CHAPTER ONE
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
This technical manual supplies information for the installation, operation, and maintenance
of your Elliott equipment. To avoid operational and maintenance difficulties, special
attention should be given to the precautionary instructions emphasized throughout the
manual.
Table of Contents – includes Customer Order Information, Equipment Data, and

Limitations, Warranty and Safety.
Chapter 1 - General Information – provides a description of the equipment and proce-

dures for unpacking, handling and storage.
Chapter 2 - Installation – discusses the basic foundation requirements along with the
alignment procedures, piping recommendations and other installation details.
Chapter 3 - Operation – provides equipment guidelines for start-up and shutdown pro-
cedures, including recommended safety precautions to observe during operation.
Chapter 4 - Maintenance – supplies a recommended routine maintenance schedule along

with disassembly, assembly and adjustment procedures.
Chapter 5 - Lubrication – describes the lubrication system, the oil requirements and gives
consideration to the care of the lubricating oil.
Chapter 6 - Control System – furnishes information required for operating, adjusting and
maintaining the control system.
Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting – provides probable causes of problems and the necessary

corrective actions.
Chapter 8 - Accessories – contains instructions and/or data and drawings applicable to

various accessory components provided with the equipment.
Chapter 9 - Service/Parts/Sales – provides the Spare Parts List, information on how to

order parts and where to obtain service assistance and training for operators and
maintenance personnel.
Chapter 10 - Technical Drawings – contains specific drawings for your equipment. The
drawing numbers may have a suffix number, or group number identifying the applicable
assembly on the drawing. Be sure to use the suffix listed when making reference to a
drawing.
D R A
100qa.ch01.7/2/2008 1-1
IN6-APR- 16
0
0 346 / 633
724-527-2811
Chapter 1
General Information
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Elliott AYR turbine is a single stage steam turbine controlled by single steam
admission valve. AYR turbines are used for numerous drive applications under various
steam conditions and consist of the following components. (Refer to Figure 1-1.)
Turbine Casing and Carbon Rings

The horizontally split turbine casing surrounds the rotating element of the turbine and
supports the stationary steam path parts. The steam end casing consists of the high-
pressure steam ring, nozzle chambers, and a packing case. The exhaust end casing
contains the steam exhaust connection and a packing case. The packing cases house the
carbon rings that seal the casing and rotor shaft. These rings minimize steam leakage
along the shaft when the turbine operates as non-condensing. Condensing turbines
employ carbon rings along with a sealing steam arrangement to prevent air leakage into
the casing.
Sentinel Valve
This warning device, located on the top of the turbine casing, indicates excessive turbine
casing pressure. In the event the casing pressure exceeds a predetermined setting above
the normal operating pressure, the valve releases a small amount of visible steam to the
atmosphere, causing a hissing sound. The sentinel valve does NOT serve as a relief
valve. Full flow relief valves, or other protective devices used to relieve the turbine of
excessive casing pressure, MUST be installed by the customer. (See “Atmospheric Relief
Valve”, Chapter 2.)
Nozzle Ring And Reversing Blade Assembly

The nozzle ring is bolted to the inside of the steam end turbine casing. The nozzles,
located in the nozzle ring, direct the steam against the blades on the first rotor disk. The
reversing blade assembly is bolted to the nozzle ring. The reversing blades reverse the
steam flow as it exits the first disk and directs the steam into the blades on the second
disk.
Bearing Housings And Supports

The steam end bearing housing is bolted and doweled to the steam end casing. A
support, attached to the bottom of the steam end bearing housing, sustains the weight of
the steam end of the turbine, and allows for thermal growth of the casing. The bearing
housing contains a journal bearing, rotor locating bearing, oil ring(s) (if required), the
overspeed trip assembly, governor drive arrangement and a shaft sleeve seal. The seal
prevents oil leakage from the bearing housing, and restricts the entry of dust, dirt and
moisture.
The exhaust end of the turbine is supported by the exhaust end bearing pedestal, which is
attached to the turbine casing at the center line. The bearing pedestal houses a journal
bearing, oil rings (if required) and two shaft sleeve seals.
Governor System
AYR turbines employ several types of governors to control the turbine speed. The
governor positions the governor valve via the governor linkage. The governor valve varies
the steam flow through the turbine, thereby matching the driven machine power and
speed.
D R A
1-2 100qa.ch01.7/2/2008
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 724-527-2811
0 347 / 633
Chapter 1
General Information
348 / 633
A
IN6-APR- 16
R2 0
FIGURE 1-1
D
100qa.ch01.7/2/2008 AYR TURBINE
http://www.elliott-turbo.com/ 1-3
0
724-527-2811
Chapter 1
General Information
Journal Bearings
Two journal bearings radially position and support the rotor. One is located in the steam
end bearing housing, the other in the exhaust end bearing pedestal. The bearings are
babbitt lined, horizontally split, precision machined steel sleeves.
Rotor Locating Bearing

The rotor locating bearing is mounted on the rotor shaft and positioned in the steam end
bearing housing. The purpose of the locating bearing is to position the rotor axially within
the turbine casing.
Overspeed Trip System

The emergency overspeed trip system operates independently of the governor system.
The trip system is designed to shut the turbine down at trip speed.
Rotor
Rotors used in AYR Turbines are typically of the “built up” design whereby the disks are
keyed and shrunk on the rotor shaft. Two styles of disks are used on rotor assemblies:
two separate straight sided disks, each having a row of buckets (Detail A, Figure 4-4), or
one profile disk containing both rows of buckets (Detail B, Figure 4-4). A shaft sleeve seal,
rotor locating bearing, overspeed trip mechanism, and the governor drive arrangement are
mounted on the steam end of the rotor shaft. The drive coupling and two shaft sleeve
seals are mounted on the exhaust end. Shrink rings are mounted outboard and between
the disks on rotors equipped with straight disk assemblies. All rotor assemblies are
dynamically balanced to provide smooth operation.
Steam Chest
The steam chest is bolted to the steam end of the turbine casing. Steam flowing through
the steam inlet passes through a strainer in the steam chest, past the trip valve, then past
the governor valve and seat to the steam ring in the casing.
FACTORY TESTS
The AYR turbine is completely assembled and steam tested before shipment. During
testing, the speed governor, overspeed trip mechanism, trip valve and governor valve are
adjusted, and the overall mechanical operation is determined to be satisfactory.
SHIPMENT
The assembled turbine is mounted on a skid and covered with an open framework of light
crating. The purpose of the crating is to indicate the outside limits of the turbine, and to
provide a means of visually identifying the contents of the crate. The crating should not be
regarded as protection against damage resulting from rough handling. Internal surfaces
and exterior unpainted machined surfaces of the turbine are coated with a rust
preventative compound.
Turbines that are exported are boxed in containers having extra shoring and bracing. The
tops of the containers are waterproofed to provide additional protection against weather
damage.
1-4
D R A724-527-2811
100qa.ch01.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 349 / 633
Chapter 1
General Information
UNPACKING
Remove the crating and check all items against the packing list. Ensure that parts are not
missing or damaged. Handle all parts carefully. If inspection shows that the turbine has
been damaged during shipment, contact the carrier and file a damage claim immediately.
If any parts are missing from the shipment, contact the nearest Elliott Company Office.
HANDLING
-WARNING-
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO LIFT THE TURBINE BY THE
EYEBOLT LOCATED ON THE TURBINE CASING
COVER. THIS EYEBOLT IS FOR LIFTING ONLY THE
CASING COVER. USING THIS EYEBOLT TO LIFT THE
ENTIRE WEIGHT OF THE TURBINE PRESENTS A
SERIOUS SAFETY HAZARD.
The turbine can be lifted safely by the use of slings under both ends of the turbine casing
as shown in Figure 1-2. When lifting the turbine, machined surfaces must be adequately
protected and the turbine kept level. In general, the lifting and handling of the turbine, and
any associated equipment, must be planned around the facilities available at the
installation site. The exact procedures as to “How to handle the equipment”, should be the
responsibility of those charged with the handling task. The estimated weight of the turbine
is provided on the outline drawing that is located in the drawing section of this manual.
© ELLIOTT TURBOMACHINERY CO. INC. (YR)
FIGURE 1-2
LIFTING THE AYR TURBINE
100qa.ch01.7/2/2008 1-5
D R Ahttp://www.elliott-turbo.com/ 724-527-2811
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 350 / 633
Chapter 1
General Information
STORAGE
Rust preventative compound is applied to the turbine before shipment. This provides
protection for up to 3 months outdoor storage, or six months indoor storage. The turbine
should be stored indoors whenever possible. The storage area should provide a clean,
dry environment, free from temperature extremes. The turbine should be maintained in an
approximate level position while in storage. The expected protection of the rust
preventative does not take into consideration extreme conditions resulting from outdoor
storage. Storing the turbine outdoors often subjects it to frequent temperature changes,
excessive amounts of moisture and, in some instances, salt laden air. All of these
conditions reduce the effectiveness of the rust preventative and should be avoided.
When a turbine is taken out of service for an extended period, it should be prepared for
storage. The following steps will safeguard against rust and corrosion:
(Refer to “Turbine Disassembly and Assembly” procedures, Chapter 4.)
1. Isolate the turbine from the steam supply and exhaust source. Tag all isolating
valves.
2. Remove the bearing caps and coat the rotor shaft journals, bearing liners and rotor
locating bearing with a suitable rust preventative.
3. Replace the bearing caps. Leave the bolts finger tight, and tag the bearing caps to
indicate that the bolts are loose.
4. Remove the top half turbine casing and carbon rings. Coat the rotor assembly,
spacer rings, carbon ring sealing areas on the rotor shaft and the inside of the turbine
casing with rust preventative compound.
5. Replace the carbon rings and the top half turbine casing. Leave the bolts finger tight.
Tag the casing cover to warn that the flange must be cleaned and resealed before
placing the turbine in operation.
6. Coat the external rotor shaft areas with rust preventative.
7. If the turbine is equipped with a Woodward Hydraulic Governor, fill the governor with
turbine oil.
8. Coat governor linkage and pins with rust preventative.
9. Inspect the turbine periodically and reapply rust preventative as necessary.
1-6
D R A724-527-2811
100qa.ch01.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 351 / 633
Chapter 1
General Information
Prior to returning the turbine to service (Refer to “Disassembly and Assembly” procedures,
Chapter 4):
1. Clean all rust preventative compound from the turbine with a suitable solvent and lint
free rags.
2. Inspect the turbine for possible damage incurred during handling and storage.
3. Carefully clean lightly corroded surfaces with fine emery cloth. Replace any heavily
corroded parts.
4. Clean and re-seal all flange joints.
5. Refer to “Initial Start-Up”, Chapter 3.
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS
Part lists are included with many of the illustrations throughout this manual. The Spare
Parts List is located in Chapter 9 which designates recommended spare parts that should
be kept in stock. Stocking these parts will enable turbine maintenance, and/or emergency
repairs that could otherwise cause lengthy shutdowns. Ordering, Storing and Returning
spare parts are also discussed in Chapter 9.
FIELD SERVICES
Field service representatives are available to oversee the installation and start-up, or any
phase of maintenance, on Elliott equipment. Also, field service engineers are available to
conduct performance analysis and other related equipment evaluations. For the location
of the nearest Elliott Company office, refer to the “Sales and Service Locations” located in
Chapter 9 of this manual.
FACTORY REPAIR
Facilities are available for major repair and rebuilding of Elliott turbines at our factory, or
our authorized repair shops around the world. Contact the nearest Elliott Company office
for details.
100qa.ch01.7/2/2008 1-7
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 352 / 633
CHAPTER TWO
INSTALLATION
INTRODUCTION
Proper installation of the machinery will contribute to long trouble-free operating life with
minimum maintenance. To aid in making a proper installation, this chapter describes a
detailed procedure that has proven successful for installing numerous turbines and
associated equipment. The following chapter contains the installation methods
recommended by Elliott Company. Other procedures do exist that can provide a
satisfactory installation; however, prior to using any of these alternate procedures, it is
recommended that the purchaser carefully investigate both the procedure and the ability of
workers to produce a permanent and satisfactory installation.
Elliott Service Representatives are experienced in installation procedures and can assist
in providing a good installation. The installation procedures contained in this chapter are
as specific as possible but cannot possibly cover all variations in field conditions.
Therefore, the Elliott Service Representative may sometimes deviate slightly from the
published procedures. This is done to give a better installation by using procedures to fit
specific field and service conditions. Regardless of the procedure used, first class
materials and quality workmanship should be employed.
The procedure recommended by Elliott involves the following items:
1. Foundation
2. Chock Blocks
3. Grouting
4. Setting the equipment on foundation
5. Shaft alignment
6. Coupling Installation
7. Piping Recommendations
Included in this chapter is a detailed procedure for making “cold alignment” as well as
methods for making machine “hot alignment” checks.
2-1
D R A100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 353 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
While many aspects of an installation are the responsibility of the purchaser or his
engineer, some suggestions are offered that may contribute to suitable installation. One
such example is whether to install the machine outdoors under only a roof, or in a
completely enclosed building. While this class of equipment can generally be installed
outdoors, local conditions may suggest alternate arrangements. Freezing or low ambient
temperatures around machinery can create difficulties during start-ups and shutdowns; for
example, lubricating oil must be warm before starting equipment. Water and steam
equipment must be drained completely or heated during shutdown.
Alternately, in tropical areas, direct sun on one side of the foundation might cause
expansions that, when coupled with other factors in the system, could create unacceptable
alignment.
In addition to operating considerations, maintenance and equipment inspections will be

required - sometimes scheduled and occasionally unscheduled. Regardless of which,
weather conditions may not always cooperate. Rain, snow, wind and low or high
temperatures generally extend maintenance and inspection when workers are exposed
directly to these elements. In addition, quality of workmanship may be lowered to a point
where work accomplished is futile.
For inspection and maintenance, a permanent overhead crane or hoist is recommended.

Casing top halves and rotors have close clearances that must be protected; therefore,
moves must be slow and positive. This is seldom achievable with crawler or wheel-
mounted cranes.
Installation of the machinery may be on either steel soleplates or a self-supporting

fabricated steel baseplate. The functional purpose of these intermediate supports is to
provide a permanent mounting plate for the machine feet that can be shimmed. When the
foundation support is not continuous or is mounted directly on columns, a self-supporting
fabricated steel baseplate must be designed that will minimize deflections between contact
supports.
Soleplates usually provide support for only one machine or smaller equipment strings. In
most cases, a baseplate is made to support larger equipment strings. Some baseplates
are also designed to contain or support lubrication and seal system piping and
instrumentation in addition to the machinery. Baseplates with the lubrication system built
in may require less space and have lower installation cost, but are generally more difficult
to maintain.
Installations of a self-supporting baseplate on a reinforced concrete foundation should

follow the guidelines presented with only the sections indicated on the outline drawing left
unsupported. When the installation of a self-supporting baseplate is on structural steel or
columns, care must be exercised to ensure that the mounting surfaces are machined level
(from end-to-end and side-to-side there should be less than 0°, 6' slope) and flat (each
pad must be flat within .003" [.076mm]). Full contact between the mounting surfaces is
required without the use of step shimming. With this installation arrangement, grouting is
not used to fill in gaps, but other procedures presented in this chapter should be followed.
See Figure 2-1.
2-2
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 354 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
EQUIPMENT BASEPLATE
FOUNDATION BOLT
BASEPLATE PAD
SHIMS
STRUCTURE PAD
PLANT SUPPORTING STRUCTURE
FIGURE 2-1
TYPICAL BASEPLATE MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT ON STRUCTURAL STEEL
FOUNDATION
The principle function of the foundation is to provide a permanently rigid, non-warping

support for the machinery. In meeting these requirements, the foundation should:
• Hold machines in proper alignment under all operating conditions.
• Support the machine’s weight and load, and distribute it uniformly and evenly to the
soil or main support structure.
• Maintain established equipment locations.
• Minimize transmission of vibration to or from the machines.
While the responsibility for a successful foundation rests with the purchaser, the following
suggestions are offered for assistance and consideration:
1. The outline drawing provides equipment mounting surface areas, anchor bolt
locations, main piping connections, and other information necessary in designing a
foundation.
2. A foundation of reinforced concrete should be of ample size and proportion for

adequate support of the machinery, as well as piping forces such as inlet and
discharge piping.
2-3
D R A100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 355 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
3. Provision should be made in the foundation design for accessibility to all parts of the
machine or its auxiliaries during operation, inspection and maintenance.
4. The foundation should rest entirely on natural rock or entirely on solid earth. A
foundation resting partly on one or partly on another may warp due to settling of part
of the foundation support. Distortion may also occur due to unequal pressures
created by differences in ground water level.
5. Foundations supported on pilings should have a rigid continuous cap over the pilings
on which the foundation rests.
6. Temperature surrounding the foundation should be uniform. Temperature differences

between the top slab and mat, for instance, can create substantial bending stresses
in columns. Care must be taken to reduce thermal distortion from radiation or uneven
heating and cooling. Direct sunlight on outdoor tropical installations is to be avoided.
Steam lines passing close to the foundation should also be avoided; but when
unavoidable, the lines should be insulated and the foundation shielded.
7. Foundation should be isolated from all other structures and arranged so that outside
vibrations are not transmitted to it. Where foundations must be supported by floor
beams, a vibration dampening material should be interposed between the beams and
the foundation.
8. Design of foundation structure should avoid resonant frequencies of operating speed,

40% to 50% of operating speed, rotor critical speeds, and two times operating
speeds.
9. It is recommended that concrete foundations be allowed to cure for approximately 28

days before loading. This will allow for development of strength and reduction in
shrinkage rate. Curing procedure should be in accordance with American Concrete
Institute recommendations.
10. Recommended size of foundation anchor bolts and projection above foundation is
shown on the outline drawing. Suggested installation of the anchor bolt is as shown
in Figure 2-2. Use of a pipe sleeve around anchor bolt allows for some shifting of the
anchor bolt if found necessary during installation of equipment. It allows for
increased stretch length of anchor bolts.
11. When establishing the top elevation for the foundation, allow approximately 0.5 inch
(12 mm) for removal of top crust of concrete by chipping. Reinforcing rods, ties, or
steel members should be sufficiently below the surface to permit chipping away of
approximately 1.00 inch (25 mm) of concrete without making contact. A minimum
space of 1.00 inch (25 mm) should be provided between foundation and chock block
to provide adequate room for insertion of grout. The maximum distance between the
foundation and soleplate or baseplate should not exceed 4.00 inches (100 mm).
Figure 2-3 is a cross-sectional view showing the location of a soleplate with chock blocks,
chock block grout and final grout. Figure 2-4 is similar but shows the location of a
baseplate with chock blocks, chock block grout and final grout.
2-4
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 356 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
BASEPLATE BOXBEAM CHIPPED HALF OF

ROUGH FOUNDATION
0.50 IN. (12 mm) + 1.5 D FINAL GROUT

4.00 IN. (100 mm) MAX. (DO NOT POUR UNTIL FINAL
BETWEEN BOTTOM OF ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENTS
BASEPLATE AND FOUNDATION HAVE BEEN MADE)
1.00 IN. (25 mm) MIN.

BETWEEN CHOCK BLOCK AND
9 x D MIN.
TOP OF ROUGH FOUNDATION
2 x D MIN.
D
CHOCK BLOCK 2 x D RADIUS
PIPE SLEEVE
5 x D MIN.
CONCRETE
FOUNDATION
7 x D MIN. REINFORCING ROD

(PLACE SUFFICIENTLY
BELOW FOUNDATION SURFACE
ANCHOR BOLT TO PERMIT NECESSARY CHIPPING)
FIGURE 2-2
SUGGESTED ANCHOR BOLT ARRANGEMENT
FOUNDATION BOLT
EQUIPMENT SOLEPLATE
PIPE SLEEVE
SHIMS
CHOCK BLOCK HOLD DOWN

SCREW
ROUGH
FOUNDATION
SURFACE
CHOCK BLOCK GROUT

LEVELING SCREWS
FIGURE 2-3
TYPICAL SOLEPLATE MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
2-5
D R A100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 357 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
Foundation Preparation
When the foundation is constructed of reinforced concrete, it is not practical to pour the
concrete block with the necessary precision to permit setting the machinery directly onto
the block. Therefore, the soleplate or baseplate is set with a void between it and the
foundation. After the soleplate or baseplate is positioned, machinery placed and cold
alignment check made, the soleplate or baseplate is cemented or grouted to the
foundation. This procedure essentially creates one continuous support for the machinery.
FOUNDATION BOLT
BASEPLATE PAD
PIPE SLEEVE
SHIMS
HOLD DOWN
CHOCK BLOCK SCREW
ROUGH
FOUNDATION
SURFACE
CHOCK BLOCK GROUT

LEVELING SCREWS
FIGURE 2-4
TYPICAL BASEPLATE MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
In order to obtain good bonding surfaces for the grout, all defective concrete, laitance, dirt,
oil, wax, grease and loose material must be removed from the mating surfaces. This can
best be accomplished by chipping, bush hammering or by other means until sound, clean
surfaces are obtained. Removal of approximately 0.5 inch (12 mm) of the top concrete
surface should provide a strong, laitance-free surface for bonding and anchoring of the
grout.
2-6
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 358 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
CHOCK BLOCKS
In this manual, the term “chock block” is used to describe steel or grout blocks that serve
to level and support the soleplate or baseplate prior to full grouting. The size of a steel
chock block may vary, but the two sizes shown in Figure 2-5 will generally satisfy most all
conditions. When steel chock blocks are furnished by Elliott Company, the blocks will
conform to the information provided in Figure 2-5 or, when desired, this figure can be used
to make chock blocks. To provide for ease of installation and leveling, four jack screws
are furnished in the chock block. A screw anchor in the center of the block is used to
anchor the chock block securely until grouting in of the blocks.
Chock Block
1. Material carbon steel plate
2. Machine both top and bottom flat
3. Break all corners and chamfer all holes
1.0 in.
25 mm 0.5 in.
13 mm
4.00 in.
8.00 in. OR 12.00 in. 101 mm
203 mm OR 305 mm
0.75 in.
19 mm
4 - SET SCREWS
1/2" - 13 x 1-1/2" LONG
OVAL POINT OR EQUIVALENT
MACHINE SCREW
1/4" - 20 x 3" LONG
FLAT HEAD OR EQUIVALENT
SCREW ANCHOR SHIELD TO
MATCH MACHINE SCREW
FIGURE 2-5
TYPICAL CHOCK BLOCK
2-7
D R A100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 359 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
Epoxy grout chock blocks can also be used in place of steel chock blocks. When using
epoxy grout chock blocks, position small forms at each anchor bolt just as suggested for
steel chock blocks. The top surface of each form should be level and at essentially the
same elevation as all other chock block forms. Forms should be anchored, coated with
wax and sealed around the bottom. When pouring grout, forms should be completely
filled. This will minimize the need for shimming between the chock and baseplate or
soleplate.
Use of chock blocks allows the installation workmen to easily make a change in elevation
at a soleplate or baseplate support pad. The chock blocks also distribute the machinery
weight and hold down nut force so that deflections of the soleplate or baseplate due to
these forces are minimized. With chock blocks, the soleplate or baseplate can be easily
shifted horizontally without disturbing established elevations.
For maximum effectiveness, two chock blocks should be positioned at each foundation
anchor bolt as shown in Figure 2-6. Machines mounted on baseplates generally have the
foundation anchor bolts spread out and close to only one edge; therefore, placement of
chock blocks can usually be accomplished as shown in Figure 2-6.
For machines mounted on soleplates, the number of foundation anchor bolts increases
while available surface area decreases, therefore making effective placement of chock
blocks more difficult.
ANCHOR BOLT
CHOCK BLOCK
BASEPLATE OR
APPROXIMATELY 4.00" (100 mm) SOLEPLATE
FIGURE 2-6
2-8
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 360 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
Figure 2-7 shows a preferred arrangement when space is available, while Figure 2-8
illustrates an alternate arrangement that may be used. The arrangement used should
provide maximum support and minimize deflection or warping to the soleplate or baseplate
during installation work.
36.00 in. (900 mm)
12.00 in
(300 mm)
CHOCK BLOCKS
FIGURE 2-7
20.00 in (500 mm)
9.00 in
(320 mm)
TWO CHOCK BLOCKS
FIGURE 2-8
ALTERNATE LOCATION OF CHOCK BLOCKS
Figure 2-9 illustrates a typical arrangement with chock blocks positioned on either side of
the foundation anchor bolt. As described earlier, the foundation surface must be prepared
by chipping or other means prior to setting the chock blocks. The chock block surfaces,
where a bond with the grout is desired, must also be cleaned prior to setting. Surfaces
must be free of oil, dirt and oxidation.
2-9
D R A100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 361 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
If the chock blocks have been coated with a catalyzed epoxy primer, the surface coating
should not be removed, but surfaces should be cleaned with solvent to remove any oil or
dirt prior to setting.
Foundation anchor bolt Obtain this dimension

Temporary plug from the certified
Seal outline drawing
Chock block
Leveling screws
Chock block Chipped foundation

grout surface
Form Seal
1.00 in (25mm) min.
Screw anchor
Hold down screw
Reinforcement rods
FIGURE 2-9
TYPICAL CHOCK BLOCK ARRANGEMENT
The chock block surfaces should be sandblasted if coated with rust or some other surface
coating. Sandblasting is best, but a disk grinder or other mechanical method can be used.
If chock blocks will be immediately grouted after setting, no further surface treatment is
required. A clean, sandblasted surface will provide a good bonding surface.
If grouting in one of the chock blocks will be delayed after cleaning, the cleaned surfaces
should be coated with an epoxy primer or surface coating recommended by the grout
supplier.
To set a chock block, determine the chock block anchor screw locations on the foundation
and drill 0.5-inch (12 mm) diameter by 1.00-inch (25 mm) deep holes (if screw anchor
shield is other than that shown, appropriate drilling should be used) in the concrete.
Position the chock block and engage the screw anchor as shown in Figure 2-9. Level the
individual blocks using the four set screws provided. All blocks must be level and
approximately at the same elevation. It is desirable to maintain all chock block elevations
within a few thousandths of an inch or a few hundredths of a millimeter. This makes final
installation and shimming of the equipment much easier. On installations where overall
length of the equipment is short, elevation of the chock blocks can best be set by use of a
straight edge and precision level. On installations where the overall length of the
equipment is large, use of a precision tilting level may be advantageous.
Regardless of the method used, shimming should be used between the chock blocks and
soleplate or baseplate to correct any elevation variations required.
2-10
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 362 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
NOTE
Before making a check of chock block level and elevation,
be sure anchor screw is tight and all four leveling screws
are making contact with the foundation.
GROUTING
The procedure to be followed for grouting in of chock blocks, soleplates or baseplates is

the same except for quantity of grout placed. Elliott recommends that the grout used be a
good quality epoxy grout system from a reliable manufacturer of heavy machinery grouts.
Epoxy grouts consist of an epoxy resin, hardener and graded silica aggregate. The resin
and hardener serve as the adhesive while the aggregate serves as a filler to reduce cost,
improve thermal expansion compatibility, and absorb heat released by curing. With proper
application, an epoxy grout should provide a permanent, reliable installation. Use of sand-
cement grout or sand-cement grout with various additives may also provide an adequate
installation; however both are generally lower in strength, have more tendencies to shrink
unevenly, and are generally more susceptible to chemical attack and deterioration by oils.
The prime purpose of grouting is to:

• Fill all voids between the foundation and the soleplate or baseplate.
• Provide a permanent bond between the foundation and the soleplate or baseplate.
• To assist the foundation anchor bolts in preventing lateral movement.
• Provide a solid, level base to which the machine can be anchored by the
foundation anchor bolts to prevent vertical movement.
• Make the soleplate or baseplate more or less an integral part of the concrete
foundation.
As anchor bolts are designed for hold down purposes, it is desirable to provide for some
stretching of the anchor bolt between the bottom of the sleeve and the bottom of the nut.
Therefore, it is recommended that the sleeve be filled with a pliable material such as
silicone rubber, prior to final grouting.
Use of epoxy grouts requires some installation procedures that differ from those used for
sand-cement grouts. The procedure that follows provides a general guide for use with
epoxy grout; but for more specific details, consult the grout supplier’s bulletins or labels.
This is particularly important in regard to safety precautions.
-WARNING-
MOST EPOXY GROUT IS FLAMMABLE, TOXIC,
POISONOUS, AND CORROSIVE. THEREFORE,
MATERIAL SHOULD BE KEPT AWAY FROM OPEN
FLAME, HIGH HEAT SOURCES OR SPARKS. IT
SHOULD BE MIXED IN A WELL-VENTILATED AREA.
WORKMEN SHOULD WEAR EYE PROTECTION AT ALL
TIMES DURING MIXING OF GROUT AND HARDENER,
AND ALSO WHEN APPLYING MIXED GROUT.
GLOVES AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING SHOULD BE
WORN AT ALL TIMES.
When grouting in baseplates, thermal expansion rates between sand-cement grout and
steel or an aggregate filled epoxy grout and steel generally can become significant.
2-11
D R A100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 363 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
Therefore expansion joints should be installed when stretches greater than approximately
three feet are encountered. After the foundation has been dressed, the surface of the
expansion joint should be sealed with silicone rubber.
Timing and proper mixing are the secrets to successful grouting. Before mixing the
components together, everything else should be ready - surfaces cleaned and dry, forms
completed and sealed, pushing tools, rags, cleaning solvents available and adequate
manpower.
Because of epoxy grout’s higher compressive and tensile strengths and its readiness to
bond to metals, the top of the grout should be brought up along the side of the soleplate or
baseplate to give some protection against lateral movement.
Grout forms should be built of materials of adequate strength and should be securely
anchored and shored to withstand the pressure of the grout under working conditions.
For epoxy grout, the forms must be waxed to keep them from becoming bonded to the
grout. For chock block grouting, the anchor bolt sleeve should be sealed and the form
height sufficient to provide a grout height approximately half way up the chock block.
Because the epoxy grout will flow through even the smallest holes, the forms must be fit
together as tightly as possible. Putty can be used as caulking for small cracks or holes.
To permit easy cleanup, wax or cover all surfaces where grout may splash.
For outdoor installation, the foundation should be protected from rain since it is important
that the foundation be clean and dry at the time of grouting. Normal grouting temperature
should be between 40° and 90°F (4° and 32°C). Due to the accelerated rate of curing at
high temperatures, shade the foundation from summer sunlight for at least 24 hours
before and 48 hours after grouting. In the hot summer weather, place the grout during the
afternoon so the initial cure will occur during the cooler evening hours. In cold weather,
the grout materials should be stored in a warm place. Low temperatures make the grout
stiff and hard to handle. For best results, ingredients should have an actual temperature
of 70°F (21°C) or higher. (Refer to instructions for the particular grout mix being used for
allowable working time at various ambient temperatures.)
Flow grade epoxy grouts can generally be handled with the same methods and tools that
are used with flow grade sand-cement grouts. Mixing can be done in small mortar mixers.
Use of a purchased grout with all the ingredients accurately measured into convenient
batches reduces the chance of error. The actual placing of the material can be
accomplished by several means. Some contractors prefer to force the materials into place
while others, through years of experience, prefer to place the materials by other methods.
The material is very viscous; however, it will flow and seek its own level given time and an
ambient temperature within a given range. Generally, it is best to start at one end of the
baseplate and work toward the other end, forcing the air out to eliminate voids as the
material moves along. Plywood strips, sheet metal strips, wires and rods can be used to
flow the grout completely under the soleplate or baseplate.
NOTE
Check the forms frequently for leaks. Leaks do not self-
seal. If not stopped, leaks will cause voids.
Forms should be left in place until the grout is hard enough throughout that it cannot flow.
This usually occurs overnight but can be longer in cold weather.
2-12
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 364 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
SETTING THE EQUIPMENT ON FOUNDATION
Once the chock block grout has cured sufficiently to withstand static load, installation of
the equipment on the foundation may proceed.
If the soleplates or baseplates have been coated with a catalyzed primer, the surface
coating should not be removed. Remove oil and dirt with solvent. If the surfaces that will
come in contact with the grout are coated with some other material or rust, the surfaces
should be sandblasted. While sandblasting is best, a disk grinder or some other
mechanical method may be used. The cleaned surface should be coated with epoxy
primer or surface coating recommended by the grout supplier.
Prior to placing the soleplate or baseplate on the chock blocks, clean chock block contact
surfaces and install approximately 0.125 inch (3.0 mm) thick shim pack having an
assortment of shim thicknesses on each chock block. Shim pack should be full size,
clean, smooth and rust free. This will provide a means of lowering any portion of the
machine or baseplate that requires adjustment during leveling.
Set the baseplate or soleplates on the shimmed chock blocks and tighten down all the
foundation bolts. Check for level and make necessary adjustments by adding or removing
shims. Normally, it is best to start at the middle and work toward the ends. All soleplate
or baseplate leveling should be done using the machined support foot surfaces.
Before mounting the equipment on the soleplates or baseplate, place a 0.125 inch (3.0
mm) thick stainless steel shim pack having an assortment of shim thicknesses on each
machine support. A stainless steel shim pack is generally preferred. Full size shims are
preferred when setting machinery or when making elevation changes during alignment.
NOTE
Shims and contact surfaces should be kept smooth, free of
burrs, and clean to prevent erroneous alignment readings.
Check that coupling hubs have been mounted on their respective shaft ends before setting
machinery on soleplate or baseplate. If not, refer to “Coupling Installation” procedure in
this chapter and the coupling manufacturer’s literature.
After machinery has been placed on soleplates or baseplate, install and tighten hold down
bolts. Check for a “soft foot” by loosening each hold down bolt in turn while measuring,
with a dial indicator, movement between machine foot and soleplate or baseplate. If
movement on loosening a nut exceeds approximately 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) at any foot,
shim changes to eliminate the “soft foot” should be made before proceeding.
With soleplates or baseplate set and leveled, machinery mounted and rough aligned,
remove all temporary shipping braces.
2-13
D R A100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 365 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
NOTE
The journal bearings on the turbine have been fitted with
plastic inserts for protection during shipment. These
plastic inserts must be removed before the rotor is turned.
If the machine is to be reshipped, the plastic inserts must
be reinstalled for transit to final jobsite.
Then clean the bearings and bearing housings. All clearances should then be checked.
(Refer to clearance table and drawings.) Thoroughly oil all bearings and reassemble
bearing housings. (Refer to appropriate sections in Chapter 4.) The machinery is now
ready to be “cold aligned”. The “cold alignment” method to use is dependent on the
distance between the coupling hubs. For greatest accuracy, the method suggested
should be used whenever possible. Initial cold alignment should be obtained prior to
grouting in soleplates or baseplate. In order to provide maximum flexibility and minimum
confusion, the cold alignment should be completed with all piping disconnected from the
machinery. Axial coupling separation indicated on outline drawing must be maintained
during cold alignment.
COUPLING INSTALLATION
A flexible coupling is used between the turbine and the driven equipment. This type of
coupling can be manufactured for use with either straight or tapered shaft ends. Individual
preferences or certain operating conditions may dictate using different types of couplings.
Therefore, it is advisable to refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for specific details
pertaining to the coupling.
Installing a Straight Bore Coupling
1. Clean and de-burr the coupling hub and shaft end.
2. Place the coupling sleeve (if applicable) on the equipment shaft with the bolting
flange positioned toward the shaft end.
3. Check the key fit in the coupling hub and the shaft keyways. The key must have a
side clearance of .001 inch to .003 inch (0.03 mm to 0.07 mm) between the key and
coupling keyway. The fit between the key and shaft keyway must be .000 inch to
.002 inch (0.0 mm to 0.05 mm) interference. The key must be fitted to provide .005
inch to .013 inch (0.13 mm to 0.33 mm) top clearance in the coupling keyway.
4. After the key has been fitted to provide the proper clearances, insert it in the shaft
keyway.
5. Apply a light coat of suitable anti-galling lubricant on the mounting surface of the
shaft.
6. Heat the coupling hub in oil or in an oven to approximately 300°F (150°C). The
coupling should not be heated with an open flame or be allowed to exceed 600°F
(315°C).
2-14
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 366 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
-WARNING-
HEAT-RESISTANT GLOVES SHOULD BE WORN WHEN
HANDLING THE HEATED COUPLING.
BOLTING FLANGE
SLEEVE
KEYWAY LOCKNUT
THREADED
SHAFT END
HUB
TAPERED BORE
BOLTING FLANGE
HUB
KEYWAY
SLEEVE
STRAIGHT BORE
FIGURE 2-10
FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS/TAPERED AND STRAIGHT BORE
7. Place the coupling hub on the shaft and position it so that the hub face is flush with
the shaft end.
CAUTION
Do not drive the coupling on or off the shaft with a
hammer. The force of the hammer will result in
internal equipment damage.
Installing a Tapered Bore Coupling
1. Clean and de-burr the coupling hub and shaft end.
2. Apply a light coating of Prussian blue to the rotor shaft.
3. Place the coupling hub on the shaft.
4. Remove the coupling and check the contact with the shaft.
2-15
D R A100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 367 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
CAUTION
Hand lapping the coupling hub on the rotor shaft may
form a ridge that will affect the coupling contact when
pulled up. Correct the contact by lightly stoning any
ridges, burrs or high spots.
5. Check the key fit in the coupling hub and the shaft keyways. The key must have a
side clearance of .001 inch to .003 inch (0.03 mm to 0.07 mm) between the key and
coupling keyway. The fit between the key and shaft keyway must be .000 inch to
.002 inch (0.0 mm to 0.05 mm) interference. The key must be fitted to provide .005
inch to .013 inch (0.13 mm to 0.33 mm) top clearance in the coupling keyway.
6. After the key has been fitted to provide the proper clearances and the coupling
contact is determined to be satisfactory, insert the key in the shaft keyway.
7. Place the coupling sleeve (if applicable) on the shaft. Position the bolting flange
toward the shaft end.
8. Fit the coupling hub on the shaft (at room temperature).
9. Take a reference dimension from the hub to a fixed part on the machine case or a
shaft shoulder. Make certain the shaft is seated against either of the thrust bearings.
10. Put a small amount of thread lubricant on the drive nut.
11. Tighten the shaft locknut to obtain an interference fit between the coupling and shaft.
See the Turbine Outline drawing in Chapter 10 for specifications on coupling pull up.
12. Recheck referenced dimension (step 9) and record for future use.
13. Lock drive nut.
CAUTION
Do not drive the coupling on or off the shaft with a
hammer. The force of the hammer will result in
internal equipment damage.
SHAFT ALIGNMENT
The turbine and the driven equipment are normally connected by flexible couplings.
Flexible couplings are used because changes in temperature and loadings during normal
operation, start-up or shutdown can cause one shaft end to move relative to its companion
shaft end. For high-speed, high-performance applications such as between compressors
and turbines, the coupling is usually the gear, disk or diaphragm type.
All flexible couplings have limits within operation without failure or undue wear. Even
when operating within the design limits, these couplings generate some resistance to
flexing. The force usually increases as the misalignment increases, thereby increasing or
decreasing bearing load fluctuations as the shaft rotates. Furthermore, operating with
2-16
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 368 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
collinear shafts at normal operating conditions minimizes tooth-sliding velocity or

diaphragm flexure while providing the maximum reserve for movement in any direction
should it be required.
Experience indicates that excessive vibration of compressors and their drivers is often
caused by improper shaft alignment. Frequently, high or unusual bearing and seal wear
can be traced to improper shaft alignment. In extreme cases, poor alignment can
precipitate a coupling, bearing or shaft failure. For smooth operation and long trouble-free
runs, good shaft alignment procedures are essential and cannot be over-emphasized.
An understanding of good shaft alignment techniques must begin with a few basic
definitions.
“Cold or ambient alignment” is the procedure that involves positioning the frames or
casings of compressors and other rotating machines while at standstill and ambient
conditions. The “cold shaft alignment” is normally accomplished using dial indicators,
feeler gauges, micrometers or a combination of these instruments. This positioning
should allow for thermal growth and material deflections that will occur between ambient
conditions and stabilized operating temperatures. The incremental movement used to
establish the cold shaft alignment may be actual measurements made during start-up or
shutdown, growths estimated by the machinery manufacturer, or estimates made by the
installer.
To calculate thermal expansion or contraction, multiply original length (generally distance

from machine shaft centerline to top of baseplate or soleplate) times expansion coefficient
(0.0000067 for steel) times temperature change in degrees Fahrenheit. (Expansion
coefficient is 0.000012 for steel and temperature change in degrees Celsius.)
Δ L (change in length) = L (length) x 0.0000067 x Δ T (change in temp. °F)
Δ L (change in length) = L (length) x 0.000012 x Δ T (change in temp. °C)
NOTE: Δ L and L in same units.
Normally, the vertical movement is minimized by use of a bolted joint where the support
foot attaches to the casing. Therefore, the average temperature of the support foot may
be considerably lower than the average of adjacent casing temperature to foot
temperature. A good “hot shaft alignment” will either verify or suggest alternate growth
figures to use.
“Hot shaft alignment” also known as operating shaft alignment or service alignment is a
procedure for monitoring the change in shaft alignment from cold or ambient conditions to
normal operating conditions. Knowing the “cold shaft alignment” and measuring the
change provides a method for determining if the shaft alignment becomes collinear at
normal operating conditions. This method is indirect, but if properly done, provides the
most reliable and acceptable method available.
2-17
D R A100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 369 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
A. COLLINEAR ALIGNMENT
B. ANGULAR MISALIGNMENT
C. PARALLEL MISALIGNMENT
© ELLIOTT CO., INC (YR)
FIGURE 2-11
TYPES OF SHAFT MISALIGNMENT
A. Collinear alignment - In Figure 2-11 part A; the two machine shaft ends are
considered to be “collinear aligned” when the two shaft ends rotate about the same
straight line (no misalignment). All machinery shafts have some deflection;
therefore, this reference is limited to the center of rotation of one shaft end relative
to the opposite shaft end. Each coupling must be analyzed individually.
B. Angular or Face misalignment - In Figure 2-11 part B; indicates the amount of

angular misalignment at a shaft end. Normally, angular displacement is measured
in mils of offset per inch (in mm of offset per meter) of coupling diameter or axial
separation.
C. Parallel misalignment - In Figure 2-11 part C; indicates the amount of parallel

misalignment between the centerlines of two adjacent shaft ends. Figure 2-11 part
C, shows two shafts with only parallel offset.
“Axial separation”. When the coupling connecting two shaft ends is a gear type, an axial
separation of plus or minus .0625 inch (1.60 mm) tolerance is usually acceptable. When
the coupling connecting the two shaft ends is a disk or diaphragm type, an axial
separation as shown in Figure 2-11 of less than plus or minus .015 inch (0.40 mm)
tolerance is usually required. Check coupling drawing and coupling instructions for
precise limits.
When aligning disk or diaphragm type couplings, adhere to the dimension information
shown on the coupling drawings. Measurements should be taken with the equipment in
2-18
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 370 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
normal thrust position (turbine rotor toward exhaust). Usually, the critical dimension is a
coupling flange face dimension as shown in Figure 2-13. For further information on axial
separation, refer to coupling vendor drawing and installation procedure.
AXIAL SEPARATION
cL cL
FIGURE 2-12
AXIAL SEPARATION
GUARDS
DIAPHRAGMS
CENTER TUBE
COUPLING FLANGE FACE TO

FLANGE FACE
FIGURE 2-13
AXIAL SEPARATION - DIAPHRAGM COUPLING
There are two similar procedures available for measuring parallel offset and angular
displacement. The most accurate measurements are obtained when one of the following
recommended methods is used.
The “Rim and Face Method” is the preferred procedure when the distance between the
two adjacent shaft ends is less than one-half the coupling diameter (this assumes face
readings are taken near outside diameter). This procedure is also known as the “Hub and
Face Method” or “Two Indicator Method”.
The “Reverse Indicator Method” is the preferred procedure when the distance between the
adjacent shaft ends is greater than one-half the coupling diameter.
2-19
D R A100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 371 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
Shaft Alignment Map Instructions

Preparation and use of a “Shaft Alignment Map” for each installation is recommended. A
typical shaft alignment map is shown in Figure 2-14. Use of a shaft alignment map
provides a convenient form on which to record indicator readings and calculate equipment
moves. Maintaining this information for comparison during maintenance inspections or for
reference, should problems develop, can provide valuable diagnostic information. A blank
form for your use is provided in Figure 2-17.
In addition to providing machine identification information, date and shaft alignment

method used, the shaft alignment map provides a plan (top) and vertical (side) elevation of
the machine shafts, complete with all the important reference points identified. The
horizontal or abscissa coordinate should be scaled using some convenient scale such as
1.00 or 2.00 inches per division (25 or 50 millimeters per division). All support feet and
coupling faces should be located. When more than two machines are involved, a larger
map or graph may be advantageous. The vertical or ordinate coordinate should be an
expanded scale such as 1 mil (0.02 millimeters) per division in order to clearly identify
misalignment. Mark North compass direction in plan view and corresponding compass
directions in indicator reading circles so no confusion develops during measurements.
When making shaft alignment corrections, it is usually advantageous to hold one machine
in a fixed position and align other machine or machines to the fixed machine. Some
guidelines to determine the best machine to hold stationary are as follows:
1. If the equipment consists of turbine driven compressor, it is generally preferred to

level turbine and move compressor into desired cold alignment.
2. If a gear is present, level and square the gear to the foundation or baseplate and
move the other machinery into alignment with the gear.
3. If the equipment string consists of three or more pieces of equipment, level the
machine nearest the center, square it to the foundation or baseplate, and move the
other machinery into alignment with the selected machine.
The solid dark heavy lines on the shaft alignment map represent the desired hot shaft
alignment; i.e., collinear alignment. Plot historical or calculated thermal expansion or
contraction change for each support location on the shaft alignment map. Connect points
plotted for each machine with a dashed line.
Use dashed line for desired “cold alignment setting”. Read off differences between the
two dashed lines in vertical plane and record desired readings in circles so marked. Plan
or horizontal alignment usually remains unchanged from ambient (cold) of bottom reading.
If system has a gear, the gear case is usually doweled or keyed under the pinion and
allowed to expand toward bull gear shaft thus requiring alignment allowances in plan view
at bull gear or low speed shaft end.
NOTE
(For All Rim Measurements)
Actual measurement is ½ TIR (Total Indicator Reading);
therefore, value of measurement shown on indicator
reading circle should be twice the distance indicated on
plot.
Offset value is plus (+) if projected centerline of machine

that indicator is attached to is above coupling mark of the
machine that indicator is riding on.
2-20
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 372 / 633
SHAFT ALIGNMENT MAP
USER ABC Company SERVICE Propane Refrigeration EQUIP. NO. C508xxx / C5037xx DATE 10 / 95
COUPLING TYPE MP 153 LUBE Grease AMBIENT TEMP. 60 F NAME
NOTES: ALIGNMENT METHOD Reverse Indicator ALIGNMENT BAR SAG Negligible MILS/MM
LEFT 0 RIGHT LEFT 0 RIGHT
3) If offset value is plus, projected center
line of machine that the indicator was COMP TURB DESIRED COLD READING
attached to will be above the coupling -12.5
W TO E
-12.5 +10
W TO E
+10
-14 0 C/T ACT
.
TURB COMP Vo = Bot - Top = -7
line of machine that the indicator was -25 +20 -4 -10
attached to will be below the coupling 0 0 Ho = Right - Left = +3
mark of the opposite machine. 2
COMP TURB
-10 -4 +7 +9
W TO E W TO E
ACTUAL COLD READING
TURB COMP
-14 +16
STEAM END FOOT EXHAUST FOOT DISCHARGE FOOT SUCTION FOOT
PLAN
MOVE 6 MIL WEST W
MOVE 22 MIL WEST N
SEPG5 E
38M4
STEAM TURBINE COUPLING
cL cL cL COMPRESSOR cL

VERTICAL
MOVE 3 MIL UP MOVE 17 MIL UP
48 " 14" 14" 18" 57"
Installation
Chapter 2
PICK A CONVENIENT SCALE SCALE 2 inches PER DIVISION SUGGEST 1" OR 2" PER DIVISION
724-527-2811
2-21
FIGURE 2-14
SHAFT ALIGNMENT MAP – EXAMPLE
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 373 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
Sometimes the work descriptions, such as those used on an alignment map, can be
confusing. Figure 2-15 is a pictorial view of Note 3 on alignment map. It reads:
“If offset value is plus, projected centerline of machine that the indicator was attached to
will be above the coupling mark of the opposite machine.”
FIGURE 2-15
Figure 2-16 is a pictorial view of Note 4 on alignment map. It reads:
“If offset value is minus, projected centerline of machine that the indicator was attached
to will be below the coupling mark of the opposite machine.”
FIGURE 2-16
2-22 100q.chap02.7/2/2008
D R A724-527-2811 http://www.elliott-turbo.com/
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 374 / 633
SHAFT ALIGNMENT MAP
USER SERVICE EQUIP. NO. DATE
COUPLING TYPE LUBE AMBIENT TEMP. NAME
NOTES: ALIGNMENT METHOD ALIGNMENT BAR SAG MILS/MM
LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT
3) If offset value is plus, projected center Bot - Top
line of machine that the indicator was
Vo = =
attached to will be above the coupling 2
TO TO
mark of the opposite machine. Right - Left
Ho = =
line of machine that the indicator was
attached to will be below the coupling
TO TO
PLAN DESIRED OPERATING LINE
LEFT
RIGHT
VERTICAL
Installation
Chapter 2
724-527-2811
PICK A CONVENIENT SCALE SCALE PERDIVISION SUGGEST 1" OR 2" PER DIVISION
FIGURE 2-17
2-23
BLANK ALIGNMENT MAP
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 375 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
Rim and Face Method of Alignment
1. Use Rim and Face Method when distance between the two adjacent shaft ends is
less than one-half the coupling diameter.
2. Lubricate bearings before rotating shafts.
3. Mark both coupling hubs at four locations 90° apart so that their position is evident at
all times during alignment work.
4. All piping strain must be removed from machine. For initial alignment work during
installation, all piping should be left unconnected from machinery. After cold
alignment has been secured, arrange dial indicators between shaft ends, or between
foundation and machine case such that any movement of machine can be detected.
Connect one flange at a time and observe indicator readings continuously. Should
movement exceed 2 mils (0.05 mm), piping strain is considered excessive. Reason
for strain should be investigated and condition corrected before proceeding with
alignment.
5. Shift rotors to running position and determine that coupling spacer distance is as
specified on coupling drawing.
6. Mount dial indicator so indicator button rides near center of rotation. Rotate shaft
against which button rests to measure axial wobble. If unable to maintain axial
wobble to less than 0.001 inch (.025 mm) on either shaft, use of two face indicators
180° apart or multiple measurements is recommended.
NOTE
Axial shaft movement during face reading measurements
can cause false readings. Two dial indicators mounted
180° apart should be used when axial float cannot be
easily controlled. When using this setup, set dial indicators
at 0° and 180° position and zero indicators. Dial indicator
at 0° should be tagged prime dial indicator. At each
interval, subtract second dial indicator’s reading from prime
dial indicator reading. Divide this result by two and record
result in prime’s location. Be sure to retain proper plus or
minus signs.
7. Measure angular misalignment with inside micrometer, feeler gauges or dial indicator,
as shown in Figure 2-18. This is best accomplished by marking measurement point
at 0° and recording readings or change in readings between 0° point and points at
90°, 180°, 270° and 360°.
On return to 0° position, indicator should return to zero or repeat measurement. Take

several sets of readings to be sure no mistake has been made or something has
moved that shouldn’t have. When taking measurements, rotate both shafts equal
amounts to cancel out eccentricity and surface imperfections.
2-24
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 376 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
DIAL INDICATOR WITH HOLE

ATTACHMENT
0
INSIDE MEASUREMENT
MICROMETER POINT
270 90
FEELERS
GAUGE BLOCK OR BAR 180
FIGURE 2-18
MEASURING ANGULAR MISALIGNMENT
8. Readings observed in step 7, above, should be recorded on alignment map. As face

readings provide the slope of shaft on which dial indicator is mounted relative to
coupling face of the opposite machine (See Figure 2-19), use an indicator recording
circle for an axial location equal to the “face reading measurement diameter” away
from the hub on which the indicator button is riding.
ANGULAR DISPLACEMENT DISTANCE EQUAL TO

MEASUREMENT DIAMETER
FIGURE 2-19
9. To measure Parallel Offset, attach the dial indicator to bracket mounted on machine
that will be moved. Set the indicator button to contact periphery of opposite coupling
hub at top approximately 0.25 inch (6 mm) from edge (as shown in Figure 2-20). Set
the indicator to zero at top, rotate both shafts together, and record dial readings on
alignment map for 90°, 180°, 270°. On return to top position, the indicator should
return to zero. Repeat this procedure several times to be sure no mistake has been
made or something moved. These four readings will be TIR (Total Indicator
Readings), and actual parallel offset is one-half of indicator (TIR) readings.
100q.chap02.7/2/2008 2-25
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 377 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
o
o o
DIAL INDICATOR
FEELER GAUGE
FIGURE 2-20
MEASURING PARALLEL OFFSET
10. Readings observed in Step 9 should be recorded on alignment map in indicator

recording circle corresponding to same axial location as dial indicator measuring
location (fixed machines coupling).
11. Vertical offset (Vo) and horizontal offset (Ho) for projected centerline of machine to be
moved at fixed machine’s coupling face can be determined by using alignment map
Note 3 or 4.
12. Slope of machine’s shaft to be moved relative to fixed machine is determined by (a)
drawing a line through the point determined in Step 11 and parallel to fixed machine’s
centerline, (b) applying alignment map Note 3 of 4 to face readings at the axial
location previously determined in Step 8, above.
13. In each view, draw a straight line through points located in Step 11 and 12 with line
extended to intersect both supports of machine to be moved. Read off distance
between line just completed and desired cold shaft position (dashed line) at each
support for component to be moved. This measurement represents movement
necessary to obtain correct cold alignment.
15. Repeat Steps 7 through 14 to verify adjustments made in Step 14 correct.
16. Unless otherwise noted, a final hot alignment should provide for an angular
displacement between machine coupling hub centerline and coupling spacer
centerline of approximately 0.25 mil per inch (0.25 mm per m) at the coupling gear
teeth or flex elements. This angular displacement is not a limit, but a suggested
alignment goal. (Refer to coupling literature for more information on maximum
allowable misalignment.)
2-26
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 378 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
Reverse Indicator Method of Shaft Alignment
1. Use the reverse indicator method of shaft alignment when distance between two
adjacent shaft ends is greater than one half the coupling diameter.
NOTE
For alignment purposes, the effective distance between
shaft ends can be increased by spanning the shaft end to
obtain a dial indicator location inboard of actual shaft ends.
Key factor is to spread two indicators as far apart as
practical with negligible bracket sag. (As spread
increases, so do possibilities for bracket sag.)
The reverse indicator method of shaft alignment eliminates the need for taking face
readings.
2. The reverse indicator method involves taking readings from one shaft to the rim
surface on the hub of the adjoining shaft and vice versa as shown in Figure 2-21.
READ HERE
SHAFT “A”
SHAFT “B”
FIRST SET OF READINGS
READ HERE
SHAFT “A”
SHAFT “B”
SECOND SET OF READINGS

FIGURE 2-21
REVERSE INDICATOR READINGS
3. Lubricate bearings before rotating shaft.
4. Mark both the coupling hubs at four locations 90° apart so that their position can
easily be seen at all times during the alignment work.
100q.chap02.7/2/2008 2-27
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 379 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
5. All piping strain must be removed from machine. For initial alignment work during
installation, all piping should be left unconnected from machinery. After cold
alignment has been secured, arrange dial indicators between shaft ends or between
foundation and machine case such that any movement of machine can be detected.
Connect one flange at a time and observe indicator readings continuously. Should
movement exceed 2 mils (0.05 mm), piping strain is considered excessive. Reason
for strain should be investigated and condition corrected before proceeding with
alignment.
6. When spanning the coupling gap with an indicator rig or bracket, zero sag is
impractical to achieve; therefore, the actual amount of sag should be determined and
recorded on the alignment map. The bracket should be sturdily constructed to
minimize shifting and sag during use.
NOTE
For purposes of this explanation, the fixed machine is
called shaft “A”. The shaft of machine to be aligned to
shaft “A” will be called shaft “B”. Therefore, shaft “B”
belongs to machine that will be moved.
7. Attach the indicator bracket to shaft “A”.
8. Attach the dial indicator to the bracket so that the button will rest on the outer rim of
coupling hub “B”. The indicator button should contact in about 0.25 inch (6 mm) from
the hub face.
9. Position dial indicator at top dead center, in line with 0° marking on coupling “B” and
zero indicator.
10. Rotate both shafts together and record dial readings on alignment map at 90°, 180°
and 270° positions. On return to top position, the indicator should return to zero.
Repeat this step several times to be sure no mistake has been made or something
moved.
11. The accuracy of the readings may be verified by algebraically adding the side
readings and comparing this sum to bottom reading. The readings should be equal
to or within 1 mil (.25 mm).
12. Remove the bracket from shaft “A” and install on shaft “B”. Using the same
procedure, obtain indicator readings from shaft “B” to the rim of coupling hub “A”.
13. Using the two equations shown on the suggested shaft alignment map, calculate the
vertical offset (Vo) and the horizontal or plan view offset (Ho). Plot these results in
the proper view and in the axial location where indicator readings were taken. Note 3
or 4 on the alignment map can assist in determining the shaft location above or below
other shaft. When making this determination, it is sometimes helpful to locate
centerline of shaft end “B” first, that is shaft end of machine to be moved, and then
the projected centerline of shaft end “B” at shaft end “A”. In this explanation, shaft
end “A” is fixed, and therefore, shaft “B” must be located relative to shaft “A”.
2-28
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 380 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
NOTE
Correct the bottom reading for sag in the bracket by
algebraically adding to bottom indicator reading. No
correction is needed on the side readings since it is
negative on both sides and will cancel out.
14. In each view, draw a straight line through points located in Step 13, extending the line
to intersect both supports of machine “B”. Read off distance between line just
completed and desired cold shaft position (dashed line) at each support for machine
“B”. This measurement represents movement necessary to obtain correct cold
alignment.
16. Repeat Steps 7 through 14 to verify adjustments made in Step 15 were correct.
17. Unless otherwise noted, a final hot alignment should provide for an angular
displacement between machine coupling hub centerlines and coupling spacer
centerline of approximately 0.25 mil per inch (0.25 mm/m) at the coupling gear teeth
or flex elements. This angular displacement is not a limit, but a suggested alignment
goal. (Refer to coupling literature for more information on maximum allowable
misalignment.)
After cold alignment has been made, the soleplates or baseplates must then be grouted;
refer to previous section titled “Grouting”. After final grouting is completed, cold alignment
should be checked and adjusted, if necessary.
Hot Alignment Check

A hot alignment check should be made after the equipment string has operated with full
load for several hours and stable operating temperatures have been reached. This check
will indicate any final adjustments necessary to achieve collinear alignment of the turbine
and driven equipment under operating conditions.
The purpose of the hot alignment procedure is to measure the movement of one shaft end
relative to the opposite shaft end. As the shaft rotates, it is not practical to measure the
actual position of one shaft end relative to its companion with dial indicators or similar
instruments, as was the case during the cold alignment procedure. Therefore, most Hot
Alignment procedures make the assumption that the machine casing and bearing housing
expand uniformly in a radial direction from the shaft center of rotation and maintain this
relationship to the shaft center regardless of the casing temperature. This basic
assumption appears to be valid as compressors and turbines are nearly symmetrical about
the shaft; therefore, distortions are minimized. Using this principle, one of the following
methods should be used to make a hot alignment check.
The “mechanical hot alignment” method uses accurate measurements between fixed
reference points on the foundation or base and the machinery bearing housings to indicate
shaft movement between ambient and normal operating conditions. This method
assumes that the fixed reference points do not move between cold alignment conditions
and machinery operation. In general, this is a good assumption provided one side or area
of the foundation is not exposed to direct sun when the other is not. Unprotected hot
steam and process lines passing in close proximity to the foundation can also contribute to
uncertainty in incremental movements.
100q.chap02.7/2/2008 2-29
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 381 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
This method eliminates the requirement for alignment brackets or bars by using
permanent reference points (called benchmarks) that are affixed directly to the foundation
and to the bearing housing as shown in Figure 2-22. All four reference points should lie in
a plane perpendicular to the centerline of the machine shaft. Similarly mounted reference
points should be established at each bearing housing in the train.
Suggested benchmarks for this technique are 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) diameter precision balls.
Because these benchmarks become an integral part of the installation and the accuracy of
alignment records over the long term are dependent upon these references, it is
recommended that the balls be made of stainless steel to prevent corrosion and mounted
solidly to avoid inadvertent movement. It is also recommended that the benchmarks be
protected with covers when not in use.
ROTOR SHAFT
BEARING HOUSING
A COLD B COLD
A' HOT B' HOT
BENCHMARKS
FOUNDATION
FIGURE 2-22
TYPICAL DISPLACEMENT OF BENCHMARKS ON FOUNDATION AND BEARING
HOUSING
NOTE
Acculign, Inc markets a tool kit designed specifically for the
purpose of conducting hot alignment checks by this
method.
Following cold alignment of the equipment string, reference dimensions A and B and
angles θ and ∅ are determined at each bearing housing and recorded. Lubrication
system should be operating and oil supply temperature near design to minimize effect of
bearing housing growth.
After the machine is brought to normal stabilized operating conditions, dimensions A' and
B' are measured at each position. With these two sets of data, the vertical and horizontal
movement of each bearing housing of the machines in the train can be determined relative
to the foundation.
2-30
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 382 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
See Figure 2-23. Using common grid paper (5 x 5 grid is usually a convenient size), lay
out reference vectors A and B at angles θ and ∅, having these vectors cross at one of the
grid intersections. The intersection of these vectors represents the centerline of the
machine shaft in the cold position. Now refer to the cold and hot measurements
previously made (A, A', B, and B') and determine the movement of the bearing housing
along vectors A and B by taking the differences between cold and hot measurements ( Δ A
and Δ B) for each location. Lay out the movements along vectors A and B using any
convenient scale, say 0.25 inch equals 0.001 inch (2 mm equals 0.01 mm), to establish
points a and b.
VECTOR B H
VECTOR A
FINAL SHAFT
POSITION
90
a
b V
A
90
B
INITIAL SHAFT POSITION
FIGURE 2-23
GRAPHICAL DETERMINATION OF SHAFT IN HOT POSITION RELATIVE
TO COLD POSITION
Draw lines through a and b perpendicular to vectors A and B. These lines represent arcs
of radii A' and B' drawn from the foundation benchmarks. The intersection of these lines
defines the position of the machine shaft centerline in the hot position relative to the cold
position. To determine the movement in vertical and horizontal directions, it is necessary
only to scale off the dimensions referred to as Δ H and Δ V, using the same scale as used
in plotting Δ A and Δ B.
A similar plot for the data secured at each bearing housing can be compared to the
alignment map information for validity of the original estimates. Where differences exist,
corrections should be made to the original estimates used on alignment map and the
machinery realigned.
With the permanent benchmark installed and the desired cold alignment reference
dimensions recorded, this information can also be used for resetting machines quickly or
for maintenance checks.
Another hot alignment check is the “reverse hot alignment” method that uses the same
basic principles as the reverse indicator method of shaft alignment. Rather than mounting
brackets off the coupling, the brackets are mounted permanently off the bearing housing
or casing.
100q.chap02.7/2/2008 2-31
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 383 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
Regardless of the measurement method used, several things should be kept in mind when
making a setup:
1. The probes and indicating blocks should be positioned to measure both the horizontal
and vertical movement at the coupling of each machine. Generally, vertical
movement is the most important; therefore, placement of brackets or bars should
favor making the most accurate readings in this direction (mount along horizontal
centerline).
2. The brackets or bars can either be located inside or outside the coupling guard.
3. Brackets or bars should be constructed and protected to minimize deflections due to

thermal gradients and local forces such as windage or high velocity lube oil (for
brackets mounted in side coupling guard).
4. Regardless of where brackets or bars are mounted, it must be on a thermally stable

part of the machine.
5. Regardless of where brackets or bars are mounted, it is recommended that a guard

be provided to protect them.
Normally, some variations can be expected in the hot alignment data observed for various
operating conditions. The central point about which most of the observations gather will
normally indicate the desired operating alignment.
Recording of the change in alignment data between ambient conditions and the central
operating condition (desired operating alignment) on the alignment map will provide
confirmation of the original data or suggest modifications to original data. The conclusion
drawn from this analysis should be recorded for future use during maintenance
turnarounds.
Once the alignment bars have been properly installed and referenced to the cold
alignment readings, the bars can also be used for aligning the machines.
In addition to these methods, there are also other methods available for making a hot
alignment check, such as optical alignment, non-contact proximity probes mounted on
water-cooled pedestals, etc. A hot alignment check with optical equipment measures the
movement of reference points (generally tooling balls mounted on the bearing housing) by
use of optics. When using this method for making a hot alignment check, great care
should be exercised as the line of sight between the measuring instrument and the
reference point can be bent by temperature gradients or air currents. Instrument stands
and their supports are also subject to vibration and distortions that can influence accuracy
of data obtained. In general, it is recommended that measurements be double-checked
by making measurements from both sides of machines and comparing results. Any lack of
correlation should be resolved.
Use of non-contact proximity probes mounted on water-cooled pedestals with the probes
looking at the shaft, couplings, bearing housing or casing can also be used. When using
one of these methods, great care should be exercised to design pedestals and mounting
such that temperature distortions are minimized.
2-32
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 384 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
Realign as Necessary
Regardless of the method used for making hot alignment check, it must be evaluated for
accuracy of information measured. Temperature variations and air currents can cause
significant changes in support temperatures between cold alignment conditions and
operating conditions. Expansions, contractions and heat flow are therefore seldom linear.
This can and does contribute to introducing errors if care is not exercised in analyzing
results.
NOTE
Before making alignment changes based on hot alignment
data, evaluate the setup to be sure data is valid and
logical.
When the hot alignment check confirms that the machines have been properly aligned, the
machines should be doweled as indicated on the outline drawing.
TURBINE PIPING RECOMMENDATIONS
No part of the turbine installation is more important for successful operation than well-
designed and properly installed piping. There are two definite objectives for good piping:
1. To prevent the heated piping from imposing strains on the turbine casing and, thus,
affecting the alignment.
2. To connect and drain the turbine inlet and exhaust piping so that dry steam is
furnished to the turbine and that water accumulation in these lines is prevented.
A main steam isolation valve is recommended in the steam piping, preferably at a

convenient accessible location in the turbine room, between the steam header and the
turbine inlet, to allow working on the turbine without shutting down the boiler.
The turbine casing must be protected from piping weight and piping expansion strains.
The weight of piping should be carried by suitable supports. Expansion joints with limit
rods or piping bends should be used adjacent to the turbine flanges. Connections
between the piping flanges and turbine flanges are made without forcing the pipeline in
any direction in order to make a satisfactory joint. Connections may be considered
satisfactory if the connecting pipe lines, when heated to operating temperature, do not
shift out of line with the turbine flanges when the bolting is withdrawn. (Refer to NEMA
standards for maximum forces and moments allowable.) Before piping is connected to
turbine, mount at least two indicators from one coupling hub to the other coupling hub –
one to measure any vertical movement, the other to measure any horizontal movement.
Then connect piping to turbine. If movement shown on any indicator exceeds 0.002" (0.05
mm) loosen piping and refabricate, realign or adjust anchors as required.
All steam piping between the turbine and boiler or steam header must be adequately
“blown down” to remove welding beads, scale, dirt, etc. During blow down, the piping
should be disconnected and directed away from the turbine. Blow down should be at
maximum design turbine throttle flow to obtain design steam temperature and velocity.
The piping should be blown down several times until a polished metal plate held in the
stream indicates the absence of foreign material.
100q.chap02.7/2/2008 2-33
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 385 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
If supplied, the trip and throttle valve always contain a permanent screen to guard against
the ingestion of large loose particles. In addition, many valves will also have a temporary
screen installed around the permanent one. The temporary screen should be removed
after approximately one month of operation and should never be left in longer than six
months.
NOTE
Strainers do not take the place of a properly setup and
conducted blow down.
STEAM LINE BLOW DOWN (Reference SM 23; latest edition)
All new steam piping between turbine and boiler or existing header must be adequately
blown to remove welding beads, scale, dirt, broken backing rings, weld rod, etc. This
includes all steam lines that can import steam into the turbine, including but not limited to:
- Main Steam
- Gland Sealing Steam
Proper setup and implementation of a sound blow down procedure are normally the
responsibility of the installation contractor. Elliott responsibility is normally only as a
witness and to verify that placement targets are acceptable before connecting to the
turbine.
Since the steam lines to the turbine cannot be connected for blow down, temporary blow
down piping will be required. Piping must be adequately secured prior to blow down.
Piping also must be rated for steam conditions at the time of the test and discharged into
an area that is properly secured and marked off.
In broad terms, blowing down the steam lines is a process that uses a cycle of heating and
cooling to break free any loose particles. Pressure is built up in the boiler and a valve is
opened to release this pressure though the steam lines. By the time the pressure is built
up again in the boiler, the piping has usually cooled. This forms the heating and cooling
cycle. The number of cycles will depend on the attention that was given to cleanliness
during erection, the design of the plant piping system, and the design of the blow down
system used.
Verification of the blow down is made by installing polished targets in the temporary blow
down piping. The targets are usually mild steel bar with a ground finish; however, key
stock material can be used. Each target can be used four times by turning the target in
ninety-degree increments.
The temporary blow down piping setup and size are very important. The force on a
particle is proportional to the mass velocity head of the fluid; therefore, the mass velocity
head developed during the blowing cycle must be at least equal to that developed during
full load operation. The temporary piping should not have a greater flow area than the
permanent piping so that satisfactory velocities can be maintained.
It is not possible to ascertain how many steam blows will be required to properly clean the
system since too many variables are involved. Experience has shown that up to fifty total
blows may be required for the main steam line and ten to twenty for the secondary lines.
Normally the blow down cycle will require one to three hours. The actual steam flow
through the pipe should be about fifteen to twenty minutes in duration and the piping
should allowed to cool for at least two hours if insulated and one hour if not insulated.
2-34
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 386 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
Polished targets are to be installed after approximately ten blows on the main steam line.
At this point the targets should indicate the approximate relative condition of the system.
After two successive blows with no pitting observed on the targets, the blown down can be
considered completed. Retain these targets for reference. Discoloration of the targets is
normal. After successful completion of the blow down procedure, the temporary piping is
to be removed. Reinstall any piping removed for the blow down. Test the system for
leaks and piping strain.
Taking proper care to ensure an effective blow down procedure has been carried out will
ensure a successful start-up of the turbine.
TURBINE STEAM SUPPLY
Steam should at all times be free from moisture. A receiver type separator with ample
drains should be provided ahead of the stop valve to prevent slugs of water from entering
the turbine. When a separator is not provided, a blowoff valve or continuous drain should
be connected to the lowest point of the steam inlet piping.
A strainer should be installed in the steam supply piping for protection against large
particles of scale, welding beads, etc. A strainer does not guard against abrasive matter,
boiler compound or acid or alkaline substances that may be carried over in the steam.
These substances will corrode, erode, or form deposits on the steam parts, reducing
efficiency and power. It is imperative that feed water treatment and boiler operation be
carefully controlled to ensure a supply of clean steam at all times.
TURBINE ATMOSPHERIC RELIEF VALVES
An atmospheric relief valve must be installed between the turbine exhaust flange and the
first exhaust line steam isolation valve (See Figure 2-24) or check valve. The purpose of
this relief valve is to protect the turbine casing from excessive exhaust pressure or failure
of exhaust valve. The relief valve must be of ample size to pass the maximum quantity of
steam flowing through the turbine without allowing the turbine casing pressure to exceed
the maximum designed pressure shown on the turbine nameplate. It is the user’s
responsibility to install the relief valve in the piping. Failure to install relief valve may
violate local or national codes and must be approved by an officer of the company.
-WARNING-
PROTECTIVE DEVICE HAS BEEN INSTALLED AHEAD
OF ANY ISOLATION VALVE AND IS IN OPERATING
CONDITION.
Condensing Turbines
The atmospheric relief valve should be sized so that it is capable of passing all of the
steam that may reach the exhaust with the pressure rising to a value not greater than 10
pounds per square inch gauge. The relief valve should be installed between the turbine
exhaust flange and any shutoff valve. (Usually on the condenser shell for direct
connected condenser.)
100q.chap02.7/2/2008 2-35
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 387 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
Non-condensing Turbines
A relief valve should be installed between the turbine exhaust connection and the first
steam isolation valve. The valve should be designed for full relief of the maximum steam
flow through the turbine with a pressure and flow rating as shown on the turbine outline
drawing located in Chapter 10 of this manual.
The sentinel valve, located on the turbine casing cover, does not serve as a relief valve.
The sentinel valve will not pass sufficient steam to relieve the turbine casing of excessive
exhaust pressure. The relief valve should be set to open at the sentinel valve setting to
give a visual or audible indication when the relief valve is starting to lift and be fully open
with an additional 10 psig or 10%, whichever is greater.
If a high back pressure trip is furnished, the relief valve pressure should be raised 5 psig
(.345 bar) and the high steam pressure trip should be set at the “start to open” pressure.
LOOP IN STEAM PIPE
ABSORBS EXPANSION
AND RELIEVES TURBINE
OF STRESSES
Y STEA M
DR
SLOPE TOWARD
HEADER
STEAM
HEADER
DRAIN
EXHAUST STEAM ISOLATION DRAIN
VALVE
INLET STEAM
ISOLATION
VALVE
ATMOSPHERIC
RELIEF VALVE
BYPASS VALVE
SPRING SUPPORT
RELIEVES CASING
OF STRESSES
SPRING SUPPORT DRAIN
RELIEVES CASING
OF STRESSES
Figure 2-24 Suggested Steam Piping Arrangement
Considerable attention should be given to the installation of miscellaneous piping. Poorly

planned and installed piping may obscure drain line functions and lead to error when
opening or closing drain lines during operation. In addition, poorly installed piping will
detract from the appearance of the installation. All drain and leakoff lines should be
installed in a neat and orderly manner. They should be grouped and brought to an open
collector box and, from there, piped to a common sump or sewer.
2-36
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 388 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
All valves should be conveniently grouped as close as possible to the collector box and all
lines should be tagged for identification. Drain lines connected through valves must have
the valves tightly closed during operation. On condensing units, these valves must not be
opened unless the turbine casing is no longer under vacuum. Leakoffs, connected without
valves must be clean and piped to an open drain.
(Refer to certified outline and connection drawings for the specific sizes of all connections
and for their exact locations.) The pipe size must be the same as or larger than
connecting sizes. All connections are brought outside the jacket when the turbine is
insulated and jacketed.
NOTE
All drains and leakoffs should be run as separate lines to
an open collector box.
NOTE
All drains and leakoffs must have sufficient flexibility to
allow for thermal growth of the turbine without excess
strains.
The following identifies the most common miscellaneous piping connections that may be
furnished and explains their individual functions (Refer to figure 2-25). (Refer to the
certified outline and purchaser’s connection drawing to verify the connection required.)
1. Casing Drain (M): Connect through a suitable valve to an open drain. Open
before starting the turbine; close when water no longer emerges from the drain.
Open when the turbine is shut down and the exhaust valve is closed. On
condensing turbines, do not open this valve while the turbine is under vacuum.
2. Steam Chest Drains [M4, M5, and M1 (BYRH, HH only)]: Connect through high
pressure piping and suitable valves to an open drain. Open before starting the
turbine to drain water from the steam chest. Close when water ceases to flow from
the drain lines. Open when the turbine is shut down. On condensing turbines, do
not open this valve while the turbine is under vacuum.
3. Shaft Packing Case Leakoff (L3): Connect to an open drain without a valve.
Connect to a vacuum source when applicable.
4. Trip Valve Stem Leakoff (L4): Connect to an open drain without a valve.
5. Governor Valve Stem Leakoff (L5): Connect to an open drain without a valve.
6. Cooling Water Connections to Bearing Housings (N5, N6, N9 and N10): These
connections are located on the side of the turbine bearing housings. See Figure 2-
25. Connect to a cooling water supply that does not exceed 90°F (32°C). Pipe the
cooling water through a stop cock and hand valve into N5, out of N6, into N9, out of
N10 through a one-foot head loop to an open drain. Adjust the stop cock to supply
water at a rate of 2 gpm (7.5 lpm.) when the hand valve is fully open. See Figure
2-26 for piping arrangement of water cooled bearing housings and caps. These
connections are not used on pressure lubricated turbines.
100q.chap02.7/2/2008 2-37
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 389 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
NOTE
Cooling water pressure must not exceed 100 psig (6.89
bar).
7. Shaft Packing Case Steam Piping (T1): Furnished only when the turbine is
operated condensing. Connect through a valve to a pressurized, saturated steam
supply. Admit steam to packing cases until a slight amount of steam leaks out of
L3. A typical arrangement is shown in Figure 2-27.
8. Nozzle ring gauge connection (S1): A shut-off valve and gauge arrangement may
be installed in this connection. The gauge can be used for indicating the inlet
steam pressure drop across the steam chest.
9. Intermediate leakoff (L3-1) for BYRHH only: Connect to a 75 to 125 psig (5.1 to
8.6 bar) header. The leakoff line should have a gauge located near each packing
case. A valve should be used to isolate the packing cases from the header.
N-8
N-7
N-6 N-11
N-12
N-5
L-4
N-10
N-9
M-5 S-1
M-4 L-5 M-1
L-3 T-1 M
* L3 LEAK OFF FROM SHAFT SEALING GLANDS N7 COOLING WATER TO STEAM END BEARING CAP
* L4 TRIP VALVE STEM LEAK-OFF N8 COOLING WATER FROM STEAM END BEARING CAP
* L5 GOVERNOR VALVE STEM LEAK-OFF N9 COOLING WATER TO EXHAUST END BEARING PEDEST AL
** M TURBINE CASING DRAIN N10 COOLING WATER FROM EXHAUST END BEARING PEDEST AL
**M1 HIGH PRESSURE STEAM RING DRAIN (BYRH, HH Only) N11 COOLING WATER TO EXHAUST END BEARING CAP
** M4 STEAM CHEST DRAIN (BELOW SEAT) N12 COOLING WATER FROM EXHAUST END BEARING CAP
** M5 STEAM CHEST DRAIN (ABOVE SEAT) S1 NOZZLE RING GAUGE CONNECTION
N5 COOLING WATER TO STEAM END BEARING HOUSING T1 SEALING STEAM TO SHAFT PACKING CASE
N6 COOLING WATER FROM STEAM END BEARING HOUSING
* ROUTE TO OPE N DRA IN NO VALVE.
** ROUTE TO OPEN DRA IN W ITH VALVE.
Figure 2-25
Miscellaneous Piping Connections
2-38
D R A 724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 390 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
1ft.(30cm)
HEADLOOP
N10 N6
CONTROL VALVE
N9 N5
STOP
COCK
COOLING
OPEN
DRAIN WATER
Figure 2-26
Suggested Piping Arrangement for Water Cooled Bearing Housings
1ft.(30cm) 1ft.(30cm)
HEADLOOP HEADLOOP
N12 N11 N7 N8
N10 N6
CONTROL VALVES
N9 N5
STOP COCK
OPEN
OPEN
COOLING DRAIN
DRAIN
WATER
Figure 2-27
Suggested Piping Arrangement for Water Cooled Bearing Housings and Caps
100q.chap02.7/2/2008 2-39
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 391 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
EXHAUST END STEAM END

SEALING GLAND SEALING GLAND
TO DRAIN L3 TO DRAIN L3
T1
RELIEF VALVE
20 psig (1.35bar)
PRESSURE GAUGE
SHUT-OFF
VALVE
SHUT-OFF
VALVE
SEALING STEAM
Figure 2-28
Suggested Sealing Steam Piping Arrangement for Condensing Turbines
VACUUM BREAKER FOR CONDENSING TURBINES
It is recommended that provisions be made in the exhaust piping or on the condenser for
breaking the vacuum. The vacuum breaker may consist of a hand-operated valve to be
opened when shutting down the turbine. Breaking the vacuum serves two purposes:
1. It increases the deceleration rate of the rotor.
2. It prevents the in leakage of cold air into the turbine casing along the shaft when
gland sealing steam is turned off.
CONNECTING TURBINE TO CONDENSER
A condenser connected directly to the turbine exhaust flange, when not suspended from
the flange or spring-supported, must have an expansion joint to provide the necessary
flexibility for expansion unless otherwise approved by Elliott Company. When the
condenser is spring-supported or hung from the turbine exhaust flange, no expansion joint
need be used, provided the maximum condenser weight under any condition is within the
allowable weight that the exhaust end is designed to support. In the latter case, the
condenser load on the exhaust flange must be central. Provisions must be made in the
supports for lateral expansion. All other piping connections to the condenser must be
provided with suitable expansion joints.
2-40
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 392 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
To avoid air leaks and maintain the highest attainable vacuum, see that all joints are tight
and that the shaft packing is receiving sufficient sealing steam. Suitable paint applied
along the joints and around the bolts of the exhaust connection will assist in keeping them
airtight.
TURBINE INSULATION
Insulating a turbine greatly reduces heat loss and sound pressure levels, isolates hot
turbine parts from personnel, and protects the turbine from the environment. Insulate the
high-temperature areas of the turbine surface indicated on the outline drawing. For
condensing turbines, these parts are the steam end casing, intermediate casing (when
used), trip and throttle valve, and steam chest. For non-condensing turbines, insulate the
exhaust end casing also.
Turbine Jacketing
Elliott supplies a sheet metal, jacket-type insulation that sheathes the turbine casing. This
removable jacketing, which provides access to turbine parts for servicing, separately
houses the high-temperature turbine sections. Available in carbon steel or optional
stainless steel, the sheet metal jacketing squares the turbine’s shape for a neater
appearance. Jacketing for the upper turbine casing consists of a metal shell and a layer
of high-temperature fibrous insulation that is fixed to its underside. The lower turbine
casing is fitted with a metal shell that is stuffed with loose insulation. Jacketing is made to
each turbine's specifications and can be obtained through Elliott field service offices.
NOTE
Elliott recommends jacketing for all outdoor installations to
protect high-temperature turbine parts from precipitation.
FIGURE 2-29
TURBINE RECOMMENDED INSULATION METAL JACKETING
100q.chap02.7/2/2008 2-41
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 393 / 633
Chapter 2
Installation
NOTES
2-42
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap02.7/2/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 394 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
CHAPTER THREE
OPERATION
INTRODUCTION
Turbine applications differ widely; therefore, operating procedures must be tailored to each
particular installation. Instructions in this chapter provide a recommended procedure for
the initial start-up and serve as a guide for establishing routine operating procedures.
Operating personnel must review this technical manual to become familiar with
the safety precautions and operating procedures for YR Turbines. Particular
attention should be directed to the WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and NOTES in
this chapter.
For location of parts described in the following text, refer to the Steam Chest Assembly
and Typical YR Turbine Assembly figures in Chapter 4.
STEAM SUPPLY
Steam should be free from moisture and preferably superheated. A receiver type
separator with ample drains should be provided upstream of the shut-off valve to prevent
water from entering the turbine. When a separator is not provided, a continuous drain
must be connected to the lowest point of the steam inlet piping.
CAUTION
If continuous drainers are on the steam piping or
turbine drains, check frequently to verify that proper
operation is maintained. Failure to drain water from
steam lines or turbine casing may result in erosion,
thrust failures, and/or poor performance.
The steam strainer protects the turbine from large particles of scale, welding beads, etc.
This strainer does not protect against abrasive matter, boiler compound, acids or alkaline
substances, all of which may be carried over in the steam. These substances may
corrode, erode or form deposits on the internal turbine parts, thus reducing efficiency and
power. Feed water treatment and boiler operation must be carefully controlled to verify a
supply of clean steam for long-term satisfactory operation.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1. Do not operate the turbine if inspection shows that the rotor shaft journals and/or
shaft packing case areas are corroded.
2. Before starting, verify the rotor rotates freely by hand and that it is not rubbing any
stationary parts.
3-1
D R A100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 395 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
CAUTION
Do not rotate shaft until lubrication has been applied.
Rotating the shaft without lubrication may result in
damage to the rotor shaft and bearing liners.
If rubbing or vibration occurs during operation,

immediately shut down the turbine, investigate and
correct the cause.
3. Verify all piping (steam, water, air) and electrical connections are made before
operating the turbine.
4. Verify that all valves, controls, trip mechanisms and safety devices are in good
operating condition.
-WARNING-
VALVE BE BLOCKED OR HELD OPEN TO CAUSE THE
TRIP SYSTEM TO BECOME INOPERATIVE.
OVERRIDING THE TRIP SYSTEM AND ALLOWING THE

TURBINE TO EXCEED THE RATED (NAMEPLATE) TRIP
SPEED MAY RESULT IN FATAL INJURY TO
PERSONNEL AND EXTENSIVE TURBINE DAMAGE.

IMMEDIATELY SHUT THE TURBINE DOWN BY
CLOSING THE INLET STEAM SHUT-OFF VALVE.
5. Before initial start-up, after major maintenance and after an extended shutdown, do
not leave the turbine unattended at any time until proper operation with load has been
demonstrated.
PREPARING THE TURBINE FOR INITIAL START-UP
NOTE
Complete installation work before attempting to operate
turbine. (Refer to Chapter 2.)
1. Disconnect the coupling between the turbine and driven machine. Turbines driving
through reduction gears can remain coupled to the gear and operated together.
2. Disconnect the steam inlet piping at the turbine and blow out the line with the supply
steam to remove any foreign material from the pipe. Use targets for determination of
cleanliness. (Refer to NEMA SM23 section 8.4 for additional details.)
3-2
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 396 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
3. Verify the steam strainer is clean and properly installed in the steam chest inlet
flange. Connect the pipe to the turbine as a permanent joint. Adjust piping hangers
to eliminate any unacceptable strain on the turbine in cold and hot conditions. Piping
4. If operating a condensing turbine, clean rust preventative compound from internal

turbine surfaces.
CAUTION
Rust preventative compound will foul surface
condenser tubes if not removed before operating the
turbine.
NOTE
As an alternative to manually cleaning the turbine internals
to remove rust preventative compound, the turbine may be
run for several hours while exhausting to atmosphere.
5. Remove bolting from the steam end bearing cap and the exhaust end bearing cap.
Lift the caps approximately 1 inch (25 mm) and pry out the top bearing liners to
release the oil rings (if supplied). Remove the bearing caps and roll out the bottom
bearing liners by lifting up on the rotor and rotating the bearing liners toward the
positioning lugs. Clean and inspect the bearing liners. Keep the steam and exhaust
end bearing liners separate.
CAUTION
Attempting to remove the bearing caps without prying
out the top bearing liners can distort the oil rings.
Distorted oil rings will not rotate and fail to provide
adequate lubrication, resulting in bearing failures.
NOTE
Turbines with Class 3 (or higher) rotors are pressure
lubricated and may not have oil rings supplied. (Refer to
the Turbine Operating Data page located in the front of this
manual to determine the rotor class.)
6. Clean the rotor shaft journals, locating bearing, and the bearing housings with clean,
lint free rags. If turbine is equipped with Kingsbury type thrust bearings, remove
thrust bearings and clean; reassemble per Supplement 03-91, located in Chapter 8
Accessories.
7. Lift the weight off the rotor and roll the bottom bearing liners into place. Make certain
the positioning lugs on the liners are correctly seated in the bearing housing locating
grooves.
CAUTION
Verify that the steam end and exhaust end bearing
liners are not interchanged.
3-3
D R A100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 397 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
8. Place the top bearing liners on the shaft journals. If the turbine is ring oiled, position
oil rings in the slots of the top liners. Flood the rotor locating bearing, shaft journals,
and bearing liners with oil. (Refer to Chapter 5 for proper oil levels and lubrication
requirements.)
9. Replace the bearing caps. Verify that the positioning lugs on the top liners engage
the grooves in the bearing caps. Apply a very thin coat of sealant to the split line.
Insert the dowel pins and tighten all bolts.
10. If supplied, review the driven machine instruction manual for pre-start inspection
procedures.
11. Inspect the governor linkage. For specific details on preparing the governor for start-
up, refer to Chapter 6, and the governor manuals located in Chapter 8 Accessories.
12. Verify that all lube oil piping has been installed and the lubrication system has been
flushed.
CAUTION
If the turbine is pressure lubricated, verify orifice plugs
are installed at the bearing housings. If orifice plugs
13. Verify free movement and clearances of the trip system. Manually activate the
overspeed trip pin to verify the overspeed trip system is functional.
14. Fabricate a clamp or other blocking device to secure the coupling sleeve (if supplied)
to the hub while operating the uncoupled turbine.
NOTE
Use a balanced adapter to secure balanced gear type
coupling hubs during uncoupled operation.
15. Verify that the exhaust relief valve is installed correctly and operates at the correct
pressure.
-WARNING-
PROTECTIVE DEVICE HAS BEEN INSTALLED
BETWEEN THE TURBINE EXHAUST CONNECTION
AND FIRST EXHAUST ISOLATION VALVE (OR
CONDENSER, IF THE TURBINE IS A CONDENSING
TURBINE).
3-4
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 398 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation

PROTECTIVE DEVICE MUST BE DESIGNED FOR FULL
RELIEF OF THE MAXIMUM STEAM FLOW THROUGH
THE TURBINE WITHOUT EXCESSIVE EXHAUST
PRESSURE.
FAILURE TO INSTALL THIS TYPE OF DEVICE MAY

RESULT IN SEVERE EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR
SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONNEL.
16. Fill oil lubricators (if ring oiled) or oil reservoir (if pressure lubricated) with proper oil.
(Refer to Chapter 5 for details.)
17. Inspect and test all controls, alarms, trips and relief valves. Calibrate and install all
instrumentation.
18. Roll the shaft by hand through several revolutions, checking for possible binding or
rubbing. Any sign of binding or rubbing should be thoroughly investigated before
attempting to start the unit.
19. If automatic controllers or regulators are supplied, do not enable during initial start-up;
use only after the general operation of the equipment has been determined
satisfactory.
INITIAL START-UP
level. Start the auxiliary oil pump (if supplied) and circulate the lubricating oil. Check
the oil piping for leaks and that oil is being delivered to the bearings.
4. Adjust the governor speed setting to minimum speed. (Refer to “Governor Operation”
in Chapter 6.)
5. Completely open the overload hand valves (if supplied). For further details review the
section on overload hand valves in this chapter.
3-5
D R A100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 399 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
NOTE
500 rpm.
CAUTION
uneven heating of the turbine rotor and casing, which
amount of steam to be discharged from the packing case leakoff drain lines. A
CAUTION
the bearing caps and check to be sure the oil rings are rotating. Verify proper oil
pressure is present (pressure lubricated only). Monitor the speed carefully during the
low speed operation.
CAUTION
Do not leave the turbine unattended at any time during
the initial start-up.
3-6
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 400 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
to prevent overheating. (Refer to Chapter 5 [Table 5-3], for recommended bearing
occur.)
18. When the turbine is thoroughly warmed up and low speed operation is determined to
be satisfactory, close the overload hand valves (if supplied).
19. For non-condensing turbines, close all drain valves provided no signs of condensate
20. Proceed with wearing in of the carbon rings (if supplied). (Refer to Turbine Operating
Data Sheet located in the front of this manual, for steam seals supplied with this unit.)
a. Gradually increase turbine speed to 1000 rpm and hold for 10-15 minutes.
b. Reduce turbine speed to 500 rpm and hold for 5-10 minutes, allowing shaft to
cool.
c. Increase turbine speed by 1000 rpm and hold for 10-15 minutes.
d. Reduce turbine speed by 500 rpm and hold for 5-10 minutes, allowing shaft to
cool.
e. Continue increasing turbine speed by 1000 rpm and decreasing by 500 rpm until
rated operating speed as shown on the turbine nameplate is achieved.
NOTE
The stepped start up procedure (wearing in of the carbon
rings) must be done for the first 2 or 3 turbine starts, or
after installation of new carbon rings. Failure to do so may
result in improper wearing in of carbon rings and cause
excessive packing case steam leakage.
22. Verify the overspeed trip by temporarily overriding the governor to actuate the
overspeed trip mechanism. (Refer to Control System, Chapter 6, for specific details
on overspeeding the turbine.)
CAUTION
Do not operate the turbine more than 2% above the
rated trip speed listed on the turbine nameplate. If the
overspeed trip does not operate within 2% of the
designated speed, shut the turbine down and make
necessary adjustments as described in Chapter 4,
Overspeed Trip System.
3-7
D R A100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 401 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
Three consecutive, non-trending trip speeds within the required range (refer to
Turbine Data sheet located in the front of this manual) must be recorded to verify safe
trip system operation. After a turbine trip and the speed decreases by 15-20% of
rated speed, the resetting lever may be relatched and the turbine brought back up in
speed.
-WARNING-
DURING TESTING OF THE MECHANICAL OVERSPEED
TRIP, THE FOLLOWING GUIDELINES MUST BE
ADHERED TO:
A. LIMIT PERSONNEL TO THE MINIMUM NUMBER

REQUIRED TO CONDUCT THE OVERSPEED
TESTS.
B. THE MAIN STEAM ISOLATION VALVE TO THE

TURBINE MUST NOT BE FULLY OPENED. IT
SHOULD ONLY BE OPENED AS FAR AS
NECESSARY TO REACH THE TRIP SPEED.
C. DURING THE TEST, TRAINED PERSONNEL MUST

OPERATE THE MAIN STEAM ISOLATION VALVE
TO THE TURBINE.
D. TWO SOURCES OF SPEED INDICATION ARE

PREFERRED. BOTH SHOULD BE OF KNOWN
ACCURACY AND CURRENT CALIBRATION.
23. Continue operating the turbine for approximately one hour, while carefully monitoring
bearing temperatures, turbine speed, vibrations levels, and listening for any unusual
noises.
24. Shut down the turbine upon satisfactory completion of the initial run. (Refer to
“Turbine Shut Down” at the end of this chapter.)
25. Couple the turbine to the driven equipment. If the turbine is used with a speed
reduction gearbox or other special equipment, follow all instructions pertaining to
those particular items.
ROUTINE START-UP
1. Verify proper oil pressure is present (pressure lubricated only).
3-8
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 402 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
level. Start the auxiliary oil pump (if supplied) and circulate the lubricating oil.
5. Completely open the overload hand valves (if supplied). For further details, review
the section on overload hand valves in this chapter.
NOTE
500 rpm.
CAUTION
amount of steam to be discharged from the packing case leak off drain lines. A
CAUTION
3-9
D R A100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 403 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
the bearing caps and check that the oil rings are rotating. If the turbine is pressure
lubricated, verify proper oil pressure is present.
to prevent overheating. (Refer to Chapter 5 [Table 5-3] for recommended bearing
occur.)
18. For non-condensing turbines, close all drain valves, provided no signs of condensate
19. Adjust governor to attain desired speed as load is applied to the turbine. (Refer to
“Control System”, Chapter 6). Close overload hand valves as required by turbine
operation. (Refer to the “Unit Outline” in Chapter 10, Technical Drawings, for
overload hand valve settings.)
OVERLOAD HAND VALVES (Optional)
Overload hand valves are used sometimes to control the steam flow through an extra bank
of nozzles. These valves can serve three functions:
a. When closed, the valves will provide more efficient turbine operation at reduced load
with normal steam conditions by reducing the nozzle area and also reducing the
steam flow.
b. In some applications, overload hand valves are used to develop the required power
by opening the valves when steam conditions are less than normal (such as
encountered during boiler start-up).
c. Sometimes overload hand valves are used to develop increased power for meeting
overload requirements with normal steam conditions.
(Refer to the “Turbine Outline” in Chapter 10, Technical Drawings, for overload hand valve
positioning versus turbine power, speed and operating steam conditions.) For the best
efficiency and speed control, open only the overload hand valves required for the actual
steam conditions present and power required.
3-10
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 404 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
TABLE 3-1
OVERLOAD HAND VALVES
Turbine Frame Size Number of Turns
AYR 7
BYR, BYRIH 9
CYR, CYRH 12
DYR, DYRH, DYRM, DYRN 12

DYR, DYRH, DYRM, DYRN
14
with 8" inlet
BYRH, BYRHH 12
NOTE
Overload hand valve must be positioned either completely
open or completely closed. Turning the stem
counterclockwise approximately 1½ turns will open the
pilot valve. (Refer to Table 3-1 for the correct number of
turns required to completely open the main valve disk.)
Open all overload hand valves during start-ups to verify
even heating of casing and prevention of valves binding in
the casing. The overload hand valves can be completely
closed if not needed when governor control is reached.
CAUTION
Operation of the overload hand valve, in anything
other than completely open or completely closed
position, can cause valve failure and possible internal
damage to the turbine.
For further information on Auto-Overload hand valves (if supplied), refer to Supplement
02-86-R1, in Chapter 8.
TURBINE SHUTDOWN
CAUTION
Before shutting down turbine, verify that the governor
system and trip system are in proper working order. If
the operational integrity is uncertain, shut off the main
steam isolation valve to stop the turbine.
1. Reduce the turbine speed to a minimum.
2. Shut down the turbine by striking the top of the trip lever by hand.
3-11
D R A100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 405 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
3. Observe the action of the trip valve and linkage.
4. Close the main steam isolation valve.
NOTE
Isolation valves, located in the turbine inlet steam piping,
must be closed after the trip valve has closed. Do not use
the trip valve as a long-term shut-off valve.
5. If non-condensing turbine, close the exhaust valve and open turbine casing drains.
6. If condensing turbine, shut down the condensing equipment, open the turbine casing
drains and close the sealing steam shut-off valve.
CAUTION
Do not apply sealing steam to the packing cases while
the turbine rotor is idle. This condition will cause
7. Allow the rotor to come to a complete stop and cool down for approximately 2 hours
before turning off the cooling water or stopping auxiliary oil pump, if supplied.
8. If the turbine is to be taken out of service for an extended period, follow the storage
instructions in Chapter 1.
OPERATION OF EMERGENCY AND STANDBY TURBINES
Emergency and standby turbines do not require a warm-up period before applying the load
and may be rapidly placed into service. However, it is important that turbines used for
emergency and standby services have drain lines open and isolating valves closed when
the turbine is idle. Turbines not used for extended periods should be inspected and
operated occasionally to verify good working condition.
Where impractical to operate the turbine, the rotor should be turned over by hand to
introduce oil to the journal bearings (oil ring lubricated turbines). If an auxiliary oil pump is
furnished (pressure lubricated turbines), oil can be supplied to the bearings by operating
the pump. To prevent corrosion, introduce dry, heated air into the casing during shutdown
periods.
CAUTION
uneven heating of the turbine rotor and casing, and
3-12
D R A724-527-2811
100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 406 / 633
Chapter 3
Operation
NOTES
3-13
D R A100q.chap03.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 407 / 633
CHAPTER FOUR
MAINTENANCE
INTRODUCTION
The AYR turbine, like most quality machinery, requires periodic maintenance and service.
This chapter supplies turbine disassembly, assembly, and adjustment procedures. These
procedures should be a familiar subject to maintenance personnel to ensure effective
repair work and proper adjustments to components requiring service. Maintenance
personnel should thoroughly understand, and at all times observe, all safety precautions
related to turbine maintenance. It is of primary importance to ensure the turbine is isolated
from all utilities to prevent the possibility of applying power or steam to the turbine when
performing internal maintenance.
-WARNING-
CLOSE, LOCK, AND TAG ALL ISOLATING VALVES
AND OPEN ALL DRAINS TO DEPRESSURIZE THE
TURBINE CASING AND STEAM CHEST BEFORE
PERFORMING ANY INTERNAL TURBINE
MAINTENANCE. ADDITIONALLY, TAKE NECESSARY
PRECAUTIONS TO PREVENT POSSIBLE TURBINE
ROTATION DUE TO REVERSE FLOW THROUGH THE
DRIVEN MACHINERY.
Non-destructive type testing is recommended for determining operational reliability of parts

during turbine inspections. If major parts replacement (such as turbine shaft, disks,
blading, etc.) becomes necessary, either an Elliott Company representative should
supervise the repair work or it should be done in an Elliott approved repair shop.
NOTE
Throughout this chapter, figure numbers are referenced in
the paragraph heading. Within the paragraph, reference to
the component item number is in parenthesis (). These
component items can be found on the figure. Figure
number and component number are also referenced on
the Spare Parts List located in Chapter 9.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Scheduled maintenance inspections are necessary for safe and efficient turbine operation.
Actual intervals between inspections cannot be specified in this manual because
maintenance scheduling is dependent upon factors best known by those directly involved
with the turbine and its particular application. Table 4-1 serves as a general guideline for
establishing a scheduled preventative maintenance program.
The actual frequency of required maintenance inspections can only be determined after
carefully considering turbine performance records, maintenance history, corrosion/erosion
rates, tests, observations and anticipated service demands. The established inspection
schedule will usually be consistent with the availability of the turbine, necessary manpower
and an adequate supply of repair parts. At the same time, scheduled inspections must be
frequent enough to avoid unsafe operating conditions.
4-1
D R A100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 408 / 633
Chapter 4
Maintenance
It is also necessary to test and adjust all safety devices on a definite schedule to ensure
operational reliability. These devices are designed to prevent injury to personnel and/or
major equipment damage. If these devices are not operated at frequent intervals, they
may not work when needed.
TABLE 4-1
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE GUIDELINES
APPROXIMATE
MAINTENANCE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE
FREQUENCY
1. Check all oil levels and add oil as necessary.
2. Check bearing and lubricating oil temperatures. 2. Chapter 5
3. Check turbine speed.
4. Check smoothness of operation; investigate
Daily
sudden changes in operating conditions or
unusual noises. 4. Chapter 4
5. If daily shutdowns are made: test the trip valve
by striking the hand trip lever.
1. Exercise trip valve to prevent sticking due to
deposits or corrosion. If on a continuous
operation schedule; exercise the trip valve by
Weekly
striking the hand trip lever. Reset the lever when
the turbine speed decreases to approximately
80% of rated speed.
1. Sample lubricating oil and renew as necessary. 1. Chapter 5
2. Check governor linkage for excessive play.
Monthly Replace any worn parts. 2. Chapter 4
3. Check the overspeed trip by overspeeding the
turbine (if the driven machine permits). 3. Chapter 6
1. Check all clearances and adjustments. 1. Chapter 4
2. Remove and clean steam strainer. If strainer is
exceptionally dirty, clean every six months. 2. Chapter 4
3. Inspect governor valve seat. Hand lap the valve
if signs of uneven wear exist. Replace the
governor valve stem packing. 3. Chapter 4
4. Clean and inspect trip valve. Replace worn out
parts and hand lap if necessary. 4. Chapter 4
5. Disassemble, clean and inspect overspeed trip
and linkage. Inspect trip pin and check for ease
Annually
of operation. 5. Chapter 4
6. Check journal bearings and rotor locating
bearing for wear and replace if necessary. 6. Chapter 4
7. Inspect and clean bearing housing oil reservoirs
and cooling chambers. 7. Chapter 4
8. Lift turbine casing cover and inspect rotor shaft,
disks, blades and shrouding. 8. Chapter 4
9. Inspect carbon rings and replace as necessary. 9. Chapter 4
10. Remove rotor assembly from casing and inspect
reversing blades and nozzle ring. 10. Chapter 4
4-2
D R A724-527-2811
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 409 / 633
Chapter 4
Maintenance
TABLE 4-1 (continued)

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE GUIDELINES
APPROXIMATE MAINTENANCE DESCRIPTION REFERENCE
FREQUENCY
11. Check operation of sentinel valve. 11. Chapter 1
Annually
12. Adjust and check overspeed trip when turbine is
(continued)
put back in operation. 12. Chapter 4
TURBINE CASING AND MISCELLANEOUS JOINTS – Refer to Figure 4-1
The AYR turbine steam joints are carefully made up and factory tested under pressure to
ensure steam tightness. Two types of sealing compounds are used: one is a paste, that is
spread on the joints, the other is a plastic string type sealant. These products—“Copaltite”
(paste) and “Temp-Tite” (plastic string)—produce a superior joint seal and are available
from Elliott Company.
NOTE
The plastic string sealant, “Temp-Tite”, can be purchased
in the desired diameter and is available on sealed spools.
The paste sealant, “Copaltite”, is available in quart
containers. (Refer to the Spare Parts List for part
numbers.)
A combination of paste and plastic sealing compound is used to seal the vertical joints
between the packing cases and turbine casing. The plastic sealant (³⁄16 inch, 5 mm wide)
and paste compound is used to fill the sealing grooves on the vertical flange faces of the
packing cases. A combination of plastic sealant (¹⁄16 inch, 1.6 mm wide) and paste
compound is used to seal the following steam joints:
1. Steam chest body (1, Figure 4-13) to the turbine casing.
2. Governor valve cover (22, 35, Figure 4-13) to the steam chest body (1, Figure 4-13).
3. Trip valve cover (3, Figure 4-13) to the steam chest body (1, Figure 4-13).
4. Nozzle ring to turbine casing.
5. The horizontal and vertical turbine casing joints.
Screw threads subjected to high temperatures often gall during disassembly. It is

recommended that anti-galling compound be applied to the threads of all studs, bolts,
socket head cap screws, hand nozzle valve and other threads subjected to high
temperatures. The joints between the bearing caps and bearing housings may be made
up with a thin coat of oil resistant sealant.
Anti-galling compound and sealants should be among the normal maintenance items
stocked, and may be purchased from Elliott Company. The sealants have a shelf life of
approximately 1 year when stored in a cool place. If Elliott Company materials are not
stocked, high-grade materials of suitable pressure and temperature rating may be used.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
410 / 633 4-3
724-527-2811
Chapter 4
Maintenance
EXHAUST END
PLACE A LINE OF PLASTIC

COMPOUND (1/16 in. [1.6mm]) IN A LAYER OF
PASTE APPROXIMATELY (1/2 in. [13mm]).
PLACE A LINE OF PLASTIC

COMPOUND (1/16 in.,1.6 mm)
STEAM END IN A LAYER OF PASTE
(APPROXIMATELY 1/2 in.,13 mm)
PASTE
SEALER
FIGURE 4-1
HORIZONTAL JOINT DETAIL
TURBINE CASING AND CARBON RING SERVICE
The steam end and exhaust end packing cases are integral parts of the horizontally split
turbine casing. Each packing case houses four carbon ring assemblies (9, Figure 4-12)
and five stainless steel spacer rings (10 & 11). The turbine casing cover (3) must be
removed to service the carbon rings and spacers. Each carbon ring assembly (Figure 4-3)
consists of three carbon segments and an anti-rotation stop, that are held together by a
retainer spring. Axial positioning of the carbon rings is maintained by the spacer rings,
that fit into the machined grooves in the packing cases.
 ELLIOTT CO., INC (YR)

FIGURE 4-2
PACKING CASE ARRANGEMENT
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 04-4
724-527-2811
411 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
Chapter 4
Maintenance
MATCH
MARKS
CARBON RING
SEGMENT
RETAINER
..
SPRING
MATCH
MARKS
....
ANTI-ROTATION STOP
FIGURE 4-3
CARBON RING SEAL ASSEMBLIES
Packing Case Disassembly
1. Remove bolts (4, Figure 4-12) and dowels (5) from the horizontal casing flange.
2. Break the joint by using four bolts (½" – 13 x 1½") as jack screws in the threaded
holes in the casing cover flange.
NOTE
If excessive sealant was used or large amounts of boiler
carry over is present, the carbon rings may become “glued”
to the packing case. Should this happen, it is necessary to
chip the carbon segments from the packing case.
Carbon Ring Removal
1. Unhook the retaining spring surrounding the carbon ring.
2. Remove the anti-rotation stop by sliding it off the retaining spring.
3. Remove the carbon ring segments by rotating them around the rotor shaft.
4. Pull the retaining spring from the packing case.
NOTE
Do not mix carbon ring segments. Mark each ring so it can
be returned to its original location.
5. Clean the packing case slots (taking care to clean the spacer vertical faces of each
carbon ring slot), rotor shaft and all sealing surfaces on the packing case flanges.
Blow out the packing cases with air.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
412 / 633 4-5
724-527-2811
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Clearances
The inside diameters of new carbon rings are selected to match to the calculated design
turbine exhaust temperature (Refer to Table 4-2). The inside diameters of used carbon
rings may be slightly larger than new rings. Measuring the carbon rings is difficult;
however, an inside micrometer or snap gauge may be used with a fair degree of accuracy.
The cold clearances may be determined by measuring the inside diameter of the
assembled rings and the diameter of the rotor shaft at sealing areas. The difference
between the measurements is the cold diametral clearance.
An alternate method employing a dial Indicator may be used. With the carbon rings
assembled and on the shaft, mount a dial indicator firmly to any part of the casing. With
the dial indicator button reading the top of the carbon ring, zero the dial indicator.
Carefully lift the carbon ring vertically and record the dial reading.
Adjustments
The carbon rings are not adjustable. Replacement is recommended if excessive steam
leaks from the packing cases. Packing case and spacer ring cleanliness is of the utmost
importance in achieving proper carbon ring seating. If an air supply is available, blow out
the packing cases before replacing the carbon rings. For best results, install new carbon
rings in complete sets.
TABLE 4-2
MINIMUM/MAXIMUM CARBON RING DIMENSIONS
FOR OPERATING EXHAUST TEMPERATURES to 750°F (400°C)
AYR TURBINES
OPERATING EXHAUST TEMPERATURE CARBON RING INSIDE DIAMETER

LIMITS INCHES mm
Min. 2.252 57.20
UNDER 300°F (150°C)
Max. 2.253 57.23
Min. 2.254 57.25
301° TO 400°F (151° TO 204°C)
Max. 2.255 57.28
Min. 2.256 57.30
401° TO 500°F (205° TO 260°C)
Max. 2.257 57.33
Min. 2.258 57.35
501° TO 600°F (261° TO 315°C)
Max. 2.259 57.38
Min. 2.260 57.40
601° TO 700°F (316° TO 370°C)
Max. 2.261 57.43
Min. 2.262 57.45
701° TO 750°F (371° TO 400°C)
Max. 2.263 57.48
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 04-6
724-527-2811
413 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Packing Case Assembly
1. Clean packing case flange surfaces, spacer rings, rotor shaft and mating turbine
casing surfaces. Blow out the packing cases with air.
2. Place the carbon ring retaining springs under and part way around the rotor shaft.
3. Roll the carbon ring segments around the shaft and into the areas between the
spacer rings. Align the match marks on the carbon ring segments to ensure proper
assembly.
4. Slide the anti-rotation stops onto the retainer springs and position the stops in
notched carbon ring segments.
5. Hook the ends of each retaining spring together and rotate the carbon rings so the
anti-rotation stops are seated in the anti-rotation notches in sealing glands.
6. Apply a thin coat of paste sealing compound to the horizontal flanges.

(Refer to Figure 4-1).
NOTE
Excessive paste sealant on packing case flanges may
result in sealant entering the packing cases and adhering
to carbon rings. This may prevent the carbon rings from
seating properly. Keep paste sealant approximately ³⁄16
inch (5 mm) away from inside edges of flanges to prevent it
from squeezing into carbon ring chambers.
CAUTION
Care must be exercised to prevent damaging the
carbon rings when replacing the turbine casing cover.
Using the casing dowel pins (5, Figure 4-12) as
lowering guides greatly reduces the risk of jarring or
damaging the carbon rings as the casing cover is
lowered into place.
7. Insert the four dowel pins in the casing cover. Start the ends of the dowels into the
mating holes in the bottom half casing while lowering the cover.
8. Seat the dowel pins.
9. Tighten horizontal casing bolts.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
414 / 633
724-527-2811
4-7
Chapter 4
Maintenance
BEARING LINERS – Refer to Figure 4-12
Locating tabs on each bearing liner (15 & 16, Figure 4-12) engage grooves in the
horizontal split of the steam bearing housing (21) and exhaust pedestal (12). This
arrangement retains the liners in the proper position. Units with number 1 or 2 rotors are
supplied with oil rings to provide lubrication during operation or startup/shutdown on
pressure lubricated turbines.
Disassembly
1. Remove any wiring, piping, etc., that would interfere with removing the bearing caps.
2. Remove the dowels (14) and bolts (13) from the bearing cap joints.
3. Break the joints by prying the bearing caps away from the bearing housings.
4. Raise the caps approximately 1 inch (25 mm) and pry the top liners (16) (at the
locating lugs) from the bearing caps with a screwdriver. This will release the oil rings
(49) (if supplied) from the caps.
CAUTION
Attempting to remove the bearing caps, without prying
out the top bearing liners, can distort the oil rings.
Distorted oil rings will not rotate to provide lubrication,
thereby resulting in bearing failures.
5. Remove bearing caps and the top journal bearing liners.
6. Lift the rotor slightly and remove the bottom bearing liners by rolling them away from
the locating lugs. The rotor shaft will rest on the shaft sleeve seals (47) when the
bottom liners are removed.
Clearances
Bearing liners used with rotors designated Class 1 and 2 provide a cold diametral
clearance of .006 inch (0.15 mm) to .009 inch (0.23 mm). Class 3 rotors are slightly larger;
therefore, the bearing clearance will be smaller. (Refer to Figure 4-14.) Diametral journal
bearing clearances are .0055 to .008 inch (0.14 to 0.20 mm) when turbine is equipped with
a Class 3 or higher. (Refer to Cold Clearance Diagram, Figure 4-14.)
To Check The Bearing Liner Clearances
Dimensional Method
This is the most accurate method of measuring diametral bearing clearances.
1. Using a micrometer with an accuracy of 0.0001" (0.0025 mm), measure the shaft
journal at several places (axial and radial). Record and average these readings.
2. With the rotor removed, install the upper and lower half bearing liners in the bearing
housing. Torque the bearing housing bolts. (Refer to Table 4-3.)
3. With an inside micrometer, (range of 2 to 3 inches [50.8 mm to 76.2 mm]). Measure

the bearing liner bore in several places (axial and radial). Record and average these
readings.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 04-8
724-527-2811
415 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
Chapter 4
Maintenance
4. Subtract the value obtained in Step 3 from the value in Step 1. This is your cold
diametral clearance.
Plastigage Method – Refer to Figure 4-12
1. With the top liners (16) removed, place a piece of plastigage axially on the shaft
journals.
2. Place the top bearing liners (16) over the shaft journals.
3. Place the oil rings (49) (if supplied) in the slotted guides in the top bearing liners,
taking care so as not to disturb plastigage.
4. Replace the bearing caps. Be sure the top bearing liner locating lugs engage the
grooves in the bearing caps.
5. Insert dowels (14) and tighten bolts (13). Torque the bearing housing bolts.
(Refer to Table 4-3.)
6. Remove the bolts (13) and dowels (14). Lift the bearing caps approximately 1 inch
(25 mm) and pry the top liners (16) from the caps with a screwdriver.
7. Remove bearing caps and top liners and compare the plastigage thickness to the
sleeve scale provided on the plastigage sleeve. Determine the clearance between
the shaft journals and top bearing liners.
Lift Check Method – Refer to Figure 4-12
2. Place the oil rings (49) (if supplied) in the slotted guides in the top bearing liners,
taking care so as not to disturb plastigage.
3. Replace the bearing caps. Be sure the top bearing liner locating lugs engage the
grooves in the bearing caps.
4. Insert dowels (14) and tighten bolts (13). Torque the bearing housing bolts.
5. Remove a pipe plug (28) located on top of the bearing cap.
6. Using a dial indicator of 0.0005" (0.0127 mm) accuracy, place the indicator stem
against the shaft and zero the indicator.
7. Carefully, lift the shaft until it contacts the top of the bearing. The dial indicator
reading is the diametral clearance. Repeat Step 7 several times to verify correct
readings.
Adjustments
Bearing liners are not adjustable. They should not be filed, scraped, shimmed, fitted or
altered in any way. Worn bearing liners can lead to vibration and other operational
problems. Replace worn bearing liners if the clearances exceed the maximum shown in
the Cold Clearance Diagram, Figure 4-14. Bearing liners should also be replaced if
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
416 / 633 4-9
724-527-2811
Chapter 4
Maintenance
inspection shows signs of scoring, wiping, cracking, flaking or loose bonding between the
babbitt and the steel backing.
Assembly – Refer to Figure 4-12
1. Clean the flanges on the bearing caps and housings.
2. Drain and clean bearing housing reservoirs and refill with clean oil. (Refer to Table 5-
1.)
3. Lift the weight of the rotor and roll the bottom bearing liners (15) around the shaft
journals and into the bearing housings. Be sure the liner locating lugs are firmly
seated in the bearing housing locating grooves.
NOTE
With Class 3 or higher rotors, the upper half liner bearing is
a Dam type. Check to see that rotation is into the Dam.
5. Place the oil rings (49) if supplied, in the slotted guides in the top half bearing liners.
6. A thin coat of oil resistant sealant may be applied to the bearing cap flanges, if
desired.
7. Replace the bearing caps. Be sure that the top bearing liner locating lugs engage the
corresponding locating grooves in the bearing caps.
CAUTION
Bearing caps must seat firmly on the bearing
housings. Do not force the caps down by tightening
the bolts. Forcing the caps down will damage the
bearing liners.
8. When the locating lugs are properly seated, replace the dowels (14).
9. Tighten all bolts (13).
WATER COOLED BEARINGS
Provisions for cooling the bearing oil are supplied as standard equipment on oil ring
lubricated turbines. The lubricating oil is cooled by water flow through chambers in the
bottom halves of the steam bearing housing and exhaust pedestal. If water-cooled caps
are supplied, water is directed from lower half bearing housing to the water chamber
located in the cap, then to drain.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 04-10
724-527-2811
417 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
Chapter 4
Maintenance
WATER COOLED CAP
(OPTIONAL)
LUBRICATOR
COOLING
WATER
COOLING DRAIN
TUBE PLUG
FIGURE 4-4
SCHEMATIC VIEW, WATER COOLED BEARING HOUSING
CAUTION
If the turbine is idle during cold weather, the cooling
water chambers must be drained to prevent damage
from freezing water.
Disassembly – Refer to Figure 4-12
1. Disconnect cooling water piping from the cooling chamber flanges (27) and bearing
caps (53 & 54) as applicable.
2. Remove machine bolts (20) from the cooling chamber flanges.
3. Remove the flanges (27), gaskets (19) and cooling tube assemblies (26) from the
bearing housings.
4. Remove the bolts (59) from the bearing cap covers (58), if applicable.
Adjustments
1. During operation, adjust the water flow through the chambers to approximately 2 gpm
(7.5 lpm). Cooling water pressure must not exceed 75 psig (5 bar).
2. Annually inspect the cooling water chambers. Clean as required. (Refer to Table 4-
1.)
1. Install new gaskets (19 & 57).
2. Replace the flanges (27 & 56) on the cooling chambers.
3. Replace the cooling chamber flange bolts (20) and connect the cooling water piping.
D R A
4. Replace the bearing cap covers (58) and tighten bolts (59), if applicable.
IN6-APR-201
0
6
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
418 / 633 4-11
724-527-2811
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ROTOR ASSEMBLY – Refer to Figure 4-12
The rotor assembly must be removed from the turbine casing before removing or replacing
the following:
1. Oil Rings (49) 5. Carbon Ring Spacer Rings (10 & 11)
2. Shaft Sleeve Seals (47) 6. Nozzle Ring (33)
3. Trip Body (52) 7. Reversing blade Assembly (37)
4. Rotor Locating Bearing (50)
Removal – Refer to Figure 4-12
1. Disconnect the coupling between the turbine and driven machine.
2. Remove the turbine casing cover (3), and carbon rings (9) as described in
Disassembly Section and Carbon Ring Replacement Section.
3. Remove the bearing housing caps (12 & 21) and top and bottom journal bearing
liners (15 & 16) as described in Disassembly Section.
4. Disconnect the governor linkage and remove the governor as outlined in the “Control
System-Governor”, Chapter 6.
5. Place a sling either outside or between the rotor disks (44 & 45), and slowly lift the
rotor approximately 1 inch (25 mm).
DETAIL “A” DETAIL “B”

STRAIGHT PROFILE
DISC ASSEMBLY DISC ASSEMBLY
FIGURE 4-5
ROTOR DISK ARRANGEMENTS
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 04-12
724-527-2811
419 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
Chapter 4
Maintenance
6. Lift the oil rings (49) if supplied, from the bearing housings. Move the rings to the
side so that they are free of the cast bearing liner supports, and then lift the rotor
assembly out of the turbine casing.
CAUTION
Keep the rotor level when lifting to prevent binding it
in the casing or damaging machined surfaces.
CAUTION
Chock the rotor assembly with blocks to prevent it
from rolling when removed from the casing.
Additionally, protect the rotor journals and carbon
ring sealing areas by wrapping them with clean rags or
other suitable covering.
Clearances
Refer to the Cold Clearance Diagram (Figure 4-14) for rotor dimensions.
Adjustments
The parts of the rotor assembly are not adjustable. Work on the rotor must be done by an
Elliott authorized service shop.
Replacement – Refer to Figure 4-12

1. Lower the rotor assembly to within 1 inch (25 mm) of full replacement in the casing.
Carefully guide the rotor while lowering it into the casing to prevent the disks (44 &
45) from contacting the reversing blade assembly (37).
2. Position the oil rings (49), if supplied, so they fall into the openings between the
bearing liner supports located in the bottom of the bearing housings.
3. Align the spacer rings (10 & 11) so they engage the grooves in the packing cases.
Be sure the sealing glands are clean and free of corrosion.
4. Position the anti-rotation tab on the rotor locating bearing (50) to engage the groove
in the steam bearing housing (21).
5. Slowly lower the rotor into the casing.
6. Check bearing housing alignment.
7. Replace the journal bearing liners and caps.
8. Replace the governor and connect the governor linkage (Refer to “Control System-
Governor”, Chapter 6).
9. Replace the carbon rings (9) and turbine casing cover (3) as outlined in “Turbine
Casing Assembly” section.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
420 / 633 4-13
724-527-2811
Chapter 4
Maintenance
EXHAUST PEDESTAL REPLACEMENT – Refer to Figure 4-12
The exhaust pedestal (12, Figure 4-12) is attached to the turbine casing by four socket
head cap screws (23) and two combining studs (17). The combining studs are threaded
into the bottom half turbine casing and pinned to the pedestal.
Two dowel pins (25), pressed into the exhaust end of the turbine casing, position and hold
the pedestal in correct horizontal and vertical parallel alignment with the steam bearing
housing (21). Spacers (24), located between the pedestal and turbine casing, are used to
adjust and maintain proper angular bearing alignment.

1. Remove the rotor assembly as outlined in “Rotor Removal” section.
2. Remove the hold-down bolts and dowel pins from the pedestal support feet.
3. Support the weight of the turbine exhaust end casing with a jack, wooden blocks, or
other adequate means.
4. Remove the tapered pins (18) from the combining studs (17).
5. Loosen the four cap screws (23) three or four turns and pry the pedestal away from
the casing until the spacers (24) are free to move.
6. Remove the cap screws and spacers. Mark each spacer so it can be returned to the
location from which it was removed.
CAUTION
If spacers (24) are not returned to their original
locations, bearing misalignment may occur. This will
cause uneven bearing wear or possible failure.
7. Slide the pedestal off the combining studs and dowel pins (25).
Clearances
The bearing housing bores should be checked for roundness. The bore should be round
to within .002" (.05 mm).
Adjustments
The bearing housing bore is not adjustable. If distortion exists the bearing housing must
be replaced.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 04-14
724-527-2811
421 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
Chapter 4
Maintenance
NOTE
Bearing anti-rotation locating grooves must be provided at
the horizontal split on replacement bearing pedestals.
These grooves may be made by hand filing. Hold the liner
so the tab is on the upstream end for clockwise rotation
(looking in direction of steam flow) and on the downstream
end for counterclockwise rotation. Upper half bearings
with a pressure dam relief must be positioned so rotation is
into the dam.
1. Slide the pedestal onto the combining studs (17) and dowel pins (25).
2. Replace the spacers (24) and cap screws (23). Spacers must be returned to the
same locations from which they were removed.
3. Tighten the cap screws (23) and insert the taper pins (18) in the pedestal and
combining studs (17).
4. Replace the rotor assembly as outlined in “Rotor Replacement” section.
5. Replace the bottom half journal bearing liners (15). Check the bearing alignment and
adjust as necessary.
STEAM BEARING HOUSING REPLACEMENT – Refer to Figure 4-12
The steam bearing housing (21) is attached to the turbine casing by four socket head cap
screws (23). Two dowel pins (25), pressed into the steam end of the turbine casing,
maintain the bearing housing in correct horizontal and vertical parallel alignment with the
exhaust pedestal (12). Spacers (24), located between the housing and turbine casing, are
used to correct any angular misalignment and also to adjust the axial position of the
turbine rotor in the casing.

1. Remove the rotor assembly as outlined in “Rotor Removal” section. Remove the
governor and related housings (Refer to “Control System-Governor”, Chapter 6).
2. Remove the hold-down bolts and dowel pins from the steam bearing housing (29).
3. Place a jack, wooden blocks or other adequate support under the steam end of the
turbine casing and steam chest.
4. Remove the bolts (30) securing the support (29) to the bearing housing (21).
5. Loosen the socket head cap screws (23) and pry the bearing housing away from the
turbine casing until the spacers (24) are free to move.
6. Remove the cap screws and spacers. Mark the spacers so they can be returned to
their original locations.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
422 / 633 4-15
724-527-2811
Chapter 4
Maintenance
CAUTION
If the spacers (24, Figure 4-12) are not replaced in their
original locations, bearing misalignment may result.
This can cause uneven bearing wear or possible
bearing failure. Nozzle ring to rotating blade clearance
may also be affected, resulting in poor performance or
mechanical failure.
7. Pull the bearing housing off the dowel pins (25).
Clearances
The bearing housing bores should be checked for roundness. The bore should be round
to within .002" (.05 mm).
Adjustments
The bearing housing bore is not adjustable. If distortion exists the bearing housing must
be replaced.
NOTE
Bearing anti-rotation locating grooves must be provided at
the horizontal split on replacement bearing pedestal and/or
housing. These grooves may be made by hand filing.
TABLE 4-3
POSITION OF LOCATING GROOVES
Liner
ROTATION
Location
Counter-
Clockwise Clockwise with Counter- Clockwise with
dam Clockwise dam
Lower Half Right Side Right Side Right Side Right Side
Exhaust
Outboard Outboard Outboard Outboard
Pedestal
Lower Half Left Side Left Side Left Side Left Side
Steam Bearing
Outboard Outboard Outboard Outboard
Housing
Exhaust Right Side Right Side Right Side Left Side
Pedestal
Inboard * Inboard * Inboard * Outboard
Cap
Steam Bearing Left Side Right Side Left Side Left Side
Housing Cap
Inboard Outboard Inboard Inboard
* An asterisk indicates the tab located in oil feed annulus does not need notched.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 04-16
724-527-2811
423 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
Chapter 4
Maintenance
1. Push the bearing housing onto the dowel pins (25) that are pressed into the steam
end turbine casing.
2. Replace the cap screws (23) and spacers (24). Ensure that the spacers are returned
to the same location from which they were removed.
3. Bolt the support (29) to the bearing housing.
4. Replace the rotor assembly as outlined in “Rotor Replacement” section.
5. Replace the bottom half journal bearing liners (15) check the bearing alignment and
adjust as necessary.
EXHAUST PEDESTAL AND STEAM BEARING HOUSING ALIGNMENT – Refer to

Figure 4-12
To obtain the correct bearing and rotor shaft journal contact, the bores of the exhaust
pedestal and the steam bearing housing must be in parallel and angular alignment. Dowel
pins (25), pressed into the turbine casing, position the pedestal and bearing housing in
horizontal and vertical parallel alignment. Spacers (24), located between the pedestal and
turbine casing and between the steam bearing housing and turbine casing, are used to
correct any angular misalignment and to position the turbine rotor axially in the turbine
casing.
To Check The Bearing Housing Alignment
1. Remove the rotor assembly from the turbine casing and clean the shaft journals.
2. Install bottom half journal bearing liners (15) in the bearing pedestal and steam
bearing housing. Be sure the liners are properly seated. Liners should be clean and
free of any oil.
3. Apply a very light coating of Prussian blue to both shaft journals.
4. Lower the rotor assembly until the full weight of the rotor is supported by the journal
bearing liners.
NOTE
Bolting down of the bearing caps will ensure bearings are
seated.
5. Rotate the rotor assembly slowly one turn in the direction of rotation.
NOTE
Ensure the rotor shaft is seated on the bottom of the
bearing liners and not moving sideways or upward while
being rotated.
6. Remove the rotor assembly from the turbine casing and check the bearing contact.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
424 / 633 4-17
724-527-2811
Chapter 4
Maintenance
NOTE
The exhaust pedestal and steam bearing housing are
considered to be in alignment when bearing contact with
the shaft journals is no less than 85% along the bottom of
the bearing liners and when the contact along the sides of
the liners is parallel with the bearing bore and equal on
each side (See Figure 4-6).
CORRECT
BEARING
CONTACT
CONTACT INDICATES
VERTICAL ANGULAR
MISALIGNMENT
CONTACT INDICATES
HORIZONTAL ANGULAR
MISALIGNMENT

FIGURE 4-6
JOURNAL BEARING AND ROTOR SHAFT CONTACT
To Correct Any Misalignment
1. Place shim stock, in increments of .002 inch (0.05 mm), behind the spacers (24) to
correct the misalignment.
2. Recheck the bearing contact and continue to add shims to achieve proper alignment.
3. After the correct bearing contact is obtained, the shims must be removed from each
spacer, and the thickness of the opposite spacer altered accordingly.
(Surface grinding is the preferred method.)
EXAMPLE
If it is necessary to add .004 inch (0.10 mm) shim
thickness to the two bottom spacers to achieve correct
alignment, .004 inch (0.10 mm) must be ground from the
two top spacers to maintain the alignment after the shims
are removed.
4. Recheck the bearing contact after the ground spacers have been installed.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 04-18
724-527-2811
425 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
Chapter 4
Maintenance
ROTOR LOCATING BEARING – Refer to Figure 4-12
The rotor locating bearing (50, Figure 4-12) maintains the correct axial position of the rotor
assembly in the turbine casing. The bearing is mounted on the rotor shaft with the
shielded side of the bearing toward the trip body. A beveled retainer ring (51) holds the
bearing in place on the rotor shaft. The outer bearing race fits into a groove in the steam
bearing housing (21), and is prevented from rotating by an anti-rotation tab, that is
permanently attached to the outer race. The anti-rotation tab fits into a slot at the
horizontal split of the bearing housing.
Clearances
To check the axial bearing clearance, an axial rotor float check must be made:
1. Mount a dial indicator perpendicular to a vertical shaft face (such as the coupling hub
or a rotor disk).
2. Shift the rotor as far as possible in both axial directions while observing the dial
indicator. The normal axial rotor float is from .010 inch (0.25 mm) to .018 inch (0.46
mm). In no case should the total indicator reading exceed .025 inch (0.64 mm).
NOTE
Excessive axial float may be the result of bearing housing
wear. If wear is found in rotor locating bearing groove, the
bearing housing must be replaced.
Disassembly
1. With the rotor removed from the turbine casing, disassemble and remove the trip
body as described in “Trip Body Removal” section.
2. Remove the retainer ring (51) with ring expanding pliers.
3. Remove the locating bearing (50) with a bearing puller.
Adjustments
The rotor locating bearing is not adjustable. A rotor locating bearing must be replaced
when the axial rotor float reaches .025 inch (0.64 mm).
Assembly
1. Install the bearing on the shaft by using a sleeve-type bearing driver that contacts
only the inner bearing race. Seat the bearing solidly against the machined shoulder
on the shaft (43, Figure 4-12).
NOTE
Be sure the shielded side of the bearing is positioned
toward the trip body (52).
2. Replace the retainer ring (51). Seat the ring firmly in the groove on the rotor shaft
with the beveled edge of the ring positioned toward the trip body.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
426 / 633 4-19
724-527-2811
Chapter 4
Maintenance
3. Replace the trip body as outlined in “Trip Body Replacement” section.
4. Flush the locating bearing with oil before replacing the bearing cap.
NOZZLE RING AND REVERSING BLADE ASSEMBLY – Refer to Figure 4-12
The nozzle ring (33, Figure 4-12) directs the steam flow from the steam ring to the buckets
of the first rotor disk (44). Steam exits the buckets of the first disk and passes through the
reversing blade assembly (37) that directs it into the buckets on the second rotor disk (45).
The reversing blade assembly is positioned between the two rotor disks and is bolted to
the nozzle ring. The reversing blade assembly is positioned by spacers and requires no
further adjustment.
ROTOR DISC
BUCKETS
NOZZLE
RING
TO
EXHAUST
NOZZLE
FROM
STEAM ROTATION
INLET
STATIONARY
REVERSING
BUCKETS
FIGURE 4-7
NOZZLE RING AND REVERSING BLADE ARRANGEMENT
Disassembly
1. Remove the rotor assembly as outlined in “Rotor Removal” section.
2. Remove the capscrews (38, Figure 4-10), lockwashers (39), and spacers (40), and lift
out the reversing blade assembly (37). Mark each spacer (40) so that it may be
returned to its original location.
3. Remove the nozzle ring capscrews (34 & 36), lockwashers (35) and nozzle ring (33)
from the casing.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 04-20
724-527-2811
427 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Clearances
The clearance between the nozzle ring (33) and the shroud on the first rotor disk (44) must
be checked whenever the rotor assembly, nozzle ring or reversing blade assembly is
removed or replaced. This clearance is a minimum of .050 inch (1.27 mm) and a
maximum of .072 inch (1.83 mm). The clearance can be measured with a feeler gauge on
the left and right of the turbine. The clearance must be taken with the rotor in running or
downstream position. (Thrust toward driven machine.)
Adjustments
Inspect the nozzle ring and reversing blade assembly annually. Clean scale or boiler
compound deposits as necessary. Replace eroded parts as needed. The nozzle ring
clearance is adjustable by changing thickness of washers at steam bearing housing.
Assembly
1. Clean the casing and nozzle ring sealing surfaces.
2. Apply a thin coat of paste type sealer and plastic string compound to the nozzle ring
sealing surface on the steam end turbine casing (Reference Figure 4-1).
3. Apply anti-galling compound to the threads of the nozzle ring capscrews (34 & 36,
Figure 4-10).
NOTE
When inspecting the nozzle ring and reversing blade
holder, the reuse of capscrews is not recommended. New
capscrews and lockwashers should be used. The
capscrews used are specially treated to withstand the
pressures and temperatures of steam turbines.
4. Bolt the nozzle ring to the turbine casing. Be sure that lockwashers (35) are used
with all capscrews.
5. Place lockwashers (39) on the reversing blade assembly capscrews (38) and apply
anti-galling compound to the capscrew threads. Put the bolts through the holes in the
reversing blade assembly and slip the spacers (40) over the capscrews.
6. Position the reversing blade assembly (37) in the turbine casing and bolt it to the
nozzle ring (33).
NOTE
Be sure the reversing blade assembly is installed in the
same location from which it was removed so that it covers
all the nozzles and overlaps the end nozzles by a minimum
of five buckets. The reversing blade trailing edges must
point in the same direction as the nozzles.
7. Return the rotor assembly to the turbine casing.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
428 / 633 4-21
724-527-2811
Chapter 4
Maintenance
SHAFT SLEEVE SEALS – Refer to Figure 4-12
Three seals (47, Figure 4-12) mounted on the rotor shaft, prevent oil leakage from the
steam bearing housing (21) and exhaust pedestal (12). The seals also restrict the entry of
steam, dust and dirt into bearing housings.
Disassembly
1. Remove the rotor assembly from the turbine casing as described in “Rotor Removal”
section.
2. Remove the drive coupling from the rotor shaft.
3. Remove the trip body (52) and rotor locating bearing (50) from the rotor shaft.
4. Remove the two set screws (48) from each sleeve seal (47) and slide the sleeve off
the rotor shaft (43).
Replacement And Adjustment
1. Place sleeve seals (47) on the rotor shaft (43).
2. Replace the rotor locating bearing (50) and trip body as outlined in “Rotor Locating
Bearing Assembly” section.
3. Install the drive coupling on the rotor shaft.
4. Return the rotor assembly to the turbine casing.
5. Position the shaft sleeve seals to provide the axial clearances shown in Figure 4-14.
6. Tighten set screws (48) to lock the sleeves (47) in position on the shaft.
NOTE
The tops of the set screws must be below the outside
diameter of the sleeve seals. Care must also be taken to
avoid distorting shaft sleeve seals when tightening the set
screws. It may be helpful to spot the shaft with a drill to
get the proper depth.
7. Peen sleeve metal over set screws to lock set screw in place.
8. Replace the casing cover (3) and bearing caps.
Clearances
1. Disassembly is not required to check axial clearances. (J, M, N on Figure 4-14 Cold
Clearance Diagram.)
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 04-22
724-527-2811
429 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
Chapter 4
Maintenance
2. Remove bearing caps (12, 21) to check radial clearances (A, Figure 4-14 Cold
Clearance Diagram) with feeler gauges.
OVERSPEED TRIP SYSTEM – Refer to Figure 4-8
The overspeed trip pin assembly is contained in the trip body mounted on the turbine rotor
shaft. When the turbine speed increases above the rated operating speed, centrifugal
force exerted on the trip pin (1, Figure 4-8) increases. When the centrifugal force
overcomes the force of the trip pin spring (2), the weighted end of the pin protrudes from
the trip body. The pin strikes the plunger assembly (7), forcing it against the adjustable
jack screw (8) in the bottom of the hand trip lever. The lever pivots on a shoulder stud,
causing the top of the lever to move away from the resetting lever. This movement
disengages the latch from the resetting lever knife edge and allows the closing spring to
pull the trip valve closed. This stops the steam flow through the turbine.
-WARNING-
VALVE BE BLOCKED OR HELD OPEN TO RENDER
THE TRIP SYSTEM INOPERATIVE. OVERRIDING THE
TRIP SYSTEM, AND ALLOWING THE TURBINE TO
EXCEED THE RATED (NAMEPLATE) TRIP SPEED,
MAY RESULT IN FATAL INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND
EXTENSIVE TURBINE DAMAGE. ALWAYS CLOSE ALL
ISOLATING VALVES AND OPEN DRAINS TO
DEPRESSURIZE THE TURBINE CASING AND STEAM
CHEST BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE ON
THE OVERSPEED TRIP SYSTEM.
Class 3 and higher rotors will have QV Trip mechanism; these are described in
supplement 01-77 in Chapter 8, Accessories.
Disassembly, Standard YR Overspeed Trip Mechanism
NOTE
To check the trip pin for cracks, it is recommended that
either the zyglow or dye check method be used. The “U”
lock staples should also be examined for nicks or cracks.
The overspeed trip pin assembly can be checked by
monitoring the frequency of overspeed trips. Check the
assembly at least every 30 overspeed trips and at 2-year
intervals.
1. Remove the steam bearing housing cap as outlined in “Bearing Liners Disassembly”
section.
2. Remove the “U” lock staple (3, Figure 4-8), surrounding the adjusting nut (4), by
prying it out of the trip body.
3 Remove the adjusting nut, trip spring (2) and washers (5), if provided.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
430 / 633 4-23
724-527-2811
Chapter 4
Maintenance
NOTE
Record the number of turns required to remove the
adjusting nut (4) so it can be returned to its original setting
during assembly.
4. Rotate the rotor shaft 180° and remove the “U” lock staple surrounding the weighted
end of the trip pin (1).
5. Remove the trip pin from the trip body. (Remove the auxiliary weight [6], if furnished.)
Trip Body Removal
1. Remove the rotor assembly from the turbine casing.
2. Remove the set screw from the trip body (52, Figure 4-12).
3. Heat the trip body evenly with a torch. Apply heat as rapidly as possible, and then
pull the trip body from the rotor shaft.
CAUTION
Care must be exercised to prevent heating the rotor
locating bearing and the rotor shaft when heating the
trip body. Protect both by wrapping in insulated cloth.
Plunger Assembly Replacement

The plunger assembly (7, Figure 4-8) can be removed by lifting it out of the bearing
housing while the rotor assembly is out of the turbine casing. (Except turbines equipped
with bearing housings having a flanged governor fit such as PG, UG and O Governors).
Turbines equipped with a flanged governor mount employ an “Umbrella” plunger. A
retainer ring, washer and spring arrangement must be removed from the bottom of the
“Umbrella” plunger before lifting it from the bearing housing. (See Chapter 6 for applicable
details for “Umbrella” plunger removal.)
If necessary, worn plunger assemblies can be replaced without removing the rotor
assembly. To remove the plunger assembly:
1. Remove the steam bearing housing cap.
2. Remove the governor and adapter piece from the steam bearing housing.
3. Loosen the jam nut (10) and remove set screw (11) from the side of the bearing
housing.
4. Remove the set screw from the plunger assembly and separate the two halves of the
plunger to remove them from the bearing housing.
5. Assemble in reverse order.
NOTE
When replacing the plunger assembly in this manner, both
parts of the new plunger assembly must be installed.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 04-24
724-527-2811
431 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Trip Body Replacement
1. Heat the trip body in hot oil or an oven. Do not exceed 500°F (260°C).
NOTE
It may be helpful to chill the turbine shaft end before
installing the trip body.
2. Place the heated trip body on the rotor shaft and align the set screw hole in the trip
body with the dimple in the shaft.
3. Tighten the set screw to ensure proper positioning on the shaft, and then back the
set screw out of the body 1 or 2 turns.
4. Tighten the set screw when the trip body has cooled to ambient temperature.
5. Check the trip body runout. Runout should not exceed .003 inch (0.07 mm).
6. Correct the trip body runout, if necessary, then peen metal over the set screw to
lock set screw.
7. Check that the plunger assembly (7) is properly positioned in the bearing housing,
and return the rotor to the turbine casing.
Assembly, Overspeed Trip Mechanism
1. If furnished, place the auxiliary weight (6, Figure 4-8) on the trip pin (1).
NOTE
The auxiliary weight is typically used for trip speeds from
2400 to 3100 rpm. Check the “Turbine Operating Data”
page of this manual for design trip speed of this turbine.
2. Insert trip pin (1) into the trip body. Position the weighted end of the pin on the
opposite side of the trip body set screw.
3. Press the “U” lock staple (3) into the trip body to secure the weighted end of the
trip pin. Be sure the staple is fully seated in the circular groove in the trip body.
Install lock wire (18 gauge) and secure as shown in Figure 4-8.
4. Place the trip spring (2) in the trip body. (Install washers [5], if furnished.)
5. Return the adjusting nut (4) to its original setting by tightening the nut the same
number of turns recorded during disassembly.
6. Press the “U” lock staple (3) into the trip body to lock the adjusting nut (4). Be sure
the staple is fully seated in the circular groove in the trip body.
7. Using a suitable blunt end tool, press on the nut end of the trip pin and verify the
trip pin slides in the circular groove in the trip body.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
432 / 633 4-25
724-527-2811
Chapter 4
Maintenance
-WARNING-
OVERSPEED TRIP SYSTEM MALFUNCTION CAN
RESULT IN INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND/OR
EXTENSIVE TURBINE DAMAGE. FOR THIS REASON,
THE TRIP SYSTEM MUST BE TESTED TO ENSURE ITS
OPERATIONAL RELIABILITY AFTER PERFORMING
MAINTENANCE OR MAKING ADJUSTMENT TO IT.
Adjusting The Trip Pin And Plunger Clearance – Refer to Figure 4-7
1. Remove the inspection plug (12, Figure 4-8) from the steam bearing housing.
2. Rotate the rotor shaft, by hand, until the adjusting nut (4) can be observed through
the inspection hole. This will position the weighted end of the trip pin (1) directly
above the plunger assembly (7).
3. Latch the resetting lever and loosen the jam nut (9) on the trip lever jack screw (8).
4. Push the plunger assembly (7) upward and into the bearing housing until it is in solid
contact with the trip pin.
5. Adjust the jack screw to obtain ¹⁄16 inch (1.6 mm) clearance between the base of the
plunger (7) and the jack screw (8).
6. Tighten the jam nut (9) and recheck the clearance.
CAUTION
The jam nut (9) must be locked, at all times, to prevent
the jack screw from vibrating loose during operation.
A loose jack screw can render the trip system
inoperative.
Adjusting The Turbine Trip Speed
1. Remove the inspection plug (12, Figure 4-8) from the steam bearing housing.
2. Rotate the rotor shaft, by hand, until the adjusting nut (4) can be viewed through the
inspection hole.
3. Latch the resetting lever (11, Figure 4-13).
4. Place a non-ferrous drift pin on the adjusting nut and strike the drift pin sharply to
ensure that the trip pin (1), trip valve and trip linkage function properly.
5. Latch the resetting lever and start the turbine. Closely monitor the turbine speed
during operation.
6. Gradually overspeed the turbine by overcoming the governor (Refer to “Control

System-Governor”, Chapter 6).
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 04-26
724-527-2811
433 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Caution
Do not allow turbine to exceed 2% above the rated
(nameplate) trip speed.
7. If the overspeed trip does not function within 2% of the rated trip speed, manually trip
the turbine by striking the top of the hand trip lever. Then close the steam inlet shut-
off valve.
KNIFE CLOSING RESETTING
HAND TRIP
EDGE SPRING(S) LEVER
LEVER
12 SHOULDER LATCH
STUD
TRIP
VALVE
ASSEMBLY
1/16”
(1.58mm)
11
10
STEAM
7
9 INLET
8
3
4 ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
5
TRIP BODY
4-8-1 TRIP PIN 1
4-8-2 TRIP SPING 1
2 4-8-3 “U” LOCK STAPLE 2
4-8-4 ADJUSTING NUT 1
1 4-8-5 WASHER *
4-8-6 AUXILIARY WEIGHT 1*
4-8-7 PLUNGER ASSEMBLY 1
6 4-8-8 JACK SCREW 1
3 4-8-9 JAM NUT 1
4-8-10 JAM NUT 1
4-8-11 SET SCREW 1
4-8-12 INSPECTION PLUG 1
*INDICATES PART NOT USED ON ALL TURBINES

OR VARIABLE QUANTITIES.
FIGURE 4-8
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
434 / 633 4-27
724-527-2811
Chapter 4
Maintenance
8. When the rotor shaft stops rotating, turn the shaft, by hand, until the adjusting nut is
visible through the bearing cap inspection hole.
9. Partially pry the “U” lock staple away from the trip body until the adjusting nut is free
to turn.
10. Turn the adjusting nut to change the trip speed. Turning the nut counterclockwise will
decrease the trip speed. Turning the nut clockwise will increase the trip speed.
11. Push the “U” lock staple into the trip body, and check that the trip pin (1) moves
freely. (Be sure staple is firmly seated.)
12. Start the turbine and check the trip speed. Continue to make trip adjustments until
the turbine trips at the rated (nameplate) trip speed. Final trip speed must be verified
three (3) times to ensure consistent readings.
Disassembly, Trip Valve – Refer to Figure 4-13
-WARNING-
CLOSE ALL ISOLATED VALVES AND OPEN DRAINS
TO DEPRESSURIZE TURBINE CASING AND STEAM
THE TRIP VALVE, GOVERNOR VALVES OR
LINKAGES.
1. Place the trip valve in the tripped position and disconnect the closing spring (14,
Figure 4-13) from the resetting lever (11).
2. Remove the cap screws (4) from the valve cover (3) and lift the trip valve assembly
(17) and cover from the steam chest body (1).
3. Loosen the jam nut (15), unscrew the valve stem from the connection block (8) and
remove the valve from the cover.
Guide Bushing Replacement
1. Disassemble the trip valve as described above in “Disassembly, Trip Valve” section.
2. Use a small grinder to remove upset metal.
3. Drive the bushings (16, Figure 4-13) out of the valve cover (3) with a non-ferrous drift
pin.
4. Clean and de-burr the valve cover.
5. Press new bushings into the valve cover and lock them in place by peening metal
over bushing.
6. Assemble the valve as outlined in the “Trip Valve Assembly” section.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 04-28
724-527-2811
435 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Assembly, Trip Valve – Refer to Figure 4-13
1. Clean the sealing surfaces on the valve cover flange and the steam chest body.
2. Insert the trip valve assembly into the guide bushings (16, Figure 4-13) and through
the valve cover.
3. Replace jam nut (15) and turn the valve stem into the connection block (8).
4. Apply a combination of paste and ¹⁄16" (1.59 mm) diameter plastic string sealants to
the sealing surfaces of the steam chest flange.
5. Return the valve assembly and cover to the steam chest body and tighten the cap
screws (4).
6. Backseat the trip valve according to Chapter 4 “Backseating the Trip Valve” section,
and connect the closing spring (14) to the resetting lever (11).
Backseating The Trip Valve – Refer to Figure 4-13
1. Disconnect closing spring (14, Figure 4-13) from resetting lever (11).
2. Loosen jam nut (15) and turn the valve stem out of the connection block (8).
3. Latch the resetting lever and slowly turn the valve stem into the connection block (8)
until the stem backseats against the lower guide bushing (16).
4. Compress the Belleville washers (10) by turning the valve stem into the connection
block until 0.040 inch (1 mm) feeler gauges can be inserted between the bottom of
pin (7) and connection block (8). (See Detail “A” on Figure 4-13.)
5. Tighten jam nut (15) and recheck the clearances.
6. Unlatch the resetting lever and connect the closing spring (14).
Trip System Linkage – Refer to Figure 4-13
1. Frequently inspect the trip system linkage for cleanliness and freedom of movement.
2. Replace pins (6 & 7, Figure 4-13) connection block (8), Belleville washers (10) or
shoulder screw (33) if the linkage develops excessive play.
3. Lubricate the linkage pins and shoulder screw with a high temperature water resistant
silicone grease.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
436 / 633 4-29
724-527-2811
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Trip System Clearances – Refer to Figure 4-13
1. With the resetting lever latched (11, Figure 4-13), maintain ⁄16 inch (1.6 mm)
1
clearance between the weighted end of the trip pin (1, Figure 4-8) and plunger
assembly (7, Figure 4-8).
2. The diametral clearance between the valve cover bushings (16, Figure 4-13) and the
trip valve stem should be 0.008 to 0.010 inch (0.20 to 0.25 mm).
3. To ensure positive backseating, adjust the trip valve to provide 0.04 inch (1 mm)
clearance between pin (7, Figure 4-13) and the connection block (8) with the resetting
lever (11) latched. (See Detail “A”, Figure 4-13.)
4. The resetting lever knife edge (12, Figure 4-13) and latch (31) must overlap
approximately 1⁄8 inch (3 mm) when the resetting lever (11) is latched.
NOTE
Latch knife edge (31, Figure 4-13) can be rotated in 90°
increments to provide a new mating surface for the
resetting lever knife edge (12). The knife edge is not
adjustable and must be replaced when worn.
GOVERNOR VALVE – Refer to Figure 4-13
-WARNING-
CLOSE ALL ISOLATING VALVES AND OPEN DRAINS
THE GOVERNOR VALVE OR ITS LINKAGE.
The governor valve (18, Figure 4-13), located in the steam chest body (1), regulates the
steam flow through the turbine. The valve is positioned through mechanical linkage by the
speed governor.
1. Remove the linkage connecting the governor valve to the governor.
2. Remove bolts (26, Figure 4-13) from the valve cover (21, 35) and pull the cover and
valve (18) away from the steam chest body (1).
3. Remove the valve stem connection (36) and jam nut (37) from the valve stem (20)
and remove the stem from the cover assembly.
4. The valve seat (27) is a shrink fit in the steam chest. The governor valve seat is
secured by three pins that are pressed into the governor valve cover. Check to
ensure these pins are removed with the cover.
5. Chill the valve seat (27), by packing with dry ice (CO2), and pull the seat from the
steam chest with a puller.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 04-30
724-527-2811
437 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
Chapter 4
Maintenance
CAUTION
Do not use other cryogenic material such as liquid
nitrogen to shrink the valve seat.
6. Remove the valve seat bushing (28, Figure 4-13) by driving it from the valve seat with
a non-ferrous rod. Replace the bushing by pressing it into the valve seat. Stake the
valve seat to lock the bushing in place.
Clearances – Refer to Figure 4-13
1. The governor valve must move freely at all times. A smooth sliding fit is necessary
between the valve stem (20, Figure 4-13) and the packing (23, 34), and between the
stem and guide bushings (22, 28).
2. The governor lever and linkage should also be smooth sliding fits. The governor
valve travel should be set in accordance with the value shown on the Turbine
Operating Data page. The governor valve has a maximum travel of ⁄16 inch (11 mm).
7
Adjustments – Refer to Figure 4-13
1. With the governor valve and linkage fully assembled:
a. Turn the valve stem (20, Figure 4-13) from the connection (36) until the valve
is fully seated.
b. Adjust the jam nut (37) so the distance between the jam nut and connection
(36) is equal to the valve travel dimension shown on the Turbine Operating
Data page.
c. Screw the valve stem into the connection until the jam nut contacts the face
of the connection.
d. Lock the jam nut by tightening it against the connection.
2. Replace the governor linkage pins and bushings if the linkage becomes loose fitting
or if excessive play is evident.
3. Inspect the governor valve stem (20) and guide bushings (22, 28) for wear and
replace as necessary.
4. Remove the packing follower (25) and replace the valve stem packing (23, 34) if
excessive steam leakage is evident. (See “Details A & B”, Figure 4-10.)
NOTE
Do not over-tighten the packing follower (25). The
governor valve stem can bind in the valve cover, resulting
in erratic speed control.
5. Lubricate the governor linkage pins with high temperature, water resistant silicone
grease.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
438 / 633 4-31
724-527-2811
Maintenance
Chapter 4
724-527-2811
4-32
GOVERNOR VALVE PACKING ARRANGEMENT
GOVERNOR VALVE GOVERNOR

COVER VALVE COVER
PACKING
RINGS (8)
PACKING GLAND PACKING
GOVERNOR FOLLOWER GOVERNOR VALVE GLAND
VALVE STEM
STEM FOLLOWER
FIGURE 4-10
GUIDE GUIDE
PACKING RINGS (7) LANTERN
BUSHING BUSHING RING
LEAKOFF
CONNECTION
DETAIL “A” DETAIL “B”
Detail “A” shows Governor valve cover Detail “B” shows Governor valve cover
and packing arrangement usually used and packing arrangement for inlet steam
for inlet steam conditions below 250 psig conditions above 250 psig (17.2). The
(17.2 bar), the packing arrangement packing arrangement consists of 7
consists of 7 packing rings packing rings, a lantern ring, followed by
1 packing ring.
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
 ELLIOTT CO., INC (Y R)
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
2 0
0
439 / 633
Chapter 4
Maintenance
1. Chill the valve seat (27) with dry ice (CO2) and press it into the steam chest body (1).
CAUTION
Do not use other cryogenic material such as liquid
nitrogen to shrink the valve seat.
NOTE
During installation of the governor valve seat, position the
valve seat to ensure steam flow is directed between the
governor valve seat ribs and not directed at a rib section.
2. When installing a replacement governor valve seat or steam chest cover, three pins
located in the governor valve cover will maintain the position of the governor valve
seat. There must be 0.020 to 0.060 inch (0.508 to 1.524 mm) clearance between the
pins and governor valve seat.
3. This clearance can be checked by positioning lead wire over the end of the pin and
bolting the governor valve cover onto the steam chest. Remove the cover and
measure the thickness of the wire, that should be 0.020” to 0.060” (0.508 to 1.524
mm). Grind the ends of the pins to achieve this clearance.
4. Place the governor valve stem (20) in the valve cover (21, 35).
5. Replace connection (36) and jam nut (37) on the valve stem (20, Figure 4-13).
6. Clean the joint between the valve cover (21, 35) and the steam chest body (1).
Apply a combination of paste and plastic string sealing compounds on the sealing
surfaces.
7. Replace the cover and tighten bolts (26).
8. Connect the governor valve linkage and adjust the valve travel.
OVERLOAD HAND VALVE – Refer to Figure 4-11
-WARNING-
CLOSE ALL ISOLATING VALVES AND OPEN DRAINS
THE HAND VALVE ASSEMBLIES.
Disassembly
The hand valve assembly is threaded into the bottom half steam end turbine casing. Turn
the valve body counterclockwise to remove it from the turbine casing.
Adjustments
1. Keep the valve stem packing (5, Figure 4-11) tight by adjusting the packing follower
(4).
2. Replace the packing when follower adjustment no longer prevents steam leakage
along the valve stem.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012 440 / 633 4-33
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Assembly
1. Coat the gasket (6, Figure 4-11) with sealing compound and place the gasket on the
valve body.
2. Coat the valve body threads with an anti-galling compound.
3. Turn the valve body into the turbine casing and tighten.
EXHAUST STATIONARY REVERSING

CONNECTION BLADE ASSEMBLY BUCKETS
SECOND
ROW OF
ROTOR
BUCKETS
FIRST ROW OF
ROTOR BLADES
NOZZLE
RING
VALVE
STEAM
RING
13 STEAM FROM
1 GOVERNOR
VALVE
4
12 2
10,11 3
ITEM DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
4-11-1 HAND VALVE ASSEMBLY 1

4-11-2 FOLLOWER 1
4-11-3 STEM & VALVE 1
4-11-4 PACKING 1 SET
4-11-10 CAP SCREW 1
4-11-11 LOCKWASHER 4
4-11-12 COVER 4
4-11-13 GASKET 1

FIGURE 4-11
OVERLOAD HAND NOZZLE VALVE ASSEMBLY
D R A
IN6-APR- 4-34
0
2 0 16
441 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
724-527-2811 http://www.elliott-turbo.com/
Chapter 4
Maintenance
PARTS LIST
(Refer to Figure 4-12)
FIGURE ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
1 Casing, Steam End 1

2 Casing, Exhaust End 1
3 Casing Cover 1
4 Machine Bolt (Cover) 20
5 Taper Dowel/Nut (Cover) 4
6 Cap Screw (Special) 13
7 Stud (Left Hand Exhaust) 4
8 Nut (Left Hand Exhaust) 4
9 CARBON RING ASSEMBLY 8
10 SPACER RING 8
11 SPACER RING (Studded) 2
12 Pedestal And Cap 1
13 Machine Bolt 10
14 Taper Dowel/Nut 4
152 BEARING LINER, BOTTOM 2
161 BEARING LINER, TOP 2
17 Combining Stud 2
18 Pin 2
193 Gasket 2
20 Machine Bolt 12
21 Bearing Housing/Cap 1
223 Oiler 2
24 Spacer 8
25 Dowel 4
263 Cooling Tube Assembly 2
273 Flange, (Exhaust End) 2
28 Pipe Plug 6
29 Support 1
30 Machine Bolt 2
31 Lock washer 2
32 Nut 2
33 NOZZLE RING 1
35 Lockwasher 25
37 BLADE HOLDER (Reversing blade Assembly) *
38 CAP SCREW (Special) *
39 LOCKWASHER *
40 Spacer *
41 Stud 6
42 Nut 8
43 Rotor Shaft 1
44 1st Disk Assembly 1
45 2nd Disk Assembly 1
46 Key 2
47 SLEEVE SEAL 3
48 SET SCREW 6
494 OIL RING 2
50 ROTOR LOCATING BEARING 1
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012 442 / 633 4-35
Chapter 4
Maintenance
PARTS LIST - Continued

51 RETAINING RING 1
52 Trip Body 1
533 Bearing Housing W/Water Cooled Cap 1
543 Bearing Pedestal W/Water Cooled Cap 1
553 ¾" Pipe Plug, Bearing Housing (Not Shown) 4
563 Flange (Steam End) 1
573 Gasket 2
583 Cover 2
593 Bolt 12
60 Eye Bolt 1
61 SENTINEL VALVE 1
Notes
1
Top liners used with Class 1 & 2 rotors are not interchangeable with top liners
used with Class 3 rotors. (Rotor class designation is on the Turbine Operating
Data page found in the Equipment Data Section of this manual.)
2
Bottom bearing liners used for oil ring lubrication are not interchangeable with
liners used for pressure lubrication.
3
Not used on pressure lubricated turbines. Blank flange used in place of Items
27 and 56. Standpipe used in place of Item 55 when pressure lubricated
turbine is equipped with Class 1 or 2 rotor. (Rotor class designation is on the
Turbine Operating Data page found in the Equipment Data Section of this
manual.)
4
Not furnished with turbines equipped with Class 3 and higher rotors. (Rotor
class designation is on the Turbine Operating Data page found in the
Equipment Data Section of this manual.)
* Indicates variable quantity.
Items listed in BOLD CAPITAL LETTERS are found on the Spare Parts List located in
Chapter 9, Sales/Service/Parts.
D R A
IN6-APR- 4-36
0
2 0 16
443 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
Chapter 4
Maintenance
FIGURE 4-13
SEE

FIGURE 4-12
TYPICAL YR TURBINE
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012 444 / 633 4-37
Chapter 4
Maintenance
PARTS LIST
1 Steam Chest Body 1

2 STEAM STRAINER 1
3 Trip Valve Cover 1
4 Cap Screw 6
5 RETAINING RING 4
6 PIN 1
7 PIN 1
8 CONNECTION BLOCK 1
9 REST BUTTON 1
10 WASHER (Belleville Spring) 6
11 Resetting Lever 1
12 KNIFE EDGE, TRIP LEVER 1
13 Machine Screw 2
14 SPRING, RESETTING LEVER 1
15 Jam Nut 1
16 BUSHING, TRIP VALVE 2
17 TRIP VALVE ASSEMBLY 1
18 GOVERNOR VALVE 1
19 PIN 1
20 GOVERNOR VALVE STEM 1
21 Governor Valve Cover (High Pressure) *1
22 Bushing 1
23 PACKING (High Pressure) *1 set
24 Lantern Ring *1
25 FOLLOWER 1
26 Machine Bolt 6
27 VALVE SEAT Valve Seat 1
28 BUSHING, VALVE SEAT (not shown) 1
29 Pins (not shown) 3
30 Hand Trip Lever 1
31 KNIFE EDGE (Latch) 1
32 SPRING, TRIP LATCH 1
33 Shoulder Screw 1
34 PACKING (Low Pressure) *1 set
35 Governor Valve Cover (Low Pressure) *1
36 CONNECTION (T Governor) *1
37 Jam Nut 1
38 Stud 8
39 Nut 8
40 Washer 2
* Indicates that the part is not used on all turbines or variable quantities of part.
Items that are listed in BOLD CAPITAL LETTERS are found on the Spare Parts
List located in Chapter 9, Sales/Service/Parts.
D R A
IN6-APR- 4-38
0
2 0 16
445 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
Chapter 4
Maintenance
SEE DETAIL ‘A’
DETAIL ‘A’
FIGURE 4-13
STEAM CHEST ASSEMBLY
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012 446 / 633 4-39
Chapter 4
Maintenance
C B D
F
E
J
J G
H
M N
M
*Note 1: See Turbine Operating Data page for rotor class designation
**Note 2: Typical 3 places. Two in the exhaust end bearing housing and one in the steam
end bearing housing.
INCHES MILLIMETERS
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.
** A Radial Clearance, Shaft Sleeve Seals .010 .0145 0.25 0.37
B Carbon Ring Inside Diameters SEE TABLE 4-2 SEE TABLE 4-2
C Shaft Diameter 2.2500 2.2505 57.15 57.16
D Spacer Ring Inside Diameter 2.375 60.33
* E Diametral Clearance Class 1 & 2 Rotors .006 .009 0.15 0.23
* E Class 3 Rotor .0035 .0055 0.09 0.14
* F Shaft Diameter Class 1 & 2 Rotors 1.9320 1.9325 49.07 49.08
* F Class 3 Rotor 1.9350 1.9355 49.15 49.16
G Trip Pin / Plunger Clearance .062 1.59
H Axial Dimension 9.434 9.440 239.62 239.77
J Axial Clearance .054 .064 1.37 1.62
K Axial Clearance .042 .072 1.07 1.83
L Axial Clearance .930 .950 23.62 24.13
M Axial Clearance .068 .098 0.72 2.49
N Axial Clearance .030 .040 0.76 1.01
NOTE
All clearances are taken with rotor thrust downstream as in
normal operation position.
FIGURE 4-14
COLD CLEARANCE DIAGRAM FOR AYR TURBINES
D R A
IN6-APR- 4-40
0
2 0 16
447 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
Chapter 4
Maintenance
TIGHTENING BOLTS
Bolts used for pressure and rotating parts shall be tightened to the following torque values.
TABLE 4-4
BOLTING TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD SPLITLINE
FASTENER FT. LBS FASTENER FT. LBS
DIAMETER TORQUE DIAMETER TORQUE
¼" - 20 5 5
⁄8" - 11 85
5
⁄16" - 18 10 ¾" - 10 205
³⁄8" - 16 17 ⁄8" - 9 330
7
7
⁄16" - 14 25 1" - 8 495
½" - 13 40
5
⁄8" - 11 85
¾" - 10 205
7
⁄8" - 9 330
1" - 8 495
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
100qa.chap04.11/8/2012 448 / 633 4-41
Chapter 4
Maintenance
NOTES
D R A
IN6-APR- 4-42
0
2 0 16
449 / 633 100qa.chap04.11/8/2012
CHAPTER FIVE
LUBRICATION
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the basic oil requirements, care of lubricating oils, and the methods
of lubricating YR Turbines.
Proper lubrication is a primary factor in achieving maximum trouble-free operation. Only

the best grades of oil should be used for turbine lubrication. Using the best oils will help
eliminate costly downtime due to bearing failures and other lubrication related problems.
BASIC OIL REQUIREMENTS
Elliott Company does not recommend specific brands of oil. Elliott equipment owners
should consult reliable oil suppliers regarding their lubrication requirements. The oil
should be a premium quality mineral-based lubricant (PolyAlphaOlefin (PAO)-based when
using synthetic oils) that will readily separate from water and have minimum tendency to
emulsify or foam when agitated. It should have high rust and oxidation resistance and
minimum sludge, lacquer, varnish or resin forming tendencies. In addition to these
requirements, Tables 5-2 and 5-3 contain other necessary information to aid in selecting
the proper lubricating oil for your turbine.
Turbines driving through speed reduction or increasing gears are often pressure lubricated
by the gear lubrication system. (Refer to the gear manufacturer’s instructions and
nameplate for gear oil requirements.) (Consult Elliott Company before deviating from the
values shown on Table 5-2.)
CAUTION
Turbines designed for PAO-based synthetic oil must
not use mineral based oils. Use of oil other than a
PAO-based synthetic oil may result in severe damage
to the bearing cases, bearings and rotor. (Refer to the
data sheet in the “Equipment Data” section of this
manual to determine which type of oil is used on the
unit.)
CARE OF OIL
Lubricating oil should be maintained in first class condition by preventing contamination

from moisture, dust, dirt or other impurities. An oil maintenance analysis program is
recommended for determining the frequency of oil changes. Consult your oil supplier for
assistance in establishing a program that will meet your specific lubrication maintenance
requirements.
100q.chap5.8/26/2013 5-1
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 450 / 633
Chapter 5
Lubrication
METHODS OF LUBRICATION
The turbines are furnished with either a ring oiled lubrication system or a pressure
lubrication system.
Pressure lubricated turbines equipped with a Class 1 or Class 2 rotor (rotor class
designated on Turbine Data page) are also furnished with oil rings. The oil rings provide
bearing lubrication during turbine start-up and shut-down. This arrangement employs a
standpipe installed in the bearing housing oil drain connection to maintain the proper oil
level for a ring oiled operation.
Turbines equipped with Class 3 or higher rotors are pressure lubricated and use an
auxiliary oil pump for bearing lubrication during turbine start-up and shut-down.
Standpipes and oil rings are not used with this arrangement.
Turbines equipped with a Class 2 or lower rotor and having an exhaust temperature
greater than 400°F (204°C) are designed for PAO-based lubrication if using a ring oiled
lubrication system.
RING OILED LUBRICATION – Refer to Figure 5-1

Standard YR Turbines are ring oil lubricated. The ring oiled lubrication system is a simple
system that employs one (AYR, BYR) or two oil rings to deliver oil to each of the turbine
bearings. The rings, approximately twice the diameter of the shaft journals, are rotated by
the journals and carry oil from the bearing housing reservoirs to the top half bearing liners.
Rotating journals carry the oil to the clearance between the bearing liners and the shaft
journals. Oil drains from the ends of each bearing liner and returns to the bearing housing
reservoirs to be cooled and recycled. Oil discharged from the steam end journal bearing
floods the rotor locating bearing before draining into the bearing housing reservoir. Table
5-4 gives the recommended trip and alarm settings for monitoring bearing and oil
temperatures.
A cooling water tube arrangement, as shown in Figure 5-1, is used to cool the oil in the
bearing housing reservoirs of ring oiled lubricated turbines.
Ring oiled lubrication systems have no means of filtering solids from the oil; therefore,
frequent oil changes are necessary to ensure a clean oil supply to the bearings.
Shielded glass oilers (Figure 5-2), installed on the sides of the bearing housings, maintain
a constant reservoir oil level when the turbine is ring oiled lubricated. Oil must be visible in
the oiler bottles at all times during operation. Empty bottles indicate possible low reservoir
oil levels. Care must also be taken to avoid overfilling the bearing housing reservoirs.
High oil levels will restrict oil ring rotation that may cause inadequate bearing lubrication.
5-2 100q.chap5.8/26/2013
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 451 / 633
Chapter 5
Lubrication
INSPECTION PLUG
ROTOR SHAFT
OIL RING
JOURNAL
BEARING
OILER
OIL
RESERVOIR
COOLING
WATER
COOLING
CHAMBER
LUBRICATING OIL
COOLING WATER
FIGURE 5-1
RING OILED LUBRICATION
BOTTLE SHIELD
KNURLED
THUMB SCREW
“A” See Table 5-1

OIL LEVEL
LOWER
RESERVOIR
LEVEL 1/8 in. WASHER

ADJUSTER (3.2 mm)
USED WITH THE CYR, DYR,
PLUG CROSS ARMS DYRM, BYRH, BYRHH

FIGURE 5-2
GLASS OILER
100q.chap5.8/26/2013 5-3
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 452 / 633
Chapter 5
Lubrication
TABLE 5-1
OIL LEVEL RANGE, CAPACITIES and FIGURE 5-2 ‘A’ DIMENSION
Quantity of Oil
Oil Level Range
Ring Oiled System Figure 5-2
YR Frame Size Dimension below
Pints (Liters) per “A” Dimension
unit centerline
bearing case
2.62" (66.5mm) to
AYR * 1 (0.5) .50" (12.7mm)
2.74" (69.5mm)
2.62" (66.5mm) to
BYR 1 (0.5) .94" (23.9mm)
2.74" (69.5mm)
CYR, DYR, DYRM, 3.55" (90mm) to .94" (23.9mm)
3 (1.3)
BYRH, BYRHH 3.68" (93mm) with ¹⁄8" washer
* AYR Re-Design Turbine Unit is easily recognized by “dog-legged” oiler lines (units manufactured after 1968). Units
manufactured prior to 1968, “A” dimension = .94" (23.9mm).
Verify oilers are set properly. To ensure the oil level is correct, turn the level adjuster
cross arms to the height indicated in Table 5-1 (“A” dimension on Figure 5-2). Lock the
cross arms in place by tightening the upper cross arm. Ensure ¹⁄8" washer is present in
the level adjuster assembly as shown in Figure 5-2 for the CYR, DYR, DYRM, BYRH and
BYRHH frames.
To Change Oil in Bearing Housing Reservoir:
1. Remove ¼-inch drain plug from bottom of bearing housing reservoir. Flush oil sump
with high quality solvent and wipe clean with lint free rags.
NOTE
Mechanical cleaning of the bearing housing sumps is not
recommended. Contact Elliott Service Office for
recommendations and cautions.
2. Replace plug after draining bearing housing.
3. Remove oiler bottle from lower reservoir (Figure 5-2).
4. (Refer to Table 5-1 for correct quantity of oil.) Fill bearing housing reservoir by
pouring oil into the lower bearing housing reservoir, until the oil level reaches the
bottom of the level adjuster cross arms in the oiler.
5. Fill oiler bottle with oil and install in the lower reservoir.
NOTE
Ensure bottle is seated on level adjuster cross arms.
6. Tighten knurled thumbscrew to secure bottle in the lower reservoir.
5-4 100q.chap5.8/26/2013
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 453 / 633
Chapter 5
Lubrication
PRESSURE LUBRICATION
Details of pressure lubrication systems vary widely. Each system is designed to meet
the turbine application requirements. Factors such as the type of driven equipment,
operational and environmental conditions, and individual preferences in the selection of
various components, may affect the specific design of the system.
Pressure lubrication systems are generally similar in that each employs a pump to draw
oil from a reservoir and deliver it filtered and cooled under pressure to the bearings and
other parts requiring lubrication. The oil then drains by gravity flow back to the reservoir
to be re-circulated. Oil system drawings are located in Chapter 10, Technical Drawings,
and show specific details of the oil system supplied on this turbine.
In most cases, the oil supply piping contains an oil filter, oil cooler and a pressure control
device. Twin oil coolers and filters are sometimes used in the pressure lubrication
system. This arrangement allows the cooler or filter to be isolated for maintenance or
repairs without shutting down the system.
Various types of optional monitoring, control, and safety devices can be used with
pressure lubrication systems. Among these devices are pressure and temperature
indicators, pressure and temperature actuated switches, oil flow sight glasses, oil level
indicators, auxiliary pumps, alarms, and emergency shutdown devices. (Refer to the
Accessories Chapter 8 of this manual for applicable details of optional lubrication
equipment.)
Lubrication System Flushing
All units employing forced feed oiling systems should have the entire lubrication system
thoroughly flushed before operation. The importance of this step cannot be over-
emphasized. All dirt, rust, scale, weld slag or other contaminants that have been
introduced into the oil system during storage, transportation and/or fabrication at the job
site must be removed by a continuous flushing operation or, in extreme cases, by
pickling, neutralizing and spraying with a rust-preventative oil.
Oil piping supplied by Elliott Company is cleaned and coated (fogged) with oil to protect
against rust formation. The open ends are plugged before shipment. Piping not
supplied by Elliott Company must also be cleaned before it is connected into the system.
Flushing should begin as soon as the system is assembled and a lubricating oil pump
can be operated. The turbine liner bearings must be removed to allow the oil to flush the
bearing case oil galleries. The flushing should continue until inspection of the filters
indicates that all contaminants have been removed. If an auxiliary oil pump is not
supplied, a temporary pump will be needed to allow flushing the system before the main
oil pump is started.
If the system remains idle for a period of time, it should be flushed before operation. An
alternate method is to circulate oil through the system at regular intervals during the idle
period and to flush the system clean just before start-up.
If a continuously lubricated coupling is used, the oil supply tubing should be

disconnected during oil system flushing.
100q.chap5.8/26/2013 5-5
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 454 / 633
Chapter 5
Lubrication
Refer to the gear manufacturer’s instructions for specifics. In general, it is

recommended that temporary bypass lines be installed to isolate gears during the
flushing operation. Gear cases, inspection covers, and plugs should be opened only
under the direct supervision of the gear manufacturer’s representative.
Install blanks at the connecting flanges to block off piping to the topworks on hydraulic
diaphragm actuators, pressure-reducing valves, backpressure regulators, and similar
control devices.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove blank-offs and to replace any piping or
tubing sections removed before placing the system into
operation.
After satisfactory system cleanliness is obtained:
1. Remove all temporary strainers, pads and back-up screens from the system.
2. Remove all traces of flushing oil and contaminants deposited by the flushing
operation from the bearing housing, filters and system low points. Install new filter
elements.
3. Remove the oil reservoir cover and clean the reservoir using lint-free wiping cloths.
Replace cover and immediately fill reservoir with clean oil.
4. Clean the bearing housings and journals.
5. Install all orifices in their proper locations, if used.
6. Replace the journal bearings. Apply an oil-resistant sealant to the bearing housing
joints.
7. Prime main and auxiliary oil pumps. Operate the auxiliary pump; bleed the system
of any air. Check for oil leaks at all fittings and connections. Repeat venting the
system when main oil pump is running.
8. After venting, check for leaks; set and check all pressure control valves, controls
and safety devices for proper operation before initial start-up. (Refer to Table 5-2,
and Oil Piping Drawing for settings.)
NOTE
All checks should be made with the oil system at normal
operating temperature.
5-6 100q.chap5.8/26/2013
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 455 / 633
Chapter 5
Lubrication
Normal Maintenance
1. Daily check oil reservoir level and add oil as required.
2. Monthly check filter pressure drop and replace elements when necessary.
(Check weekly if unit is installed in a harsh environment.)
3. Monthly check operation of auxiliary oil pump by operating pump and returning to
auxiliary duty.
4. Monthly check control valves for leaks at packing glands.
Turnaround Maintenance
1. Clean reservoir.
2. Check oil pumps according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
3. Check oil pump couplings for wear. If the couplings are in good condition, re-
lubricate; otherwise, replace.
4. Check oil pump drivers according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
5. Clean coolers.
6. Replace filter elements.
7. Check control valves according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
8. Prime main and auxiliary oil pumps. Operate the auxiliary pump; bleed the
lubrication system of any air. Check for oil leaks at all fittings and connections.
Repeat venting air when main oil pump is running.
9. After venting, check for leaks. With oil at normal operating temperature, set and
check all pressure control valves, controls and safety devices for proper operation
before start-up. For the setting, refer to both Table 5-4, and the Oil Piping Drawing
located in Chapter 10 Technical Drawings.
SELECTING LUBRICATING OILS
The following tables are to be used as guidelines in selecting lubricating oils for your YR
Turbine. These guidelines are not intended to restrict the oil supplier to a definite set of
numbers to which he must adhere. It is the intent to indicate the general service
requirements and leave the particular recommendations to the oil supplier.
100q.chap5.8/26/2013 5-7
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 456 / 633
Chapter 5
Lubrication
TABLE 5-2
GUIDELINES FOR SELECTING LUBRICATING OILS
Method of Lubrication Ring Oiled Lubrication Pressure Lubrication
A B
(See Note 1) (See Note 2)
MINERAL BASED OILS
284-352 135-164 135-352
Seconds (Approx. SUS at 100F)
63.2 – 78.8 28.8-35.2 28.8 – 78.8
(mm 2/s at 40C)
ISO Viscosity Grade 68 32 32/46/68
Viscosity Index Above 94 Above 94 Above 94
400F/ 400F/
Minimum Flash Point 400F/ 204C
(204C) (204C)
Pour Point Under -10F/-12C -6F/-21C -10F/-12C
PolyAlphaOlefin (PAO)-BASED SYNTHETIC OILS (See Note 3)
Test Method
300-340 ASTM D2161
65.4-74.3 ASTM D445
(mm 2/s at 40C)
55-65 ASTM D2161
8.8-11.5 ASTM D445
(mm 2/s at 99C)
ISO Viscosity Grade 68 --
Viscosity Index Above 120 ASTM D2270
Minimum Flash Point 450F (232C) ASTM D92
Pour Point Under -35F (-37C) ASTM D97
Refer to Turbine Operating Data Page located in the front of this manual to confirm the ISO viscosity grade of oil
used.
Notes
1. Column “A” (Table 5-2) provides the general guidelines for turbines lubricated by a turbine
shaft driven pump or by the driven machine.
2. Column “B” (Table 5-2) shows the acceptable general guidelines for turbines lubricated from
gear oil systems. Refer to the gear manufacturer’s instructions and nameplate for
gear oil requirements. Consult Elliott Company before deviating from the values shown, to
ensure gear oil requirements are compatible with the turbine.
3. The unit outline drawing and Turbine Operating Data Sheet will specify if synthetic, PAO-
based oil is to be used. Tags on each bearing case will also indicate if synthetic oil is
5-8 100q.chap5.8/26/2013
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 457 / 633
Chapter 5
Lubrication
required. While PAO-based synthetic oil is compatible with mineral oils it should not be
mixed with mineral oil as mixing will degrade the oxidation stability of the synthetic oil.
100q.chap5.8/26/2013 5-9
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 458 / 633
Chapter 5
Lubrication
TABLE 5-3
OPERATING LIMITS FOR TURBINES
Method of Lubrication Ring Oiled Lubrication Pressure Lubricated
MINERAL BASED OILS
130F 54C 130F 54C
Oil Reservoir
to to to to
Operating Temperature
190F 88C 160F 71C
Minimum Oil Temperature
70F 21C 70F 21C
Before Starting
140F 60C 130F 54C
Oil Temperature
to to to to
From Bearings
190F 88C 170F 77C
Nominal Cooling Water
90F 32C 90F 32C
Temperature
Maximum Cooling Water
100F 38C 100F 38C
Temperature
Refer to Turbine Data Sheet
Nominal Cooling Water Flow 2 gpm 7.5 lpm
Oil Temperature from

n/a n/a 120F 49C
Cooler (to Bearings)
Normal Bearing Oil Pressure, 7 psi 0.5 bar
Gage
n/a n/a to to
Some units may run 15 psi (1.03 bar) to 18
psi (1.24 bar), Refer to Turbine Data Sheet
9 psi 0.6 bar
PAO-BASED SYNTHETIC OILS (See Note 3)
Minimum Oil Temperature before
70F 21C n/a n/a
Starting
130F 54C
Oil Reservoir
to to n/a n/a
Operating Temperature
200F 93C
140F 60C
Oil Temperature from
to to n/a n/a
Bearings
210F 99C
Nominal Cooling Water
90F 32C n/a n/a
Temperature
Maximum Cooling Water
100F 38C n/a n/a
Temperature
Nominal Cooling Water Flow 2 gpm 7.5 lpm n/a n/a
n/a indicates: not applicable
5-10 100q.chap5.8/26/2013
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 459 / 633
Chapter 5
Lubrication
TABLE 5-4
BEARING TEMPERATURE LIMITS
Bearing Shell
RING OILED Oil Temperature
Temperature*
MINERAL BASED OILS
Maximum
190F 88C 225F 107C
Alarm Setting 200F 93C 240F 116C
Trip Setting 220F 104C 260F 127C
PAO-BASED SYNTHETIC OILS
Maximum
200F 93C 235F 113C
PRESSURE LUBRICATION Oil Temperature Bearing Shell
Temperature*
Maximum
170F 76C 225F 107C
*Temperature taken by contact type sensor on back of the bearing shell.
100q.chap5.8/26/2013 5-11
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 460 / 633
CHAPTER SIX
CONTROL SYSTEM – “T” GOVERNOR SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides lubrication, operation and maintenance instructions for the Elliott “T”
Governor System. The “T” Governor system employs a Woodward Mechanical Hydraulic
Speed Control Governor.
The governor is bolted to an adapter that is mounted on the steam end bearing housing.
The governor drive shaft is coupled to the trip body by a flexible coupling. The governor
valve lever, adjustable connecting rod, and terminal shaft lever connect the governor
rotary terminal (output) shaft to the governor valve.
LUBRICATION – Refer to Figure 6-1
The governor has a self-contained oil reservoir with a 1.75 quart (1.7 liter) capacity. A
breather, located on the top of the governor, vents the reservoir and also serves as a plug
for the oil filler hole. An oil level sight glass on the side of the governor indicates the
operating oil level. A reservoir drain plug is located in the governor end cover.
To replenish the oil supply, remove the breather and fill the governor until oil is visible in
the sight glass. Quality turbine oil having a viscosity of 150 SUS at 100°F (32mm²/s at
38°C) to 463 SUS at 100°F (100 mm²/s at 38°C) is recommended. Most SAE oils without
a tendency to foam are acceptable.
It is advisable to change the oil at regular intervals to ensure trouble-free operation and
long governor life.
BREATHER / FILL PLUG
ADAPTER
GOVERNOR SETSCREW
OIL LEVEL INDICATOR BEARING HOUSING
SPEED ADJUST ING
SCREW
TRIP BODY
ADJUST ABLE
CONNECT ING ROD
TERMINAL SHAFT
LEVER
FLEXIBLE COUPLING
DRAIN PLUG
ROTARY TERMINAL
(OUTPUT) SHAFT
GOVERNOR VALVE
LEVER
GOVERNOR VALVE
 ELLIOTT CO., INC. (YR)

FIGURE 6-1
GOVERNOR SYSTEM ARRANGEMENT
D R A
100q.chap06.11/17/2009 6-1
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
http://www.elliott-turbo.com/ 461 / 633 724-527-2811
Chapter 6
Control System – “T” Governor System
CAUTION
Operating the governor with dirty oil or with a low oil
level can cause the governor to malfunction and result
in damage to the turbine and/or governor.
OPERATION
Principle of Operation – Refer to Figure 6-2

The governor is coupled to the trip body and driven by the turbine shaft. The governor
uses mechanical force to sense the turbine speed and hydraulic force to correct the
speed. An internal oil pump generates the hydraulic pressure. The pump draws oil from
the governor reservoir and discharges it to a spring loaded accumulator, that stores high
pressure oil to help maintain the full work capacity of the governor. A relief valve built into
the accumulator maintains 150 psig (10 bar) operating oil pressure in the governor oil
passages.
Spring loaded flyweights sense the turbine speed. When the speed changes, centrifugal
force causes the flyweights to pivot either outward or inward. The flyweights actuate the
pilot valve plunger that opens or closes a control port in the pilot valve bushing. The
control port directs the control oil to or from the bottom side of the power piston.
The power piston is connected through linkage to the rotary terminal (output) shaft.
Control oil moves the power piston. The motion is transmitted mechanically through the
terminal shaft and connecting governor valve linkage to position the turbine governor
valve.
The “T” Governor is a droop governor. This indicates the turbine speed will decrease with
an increased load. The droop setting from the factory is 6%. This indicates that from no
load to full load the governor speed will droop by 6%. The Woodward Manual gives
directions for adjusting the droop value to increase speed stability.
D R A
6-2 100q.chap06.11/17/2009
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 724-527-2811
0 462 / 633
Chapter 6
PILOT VALVE BUSHING CONTROL

PORT
ACCUMULATING PILOT VALVE
PISTON PLUNGER
FLY
WEIGHTS
SPEEDER
SPRING SPEED ADJUSTAMENT
TERMINAL
SHAFTLEVER
COUPLING
ADJUSTABLE
CONNECTING ROD
PUMP
OIL INLET
TO RESERVOIR
ROTARY
TERMINAL
(OUTPUT)
SHAFT
GOVERNOR
POWER PISTON CASE
GOVERNOR
LEVER
FULCRUM
GOVERNOR VALVE
LEGEND
HIGH PRESSURE OIL
RESERVOIR OIL GOVERNOR

VALVE COVER
CONTROL OIL
FIGURE 6-2
T GOVERNOR SCHEMATIC
D R A
100q.chap06.11/17/2009 6-3
IN6-APR- 16
0
0 463 / 633
724-527-2811
Chapter 6
Initial Start-Up – Refer to Figure 6-3
1. Fill the governor with oil, and check for signs of leakage.
2. Check the governor linkage for ease of movement.
3. Check that the linkage jam nuts, set screws and shoulder screws are tight.
4. Turn the speed adjusting screw to minimum speed (counterclockwise).
5. Start the turbine in accordance with the initial start-up procedures, given in Chapter
3, and check the governor for oil leakage, vibration, and ease of linkage operation.
6. After the turbine is thoroughly warmed up and operating satisfactorily at minimum

speed; slowly increase speed, by turning the speed adjusting screw clockwise,
until the turbine is operating at rated speed.
7. Continue to monitor the overall governor operation for any abnormal conditions.
NOTE
Due to the design characteristics of the governor, the
operating temperature may often exceed 200°F (94°C).
Continuous operation at this temperature is acceptable
and does not exceed the design limits. The governor may
feel unusually hot to the touch, but this is not an indication
of overheating.
8. After the turbine has achieved rated speed, check the overspeed trip by turning the
speed adjusting screw full travel in the clockwise direction while closely monitoring
the turbine speed. If the rated trip speed cannot be obtained by turning the
adjusting screw, it will be necessary to overcome the governor by placing a bar
between the governor valve lever and the valve cover, and slowly prying the
governor valve open.
CAUTION
Pry the valve evenly and squarely from the valve body.
Uneven force on the valve stem can bend the stem and
cause binding. Also, monitor the turbine speed
closely. If the turbine does not trip within 2% of the
rated speed, strike the hand trip lever and adjust the
overspeed trip. (Refer to Chapter 4.)
Routine Start-Up
Start the turbine as outlined in “Routine Start-Up” procedures, Chapter 3. Monitor turbine
speed and turn the speed adjusting screw as required to bring the turbine to the desired
speed.
D R A
6-4 100q.chap06.11/17/2009
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 724-527-2811
0 464 / 633
Chapter 6
MAINTENANCE – Refer to Figure 6-3
Routine Maintenance
Because of the simplicity of the governor system, a minimum of maintenance is required.
The following checks should be made:
1. Check the governor oil level daily.
2. Frequently sample the governor oil. Change oil if the sample shows signs of
contamination.
3. Check the governor linkage for binding, excessive play and loose bolts, jam nuts or
set screws.
4. Keep the linkage clean and well lubricated with a high temperature, water resistant
silicone grease.
Governor Disassembly
Internal governor maintenance is not recommended. It is advisable to replace the
governor if defective. If the governor must be dismantled in the field, refer to Woodward
Bulletin in the Accessories Section. This bulletin lists all special tools and replacement
parts necessary for making repairs to the governor. Exchange or repair can be arranged
through your local Elliott office.
Governor Removal – Refer to Figure 6-3
1. Disconnect the adjustable connecting rod (15) from the terminal shaft lever (17) by
removing elastic stop nut (19) from shoulder screw (13).
2. Scribe line across terminal shaft and shaft lever to locate lever to shaft on
assembly. Loosen socket head cap screw (18) on the terminal shaft lever (17) and
slide the lever off the terminal shaft.
3. Remove the four cap screws (4) that secure the governor (2) to the adapter (1) and
remove governor from the adapter.
4. Loosen the coupling flange set screws and remove the flange and key (5) from the
governor driveshaft.
5. Remove the anti-rotation set screw (3).
6. Remove the steam end bearing cap as outlined in Chapter 4, and remove the
adapter (1) by lifting it out of the groove in the steam end bearing housing.
7. Remove the coupling sleeve from the trip body coupling flange.
8. Loosen the coupling flange set screws to remove the flange and key (5) from the
trip body.
D R A
100q.chap06.11/17/2009 6-5
IN6-APR- 16
0
0 465 / 633
724-527-2811
Chapter 6
Clearances – Refer to Coupling Detail, Figure 6-3
1. Maintain .080 inch to .090 inch (2.0 mm to 2.30 mm) gap between the trip body
and the coupling (6) flange.
2. Maintain .065 inch to .075 inch (1.70 mm to 1.90 mm) gap between the coupling
(6) flange and the ball head adapter.
3. The coupling sleeve (6) must have .030 to .060 inch (0.75 to 1.50 mm) axial
clearance. (.5 inch [12.7 mm] gap between the coupling flanges will provide this
clearance.)
Governor Installation
1. Place the key (5, Figure 6-3) and coupling flange on the trip body.
NOTE
Coupling adjustments are made by loosening the flange
set screws and positioning the flanges to provide the
proper clearances. Tighten the set screws to lock the
coupling flanges in place. Keep coupling parts clean and
oil free at all times.
2. Position the flange to provide the proper clearances between the trip body and
coupling flange. Tighten the flange set screw.
3. Install coupling sleeve in the trip body coupling flange.
4. Place adapter (1) in the machined groove in the bottom half of the steam end
bearing housing.
5. Place the key (5, Figure 6-3) and coupling flange on the governor driveshaft.
6. Adjust the coupling flange to provide the proper clearance between the flange and
the governor housing and lock the flange in place by tightening the set screws.
(Refer to Coupling Detail, Figure 6-3.)
7. Mount the governor (2) on the adapter (1) making sure the coupling sleeve
engages the governor coupling flange.
8. Replace the four cap screws (4) to secure the governor to the adapter.
9. Check that the coupling sleeve moves axially and readjust coupling flanges as
necessary to obtain .030 to .060 inch (0.75 to 1.50 mm) axial clearance. (.5 inch
[12.7 mm] gap between coupling flanges will provide proper axial clearance.)
10. Replace the steam end bearing cap as outlined in Chapter 4.
11. Ensure set screw (3) is tight.
D R A
6-6 100q.chap06.11/17/2009
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 724-527-2811
0 466 / 633
Chapter 6
Linkage Adjustments
1. Rotate the terminal output shaft to the middle position of its total travel. Place the
terminal shaft lever (17, Figure 6-3) on the shaft so that it is in the vertical position
(or to scribed line).
2. Tighten cap screw (18) to secure lever (17) to the terminal shaft.
3. Connect adjustable connecting rod (15) to the terminal shaft lever (17) by placing
shoulder screw (13) through rod end (14).
4. Replace elastic stop nut (19) on shoulder screw (13).
5. Adjust connecting rod (15) so that lever (17) and lever (10) are parallel to each
other.
6. Move terminal shaft lever (17) to the full open position (clockwise direction).
7. Loosen the governor valve stem jam nut, and turn the valve stem out of the
governor valve connection until the valve is firmly seated.
8. Back the valve off of the seat by turning the stem into the connection to provide
design valve travel listed on “Turbine Data” page in the front of this manual.
9. Lock the valve stem jam nut.
D R A
100q.chap06.11/17/2009 6-7
IN6-APR- 16
0
0 467 / 633
724-527-2811
Chapter 6
2 1 3
13, 14, 19 6 (SEE COUPLING
15 DE TA IL “A ” BELOW )
16 TRIP BODY
14
10 ROTA RY
TE RMINA L
(OUTPUT)
SHAFT
8
18 5
12
17
11
20, 21
7
CONNE CTION
JAMNUT GOVERNOR
9
VALVE
DE TA IL “A ” COUPLING
0.080 in. TO 0.090 in. ITEM NUMBE R DESCRIP TION QUA NTITY
0.065 in. TO 0.075 in. (2.0 mm TO 2.30 mm)
TRIP 6-3-1 ADAP TER 1
(1.70 mm TO 1.90 mm)
BODY 2 T GOVERNOR 1
3 SET S CREW 1
4 CAPSCREW 4
SET S CREWS 5 2
WOODRUFF KEY
6 COUPLING 1
BALL HEA D 7 PIN 1
ADAP TER 8 BRACKE T 1
9 TAPE R DOWEL P IN 1
10 LEVER 1
11 PIN 1
12 SET S CREW 1
13 SHOULDER S CREW 2
GOVERNOR 14 ROD END 2
DRIVE SHA FT KEY 15 CONNE CTING ROD 1
FLANGE KEY 16 JAM NUT 2
17 TE RMINA L SHAFT 1
6 LEVER
18 CAPSCREW 1
FLANGE 19 ELAS TIC S TOP NUT 2
0.030 in. TO 0.060 in. COUPLING
(0.75 mm TO 1.50 mm) 20 SOCKE T HEAD S CREW 2
SLEEVE (NOT S HOWN)
21 SOCKE T HEAD S CREW 1
FIGURE 6-3
“T” GOVERNOR
D R A
6-8 100q.chap06.11/17/2009
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 724-527-2811
0 468 / 633
Chapter 6
NOTES
D R A
100q.chap06.11/17/2009 6-9
IN6-APR- 16
0
0 469 / 633
724-527-2811
CHAPTER SEVEN
TROUBLESHOOTING
INTRODUCTION
This chapter is intended to assist operators by both identifying possible causes of equipment
problems as well as recommending likely solutions. The Elliott Company recommends the
assistance of an authorized Elliott service representative for repairs. Refer to Appendix “B”,
Chapter 9, for a complete list of Elliott Company sales and service locations.
CAUTION
Replacement parts should be purchased from the
Elliott Company. Many vendor parts have been
modified and/or calibrated by the Elliott Company to
ensure compatibility with the design. Parts purchased
directly from vendors may not function properly and
could damage other components.
For applicable parts, in addition to Table 7-1 Troubleshooting Guidelines, refer to the vendor’s
instruction manual located in Chapter 8 Accessories.
100q.chap07.7/3/2008 7-1
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 470 / 633
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
NOTES
7-2 100q.chap07.7/3/2008
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 471 / 633
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
TABLE 7-1
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
______________________________________________________________________
1. TROUBLE EXCESSIVE VIBRATION
CAUSE: Shaft Misalignment

ACTION: Re-align as necessary. (Chapter 2)
CAUSE: Excessive bearing clearance.

ACTION: Replace bearings. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Dry Coupling.

ACTION: Lubricate coupling. (Chapter 2, 7)
CAUSE: Worn or damaged coupling.

ACTION: Repair or replace coupling. (Chapter 2, 7)
CAUSE: Damaged rotor assembly.

ACTION: Replace or repair and balance the rotor assembly. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Scale deposits or rotor assembly unbalanced.

ACTION: Clean and balance as necessary. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Tight or improper fitting carbon rings. (Labyrinth seals on BYRHH)

ACTION: Inspect carbon rings, labyrinth seals and shaft. Replace as
necessary. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Water in the inlet steam supply.

ACTION: Remove the source of water and thoroughly drain steam lines and
turbine casing. (Chapter 2, 3)
CAUSE: Bent rotor shaft.

ACTION: Repair or replace the rotor assembly if run-out exceeds
.002 inch (0.05 mm). (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Loose or broken hold down bolts.

ACTION: Tighten or replace hold down bolts. (Chapter 2)
CAUSE: Sympathetic vibration. (Adjacent machinery causing vibration)

ACTION: A detailed investigation is required to determine proper corrective
action. (Chapter 2)
CAUSE: Improperly assembled parts.

ACTION: Listen for rubbing noises. Locate the source of noise, dismantle and
make necessary adjustments. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Loose rotor discs.

ACTION: Replace or repair and balance rotor assembly. (Chapter 4)
______________________________________________________________________
100q.chap07.7/3/2008 7-3
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 472 / 633
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
TABLE 7-1
______________________________________________________________________
2. TROUBLE EXCESSIVE COUPLING WEAR
CAUSE: Lack of proper lubrication.

ACTION: Lubricate as necessary. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Improper cold alignment (Does not provide allowance for thermal
expansion).
ACTION: 1. Calculate amount of thermal expansion of equipment supports.
(Chapter 2)
2. Check shaft alignment at operating temperature (hot check) and
correct misalignment to provide collinear alignment when
equipment is at normal operating temperature. (Chapter 2)
CAUSE: Shaft misalignment caused by piping strains imposed on turbine

casing.
ACTION: Inspect piping for proper installation of pipe hangers, springs and
expansion joints. Correct any deficiencies in the piping that do not
allow for thermal expansion or dead weight forces. (Chapter 2)
CAUSE: Warped or distorted foundation.

ACTION: 1. Check foundation for settling and correct as necessary.
(Chapter 2)
2. Check for uneven temperature zones surrounding the foundation
and correct as necessary. (Chapter 2)
______________________________________________________________________
3. TROUBLE TURBINE FAILS TO START
CAUSE: Inadequate steam pressure at turbine inlet.

ACTION: Check that shut-off valves are open between turbine and boiler.
(Chapter 2)
CAUSE: Obstructed steam strainer.

ACTION: Clean strainer. (Chapter 2)
CAUSE: Governor valve stuck in closed position.

ACTION: Inspect governor linkage, valve stem packing and guide bushings.
Replace worn or binding parts. (Chapter 4, 6)
CAUSE: Faulty or improperly set safety or control devices (if furnished).

ACTION: Check that all automatic trip mechanisms, pressure switches and
control devices are set in the proper mode. (Chapter 4, 6)
CAUSE: Trip valve closed.

ACTION: Latch the trip valve re-setting lever. (Chapter 3)
______________________________________________________________________
7-4 100q.chap07.7/3/2008
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 473 / 633
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
TABLE 7-1
_______________________________________________________________________
4. TROUBLE TURBINE DOES NOT COME UP TO SPEED
CAUSE: Binding or interferences in governor valve or linkage.

ACTION: Replace worn or binding parts as necessary. (Chapter 4, 6)
CAUSE: Insufficient governor valve travel.

ACTION: Adjust to provide travel shown on Turbine Operating Data page.
(Chapter 4, 6)
CAUSE: Improper positioning of hand nozzle valve.

ACTION: Position hand valve as shown on the turbine outline. (Chapter 10)
CAUSE: Low inlet steam pressure or temperature.

ACTION: Increase steam conditions to provide the design values shown on
Turbine Operating Data page.
CAUSE: Excessive exhaust pressure.

ACTION: Reduce exhaust pressure to provide value shown on Turbine
Operating Data page.
CAUSE: Load exceeds turbine rating.

ACTION: Reduce load to that which is designated on Turbine Operating Data
page.
CAUSE: Restricted steam flow at turbine inlet.

ACTION: 1. Check that shut-off valves are fully open. (Chapter 2, 4)
2. Check steam strainer and clean as necessary. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Steam nozzles and blading fouled and/or eroded.

ACTION: Clean or replace parts as required. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Governor malfunction.

ACTION: Adjust, repair or replace governor. (Chapter 4, 6, 8)
CAUSE: Reversing bucket missing or in backwards.

ACTION: Reinstall in proper direction. (Chapter 4)
100q.chap07.7/3/2008 7-5
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 474 / 633
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
TABLE 7-1
_______________________________________________________________________
5. TROUBLE EXCESSIVE STEAM USAGE
CAUSE: Improper positioning of hand nozzle valve.

ACTION: Position hand valve as outlined on the turbine outline. (Chapter 10)
CAUSE: Low inlet steam pressure or temperature.

ACTION: Increase steam conditions to provide the design values as shown on
Turbine Operating Data page.
CAUSE: Excessive exhaust pressure.

ACTION: Reduce exhaust pressure to provide value shown on Turbine
Operating Data page.
CAUSE: Load exceeds turbine rating.

ACTION: Reduce load to that which is designated on Turbine Operating Data
page.
CAUSE: Nozzles and/or turbine blades eroded or damaged.

ACTION: Inspect, repair or replace rotor assembly and/or nozzle ring.
(Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Reversing bucket missing or in backwards.

ACTION: Reinstall in proper direction. (Chapter 4)
_______________________________________________________________________
6. TROUBLE ERRATIC SPEED CONTROL
CAUSE: Worn or sticking governor valve and/or linkage.

ACTION: Replace worn parts as necessary. (Chapter 4, 6, 8)
CAUSE: Incorrect governor valve travel.

ACTION: Adjust the governor valve and linkage to provide the designed valve
travel shown on Turbine Operating Data page.
CAUSE: Governor malfunction.

ACTION: Repair or replace governor. (Chapter 6)
CAUSE: Fluctuations in steam conditions or load.

ACTION: Correct steam condition or driven machine. (Turbine Operating
Data)
______________________________________________________________________
7-6 100q.chap07.7/3/2008
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 475 / 633
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
TABLE 7-1
_______________________________________________________________________
7. TROUBLE OVERSPEED TRIP NOT FUNCTIONING PROPERLY
CAUSE: Trip mechanism improperly adjusted.

ACTION: Adjust the trip mechanism. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Defective trip mechanism.

ACTION: Replace worn or damaged parts. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Trip valve stem binding.

ACTION: Inspect valve stem and guide bushing. Clean or replace worn parts.
(Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Trip linkage binding.

ACTION: Replace worn linkage parts and lubricate as necessary. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Hand trip lever corroded or has incorrect latch engagement.

ACTION: Clean and adjust latch. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Excessive vibration.

ACTION: See “Excessive Vibration” in section 1 of this table 7-1.
_______________________________________________________________________
8. TROUBLE TURBINE DOES NOT COOL AFTER SHUT DOWN
CAUSE: Inlet steam shut off leaking.

ACTION: Check that valve is tightly closed and firmly seated. (Chapter 2, 3)
CAUSE: Exhaust shut-off valve leaking. (non-condensing turbine)

ACTION: Check that valve is tightly closed and firmly seated. (Chapter 2, 3)
CAUSE: Steam entering turbine through drain leak off lines.

ACTION: Pipe all drain lines to an open sump or sewer. (Chapter 2)
CAUSE: Steam entering turbine through intermediate leak-off line.

(BYRHH only)
ACTION: Close stop valve in intermediate leak off line between packing cases
and header pipe.
_______________________________________________________________________
100q.chap07.7/3/2008 7-7
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 476 / 633
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
TABLE 7-1
_______________________________________________________________________
9. TROUBLE EXCESSIVE BEARING WEAR
CAUSE: Excessive bearing temperature.

ACTION: See “Excessive Bearing Temperature” in Table 7-1, Item 10.
CAUSE: Damaged oil rings.

ACTION: Replace oil rings. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Low oil level

ACTION: Replenish bearing housing reservoir oil supply. (Chapter 3, 5)
CAUSE: Dirty lubricating oil.

ACTION: Change oil and clean bearings. (Chapter 4, 5)
CAUSE: Rough journal surfaces.

ACTION: Stone or repair the journals or replace the rotor assembly.
(Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Water in lubricating oil.

ACTION: See “Excessive Steam Leakage past Carbon Rings”;
Table 7-1, Item 11
CAUSE: Excessive vibration.

ACTION: See “Excessive Vibration” in Table 7-1, Item 1.
CAUSE: Shaft misalignment.

ACTION: See “Excessive Coupling Wear” in Table 7-1, Item 2.
CAUSE: Internal bearing misalignment.

ACTION: Check bearing housings for damage. Correct alignment. (Chapter 4)
_______________________________________________________________________
7-8 100q.chap07.7/3/2008
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 477 / 633
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
TABLE 7-1
_______________________________________________________________________
10. TROUBLE EXCESSIVE BEARING TEMPERATURE
CAUSE: Worn bearings.

ACTION: Replace bearings. Determine and correct cause of bearing wear.
See “Excessive Bearing Wear” in Table 7-1, Item 9.
CAUSE: Fouled cooling water chambers.

ACTION: Clean cooling water chambers. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Incorrect water flow to bearing housing cooling chambers.

ACTION: Regulate cooling water flow. (Chapter 2, 3)
CAUSE: Excess oil viscosity

ACTION: Change oil in accordance with viscosities shown in Chapter 5.
_______________________________________________________________________
11. TROUBLE EXCESSIVE STEAM LEAKAGE PAST CARBON RINGS
CAUSE: Worn or damaged carbon rings.

ACTION: Replace carbon ring assemblies. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Dirt or foreign matter in sealing glands.

ACTION: Clean sealing glands. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Weak or broken retainer springs.

ACTION: Replace carbon ring assemblies. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Shaft area under carbon ring scored, fouled or corroded.

ACTION: Clean and polish, or spray metal and re-machine shaft area under
carbon rings. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Restrictions in sealing gland leak-off drain lines.

ACTION: Check and correct any restrictions in the lines, or improperly
designed piping. (Chapter 2)
CAUSE: Excessive gland sealing steam pressure. (Condensing Turbines)

ACTION: Reduce gland sealing steam pressure. (Chapter 3)
CAUSE: Intermediate leak off pressure too high due to worn labyrinth seals or
header pressure too high. (BYRHH only)
ACTION: Replace labyrinth seals. (Chapter 4) Reduce header pressure.
(Chapter 2)
CAUSE: Dirt or foreign matter on spacer ring sealing surfaces.

ACTION: Clean spacer rings. (AYR only)
_______________________________________________________________________
100q.chap07.7/3/2008 7-9
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 478 / 633
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
TABLE 7-1
_______________________________________________________________________
12. TROUBLE EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE AT TRIP VALVE STEM
CAUSE: Obstructed leak-off line.

ACTION: Clean out lines. (Chapter 2)
CAUSE: Trip valve stem lock nut loose.

ACTION: Tighten snug to bushing. (Chapter 4)
(Chapter 2)
CAUSE: Stem bushings or stem worn.

ACTION: Replace worn parts. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Backseating spring weak.

ACTION: Replace spring. DO NOT ADJUST VALVE STEM. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Incorrect backseat adjustment.

ACTION: Adjust Trip valve backseat. (Chapter 4)
_______________________________________________________________________
13. TROUBLE EXCESSIVE LEAKAGE AT GOVERNOR VALVE SYSTEM
CAUSE: Obstructed leak-off line.

ACTION: Clean out line. (Chapter 2)
CAUSE: Follower loose.

ACTION: Tighten follower. (Chapter 4)
CAUSE: Stem or bushing worn.

ACTION: Replace worn parts. (Chapter 4, 6)
CAUSE: Packing worn.

ACTION: Replace packing. (Chapter 4)
_______________________________________________________________________
7-10 100q.chap07.7/3/2008
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 479 / 633
Chapter 8
Accessories
CHAPTER EIGHT
ACCESSORIES
INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains information on accessory items applicable to the unit. Engineered
drawings, instruction/operation manuals, and data sheets if required, are included for the
accessory component. The drawing numbers may have a suffix number, or group number
identifying applicable equipment on the drawing. Be sure to use the suffix listed when
making reference to a drawing.
If this manual is in an electronic format (CD-ROM), scroll down for a list of the Accessory
information contained in this chapter.
8-1
D R Ach8.04/20/02
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 480 / 633
Chapter 8
Accessories
NOTES
8-2
D R A724-527-2811
ch8.04/20/02
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 481 / 633
Chapter 8
Accessories
Form 188-C (05/28/02)
ACCESSORIES
F402016-1, -2
Index Description Drawing/Document Number

No.
1. Governor Outline Drawing P4045A203
Product Specification Sheet 03368C
Installation and Operation Manual 04042L
Oil for Hydraulic Controls Instruction Manual 25071J
2. Tachometer Outline Drawing P82M471
Instruction Manual SPD-100
Cable Outline Drawing P8405B550-048
Magnet Pickup Outline Drawing 436023-9
3. Turbine Rotor And Reversing
Bucket Holder
Bearing Housing Oil Seals Elliott Bearing Isolator (EBI) Supplement
4. Turbine Bearing Temperature
Instrumentation
Thermometer/Thermowell Outline/Specification Sheet PRL031359A
Instruction Book PRL031359B
8-3
D R Ach8.04/20/02
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 482 / 633
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 483 / 633
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 484 / 633
Product Specification 03368
(Rev. C, 11/2012)
TG611‐13/‐17 Governor
with Overspeed Test Device
Application
TG611 Governors are
self-contained,
mechanical-hydraulic,
speed-droop governors
for use on small steam
turbines driving pumps,  API 611 Compliant
compressors, or
generators, where  Low cost
isochronous (constant  Speed droop
speed) operation is not
required. These governors control
are directly coupled to the  Integral overspeed
steam-turbine’s rotor or
auxiliary shaft to sense test device
and control turbine speed.  Weatherproof
Designed for API-611-
based turbine  Self-contained
applications, these sump
governors include a
special Overspeed Test  NEMA "A" speed
Device, allowing control
controlled and safe
turbine overspeed trip  16 and 23.7 Nm
testing. (12 and 17.5 lb-ft)
Description outputs
 Designed for
TG611 governors are harsh
mechanical-hydraulic speed-droop governors for controlling small steam turbines.
These governors control turbine speed by sensing turbine rotor speed via their input
environments
drive shaft, comparing this speed to an internal speed setpoint, then using a rotary
output terminal shaft connected to the turbine’s governor valve to control turbine inlet
steam flow. This self-contained governor utilizes an integrated drive-shaft-driven
ballhead assembly to sense turbine speed, and an integrated drive-shaft-driven oil
pump to create the necessary output force to move/control the turbine’s governor
valve. The governor output is a serrated terminal shaft that extends out each side of
the governor housing and rotates up to 40° to accurately control the turbine’s inlet
steam valve(s).
Different models are available depending on the output shaft force and input drive-
shaft speed range required. The TG611 governor’s (turbine) speed setpoint is set
and adjusted via a speed-setting screw located on the unit’s cover plate. TG611
governors are available in two different work outputs: 16 Nm (12 lb-ft) and 23.7 Nm
(17.5 lb-ft). These governors are hydraulically powered for a high work output, and
are available for three different speed ranges.
Like most mechanical governors, the TG611 governor uses its output terminal shaft
position as a feedback signal for stability. By using this stabilizing method, turbine
speed will “droop” a certain percentage as load increases (shaft position increases).
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 485 / 633
Woodward 03368 p.2
Standard Features
Simplicity and low cost are distinct advantages of the TG611 Governor. The governor operates with speed droop for
stability of control and screw-type speed setting.
An internal oil pump, driven by the governor's drive shaft, transports oil from the self-contained sump. Internal pressure
is maintained by a relief valve-accumulator system. An oil sight-glass provides ease in checking the oil level.
The output (terminal) shaft extends out both sides of the case, and the governor drive rotation can be in either direction.
Special Features
The built-in relief valve-accumulator helps maintain full oil pressure in the governor hydraulic system during transient
conditions.
Contamination is reduced by the weatherproof construction and the self-contained oil sump.
The standard version includes an integral overspeed test device that allows the speed to be safely increased in a
controlled manner up to the turbine’s overspeed trip speed. This feature allows for testing of the turbine’s overspeed
trip mechanism in a safe manner.
Specifications
Speed-Setting Screw Adjustment on top of cover
Input Drive Shaft Diameter 12.675 to 12.687 mm (0.4990 to 0.4995 inch)
Speed Range Can be adjusted to meet NEMA "A" requirements at any speed within the
following ranges:
1100 to 2400 rpm 2400 to 4000 rpm 4000 to 6000 rpm
Different governor part numbers are required for different ranges.
This governor is capable of controlling at a lower-than-specified speed range

with some loss of output torque and performance.
Drive Power Requirement 373 W (1/2 hp) maximum required to turn drive shaft at rated speed
Rotation Clockwise or counterclockwise, as viewed from the top of the governor
Rotation can be changed on this governor by removing four screws and

rotating pump housing 180°.
Output
TG611-13 16 Nm (12 lb-ft)

TG611-17 23.7 Nm (17.5 lb-ft)
D R A Output Shaft .625-36 serration on both sides of case

IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 486 / 633
Woodward 03368 p.3
Control Characteristics
(intended to meet NEMA "A" requirements)
Steady State Speed Band ±0.75% of rated speed
Droop Internally adjustable and must be set as required for stability. Factory set at
6% for 20° terminal shaft travel at 1800, 3600, or 5400 rpm, depending on
speed range selected.
Typical Response 7.2% overspeed with full load change on a 50% per second acceleration
turbine at 4% droop setting
Operating Temperature Continuous operating temperature 60 to 93 °C (140 to 200 °F). Ambient
temperature –29 to +93 °C (–20 to +200 °F). Contact Woodward if operating
beyond these limits.
Overspeed Test Device
Range Overspeed test can be initiated from any speed setting
Adjustable Overspeed test speed can be set at any speed with a separate integral
adjustment screw.
Semi-secure Screw-on metal cap protects the overspeed test mechanism from the
environment.
Hydraulic System
Oil Self-contained sump. SAE 10 to 50 is recommended with a viscosity of 100
to 300 SUS, depending on operating temperature. See Woodward manual
25071, Oils for Hydraulic Controls, for recommended oils.
Relief Valve An integral part of accumulator—it maintains 1034 kPa (150 psi) for the
TG611-13 and 1379 kPa (200 psi) for the TG611-17 at the specified speed
ranges. Both governors are capable of controlling at lower speeds with
some loss of output torque and performance.
Capacity 1.7 L (1.75 quarts)
Construction
Case and Pump Housing Die-cast aluminum
Weight 7 kg (16 lb) aluminum case
Mounting
Attitude Vertical or horizontal (breather cap up)
References
Manual 04042 TG-13/TG-17/TG611-13/TG611-17 Governors
Manual 25071 Oils for Hydraulic Control
Regulatory Compliance
European Compliance for CE Marking:
(Applicable only to units bearing the CE marking.)
ATEX Potentially Declared to 94/9/EC COUNCIL DIRECTIVE of 23 March 1994 on the
Explosive Atmospheres approximation of the laws of the Member States concerning equipment and
Directive: protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as:
II 2 G c IIC TX. The TX reflects special conditions for safe use:
Special Conditions for Safe Use—Maximum Surface Temperature
The maximum surface temperature of the TG611 Governor is dependent upon three factors that are specific to the
operating conditions of each individual application. These factors are as follows:
 Governor drive shaft speed
 Ambient temperature
 Hydraulic Fluid Selection (see Table 2-1 in manual 04042)
The maximum surface temperature of the TG611 Governor must stay below the lowest ignition temperature of the
surrounding explosive atmosphere and within allowable operating conditions for the hydraulic fluid selection. It is the
user's responsibility to maintain a safe surface and fluid temperature. If normal operating conditions cause the
surface temperature of the TG611 to rise close to ignition temperatures or near the maximum recommended
hydraulic fluid temperature, a heat exchanger must be installed. Refer to manual 04042 for location and sizing of the
ports for connection of a heat exchanger.
Other European Compliance
Compliance with the following European Directive does not qualify this product for the application of the CE Marking:
Machinery Directive: Compliant as partly completed machinery with Directive 2006/42/EC of the
European Parliament and the Council of 17 May 2006 on machinery.
Pressure Equipment Compliant as “SEP” per Article 3.3 to Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC of 29
D R A Directive: May 1997 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States concerning
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 pressure equipment.
487 / 633
Woodward 03368 p.4
Outline Drawing of TG611 Governor
For more information contact:

PO Box 1519, Fort Collins CO, USA 80522-1519
1000 East Drake Road, Fort Collins CO 80525
Tel.: +1 (970) 482-5811  Fax: +1 (970) 498-3058
www.woodward.com
Distributors & Service

Woodward has an international network of distributors and service facilities.
For your nearest representative, call the Fort Collins plant or see the
Worldwide Directory on our website.
This document is distributed for informational purposes only. It is not to be construed as
R A
creating or becoming part of any Woodward contractual or warranty obligation unless
expressly stated in a written sales contract.
D
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 Copyright © Woodward 2009–2012, All Rights Reserved
0 488 / 633
Product Manual 04042
(Revision L, 2/2013)
Original Instructions
TG-13 and TG-17 Governors

TG611-13 and TG611-17 Governors
Installation and Operation Manual
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 489 / 633
Read this entire manual and all other publications pertaining to the work to be
performed before installing, operating, or servicing this equipment.
Practice all plant and safety instructions and precautions.
General
Precautions Failure to follow instructions can cause personal injury and/or property damage.
This publication may have been revised or updated since this copy was produced.
To verify that you have the latest revision, check manual 26311 , Revision Status &
Distribution Restrictions of Woodward Technical Publications, on the publications
Revisions page of the Woodward website:
www.woodward.com/publications
The latest version of most publications is available on the publications page. If

your publication is not there, please contact your customer service representative
to get the latest copy.
Any unauthorized modifications to or use of this equipment outside its specified

mechanical, electrical, or other operating limits may cause personal injury and/or
property damage, including damage to the equipment. Any such unauthorized
Proper Use modifications: (i) constitute "misuse" and/or "negligence" within the meaning of
the product warranty thereby excluding warranty coverage for any resulting
damage, and (ii) invalidate product certifications or listings.
If the cover of this publication states "Translation of the Original Instructions"

please note:
The original source of this publication may have been updated since this
Translated translation was made. Be sure to check manual 26311 , Revision Status &
Publications Distribution Restrictions of Woodward Technical Publications, to verify whether
this translation is up to date. Out-of-date translations are marked with . Always
compare with the original for technical specifications and for proper and safe
installation and operation procedures.
Revisions—Changes in this publication since the last revision are indicated by a black line
alongside the text.
Woodward reserves the right to update any portion of this publication at any time. Information provided by Woodward is
believed to be correct and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by Woodward unless otherwise expressly
undertaken.
Manual 04042
D R A Copyright © Woodward 1984–2013

All Rights Reserved
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 490 / 633
Contents
WARNINGS AND NOTICES ............................................................................III

ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE AWARENESS ................................................. IV
REGULATORY COMPLIANCE ........................................................................ V
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL INFORMATION ........................................................... 1
Description ..............................................................................................................1
References .............................................................................................................3
TG Part Numbers ...................................................................................................4
CHAPTER 2. INSTALLATION.......................................................................... 6
Introduction .............................................................................................................6
Receiving ................................................................................................................6
Storage ...................................................................................................................7
Drive-Shaft Rotation ...............................................................................................7
Changing Drive-Shaft Rotation ...............................................................................7
Governor Mounting ...............................................................................................11
Linkage Attachments ............................................................................................12
Heat Exchanger Installation (optional) .................................................................13
Oil Supply .............................................................................................................14
When is a Heat Exchanger Necessary? ...............................................................16
Overspeed Test Device ........................................................................................18
CHAPTER 3. GOVERNOR OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENTS .......................... 24
Introduction ...........................................................................................................24
Initial Operation ....................................................................................................24
Speed Droop ........................................................................................................25
Droop Adjustment .................................................................................................25
Operation of the Overspeed Test Device .............................................................26
CHAPTER 4. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION ................................................... 29
Introduction ...........................................................................................................29
Description of Operation .......................................................................................29
CHAPTER 5. TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................... 33
Introduction ...........................................................................................................33
Visual Inspection ..................................................................................................33
Definitions .............................................................................................................33
CHAPTER 6. REPLACEMENT PARTS ........................................................... 36
Replacement Parts Information ............................................................................36
Replacement Parts List for Figure 6-1..................................................................36
CHAPTER 7. SERVICE OPTIONS ................................................................. 47
Product Service Options .......................................................................................47
Woodward Factory Servicing Options ..................................................................48
Returning Equipment for Repair ...........................................................................48
Replacement Parts ...............................................................................................49
Engineering Services............................................................................................49
How to Contact Woodward ...................................................................................50
Technical Assistance ............................................................................................50
D R A Woodward i
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 491 / 633
TG-13/TG-17/TG611-13/TG611-17 Governors Manual 04042
Contents
CHAPTER 8. ASSET MANAGEMENT AND REFURBISHMENT SCHEDULING

PERIOD .....................................................................................................51
REVISION HISTORY ....................................................................................51
DECLARATIONS .........................................................................................52
Illustrations and Tables
Figure 1-1. Governor Work Output .........................................................................1

Figure 1-2a. TG-13 Governor .................................................................................2
Figure 1-2b. TG611-13 Governor ...........................................................................2
Figure 2-1. Pump-Housing Assembly .....................................................................8
Figure 2-2. Pump -Housing Assembly ....................................................................8
Figure 2-3. Location of Pump-Drive Pin .................................................................8
Figure 2-4. Pump-Housing Assembly .....................................................................9
Figure 2-5. Setup for Clockwise Rotation of the Governor Drive Shaft ................10
Figure 2-6. Setup for Counterclockwise Rotation of the Governor Drive Shaft ....10
Figure 2-7. Typical Linkage Arrangement for the TG Governor ...........................13
Figure 2-8. Heat-Exchanger Tap Locations .........................................................14
Figure 2-9. Heat-Exchanger Piping Schematic ....................................................14
Figure 2-10a. TG-13/TG-17 Outline Drawing .......................................................19
Figure 2-10b. TG-13/TG-17 Outline Drawing .......................................................20
Figure 2-10c. TG-13/TG-17 Outline Drawing .......................................................21
Figure 2-10d. TG-13/TG-17 Outline Drawing .......................................................22
Figure 2-10e. TG611-13/TG611-17 Outline Drawing ...........................................23
Figure 3-1. Droop-Adjusting Lever Movement .....................................................26
Figure 3-2. Operating the Overspeed Test Device...............................................27
Figure 4-1. TG-13/TG-17 and TG611-13/TG611-17 Schematic Diagram............31
Figure 6-1. Parts for the TG-13 and -17 Governor, Cast-Iron Case, Screw Speed
Setting ..............................................................................................38
Figure 6-2. Parts for the TG-13 and -17 Cover Assembly (Lever Speed Setting)
for Use with Cast-Iron Case TG-13 and -17 ....................................39
Figure 6-3. Parts for the TG-13 and -17 Governor. Die-cast Aluminum Case.
Screw Speed Setting .......................................................................41
Figure 6-4. Parts for the TG-13 and -17 Governor with Extended Drive Shaft, Die-
cast Aluminum Case, Screw Speed Setting ....................................43
Figure 6-5. Parts for the TG-13 and -17 Cover Assembly (Lever Speed Setting),
for Use with Aluminum Case TG-13 and –17 ..................................44
Figure 6-6. Parts for the TG611-13/-17 Overspeed Test Device .........................46
Table 1-1. TG-13 and TG611-13 Part Numbers.....................................................4

Table 1-2. TG-17 and TG611-17 Part Numbers.....................................................5
Table 2-1. Oil Chart ..............................................................................................17
Table 2-2. Viscosity Comparisons ........................................................................17
D R Aii Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 492 / 633
Warnings and Notices

Important Definitions
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential
personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this
symbol to avoid possible injury or death.
 DANGER—Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result
in death or serious injury.
 WARNING—Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
 CAUTION—Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in minor or moderate injury.
 NOTICE—Indicates a hazard that could result in property damage only
(including damage to the control).
 IMPORTANT—Designates an operating tip or maintenance suggestion.
The engine, turbine, or other type of prime mover should be

equipped with an overspeed shutdown device to protect against
runaway or damage to the prime mover with possible personal injury,
Overspeed / loss of life, or property damage.
Overtemperature / The overspeed shutdown device must be totally independent of the
Overpressure prime mover control system. An overtemperature or overpressure
shutdown device may also be needed for safety, as appropriate.
The products described in this publication may present risks that

could lead to personal injury, loss of life, or property damage. Always
wear the appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) for the job
Personal Protective at hand. Equipment that should be considered includes but is not
limited to:
Equipment
 Eye Protection
 Hearing Protection
 Hard Hat
 Gloves
 Safety Boots
 Respirator
Always read the proper Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for any
working fluid(s) and comply with recommended safety equipment.
Be prepared to make an emergency shutdown when starting the

engine, turbine, or other type of prime mover, to protect against
runaway or overspeed with possible personal injury, loss of life, or
Start-up property damage.
On- and off-highway Mobile Applications: Unless Woodward's control

functions as the supervisory control, customer should install a
system totally independent of the prime mover control system that
Automotive monitors for supervisory control of engine (and takes appropriate
action if supervisory control is lost) to protect against loss of engine
Applications
control with possible personal injury, loss of life, or property damage.
D R A Woodward iii
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 493 / 633
To prevent damage to a control system that uses an alternator or

battery-charging device, make sure the charging device is turned off
before disconnecting the battery from the system.
Battery Charging
Device
Electrostatic Discharge Awareness

Electronic controls contain static-sensitive parts. Observe the
following precautions to prevent damage to these parts:
 Discharge body static before handling the control (with power to
the control turned off, contact a grounded surface and maintain
Electrostatic contact while handling the control).
Precautions  Avoid all plastic, vinyl, and Styrofoam (except antistatic versions)
around printed circuit boards.
 Do not touch the components or conductors on a printed circuit
board with your hands or with conductive devices.
To prevent damage to electronic components caused by improper
handling, read and observe the precautions in Woodward manual
82715, Guide for Handling and Protection of Electronic Controls,
Printed Circuit Boards, and Modules.
Follow these precautions when working with or near the control.

1. Avoid the build-up of static electricity on your body by not wearing clothing
made of synthetic materials. Wear cotton or cotton-blend materials as much
as possible because these do not store static electric charges as much as
synthetics.
2. Do not remove the printed circuit board (PCB) from the control cabinet
unless absolutely necessary. If you must remove the PCB from the control
cabinet, follow these precautions:
 Do not touch any part of the PCB except the edges.
 Do not touch the electrical conductors, the connectors, or the
components with conductive devices or with your hands.
 When replacing a PCB, keep the new PCB in the plastic antistatic
protective bag it comes in until you are ready to install it. Immediately
after removing the old PCB from the control cabinet, place it in the
antistatic protective bag.
D R Aiv Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 494 / 633
Regulatory Compliance
European Compliance for CE Marking:
(Applicable only to units bearing the CE marking.)
ATEX Declared to 94/9/EC COUNCIL DIRECTIVE of 23 March

Potentially 1994 on the approximation of the laws of the Member
Explosive States concerning equipment and protective systems
Atmospheres intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as:
Directive: II 2 G c IIC TX. The TX reflects special conditions for safe
use.
Other European Compliance

Compliance with the following European Directive does not qualify this product
for the application of the CE Marking:
Machinery Compliant as partly completed machinery with Directive

Directive: 2006/42/EC of the European Parliament and the Council
of 17 May 2006 on machinery.
Pressure Compliant as “SEP” per Article 3.3 to Pressure

Equipment Equipment Directive 97/23/EC of 29 May 1997 on the
Directive: approximation of the laws of the Member States
concerning pressure equipment.
The TG-13/TG-17 and TG611-13/TG611-17 governors are suitable for use in

European Zone 1, Group II environments per compliance with EN13463-5, Non-
electrical equipment intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres – Part
5; Protection by constructional safety ‘c’, with the following Special Conditions for
Safe Use:
Special Conditions for Safe Use—Maximum Surface Temperature

The maximum surface temperature of the TG Governor is dependent upon
three factors that are specific to the operating conditions of each individual
application. These factors are as follows:
 Governor drive shaft speed
 Ambient temperature
 Hydraulic fluid selection (see Table 2-1)
The maximum surface temperature of the TG Governor must stay below the
lowest ignition temperature of the surrounding explosive atmosphere and within
allowable operating conditions for the hydraulic fluid selection. It is the user's
responsibility to maintain a safe surface and fluid temperature. If normal
operating conditions cause the surface temperature of the TG to rise close to
ignition temperatures or near the maximum recommended hydraulic fluid
temperature, a heat exchanger must be installed. Refer to the sections on “Heat
Exchanger Installation” and “When is a Heat Exchanger Necessary?” for location
and sizing of the ports for connection of a heat exchanger.
Compliance with the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC noise measurement and

mitigation requirements is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the machinery
into which this product is incorporated.
This listing is limited only to those units bearing the CE Mark on the nameplate.
D R A Woodward v
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 495 / 633
EXPLOSION HAZARD—Substitution of components may impair

suitability for Zone 1 applications.
RISQUE D’EXPLOSION—La substitution de composants

peut rendre ce matériel inacceptable pour les
emplacements de Zone 1.
D R Avi Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 496 / 633
Chapter 1.
General Information
Description
The Woodward TG-13/TG-17 and TG611-13/TG611-17 are mechanical-hydraulic
speed droop governors for controlling steam turbines—applications where
isochronous (constant-speed) operation is not required.
The TG-13/TG-17 and TG611-13/TG611-17 governors have a full 40 degrees of

maximum terminal-shaft travel. Recommended travel from the no load to the full
load position is 2/3 of full governor travel.
See Figure 1-1 for a graphic representation of maximum work capacity for the
governors and related governor terminal shaft travel information.
Maximum work capacity over full governor travel of 40° is 12.2 ft-lb (16.5 J) for the
TG-13/TG611-13 and 17.5 ft-lb (23.7 J) for the TG-17/TG611-17. See above for
recommended governor output travel. In special applications, min and max prime mover
stops may be outside the governor stops.
Figure 1-1. Governor Work Output
Governor output is provided through a serrated terminal shaft extending from

both sides of the case.
The internal pump for the governors is sized to operate over standard speed ranges:
 1100 to 2400 rpm
 2400 to 4000 rpm
 4000 to 6000 rpm
D R A Woodward 1
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 497 / 633
Figure 1-2a. TG-13 Governor

(screw speed setting, left; lever speed setting, right)
Figure 1-2b. TG611-13 Governor

(screw speed setting with overspeed test device)
The TG-13/TG611-13 governor operates with 1034 kPa (150 psi) internal oil
pressure, and the TG-17/TG611-17 operates with 1379 kPa (200 psi) internal oil
pressure.
D R A2 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 498 / 633
Either governor is set to the speed range specified by the customer at time of
order. The high-speed governor (4000 to 6000 rpm) may require a heat
exchanger in some applications (see end of Chapter 2, “When is a Heat
Exchanger Necessary?”). Both governors are capable of controlling at lower-
than-specified speed range with some loss of output torque and performance.
The governor should not be run at a speed greater than the range specified
because of heat rise and component wear issues.
The governors are available with either a cast-iron case or a die-cast aluminum case.
Speed droop is required for stable governor operation. Droop is factory set, but
internally adjustable.
Two means of speed setting are available. Screw speed setting is standard.
Lever speed setting is optional and provided by a serrated shaft assembly
extending from both sides of the cover.
The TG-13 and TG-17 governors are identified as either a screw

speed-setting or as a lever speed-setting governor. The TG611
governors are screw speed-setting only (see Figure 1-2).
Governor drive shaft rotation for both governors is single direction only. In both
the cast iron and the die-cast aluminum governors, rotation can be changed in
the field. In the cast iron governor, it must be changed internally, and in the die-
cast aluminum governor, it can be changed externally by removing four screws
and rotating the pump housing 180 degrees (see Chapter 2).
Governor maintenance is minimal due to few moving parts, weatherproof design,

and self-contained oil supply. The governor drive shaft operates a gerotor oil
pump. Internal oil pump pressure is regulated by a relief valve/accumulator. The
oil sight gauge installed on each side of the governor case makes oil condition
and oil-level checking simple.
References
Additional helpful information can be found in these Woodward publications,
available online (www.woodward.com):
Number Title
03368 TG611-13/-17 Governors product specification
04038 TG-13 and TG-17 Governors product specification
25071 Oils for Hydraulic Controls
25075 Commercial Preservation Packaging for Storage of Mechanical-
Hydraulic Controls
36641 Governor Oil Heat Exchanger, Remote & Integral Types
51348 TG-13/-17 Overspeed Test Device Conversion Kit
D R A Woodward 3
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 499 / 633
TG Part Numbers
Table 1-1. TG-13 and TG611-13 Part Numbers
IN DR20A4
16
PR- 500 / 633
Woodward
06-A
Table 1-2. TG-17 and TG611-17 Part Numbers
D R A Woodward 5
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 501 / 633
Chapter 2.
Installation
Introduction
Use care while handling and installing the TG-13/TG-17 and TG611-13/
TG611-17 governors. Be particularly careful to avoid striking the drive shaft,
terminal shafts, speed-setting shafts, or adjusting screw. Abuse can damage
seals, internal parts, and factory adjustments.
Do not rest the governor on its drive shaft.
Explosion Hazard—The surface temperature of this governor

depends on three operating conditions: drive shaft speed, ambient
temperature, and hydraulic fluid selection. It is the user's
responsibility to maintain a safe surface and fluid temperature. If
normal operating conditions cause the surface temperature of the TG
to rise close to ignition temperatures of hazardous gases in the
external environment or near the maximum recommended hydraulic
fluid temperature, a heat exchanger must be installed. Refer to the
sections on “Heat Exchanger Installation” and “When is a Heat
Exchanger Necessary?” for location and sizing of the ports for
connection of a heat exchanger.
Explosion Hazard—External fire protection is not provided in the

scope of this product. It is the responsibility of the user to satisfy
any applicable requirements for their system.
Due to typical noise levels in turbine environments, hearing

protection should be worn when working on or around the TG
governor.
The surface of this product can become hot enough to be a hazard.

Use protective gear for product handling in these circumstances.
Receiving
The governor is shipped from the factory bolted to a wooden platform in the
vertical position and boxed. An oil sight gauge is factory installed on each side of
the case, and a breather/filler cap is positioned for vertical governor mounting
and operation.
After factory testing and adjusting, the governor is drained of oil, sealed, and
painted. A light film of oil covers internal parts to prevent rust. External shafts are
coated with a spray lubricant. No internal cleaning or flushing is necessary before
installation and operation or customer retesting.
D R A6 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 502 / 633
Storage
The governor may be stored for short periods of time as received from the
factory. For long-term storage, storage in a hostile environment (large
temperature changes, humid or corrosive atmosphere), or if the governor is
installed on the turbine for storage, fill the governor with oil and follow
preservation packaging instructions in Woodward Manual 25075, Commercial
Preservation Packaging for Storage of Mechanical-Hydraulic Controls.
If the breather/filler cap has been moved for horizontal governor operation and
the governor is to be stored vertically, replace the cap with a plug before filling
the governor with oil to prevent oil from draining through the cap.
Drive-Shaft Rotation
Governor drive-shaft rotation is determined by looking at the governor from the
top.
The correct direction of rotation of the TG, when viewed from the top
of the governor, is stamped “cw” (clockwise) or “ccw”
(counterclockwise) on the governor nameplate.
Governor drive-shaft rotation is single direction only. When looking at the

governor from the top, the direction of rotation must be the same as the turbine-
shaft rotation when looking at the mounting pad.
If the governor oil pump is rotated in the wrong direction, the governor will not
have oil pressure. Without oil pressure, pump parts start heating up, which can
result in possible seizure of rotating parts.
Be sure governor-drive and turbine-drive rotation is the same when

looking at the governor and the mounting pad from the top. Incorrect
drive rotation may cause governor damage.
Changing Drive-Shaft Rotation

TG with a Pump Eccentric not Machined into The Base
1. See Figures 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3.
2. Remove the governor from the turbine. Drain all oil from the governor.
3. Place the governor on its side with the cooler tap up.
4. Turn the key slot on the drive shaft to face up.
5. Remove the four pump-housing screws and remove the pump housing.
6. Notice the directional arrows stamped on the pump housing. Turn the
eccentric ring so that the pin hole is next to the arrow for desired shaft
rotation.
D R A Woodward 7
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 503 / 633
Figure 2-1. Pump-Housing Assembly
7. Insert the pin into the pin hole in the eccentric (pin must drop below flush).
8. Place the inner and outer gear in the pump housing.
9. Be sure that the key slot in the drive shaft is turned up and the square-
headed pin on the pump drive is in place.
Figure 2-2. Pump -Housing Assembly
10. Install the pump-housing assembly on the drive shaft and align the slot in
the inner gear with the pump-drive pin.
Figure 2-3. Location of Pump-Drive Pin
D R A8 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 504 / 633
Do NOT turn the drive shaft in order to engage the outer and inner
pump gears. It is possible for the pump drive pin to fall out if the
drive shaft is turned. The square head on the pump drive pin must
remain against the case bottom as shown in Figure 2-3.
11. Fasten the pump housing to the case with four screws and torque to
33.9 Nm (300 lb-in).
12. Make sure that the drive shaft rotates freely.
13. Place the ballhead retaining collar on the drive shaft. Leave 0.25 mm
(0.010 inch) clearance between the pump housing and collar. Torque to
5.6 Nm (50 lb-in).
If the drive shaft does not rotate freely, loosen the four screws on the
pump housing, align the pump, and tighten the screws.
TG with a Pump Eccentric Machined into the Base
1. See Figures 2-4, 2-5, and 2-6.
2. Remove the four pump-housing screws.
Figure 2-4. Pump-Housing Assembly
Hold the pump-housing assembly flat against the governor case

when rotating the pump housing 180 degrees. (See WARNING
below.)
If the pump shaft (124) is allowed to become separated from the ballhead drive
shaft (123) [see Figure 6-3], the governor will call for maximum fuel, possibly
causing a dangerous overspeed.
Death, personal injury and/or extensive damage to equipment can

result if the governor pump is reassembled with ballhead shaft and
the pump drive shaft disconnected.
D R A Woodward 9
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 505 / 633
3. Rotate the pump-housing assembly 180 degrees.
4. Align the arrow on the pump housing with the reference point on the
governor case. Figure 2-5 shows the setup for clockwise (cw) rotation of the
governor drive shaft, and Figure 2-6 shows the setup for counterclockwise
(ccw) rotation of the governor drive shaft.
Figure 2-5. Setup for Clockwise Rotation of the Governor Drive Shaft
Figure 2-6. Setup for Counterclockwise Rotation of the Governor Drive Shaft
As seen in Figure 2-5, a TG described as having a “clockwise rotation” is set

using the arrow that points counterclockwise next to the reference point on
the governor case. And a TG described as having a “counterclockwise
rotation,” as in Figure 2-6, is set using the arrow that points clockwise next
to the reference point on the governor case. This is because normal rotation
is stated viewing the governor from the top, whereas the governor is viewed
from the bottom while changing rotation.
1. If the governor is fitted with a speed-setting screw, turn the speed-setting

screw fully clockwise. If the governor is fitted with a lever speed setting, bring
the speed-setting shaft to the maximum-fuel position using serration wrench
030943 and hold the speed-setting shaft in that position. This will compress
the governor speeder spring and prevent a separation of the governor drive
shaft (124) form the ballhead assembly (123) (see Figure 6-3).
Be sure that the drive shaft line engages with the bushing.
D R A10 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 506 / 633
Now keep maintaining pressure on the speeder spring while replacing the
four screws, and torque to 9.0 Nm (80 lb-in). If the governor is equipped
with an extended drive shaft (Figure 6-4), torque to 5.6 to 7.0 Nm
(50 to 62 lb-in).
5. Make sure that the drive shaft rotates freely.
6. Remove the cover and make sure that the ballhead is rotating when the
pump drive shaft is rotated. It is possible to reassemble the pump with the
ballhead disengaged. If this happens, the governor will call for maximum
fuel, possibly causing a dangerous overspeed.
Death, personal injury and/or extensive damage to equipment can

result if the governor pump is reassembled with ballhead shaft and
the pump drive shaft disconnected.
Governor Mounting
This governor can be mounted vertically or horizontally. Mounting is called
vertical or horizontal if the drive shaft is in a vertical or horizontal position when
viewing the governor installed on its mounting base.
The breather/filler cap and the drain plug are factory installed for vertical
governor operation. For horizontal operation, the breather/filler cap and drain
plug must be interchanged (each moved to the other’s position). Retighten the
breather/filler cap and drain plug to prevent them from leaking (25.4 ±1.7 Nm /
225 ±15 lb-in torque).
This places the servopiston on the bottom, keeping it completely immersed in oil
and preventing air from being trapped in the servopiston. See the outline
drawings (Figure 2-10) for alternate cap and plug positions as well as governor
mounting-hole locations and hole sizes. This also places the oil sight gauge
above the terminal shaft. The oil sight gauge may be moved to the right side, if
desirable.
For horizontal operation, the TG governor must be installed with the

oil sight gauge at the top of the governor, as shown in Figure 2-8.
Make sure that there is adequate clearance for attaching the fuel control or
steam-valve linkage, manual speed adjustment or speed-setting lever linkage,
and for oil maintenance.
Be sure that the device-shaft rotation (clockwise or counterclockwise), and the

governor speed setting is correct for your installation.
Correct direction of the governor drive-shaft and the maximum

governor speed setting is stamped on the data plate.
D R A Woodward 11
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 507 / 633
Governor drive-shaft rotation is single direction only. When looking at the
governor from the top, the direction of rotation must be the same as the turbine-
shaft rotation when looking at the mounting pad.
Be sure turbine drive and governor drive directions of rotation are

the same. Incorrect drive rotation may cause governor damage.
If the governor oil pump rotates in the wrong direction, there will be
no oil pressure. Without oil pressure, pump parts will heat up, and
seizure of rotating parts will result.
Be sure that the governor drive shaft is accurately aligned and concentric with
the turbine shaft. All fits must be close but free. The drive coupling used must
allow for thermal expansion without end-loading the drive shaft. The coupling
must also ensure that no side loads are applied to the governor drive shaft.
Do not pound the drive coupling on the governor drive shaft, or force
the governor into position. The drive shaft diameter is 12.675 to
12.687 mm (0.4990 to 0.4995 inch). Force could damage the governor.
Use a gasket between the governor and the turbine mounting pad to allow for
surface imperfections. Using a drive coupling of the correct length, and a No. 5
Woodruff key, install the governor on the mounting pad. Tighten the four
governor mounting bolts equally.
Refer to the turbine manufacturer’s specifications for torque limits

when tightening the four governor mounting bolts.
Linkage Attachments
Terminal Shaft
The terminal shaft extends from both sides of the case and provides 40 degrees
of full governor travel. Recommended travel between no load and full load is 2/3
of full governor travel. See Figure 1-1 for a graphic representation of maximum
work capacity for the TG and related governor terminal shaft travel information.
Installed linkages must operate smoothly, free of binding, and can be spring
loaded in the shutdown direction only to remove looseness.
Be sure to allow sufficient overtravel at each end of the terminal

shaft. Failure to provide sufficient overtravel at maximum fuel
position can prevent the prime mover from giving maximum fuel
when required. Failure to provide sufficient overtravel at minimum
fuel position can prevent the governor from shutting down the prime
mover and result in possible damage to equipment and personal
injury.
Linkage should be free of any friction or binding. All lost motion should be
eliminated. Terminal shaft connections should be a 0.625 to 0.636 serration
clamped to the output shaft. Refer to Figure 2-7, for typical linkage arrangement.
D R A12 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 508 / 633
Speed Setting Linkage

If the TG-13 or TG-17 is equipped with optional lever speed setting, linkage to
the speed-setting shaft on either side must be installed. Lever speed setting
requires 30 degrees travel for full governor speed-range. An internal return spring
with a maximum force of 2.5 Nm (22 lb-in) is acting on the speed setting shaft.
Speed-setting linkage also must operate smoothly, without binding or looseness.
Figure 2-7. Typical Linkage Arrangement for the TG Governor
Heat Exchanger Installation (optional)

If it is necessary to install a heat exchanger, mount it below governor oil level in
order to prevent overflow of oil through the governor breather/filler cap. Flush the
heat exchanger before installation with the same grade and type of oil selected
for the TG governor (see Oil Supply below) to remove possible oxidation.
Make the required piping connections to the cooler and the governor (see Figure 2-9,
which illustrates tap locations and piping connections). Notice in Figure 2-8, Heat-
Exchanger Tap Locations, that there are two tap locations for the oil from the cooler
outlet. Which tap location is used depends on the governor mounting position.
Pipe must be sized to minimize pipe-pressure losses, which must not exceed
103 kPa (15 psi). Oil flow from the oil to cooler inlet tap (0.125”-27 NPTF) on a
governor operating at 6000 rpm and using a 0.188 thick gerotor pump (0.188 is
standard thickness on high-speed governors) is 3.8 L/min at 1034 kPa (1 US
gal/min at 150 psi). Install a governor oil drain in the oil-from-cooler outlet pipe at
the lowest point in the system (see Figure 2-9).
It is recommended that a throttling device be installed so that coolant flow to the

heat exchanger can be regulated for optimum operating temperature of the oil.
Excessive cooling of governor oil can cause marginal operation.
D R A Woodward 13
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 509 / 633
Oil Supply
Remove the breather/filler cap and fill the governor with 1.7 L (1.8 US quarts) of
oil to a level visible on the oil sight gauge. Additional oil is required if the governor
uses an oil heat-exchanger. Always make sure that the oil level is visible on the
oil sight gauge before starting. After the turbine is started and the governor is at
operating temperature, add oil if necessary.
Select an oil based on the operating temperature of the governor (see Table 2-1).
Figure 2-8. Heat-Exchanger Tap Locations
Figure 2-9. Heat-Exchanger Piping Schematic
Use Tables 2-1 and 2-2 as a guide in the selection of a suitable lubricating/
hydraulic oil. Oil grade selection is based on the operating-temperature range of
the governor. Also, use this information to aid in recognizing and correcting
common oil problems.
D R A14 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 510 / 633
For applications where the governor shares the oil supply with the turbine, use
the oil recommended by the turbine manufacturer.
Governor oil is both a lubrication oil and a hydraulic oil. It must have a viscosity
index that allows it to perform over the operating-temperature range, and it must
have the proper blending of additives that cause it to remain stable and
predictable over this range.
Governor oil must be compatible with seal materials (nitrile, polyacrylic, and
fluorocarbon). Many automotive and gas-engine oils, industrial lubrications oils,
and other oils of mineral or synthetic origin, meet these requirements.
Woodward governors are designed to give stable operation with most oils with a
viscosity, at operating temperature, of between 50 and 3000 SUS (Saybolt
Universal Seconds). At normal operating temperature, the viscosity should be
between 100 to 300 SUS. Poor actuator response or instability may be an
indications that oil viscosity is outside this range.
Excessive component wear or seizure in a governor indicates the possibility of:
1. Insufficient lubrication caused by:

 An oil that flows slowly when it is cold, especially during start-up.
 No oil in the governor.
2. Contaminated oil caused by:

 Dirty oil containers.
 A governor exposed to heating-up and cooling-down cycles, which
creates condensation of water in the oil.
3. Oil not suitable for the operating conditions caused by:

 Changes in ambient temperature.
 An improper oil level which creates foamy, aerated oil.
Operating a governor continuously beyond the high-limit temperature of the oil

will result in oil oxidation. This is identified by varnish or sludge deposits on the
governor parts. To reduce oil oxidation, lower the actuator operating-temperature
with a heat exchanger or other means, or change to an oil more oxidation-
resistant at the operating temperature.
A loss of stable governor control and possible turbine overspeed

may result if the viscosity is not within the 50 to 3000 SUS range. An
overspeeding and/or runaway prime mover can result in extensive
damage to the equipment, personal injury and/or loss of life.
Specific oil-viscosity recommendations are given in the Oil Chart (Table 2-1).
Select a readily available good brand of oil, either mineral or synthetic, and
continue using that same brand. Do NOT mix different classes of oils. Oil that
meets the API (American Petroleum Institute) engine-service classification in
either the “S” group or the “C” group, starting with “SA” or “CA” through “SF” and
“CD” is suitable for governor service. Oils meeting performance requirements of
the following specifications are also suitable: US MIL-L-2104A, MIL-L-2104B,
MIL-L-2104C, MIL-L-46152, MIL-L-46152A, MIL-L-46152B, MIL-L-45199B.
D R A Woodward 15
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 511 / 633
Replace the governor oil if it is either contaminated or suspected of contributing
to governor instability, or every three years if the governor is in continuous
operation. Drain the oil while it is still hot and agitated; flush the governor with a
clean solvent having some lubrication quality (such as fuel oil or kerosene)
before refilling with new oil. If drain time is insufficient for the solvent to
completely drain or evaporate, flush the governor with the same oil it is being
refilled with to avoid dilution and possible contamination of the new oil. To avoid
recontamination, the replacement oil should be free of dirt, water, and other
foreign material. Use clean containers to store and transfer oil.
Observe manufacturer’s instructions or restrictions regarding the

use of solvents. If no instructions are available, handle with care. Use
the cleaning solvent in a well ventilated area away from fires or
sparks.
Failure to follow the above safety instructions can result in

dangerous fires, extensive damage to equipment, personal injury
and/or loss of life.
Oil that has carefully selected to match the operating conditions and is
compatible with governor components should give long service between oil
changes. For governors operating under ideal conditions (minimum exposure to
dust and water and within the temperature limits of the oil), oil changes can be
extended. If available, a regularly scheduled oil analysis is helpful in determining
the frequency of oil changes.
Any persistent or recurring oil problems should be referred to a qualified oil

specialist for solution.
When is a Heat Exchanger Necessary?

The maximum surface temperature of the TG governor must stay below the
lowest ignition temperature of the surrounding explosive atmosphere and within
allowable operating conditions for the oil. The recommended continuous
operating temperature of the oil is 60 to 93 °C (140 to 200 °F). The ambient
temperature limits are –29 to +93 °C (–20 to +200 °F). Measure the temperature
of the governor on the outside lower part of the case. The actual oil temperature
will by slightly warmer by approximately 6 °C (10 °F).
Some applications of the TG governor may require that an oil heat exchanger be
used to prevent oil breakdown, excessive surface temperatures, and problems
due to excessive oil temperatures. TG governors operating at low and medium
speed-ranges (1100 to 2400 rpm and 2400 to 4000 rpm) do not normally require
use of a heat exchanger. The high-speed governor (4000 to 6000 rpm) may
require a heat exchanger in some applications.
Factors such as oil viscosity, governor speed, heat radiation from surrounding
sources, and mounting pad and ambient temperatures affect oil conditions,
necessitating an oil cooler. See Woodward Manual 25071, Oils for Hydraulic
Controls.
Depending on the individual installation, and external oil cooler may be required.
If the oil viscosity at operating temperature is below 100 SUS, an oil cooler is
required. The TG governor is equipped with a cooler tap.
D R A16 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 512 / 633
Table 2-1. Oil Chart
Table 2-2. Viscosity Comparisons
D R A Woodward 17
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 513 / 633
Under laboratory test conditions, a single pass, counter-flow heat exchanger with
0.09 to 0.19 m² (1 to 2 ft²) of effective heat-transfer area provides adequate
cooling for most high-speed TG governor applications. If there is doubt
concerning the need for, or size of a heat exchanger, contact Woodward or your
local authorized distributor.
Overspeed Test Device

If you need to install an Overspeed Test Device on an older TG governor, please
see Woodward application note 51348, TG611-13/-17 Overspeed Test Device
Conversion Kit.
D R A18 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 514 / 633
Figure 2-10a. TG-13/TG-17 Outline Drawing

Screw Speed Setting. Cast Iron Case. Do Not Use For Construction
D R A Woodward 19
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 515 / 633
Figure 2-10b. TG-13/TG-17 Outline Drawing

Lever Speed Setting. Cast-Iron Case. Do Not Use For Construction
D R A20 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 516 / 633
Figure 2-10c. TG-13/TG-17 Outline Drawing

Lever Speed Setting. Die-Cast Aluminum Case. Do Not Use For Construction
D R A Woodward 21
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 517 / 633
Figure 2-10d. TG-13/TG-17 Outline Drawing

Screw Speed Setting. Die-Cast Aluminum Case. Do Not Use For Construction
D R A22 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 518 / 633
Figure 2-10e. TG611-13/TG611-17 Outline Drawing

Screw Speed Setting. Die-Cast Aluminum Case. Do Not Use For Construction
(Other than dimensions shown, TG611 dimensions are the same as other
TG-13/TG-17)
D R A Woodward 23
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 519 / 633
Chapter 3.
Governor Operation and Adjustments
Introduction
This chapter provides initial operating instructions and adjustment features of the
TG-13/TG-17 and TG611-13/TG611-17 governors.
Due to typical noise levels in turbine environments, hearing

protection should be worn when working on or around the TG
governor.
The surface of this product can become hot enough to be a hazard.

Use protective gear for product handling in these circumstances.
Initial Operation
Before initial operation of the TG equipped turbine, be sure that all previous
installation steps are successfully accomplished.

property damage.
Normally, the only requirements for putting a new or overhauled governor into
service are to fill the governor with oil and adjust the rated speed setting. All
other adjustments are accomplished during factory testing according to turbine-
manufacturer specifications and should not require further adjustments.
Governor speed setting is factory set to give governor rated speed at initial
start-up. This setting may be different than the rated turbine speed. It is
recommended that the speed setting be decreased before start-up by turning the
manual speed-setting screw, or by turning the high-speed stop screw clockwise
on lever speed-setting models to give low speed at initial start-up.
Open the steam valve slowly. Check the turbine speed and adjust as necessary
to bring the turbine to rated speed. Make sure the terminal-shaft linkage to the
valve is correctly adjusted to allow maximum and minimum steam-flow
requirement.
Check the governor for stable operation by manually disturbing the terminal shaft
linkage or speed setting. Governor stability is satisfactory when the governor
returns to speed with only a slight over or undershoot. Instability indicates the
need for adjustment of droop.
D R A24 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 520 / 633
Speed Droop
Speed droop, or simply droop, is a method of creating stability in a governor. It is
the decrease in speed taking place when the governor terminal shaft moves from
the minimum-fuel to the maximum-fuel position in response to a load increase,
expressed as a percentage of rated speed.
If instead of a decrease in speed, an increase takes place, the governor is

showing a negative droop. Negative droop will cause instability in a governor.
Not enough droop can cause instability in the form of hunting, or surging, in
response to a load change. Too much droop can result in slow governor
response in picking up or drooping off a load. Droop can be calculated with the
following formula:
No Load Speed – Full Load Speed
% Droop = x 100
Full Load Speed
Droop Adjustment
The factory-made, 6% droop setting for 20 degrees terminal-shaft travel will
provide sufficient stability for most applications and will not normally need to be
adjusted before governor operation. Adjustment may be necessary if the
governor has been disassembled.
If the governor terminal shaft does not use 2/3 of full governor travel
from “NO LOAD” to “FULL LOAD”, droop also will be reduced
proportionately.
Adjustment of droop may be required during governor operation if the governor

shows instability or difficulty in responding to a load change. Instability, in the
form of hunting or surging, indicates insufficient droop, and the droop-adjusting
lever should be positioned to increase droop. If the TG shows difficulty in
accepting load, or where the governor becomes unstable after a load change,
excessive droop is indicated.
In cases where the governor droop setting must be changed on the turbine, use
the following droop-adjusting procedure:
1. Shut down the turbine.
2. Remove the cover assembly to gain access to the droop-adjusting lever.

Use care while removing the cover not to damage the cover gasket. If the
governor is horizontally mounted, drain governor oil before removing the
cover. The cover also fastens internal parts that can fall out, especially on
horizontally mounted governors.
3. Loosen the socket-head screw which fastens the droop-adjusting lever just
enough to slide the lever a very small amount, approximately 0.8 mm (1/32
inch) at a time, in the direction desired to adjust droop.
Moving the droop-adjusting lever away or towards the terminal shaft center
line, increases or decreases droop, respectively (see Figure 3-1).
Do not move the droop-adjusting lever in the decrease-droop

direction too far toward zero droop (the center line of the terminal
shaft), as this results in an unstable operation. TG governors are not
stable at “0” droop.
D R A Woodward 25
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 521 / 633
4. Tighten the screw and install the cover. Torque the cover screws to 11.3
Nm (100 lb-in) for cast iron governors.
5. Fill the governor with oil to a level visible on the oil sight gauge.
Figure 3-1. Droop-Adjusting Lever Movement
6. Observe governor operating behavior again and repeat adjustments to the

droop-adjusting lever until governor operation is satisfactory. If repeated
attempts at adjustment fail to provide governor stability, other problems are
indicated. See Troubleshooting, Table 5-1.
The TG cover fastens internal parts into operating position. Do not

operate the TG governor without the cover assembly in place. Failure
to fasten the cover assembly securely in place can result in
extensive damage to equipment and personal injury.
Operation of the Overspeed Test Device

Adjusting the Overspeed Test Device
The overspeed test device (OTD) must be adjusted for each application trip
speed.
1. Begin the adjustment procedure with the turbine shut down.
2. Remove (unthread) the cap from the overspeed test device.
3. In the following steps, use the cap and adjusting dowel pin (Figure 6-6 item
1) to fully actuate the overspeed test device cam (Figure 6-6 item 12).
You must ensure that the overspeed device is fully activated before
adjusting it. The OTD cap and adjusting pin must not be touching
anything but the cam during the adjustment procedure.
D R A26 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 522 / 633
4. With the turbine shut down, rotate the cam to full-stroke position and hold it
in place while making sure that the trip push rod (Figure 6-6 item 14) is
backed out as far as it can go, by turning it counterclockwise (CCW) with a
3/32” Allen wrench.
New units from the factory will already be set this way.
5. Start and run the turbine at rated “no-load” speed.
6. Using the cap and adjusting pin, rotate the cam to full stroke position again
and hold it in place (Figure 3-2).
7. While holding the cam in full-stroke position and monitoring the speed, use a
3/32” Allen wrench to adjust the push rod clockwise (CW), just until the trip
speed is reached.
This may or may not cause the turbine trip mechanism to trip.
8. While still holding the cam in full-stroke position, slowly turn the trip push rod
clockwise (CW) an additional amount (about 1/2 turn in increments of no
more than 1/8 turn) to obtain approximately 1% to 2% over the trip point.
This should cause the turbine trip mechanism to trip.
This additional setting is the ultimate speed stop to ensure that the
turbine will never be taken more than 2% above the normal trip speed
setting if the turbine trip mechanism should fail.
Using the Overspeed Test Function
Figure 3-2. Operating the Overspeed Test Device
D R A Woodward 27
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 523 / 633
This is the procedure to follow in order to test the overspeed test function using
the TG Governor overspeed test device (OTD).
1. Remove (unthread) the cap from the overspeed test device.
2. Run the turbine at rated “no load” speed.
3. With the system set up for the overspeed test, rotate the cam using the cap
and adjusting pin until the speed begins to rise (Note: most of the travel is
used to move the internal linkage to the beginning of the test start point).
4. When the speed begins to rise, continue to slowly rotate the cam, thereby
raising the turbine speed, until the trip speed is reached.
5. The unit should trip at the trip speed. Return the cam to its original stowed
position, and the unit will return to the rated speed.
6. Replace the cap, hand tight.
7. If the OTD reached the trip speed and the trip function did not work, repair
the trip mechanism and then repeat this procedure.
8. If the OTD did not reach the trip speed, follow the OTD adjustment
procedure above to set the OTD to the correct trip speed and then repeat
this procedure.
To prevent malfunction of the overspeed test device (OTD) due to

contamination from dirt or water, the OTD protective cap must be
kept in place (hand-tight) when the OTD is not in use.
D R A28 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 524 / 633
Chapter 4.
Principles of Operation
Introduction
Internally, the TG-13/TG-17 and TG611-13/TG611-17 governor consists of the
following basic items:
 oil pump
 oil accumulator
 speeder-spring
 ballhead and pilot-valve bushing assembly
 pilot-valve plunger
 servopiston
 droop adjustment
 speed adjustment
 terminal lever and shafts
A schematic diagram (Figure 4-1) shows the relationship of these various items
and provides a visual means of understanding the operation of the TG governor.
Description of Operation
Oil Pressure and Distribution
The governor is normally driven by the turbine through a flexible coupling. The
inner gerotor of the oil pump is keyed to the governor drive shaft and pilot-valve
bushing. The pump draws oil from the sump and distributes it through the oil
passages within the case. Oil is also discharged to the spring-loaded
accumulator. The relief valve/accumulator maintains 1034 kPa (150 psi)
operating pressure at rated speed for the TG-13/TG611-13 and 1379 kPa
(200 psi) operating pressure at rated speed for the TG-17/TG611-17. Excess
pressure compresses the accumulator springs and oil is released to sump during
steady-state operation.
A change in speed and centrifugal force moves the flyweights out or in. This
moves the pilot-valve plunger either upward or downward depending on whether
it is an increase or decrease in speed. Plunger movement opens the control port
and releases oil either to sump or to the underside of the servopiston. During
servopiston movement in the increase-fuel direction, the accumulator
supplements the system oil supply with its stored volume of high-pressure oil and
helps maintain the full work capacity of the governor.
Ballhead Operation
The ballhead assembly contains two flyweights, speeder spring, thrust bearing,
pilot-valve plunger and pilot-valve bushing. As the flyweights are rotated, they
produce a centrifugal force that is opposed by the downward force of the
speeder-spring. The speeder-spring force can be varied by adjusting the speed-
setting screw, or speed-setting lever.
A thrust bearing on top of the flyweight toes permits the pilot-valve bushing to
rotate around the pilot-valve plunger. This reduces friction between the bushing
and plunger.
D R A Woodward 29
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 525 / 633
Pilot-Valve Function
When the turbine is running at the governor set speed, the pilot-valve plunger is
centered, covering the control ports of the pilot-valve bushing. In this position, no
oil is discharged from or flows to the servopiston, and the governor terminal shaft
cannot move. A change in either the flyweight centrifugal force (speed change) or
the speeder-spring force (speed setting) moves the plunger from its centered
position. Plunger movement opens the control port and releases oil either to
sump or to the underside of the servopiston.
The pilot-valve plunger lowers if:

 An additional load slows the turbine and governor speed. This decreases
the centrifugal force of the rotating flyweights which opposes the force for
the speeder spring.
 The turbine speed is unchanged, but speeder-spring force is increased by
raising the governor speed setting with the speed-setting screw or speed-
setting lever.
Lowering the pilot-valve plunger opens the control ports. High-pressure oil is
released to the area below the servopiston, forcing the servopiston upwards. This
rotates the governor terminal shaft in the increase-steam direction.
As the servopiston rises, the speeder-spring force is decreased by movement of

the terminal lever and allows the pilot-valve plunger to rise. The flow of high-
pressure oil to the servopiston is closed off by the control land, stopping the
upward motion of the servopiston.
The pilot-valve plunger raises if:

 The centrifugal force of the rotating flyweights is increased by a load
decrease on the turbine. This causes an increase in turbine and governor
speed.
 The governor speed is lowered by reducing the speeder-spring force with
the speed-adjusting screw.
Raising the pilot-valve plunger again opens the ports, but this time control oil is
released to sump from below the servopiston. High-pressure oil in the area
above the servopiston cylinder forces the piston down. This rotates the terminal
shaft in the decrease-steam or fuel direction. Speeder-spring pressure increases,
forcing the pilot-valve plunger downward. Terminal-shaft movement stops as the
control land covers the ports, stopping the release of control oil.
Droop-Adjusting Lever Function

Note that as the terminal lever rotates in the increase-fuel direction, the droop-
adjusting lever is lifted and decreases the speeder-spring force on the flyweights.
Thus, the ballhead is allowed to re-center the pilot-valve plunger at lower speeds
as fuel is increased. This characteristic is referred to as “speed droop”. Closing
the control port stops further movement of the servopiston simultaneously with
the return of turbine speed to a speed determined by the new speed or spring
force.
When moving in the decrease-fuel direction, the terminal lever lowers the droop-
adjusting lever and increases the speeder-spring force. This increase in speeder-
spring force re-centers the pilot-valve plunger and stops further servopiston
movement.
D R A30 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 526 / 633
The amount of speed change, or droop, for a given amount of terminal shaft
rotation depends upon the positioning of the droop-adjusting lever on the terminal
lever.
Figure 4-1. TG-13/TG-17 and TG611-13/TG611-17 Schematic Diagram
D R A Woodward 31
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 527 / 633
Overspeed Test Device Function

The overspeed test device (OTD), if so equipped, is used to safely test the
independent trip function on the turbine by allowing a controlled method of
increasing the speed of the TG Governor. The OTD must be set by the end user
such that the speed can be increased to a maximum of 2% over the trip speed
setting, thereby ensuring that the trip speed is reached, but the OTD will not
allow the speed to be increased more than 2% over the trip speed. If the test
device is released during operation, the governor will return to the current rated
speed setting of the governor. The OTD is adjustable and can be set to a
different trip speed setting if necessary.
D R A32 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 528 / 633
Chapter 5.
Troubleshooting
Introduction
Faults in governor operation are usually revealed as speed variations of the
turbine. But not all such variations indicate a governor fault. Therefore, when
improper operation is evident, check all components, adjustment settings, and
the turbine for correct operation.
Use the following troubleshooting table to isolate and remedy faults in the
governed system. When requesting additional information or service help from
Woodward or an authorized service shop, it is important to include the following
information:
 Governor serial number and part number shown on nameplate.
 A complete description of all problems and symptoms.
See Chapter 7 for Woodward locations.
Visual Inspection
Before attempting to troubleshoot the system, visually check the following items:
1. Check linkages installed between the governor output and a steam valve and
any speed-setting linkage. Common sources of trouble are binding, lost
motion, or inadequate travel.
2. Check the oil for proper level and good condition. Dirty oil causes many
governor troubles. Oil contaminated by water or excessive heat breaks down
rapidly, causing foaming and corrosion of internal parts.
3. Check for correct turbine operation. Be sure the drive to the governor drive is
smooth and free of torsion vibration.
4. Be sure the speed variations are not the result of load changes beyond the
capacity of the turbine.
Definitions
Terms used in the troubleshooting chart are defined as follows. See Table 5-1 for
troubleshooting information.
HUNT—A rhythmic variation of speed which can originate in the governor or in

the prime mover. A hunt usually has a frequency of less than 50 cycles per
minute.
SURGE—A rhythmic variation of speed occurring at periodic intervals which can

also originate in the governor or in the prime mover.
JIGGLE—A high frequency vibration of the governor terminal shaft and fuel
linkage. Do not confuse this with normal controlling action of the governor. A
jiggle has a frequency of more than 50 cycles per minute.
D R A Woodward 33
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 529 / 633

property damage.
Symptom Cause Correction
1. The Turbine hunts or surges. A. Low oil level. Add oil to a level visible in the oil
sight gauge.
B. Dirt in governor. Remove old oil, flush with

lightweight oil, and refill to correct
level with fresh oil.
C. Binding terminal-shaft linkage. Re-align linkage as necessary. If

the governor was recently
dissembled, make sure that the
terminal-shaft bearings do not
bind internally on the terminal
lever.
D. Insufficient droop adjustment. Reposition the droop-adjusting

lever to increase droop.
2. Governor terminal shaft jiggles. A. Improper alignment of the Check and repair as necessary.
governor drive coupling.
B. Worn flyweight pins. Return governor to factory for

repair.
3. The governor shows difficulty in A. Insufficient use of terminal- Check linkage. Recommended
accepting load, or is unstable as shaft travel. travel is 2/3 of full governor travel
evidence by a slow and unsteady for the TG governor from no load
oscillation, especially after a load to full load.
change.
Droop and its stabilizing effect

are a function of governor
terminal-shaft travel. If the
governor terminal-shaft linkage
is arranged so that only a small
percentage of terminal shaft
travel is used from no load to
full load, droop and its
B. Too much droop. stabilizing effect is reduced
proportionally.
Reposition the droop-adjusting

C. High steam-valve gain. lever for decreased-droop
compensation.
Make sure that the steam valve is

D. Dirt in governor oil. not too large or oversize for the
particular application.
Drain, flush, and refill with fresh

oil.
D R A34 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 530 / 633
Symptom Cause Correction
4. The turbine does not pick up A. Speed-setting too low. Increase governor speed setting.
rated full load.
B. Incorrect terminal shaft linkage Check linkage. Recommended
travel. travel 2/3 of full governor travel
for the TG governor from no load
to full load.
C. Governor speed range is Check speed range of the

incorrect for the particular governor.
application.
D. Droop setting too high. Reposition droop-adjusting lever

to decrease droop.
5. The governor does not start or A. Wrong governor drive rotation. Check the turbine drive to the
control. governor. Reverse pump parts for
different rotation if necessary.
B. Key not properly installed or Check drive installation.

missing, drive shaft is not
engaged.
C. Pump drive pin in broken. Return governor to factory for

repair.
6. Governor starts, but remains at A. Speed setting too high. Reduce speed setting until
maximum. governor controls, then adjust for
desired speed.
D R A Woodward 35
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 531 / 633
Chapter 6.
Replacement Parts
Replacement Parts Information

When ordering replacement parts, include the following information:
 Governor serial number and part number shown on nameplate.
 Manual number (this is Manual 04042).
 Parts reference number in parts list and description of part or part name.
See Chapter 7 for Woodward locations.
Personal injury may result if accumulator springs are released

suddenly. Use an arbor press to release or to install the accumulator
springs.
Replacement Parts List for Figure 6-1

Ref. No. Part Name ................................................................ Quantity
04042-1 Drive screw ........................................................................... 2
04042-2 Governor nameplate ............................................................. 1
04042-3 Breather/Filler cap ................................................................. 1
04042-4 Cover (for screw speed setting ............................................. 1
04042-5 Cover gasket ......................................................................... 1
04042-6 Screw, soc hd .250-20 x 1.00” .............................................. 3
04042-7 Flat washer, .265 x .500” ...................................................... 1
04042-8 Droop-adjusting lever ............................................................ 1
04042-9 Screw, soc hd sems, 250-20 x 2.00 ...................................... 2
04042-9A Washer, .250 internal shockproof ......................................... 2
04042-9B Washer, .265 x .500 x .064 thick........................................... 2
04042-10 Connection link (chain link) ................................................... 1
04042-11 Servopiston bushing.............................................................. 1
04042-12 Servopiston ........................................................................... 1
04042-13 Straight pin ............................................................................ 1
04042-14 Preformed packing ring, 2.114 ID x .070 .............................. 1
04042-15 Gerotor oil pump ................................................................... 1
04042-16 Pump spacers ....................................... (use none, 1 or 2 AR)
04042-17 Pump housing ....................................................................... 1
04042-18 Taper pin, #5 ......................................................................... 2
04042-19 Oil seal .................................................................................. 1
04042-20 Ballhead retainer collar ......................................................... 1
04042-21 Screw, soc hd sems, .312-18 x 1.00”.................................... 4
04042-22 Terminal shaft ....................................................................... 2
04042-23 Oil seal .................................................................................. 2
04042-24 Roller bearing ........................................................................ 2
04042-25 Pipe plug, .062-27 NPTF ...................................................... 1
04042-26 Pipe plug, .125-27 NPTF ...................................................... 2
04042-26A Pipe plug .250-18 NPTF ....................................................... 1
04042-27 TG-13 and -17 case .............................................................. 1
04042-28 Oil baffle ................................................................................ 1
04042-28A Oil baffle (high speed TG-13 or TG-17 only) ........................ 1
04042-29 .................................................................................. Not used
04042-30 Ballhead bushing assembly .................................................. 1
D R A36 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 532 / 633
04042-31 Terminal lever ........................................................................1
04042-32 Flyweight pin ..........................................................................2
04042-33 Flyweight ................................................................................2
04042-34 Ballhead cover .......................................................................1
04042-35 Feedback lever ......................................................................1
04042-36 Spring clip ..............................................................................1
04042-37 Pivot block ..............................................................................1
04042-38 Screw, hex hd ........................................................................8
04042-39 Preformed packing ring ..........................................................1
04042-40 Flat washer, .515 x .875.........................................................1
04042-41 Wave washer .........................................................................1
04042-42 Speed-setting screw ..............................................................1
04042-43 Pivot pin .................................................................................1
04042-44 High-speed stop washer, s.s..................................................2
04042-45 Speeder-spring screw ............................................................1
04042-45A Speeder spring .......................................................................1
04042-46 Pilot-valve plunger .................................................................1
04042-47 Thrust bearing ........................................................................1
04042-48 Retaining ring .........................................................................1
04042-49 Spring seat .............................................................................1
04042-50 Accumulator spring, small ......................................................1
04042-51 Accumulator spring, large ......................................................1
04042-52 Accumulator piston ................................................................1
04042-53 Oil sight gauge .......................................................................1
04042-54 Pipe plug, .500- 14 NPTF ......................................................2
04042-55 Pump drive pin, square head .................................................1
04042-56 Preformed packing ring, 1.176 ID x .0706 .............................1
04042-57 Bore plug ................................................................................1
04042-58 Retaining ring .........................................................................1
04042-59 Preformed packing-ring, 1.424 ID .x .0706 ............................1
04042-60 Bore plug ................................................................................1
04042-61 Retaining ring .........................................................................1
04042-62 Rotation Decal .......................................................................1
04042-63 to 79 ............................................................................. Not used
D R A Woodward 37
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 533 / 633
Reference Numbers 1 through 62 are on this page.
Figure 6-1. Parts for the TG-13 and -17 Governor, Cast-Iron Case, Screw Speed
Setting
Injury may result if compressed springs 50 and 51 are released

suddenly. Use the proper equipment to remove springs and spring
covers.
D R A38 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 534 / 633

Reference numbers 63 through 79 are not used.
04042-80 Cover (for lever speed setting)...............................................1
04042-81 Bushing ..................................................................................2
04042-82 Oil seal ...................................................................................2
04042-83 Speed-setting shaft ................................................................1
04042-84 Screw, soc hd sems, .250-20 x 1.00” ....................................8
04042-85 Speed-setting shaft lever .......................................................1
04042-86 Roll pin, s.s .188 x .750..........................................................1
04042-87 Spring seat .............................................................................1
04042-88 Speed-setting return spring....................................................1
04042-89 Speed-setting screw assembly ..............................................1
04042-90 Straight pin, .124 x .750” ........................................................1
04042-91 Roller ......................................................................................1
04042-92 Stop lever ...............................................................................1
04042-93 Hex nut, .250-28 ....................................................................2
04042-94 Set screw, oval point, .250–28 x .200” ...................................2
Reference numbers 80 through 94 are on this page
Figure 6-2. Parts for the TG-13 and -17 Cover Assembly (Lever Speed Setting)
for Use with Cast-Iron Case TG-13 and -17
D R A Woodward 39
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 535 / 633

04042-101 Breather - Filler cap............................................................... 1
04042-102 Screw - .250-20 x .750 ........................................................ 14
04042-103 Stop washer .......................................................................... 2
04042-104 Pivot ...................................................................................... 1
04042-105 Feedback lever...................................................................... 1
04042-106 Spring clip ............................................................................. 1
04042-107 Screw - .250-20 x 1.000 ........................................................ 7
04042-109 Terminal lever ....................................................................... 1
04042-111 Connection-link assembly ..................................................... 1
04042-112 Piston .................................................................................... 1
04042-113 Baffle ..................................................................................... 1
04042-114 Ballhead cover ...................................................................... 1
04042-115 Speed-setting nut .................................................................. 1
04042-116 Speeder-screw assembly ...................................................... 1
04042-117 Speeder spring ...................................................................... 1
04042-118 Pilot-valve plunger................................................................. 1
04042-119 .................................................................................. Not used
04042-120 .................................................................................. Not used
04042-121 Flyweight ............................................................................... 2
04042-122 Straight pin ............................................................................ 2
04042-123 Ballhead-bushing assembly .................................................. 1
04042-124 Pump drive pin ...................................................................... 1
04042-125 Drive shaft ............................................................................. 1
04042-126 Pipe plug - .500 socket head ................................................ 2
04042-127 Case ...................................................................................... 1
04042-128 Pump housing ....................................................................... 1
04042-129 Bowed retaining ring (internal) .............................................. 1
04042-130 Bowed retaining ring .461 dia. .............................................. 1
04042-131 Ball bearing ........................................................................... 1
04042-132 Retaining ring - .461 diameter............................................... 2
04042-133 Oil seal .................................................................................. 1
04042-134 Oilite bushing ........................................................................ 1
04042-135 Preformed packing - .062 W x 2.000 ID ................................ 1
04042-136 Gerotor pump ........................................................................ 1
04042-137 Accumulator piston................................................................ 1
04042-138 Large accumulator spring ..................................................... 1
04042-139 Small accumulator spring ...................................................... 1
04042-140 Spring seat ............................................................................ 1
04042-141 Retaining ring-1.526 diameter ............................................... 1
04042-142 Speed-setting-screw assembly ............................................. 1
04042-143 Loading spring....................................................................... 1
04042-144 Washer .................................................................................. 1
04042-145 Speed-setting screw assembly ............................................. 1
04042-146 Preformed packing - .364 ID x .070 ...................................... 1
04042-147 Oil sight gauge ...................................................................... 2
04042-148 Needle bearing - .625 ID ....................................................... 2
04042-149 Oil seal .................................................................................. 2
04042-150 Terminal shaft ....................................................................... 2
04042-151 Cover gasket ......................................................................... 1
04042-152 Cover ..................................................................................... 1
04042-153 Nameplate ............................................................................. 1
04042-154 Drive screw - .2 x .188 .......................................................... 2
04042-155 Needle thrust bearing and bearing race assembly ............... 1
04042-156 through 160 ................................................................ Not used
D R A40 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 536 / 633
Reference numbers 101 through 155 are on this page.
Figure 6-3. Parts for the TG-13 and -17 Governor. Die-cast Aluminum Case.
Screw Speed Setting
covers.
D R A Woodward 41
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 537 / 633

04042-101 Breather - Filler cap............................................................... 1
04042-102 Screw - .250-20 x .750 ........................................................ 14
04042-103 Stop Washer ......................................................................... 2
04042-104 Pivot ...................................................................................... 1
04042-105 Feedback lever...................................................................... 1
04042-106 Spring clip ............................................................................. 1
04042-107 Screw - .250-20 x 1.000 ........................................................ 7
04042-109 Terminal lever ....................................................................... 1
04042-111 Connection-link assembly ..................................................... 1
04042-112 Piston .................................................................................... 1
04042-113 Baffle ..................................................................................... 1
04042-114 Ballhead cover ...................................................................... 1
04042-115 Speed-setting nut .................................................................. 1
04042-116 Speeder-screw assembly ...................................................... 1
04042-117 Speeder spring ...................................................................... 1
04042-118 Pilot-valve plunger................................................................. 1
04042-119 .................................................................................. Not used
04042-120 .................................................................................. Not used
04042-121 Flyweight ............................................................................... 2
04042-122 Straight pin ............................................................................ 2
04042-123 Ballhead-bushing assembly .................................................. 1
04042-124 Pump drive pin ...................................................................... 1
04042-125 Drive shaft ............................................................................. 1
04042-126 Pipe plug - .500 socket head ................................................ 2
04042-127 Case ...................................................................................... 1
04042-128 .................................................................................. Not used
04042-129 Bowed retaining ring (internal) .............................................. 1
04042-130 Bowed retaining ring .461 diameter ...................................... 1
04042-131 Ball bearing ........................................................................... 1
04042-132 Retaining ring - .461 diameter............................................... 2
04042-133 Oil seal .................................................................................. 1
04042-134 Oilite bushing ........................................................................ 1
04042-135 Preformed packing .062 W x 2.000 ID .................................. 1
04042-136 Gerotor pump ........................................................................ 1
04042-137 Accumulator piston................................................................ 1
04042-138 Large accumulator spring ..................................................... 1
04042-139 Small accumulator spring ...................................................... 1
04042-140 Spring seat ............................................................................ 1
04042-141 Retaining ring -1.526 diameter.............................................. 1
04042-142 Speed-setting-screw assembly ............................................. 1
04042-143 Loading spring....................................................................... 1
04042-144 Washer .................................................................................. 1
04042-145 Speed-setting screw assembly ............................................. 1
04042-146 Preformed packing - .364 ID x .070 ...................................... 1
04042-147 Oil sight gauge ...................................................................... 2
04042-148 Needle bearing -.625 ID ........................................................ 2
04042-149 Oil seal .................................................................................. 2
04042-150 Terminal shaft ....................................................................... 2
04042-151 Cover gasket ......................................................................... 1
04042-152 Cover ..................................................................................... 1
04042-153 Nameplate ............................................................................. 1
04042-154 Drive screw - .2 x .188 .......................................................... 2
04042-155 Needle thrust bearing and bearing race assembly ............... 1
D R A42 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 538 / 633
04042-156 Shaft Extended TG Drive .......................................................1
04042-157 Pump housing ........................................................................1
04042-158 Pump housing extension........................................................1
04042-159 Screw .250-20 x 1.750 hex hd. cap .......................................4
04042-160 Retaining ring (internal) 1.249 free diameter .........................1
Figure 6-4. Parts for the TG-13 and -17 Governor with Extended Drive Shaft, Die-
cast Aluminum Case, Screw Speed Setting
covers.
D R A Woodward 43
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 539 / 633

04042-161 Breather/filler cap .................................................................. 1
04042-162 Screw - .250 -20 x 1.00 ......................................................... 8
04042-163 Screw - .250 - 20 x 1.00 soc hd ............................................ 1
04042-164 Washer - .250........................................................................ 1
04042-165 Stop - Max - Min .................................................................... 1
04042-166 Oil seal .................................................................................. 2
04042-167 Bushing ................................................................................. 2
04042-168 Cover ..................................................................................... 1
04042-169 Lever ..................................................................................... 1
04042-170 Roll pin .188 dia. x .750 ........................................................ 1
04042-171 Straight pin .124 x .750 ......................................................... 1
04042-172 Speed-setting plunger ........................................................... 1
04042-173 Screw .................................................................................... 1
04042-174 Speed-setting spring ............................................................. 1
04042-175 Speed-setting-screw guide post............................................ 1
04042-176 Speed-setting-plunger guide ................................................. 1
04042-177 Roller bushing ....................................................................... 1
04042-178 Nut - .250-28 ......................................................................... 2
04042-179 Set screw - .250-28 x 2.00 .................................................... 2
04042-180 Speed-setting shaft ............................................................... 1
Figure 6-5. Parts for the TG-13 and -17 Cover Assembly (Lever Speed Setting),
for Use with Aluminum Case TG-13 and –17
D R A44 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 540 / 633

04042-6-1 Dowel Pin ...............................................................................1
04042-6-2 Cap.........................................................................................1
04042-6-3 O-ring .....................................................................................1
04042-6-4 Retention Nut .........................................................................1
04042-6-5 Warning Label ........................................................................1
04042-6-6 Cover Screw...........................................................................8
04042-6-7 Retaining Ring .......................................................................1
04042-6-8 Cover......................................................................................1
04042-6-9 Cover Gasket .........................................................................1
04042-6-10 O-ring .....................................................................................1
04042-6-11 Speed-Setting Screw (Assembly) ..........................................1
04042-6-12 Cam........................................................................................1
04042-6-13 Cam Follower .........................................................................1
04042-6-14 Push Rod ...............................................................................1
04042-6-15 Small Spring ...........................................................................2
04042-6-16 Small O-ring ...........................................................................1
04042-6-17 Large O-ring ...........................................................................1
04042-6-18 Pin ..........................................................................................1
04042-6-19 Mounting Bushing ..................................................................1
04042-6-20 Nameplate ..............................................................................1
04042-6-21 Drive Screw ............................................................................2
04042-6-22 Mounting Guide ......................................................................1
04042-6-23 Torsion Spring ........................................................................1
04042-6-24 Spring Pin...............................................................................1
04042-6-25 Alignment Guide ....................................................................1
04042-6-26 Lever Bracket .........................................................................1
04042-6-27 Spring Clip..............................................................................1
04042-6-28 Snap Ring ..............................................................................2
04042-6-29 Large Washer.........................................................................2
04042-6-30 Small Washer * ......................................................................2
04042-6-31 Pivot Pin .................................................................................1
04042-6-32 Spring Seat ............................................................................1
04042-6-33 Loading Spring .......................................................................1
* NOTE—The small washer (30) is used only with the bar-stock feedback level
(0.625” wide) and not with the cast feedback lever (0.750” wide).
D R A Woodward 45
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 541 / 633
Reference numbers (6-)1 through (6-)33 are on this page.

Figure 6-6. Parts for the TG611-13/-17 Overspeed Test Device
D R A46 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 542 / 633
Chapter 7.
Service Options
Product Service Options

If you are experiencing problems with the installation, or unsatisfactory
performance of a Woodward product, the following options are available:
 Consult the troubleshooting guide in the manual.
 Contact the manufacturer or packager of your system.
 Contact the Woodward Full Service Distributor serving your area.
 Contact Woodward technical assistance (see “How to Contact Woodward”
later in this chapter) and discuss your problem. In many cases, your
problem can be resolved over the phone. If not, you can select which course
of action to pursue based on the available services listed in this chapter.
OEM and Packager Support: Many Woodward controls and control devices are
installed into the equipment system and programmed by an Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) or Equipment Packager at their factory. In some cases, the
programming is password-protected by the OEM or packager, and they are the best
source for product service and support. Warranty service for Woodward products
shipped with an equipment system should also be handled through the OEM or
Packager. Please review your equipment system documentation for details.
Woodward Business Partner Support: Woodward works with and supports a

global network of independent business partners whose mission is to serve the
users of Woodward controls, as described here:
 A Full Service Distributor has the primary responsibility for sales, service,
system integration solutions, technical desk support, and aftermarket
marketing of standard Woodward products within a specific geographic area
and market segment.
 An Authorized Independent Service Facility (AISF) provides authorized
service that includes repairs, repair parts, and warranty service on Woodward's
behalf. Service (not new unit sales) is an AISF's primary mission.
 A Recognized Engine Retrofitter (RER) is an independent company that
does retrofits and upgrades on reciprocating gas engines and dual-fuel
conversions, and can provide the full line of Woodward systems and
components for the retrofits and overhauls, emission compliance upgrades,
long term service contracts, emergency repairs, etc.
 A Recognized Turbine Retrofitter (RTR) is an independent company that
does both steam and gas turbine control retrofits and upgrades globally, and
can provide the full line of Woodward systems and components for the
retrofits and overhauls, long term service contracts, emergency repairs, etc.
You can locate your nearest Woodward distributor, AISF, RER, or RTR on our
website at:
www.woodward.com/directory
D R A Woodward 47
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 543 / 633
Woodward Factory Servicing Options

The following factory options for servicing Woodward products are available
through your local Full-Service Distributor or the OEM or Packager of the
equipment system, based on the standard Woodward Product and Service
Warranty (5-01-1205) that is in effect at the time the product is originally shipped
from Woodward or a service is performed:
 Replacement/Exchange (24-hour service)
 Flat Rate Repair
 Flat Rate Remanufacture
Replacement/Exchange: Replacement/Exchange is a premium program

designed for the user who is in need of immediate service. It allows you to
request and receive a like-new replacement unit in minimum time (usually within
24 hours of the request), providing a suitable unit is available at the time of the
request, thereby minimizing costly downtime. This is a flat-rate program and
includes the full standard Woodward product warranty (Woodward Product and
Service Warranty 5-01-1205).
This option allows you to call your Full-Service Distributor in the event of an
unexpected outage, or in advance of a scheduled outage, to request a
replacement control unit. If the unit is available at the time of the call, it can
usually be shipped out within 24 hours. You replace your field control unit with
the like-new replacement and return the field unit to the Full-Service Distributor.
Charges for the Replacement/Exchange service are based on a flat rate plus
shipping expenses. You are invoiced the flat rate replacement/exchange charge
plus a core charge at the time the replacement unit is shipped. If the core (field
unit) is returned within 60 days, a credit for the core charge will be issued.
Flat Rate Repair: Flat Rate Repair is available for the majority of standard
products in the field. This program offers you repair service for your products with
the advantage of knowing in advance what the cost will be. All repair work carries
the standard Woodward service warranty (Woodward Product and Service
Warranty 5-01-1205) on replaced parts and labor.
Flat Rate Remanufacture: Flat Rate Remanufacture is very similar to the Flat
Rate Repair option with the exception that the unit will be returned to you in “like-
new” condition and carry with it the full standard Woodward product warranty
(Woodward Product and Service Warranty 5-01-1205). This option is applicable
to mechanical products only.
Returning Equipment for Repair

If a control (or any part of an electronic control) is to be returned for repair,
please contact your Full-Service Distributor in advance to obtain Return
Authorization and shipping instructions.
When shipping the item(s), attach a tag with the following information:
 return authorization number;
 name and location where the control is installed;
 name and phone number of contact person;
 complete Woodward part number(s) and serial number(s);
 description of the problem;
 instructions describing the desired type of repair.
D R A48 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 544 / 633
Packing a Control
Use the following materials when returning a complete control:
 protective caps on any connectors;
 antistatic protective bags on all electronic modules;
 packing materials that will not damage the surface of the unit;
 at least 100 mm (4 inches) of tightly packed, industry-approved packing
material;
 a packing carton with double walls;
 a strong tape around the outside of the carton for increased strength.
To prevent damage to electronic components caused by improper

handling, read and observe the precautions in Woodward manual
82715, Guide for Handling and Protection of Electronic Controls,
Printed Circuit Boards, and Modules.
Replacement Parts
When ordering replacement parts for controls, include the following information:
 the part number(s) (XXXX-XXXX) that is on the enclosure nameplate;
 the unit serial number, which is also on the nameplate.
Engineering Services
Woodward offers various Engineering Services for our products. For these services,
you can contact us by telephone, by email, or through the Woodward website.
 Technical Support
 Product Training
 Field Service
Technical Support is available from your equipment system supplier, your local Full-
Service Distributor, or from many of Woodward’s worldwide locations, depending
upon the product and application. This service can assist you with technical
questions or problem solving during the normal business hours of the Woodward
location you contact. Emergency assistance is also available during non-business
hours by phoning Woodward and stating the urgency of your problem.
Product Training is available as standard classes at many of our worldwide

locations. We also offer customized classes, which can be tailored to your needs
and can be held at one of our locations or at your site. This training, conducted
by experienced personnel, will assure that you will be able to maintain system
reliability and availability.
Field Service engineering on-site support is available, depending on the product

and location, from many of our worldwide locations or from one of our Full-
Service Distributors. The field engineers are experienced both on Woodward
products as well as on much of the non-Woodward equipment with which our
products interface.
For information on these services, please contact us via telephone, email us, or
use our website: www.woodward.com.
D R A Woodward 49
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 545 / 633
How to Contact Woodward

For assistance, call one of the following Woodward facilities to obtain the address
and phone number of the facility nearest your location where you will be able to
get information and service.
Electrical Power Systems Engine Systems Turbine Systems

Facility---------------- Phone Number Facility---------------- Phone Number Facility---------------- Phone Number
Brazil ------------- +55 (19) 3708 4800 Brazil ------------- +55 (19) 3708 4800 Brazil ------------- +55 (19) 3708 4800
China ----------- +86 (512) 6762 6727 China ----------- +86 (512) 6762 6727 China ----------- +86 (512) 6762 6727
Germany--------- +49 (0) 21 52 14 51 Germany------- +49 (711) 78954-510 India --------------- +91 (129) 4097100
India --------------- +91 (129) 4097100 India --------------- +91 (129) 4097100 Japan -------------- +81 (43) 213-2191
Japan -------------- +81 (43) 213-2191 Japan -------------- +81 (43) 213-2191 Korea -------------- +82 (51) 636-7080
Korea -------------- +82 (51) 636-7080 Korea -------------- +82 (51) 636-7080 The Netherlands - +31 (23) 5661111
Poland--------------- +48 12 295 13 00 The Netherlands - +31 (23) 5661111 Poland--------------- +48 12 295 13 00
United States ---- +1 (970) 482-5811 United States ---- +1 (970) 482-5811 United States ---- +1 (970) 482-5811
You can also locate your nearest Woodward distributor or service facility on our
website at:
www.woodward.com/directory
Technical Assistance
If you need to telephone for technical assistance, you will need to provide the following information.
Please write it down here before phoning:
Your Name
Site Location
Phone Number
Fax Number
Engine/Turbine Model Number
Manufacturer
Number of Cylinders (if applicable)
Type of Fuel (gas, gaseous, steam, etc)
Rating
Application
Control/Governor #1
Woodward Part Number & Rev. Letter
Control Description or Governor Type
Serial Number
Control/Governor #2
Serial Number
Control/Governor #3
Serial Number
If you have an electronic or programmable control, please have the adjustment setting positions or
the menu settings written down and with you at the time of the call.
D R A50 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 546 / 633
Chapter 8.
Asset Management and Refurbishment
Scheduling Period
This product is designed for continuous operation in a typical industrial

environment and includes no components that require periodic service. However,
to take advantage of related product software and hardware improvements, we
recommend that your product be sent back to Woodward or to a Woodward
authorized service facility after every five to ten years of continuous service for
inspection and component upgrades. Please refer to the above service programs
when returning products.
Revision History
Changes in Revision L—
 Updated Declarations
Changes in Revision K—
 Updated ATEX compliance listing
D R A Woodward 51
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 547 / 633
Declarations
D R A52 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 548 / 633
D R A Woodward 53
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 549 / 633
We appreciate your comments about the content of our publications.
Send comments to: icinfo@woodward.com
Please reference publication 04042L.
PO Box 1519, Fort Collins CO 80522-1519, USA

1000 East Drake Road, Fort Collins CO 80525, USA
Phone +1 (970) 482-5811  Fax +1 (970) 498-3058
Email and Website—www.woodward.com
Woodward has company-owned plants, subsidiaries, and branches,

as well as authorized distributors and other authorized service and sales facilities throughout the world.
Complete address / phone / fax / email information for all locations is available on our website.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 550 / 633
25071J
Oils for Hydraulic Controls
Manual 25071J
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 551 / 633
Contents
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL INFORMATION ...................................................................................... 1

Introduction ...................................................................................................................................... 1
Oil Characteristics ............................................................................................................................ 1
Oil Lubrication Properties................................................................................................................. 2
Performance Additives ..................................................................................................................... 3
Lubrication Protective Additives....................................................................................................... 4
CHAPTER 2. HOW TO SELECT AN OIL ....................................................................................... 7

General Information ......................................................................................................................... 7
Proper Oil Selection ......................................................................................................................... 9
Automatic Transmission Fluids ...................................................................................................... 12
Synthetic Oils ................................................................................................................................. 12
Remarks......................................................................................................................................... 13
CHAPTER 3. OIL MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 15

General Information ....................................................................................................................... 15
Oil Change Intervals....................................................................................................................... 16
When to Change Governor Oil....................................................................................................... 17
Contaminated Governor Oil ........................................................................................................... 18
Oil Filters ........................................................................................................................................ 18
Oil Lacquering ................................................................................................................................ 20
Illustrations and Tables
2-1. Oil Chart ....................................................................................................................... 11

2-2. Viscosity Comparisons ................................................................................................. 11
IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS
WARNING—indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION—indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not

avoided, could result in damage to equipment.
NOTE—provides other helpful information that does not fall under the
warning or caution categories.
Revisions—Text changes are indicated by a black line alongside the text.
Woodward Governor Company reserves the right to update any portion of this publication at any time. Information
provided by Woodward Governor Company is believed to be correct and reliable. However, no responsibility is
assumed by Woodward Governor Company unless otherwise expressly undertaken.
© 1986 by Woodward Governor Company
All Rights Reserved
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 552 / 633
Manual 25071 Oils for Hydraulic Controls
Chapter 1
General Information
Introduction
This manual serves as a general guide for anyone involved in the selection of oils
for use in Woodward governors or actuators.
One of the primary functions required of an oil is to stand up to high loadings

and high temperatures, while remaining a good lubricant. Oil, as it emerges from
the refinery process, is a slippery liquid, but it lacks additives vital to its intended
functions.
These additives turn a liquid into a lubricant that fights heat, cold, contamination,
corrosion, rust, wear, and other environmental and mechanical hazards. Lubricant
additives are grouped into three general categories according to the functions
they perform:
• protect the lubricated surface
• improve lubricant performance
• protect the lubricant
Surface protective additives include anti-wear agents, corrosion and rust

inhibitors, and detergents and dispersants. Performance additives include pour
point depressants, seal swell agents, and viscosity index improvers. Lubricant
protective additives cover anti-foamants, anti-oxidants, and metal deactivators.
Oil Characteristics
There are four important characteristics to be considered in an oil: viscosity, pour
point, shear stability, and thermal stability.
Viscosity
All natural lubricants thin as they warm, and thicken as they cool. The magnitude
of this change is measured by the Viscosity Index (VI). The higher the VI
number, the less effect temperature has on viscosity change. An oil with a VI of
200 is very good in this respect.
Pour Point
The pour point of an oil is a measure of its low temperature suitability. Chemical
compounds, called pour point depressants, are used to allow the oil to flow even
at low operating temperature when the oil has thickened.
D R A Woodward 1
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 553 / 633
Oils for Hydraulic Controls Manual 25071
Shear Stability
Oil viscosity can also change due to shear. Actual mechanical shearing of long
chain polymers in oil will act to lower both the actual viscosity at any given
temperature and the Viscosity Index.
Thermal Stability
Oil viscosity changes will also occur with long-term operation at high
temperatures. In this case, the oil will thicken due to oxidation and evaporation of
the lighter molecules.
Multi-viscosity oils extend the operating temperature range while still

maintaining proper viscosity. However, they have relatively poor thermal and
shear stability resulting in shorter useful life. A good alternative is synthetic oils,
since they have good temperature viscosity characteristics. Synthetic oils are
covered in Chapter 2.
Oil Lubrication Properties

Oil lubrication properties are greatly improved by the addition of a variety of
chemical compounds such as anti-wear agents, corrosion and rust inhibitors, and
detergents and dispersants.
If information is needed about the additive contents of an oil, it may be advisable

to check with an oil company representative.
Anti-wear Agents
Mechanical wear from metal-on-metal rubbing or abrasives is normally
prevented by hydrodynamic lubrication with an oil film thick enough to keep the
parts separated. But under certain conditions such as high load, low speed, and
low lubricant viscosity, the lubricant film may rupture and allow metal-to-metal
contact. This condition may exist between thrust bearing surfaces or between
closefitting pump gears and gear pockets.
To prevent wear due to metal-to-metal contact, anti-wear additives found in most

lubricants form a coating which will yield under the shear stress imposed by
minimum lubrication. However, heat from friction between mating surfaces
provides energy for a chemical reaction between the additive and metal surfaces
that result in a protective coating.
D R A2 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 554 / 633
Corrosion And Rust Inhibitors
Another important lubrication property of an oil is that it must be able to resist
rust and corrosion and be compatible with seal material.
If a lubricating oil becomes contaminated with moisture, corrosion can develop.

In the case of governors using engine oil, the oil may become contaminated with
the acidic products of combustion.
Detergents And Dispersants

Detergents are compounds used to control deposits at high temperature, while
dispersants are used to control the formation of sludge at low temperature.
Dispersants absorb contaminant particles and keep them in suspension so they
cannot agglomerate and form sludge.
Performance Additives
Oil performance characteristics also can be greatly improved with additional
compounds such as pour point depressants, seal swell agents, and Viscosity
Index improvers.

Pour Point Depressants

Pour point depressants are compounds which allow the oil to flow even at low
operating temperature when the oil has thickened. These natural properties of oil
are determined by the crude itself and by the refinery process.
Seal Swell Agents

A number of seals are used throughout a governor to keep the dirt out and the oil
in. Seals are made of many compounds including nitrile and silicon. Currently,
the trend in seal material is to Viton which can withstand prolonged temperatures
to 204 °C (400 °F).
D R A Woodward 3
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 555 / 633
Viscosity Index Improvers
The rate at which mineral oils thin out is described by a mathematical
relationship between their viscosities at 100 °F (38 °C) and 210 °F (99 °C),
which is referred to as Viscosity Index (VI).
Oils with a high VI exhibit less viscosity change with temperature than oils with
a low VI. A lubricant that is expected to perform over a wide temperature range
must usually have a high VI. The VI of oils has received much attention because
ease in starting the engine requires low viscosity at low temperatures, and normal
operation requires an adequate oil film at normal operating temperature.
Wide temperature-range viscosity requirements of oils has been met by treating

the oil with an additive known as a VI improver. VI improvers also improve
shear stability.
Polymeric VI improvers are more likely, however, to be broken apart by shear

forces between moving surfaces. Once this type of permanent shear has occurred,
the polymer contributes less to high-temperature thickening. Therefore, high VI
oils using polymeric VI improvers require a polymer that will continue to provide
adequate thickening at high temperature.
Lubrication Protective Additives

Special additives also are used to increase the lubrication protection given by
oils. Such additives include anti-foamants, anti-oxidants, and metal deactivators.

Anti-Foamants
When subjected to sufficient agitation, all oils will entrap air and produce foam.
This, in turn, causes more problems. Oil reaction increases exposure of the oil to
oxygen, which increases the rate of oxidation.
Air and foam also reduce lubricant efficiency as a coolant and as a hydraulic
fluid. Retained air changes oil to a compressible fluid and may cause operational
problems. To eliminate foaming, additives with a lower surface tension than the
oil, and low solubility in the lubricants are used. This weakens and ruptures the
oil film surrounding the bubbles.
D R A4 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 556 / 633
Anti-Oxidants
The oxidation process is complex and is highly undesirable. Often, additives that
reduce oil oxidation also reduce corrosion.
Decomposition of the oil may also occur, forming a variety of compounds such
as aldehydes, alcohols, and acids. These compounds may further oxidize and
react with each other to form more compounds. Some of these compounds may
be soluble in oil, resulting in a viscosity increase; others may be insoluble and
form varnish or sludge.
Oxidation is affected by many factors: temperature, lubricated materials, crude

source, and refining process. The choice of the anti-oxidant agent used is based
on tests of a particular oil.
Metal Deactivators
Additives that are used as corrosion and rust inhibitors form coatings on metal
surfaces which also act as metal deactivators. Metal deactivators also inhibit
oxidation by coating metals such as lead, copper, and iron, which could act as
oxidation catalysts.
D R A Woodward 5
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 557 / 633
D R A6 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 558 / 633
Chapter 2
How to Select an Oil
General Information
There are several important factors to consider in the selection of an oil for
proper governor operation. Following is a list of those factors and how they
affect governor operation.
Viscosity
In governor applications, a change in viscosity can seriously affect performance.
If the oil is too thin, the governor can become unstable. If the oil is too thick, the
governor will become sluggish and unresponsive.
The higher the VI (Viscosity Index) number, the less effect temperature has on
viscosity change. Our recommended range of viscosities for proper governor
operation is from 50 to 3000 SUS with a nominal 150 SUS being ideal. With this
in mind, proper oil selection would be that with 150 SUS at operating
temperature and a high VI
WARNING
A loss of stable governor control and possible prime mover
overspeed may result if the viscosity exceeds the 50 to 3000 SUS
range. An overspeeding and/or runaway prime mover can result In
extensive damage to the equipment, personal Injury, and/or loss of
life.
Pour Point
We recommend an oil with a pour point 8 to 11 Celsius degrees (15 to 20
Fahrenheit degrees) below the lowest starting temperature anticipated. This
avoids possible pump cavitation and slow response. In arctic conditions, it may
be necessary to install an oil heater. Contact Woodward for information
concerning the specific requirements of your installation.
Shear Stability
In applications where severe service is expected or long spans between oil
changes are required, an oil with a high shear stability should be selected. Check
with an oil company representative for information regarding the shear stability
of a particular oil.
D R A Woodward 7
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 559 / 633
Thermal Stability
For service conditions expecting long-term high-temperature operation, an oil
with high thermal stability should be selected. Multi-viscosity oils extend the
operating temperature range while still maintaining proper viscosity. However,
they have relatively poor thermal and shear stability, resulting in shorter useful
life. A good alternative is synthetic oils. These products have good temperature
viscosity characteristics and good thermal and shear stability.
A heat exchanger can be used to lower the operating temperature of a governor.
Corrosion And Rust Inhibitors

Another important factor in the selection of an oil for proper governor or actuator
operation is that it must be able to resist rust and corrosion.
Corrosion is a particular problem in governors because the oil may become

contaminated with moisture. In the case of governors using engine oil, the oil
may become contaminated with the acidic products of combustion.
Sludge Dispersion
Dispersants are especially useful in protecting engines that rarely reach normal
operating temperature. This type of service leads to the formation of sludge,
which coats parts and can block internal oil passages in the governor.
Seal Compatibility
Oils used in governors must be compatible with these materials. While
significant shrinkage or softening of seals cannot be tolerated, a slight swelling is
often desirable. If the base oil cannot cause sufficient swelling, a seal swell agent
may be used.
Oil Oxidation
When subjected to sufficient agitation, all engine/governor oils will entrap air
and produce foam. This, in turn, causes more problems. Oil reaction increases
exposure of the oil to oxygen, which increases the rate of oxidation. Air and
foam also reduce lubricant efficiency as a coolant and as a hydraulic fluid.
Retained air changes oil to a compressible fluid and may cause a perfectly
adjusted governor to become unstable. To eliminate foaming, additives with a
lower surface tension than the oil and low solubility are added to the lubricant
used. The additives weaken and rupture the oil film surrounding the bubbles.
D R A8 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 560 / 633
Anti-wear Additives
Oils containing anti-wear additive packages provide more protection during
periods of boundary lubrication, when true hydrodynamic lubrication is not
possible, due to high loads, low speed, excessive temperatures, etc. This
additional lubrication is possible due to the formation of protective films on
metal surfaces.
Zinc dialkyldithiophosphates (ZDPs) are often used as anti-wear additives and

are found in many common hydraulic and engine oils. Governors do not
normally require anti-wear additives, but under certain marginal lubrication
conditions may benefit from their use.
CAUTION
ZDP is corrosive to silver and tends to attack it. Oils with a ZDP anti-
wear additive are not recommended for use in the PGEV governor
with an oil-filled side plate. The PGEV governor contains a load-
control resistor with silver contacts. Increased silver contamination
of the oil and wear of the load-control resistor contacts may result
from using an oil with a ZDP anti-wear additive. PGE governors and
PGEV governors without an oil-filled side plate may continue to use
oils with a ZDP anti-wear additive, as the oil does not come into
contact with the silver contacts.
Proper Oil Selection

There are two essential factors that need to be considered in the selection of an
oil for proper governor operation. The first one is the SUS viscosity range of the
oil, and the second one is the operating temperature of the governor in its
ambient environment.
Oil Viscosity Range

The recommended range of viscosities for governor operation is from 50 to 3000
SUS at normal governor operating temperature.
This range is shown in the “Legend” (at the bottom of the Oil Chart) and in the
Oil Chart as the “Acceptable Operating Range”. The higher the viscosity number,
the less effect temperature has on viscosity change.
Woodward governors are designed to give stable operation with most oils if oil
viscosity at the operating temperature span is within a range of 50 to 3000 SUS.
The ideal range of viscosities for governor operation is from 100 to 300 SUS at
normal governor operating temperatures. The governor oil operating
temperatures are shown on a scale from –40 to +116 °C (–40 to +240 °F) on top
of the Oil Chart. This range is represented by the white sections in the legend and
in the Oil Table as the “Ideal Operating Range”.
D R A Woodward 9
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 561 / 633
Governor Operating Temperature
The recommended oil temperature for continuous governor operation is 60 to 93
°C (140 to 200 °F). Measure the temperature of the governor or actuator on the
outside lower pan of the case. The actual oil temperature will be slightly warmer,
about 6 Celsius degrees higher (10 Fahrenheit degrees higher). The ambient
temperature range is –29 to +93 °C (–20 to +200 °F).
WARNING
Governor operation must not be attempted below the pour point of
the oil as the governor can become sluggish and unresponsive.
Seizure of governor internal parts can also result, causing loss of
governor control with resulting damage to equipment and/or personal
injury.
How to Read the Oil Chart

(Figure 2-1)
The cross-hatched sections to the left of the white section in the legend and in the
Oil Chart designate the low temperature limits acceptable for operation for
limited periods of time only.
The hatched sections designated “Pour Point” in the legend and in the Oil Chart
indicate the temperature range where oil gets progressively thicker to reach its
pout point. The approximate pour point is represented by the low temperature
end of the hatched section (left-hand end).
If the oil is too thick, the governor can become sluggish and unresponsive. An oil
with a pour point 8 to 11 Celsius degrees (15 to 20 Fahrenheit degrees) below the
lowest starting temperature anticipated is recommended.
The cross-hatched sections to the right of the white sections in the legend and in
the Oil Chart designate the high temperature limits acceptable for operation for
limited periods of time only. The right-hand end of these sections represents the
approximate degradation temperature of the oil.
Prolonged use at temperatures above this point, without frequent oil change, may
result in governor failure. To avoid governor operation close to the point of oil
degradation, change to an oil more temperature resistant or lower the governor
operating temperature with a heat exchanger, or both.
Under extreme ambient operating temperatures, such as tropical or arctic

operating conditions, it may be necessary to install a heat exchanger or an oil
heater. Contact Woodward for information concerning the specific requirements
of your installation.
D R A10 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 562 / 633
Figure 2-1. Oil Chart
Figure 2-2. Viscosity Comparisons
D R A Woodward 11
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 563 / 633
Automatic Transmission Fluids
Automatic transmission fluids, such as AT FLUID TYPE F, AT FLUID TYPE
A, OR DEXRON II, are suitable for governor use. Automatic transmission fluid
can be used at temperatures lower than most petroleum oils and at temperatures
to 149 °C (300 °F) for short periods. However, at elevated temperatures, internal
governor leakage may develop. Any transmission fluid approved by a
transmission manufacturer should be suitable in a governor, providing viscosity
requirements are met.
Synthetic Oils
Most synthetic lubricants are excellent for governor use, provided they meet
viscosity requirements. Synthetics provide better lubrication than conventional
oils under severe demands, particularly at high speeds or broad temperature
ranges. They are not generally recommended as an alternative to straight mineral
oil in standard applications.
The major advantages of the synthetic family of oils over straight petroleum oils
in governor applications are a wider temperature range, a high resistance to
oxidation, and a very low volatility. The disadvantages are cost and more limited
availability in some areas. As with any oil, it is not recommended that these be
mixed with each other or with petroleum oils.
CAUTION
Some classes of synthetic oils may not be compatible with
diaphragms, gaskets, and seals. Serious damage to diaphragms,
gaskets, and seals can result, requiring replacement of parts. If in
doubt, contact Woodward for specific recommendations.
Synthetic lubricants are classed according to chemical source: for example, the
silicones, the polyglycols, the synthesized hydrocarbons, and the organic esters.
Silicone Lubricants
The name "silicones" has been broadly applied to several different base fluids,
and they are available in a wide range of viscosities.
The main advantage over petroleum oils comes from the formulations that
provide very high viscosity index (usually in the 200 to 300 range), high
resistance to oxidation, and very low volatility.
Polysulfide additives have greatly improved the load-carrying capacity and anti-
wear properties of silicone lubricants. Silicone oils have little effect on most
rubbers, but this is not the case with other oils. Systems previously lubricated
with other oils should be cleaned and flushed.
Silicone oils are used in high temperature, high pressure hydraulic systems, air
compressors, and gear boxes. The cost of these oils is competitive with other
synthetic oils.
D R A12 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 564 / 633
Polyglycol Lubricants
Examples of polyglycol lubricants are the glycols, polyethers, and polyalkylene
glycols. These are the least expensive of the synthetics.
They have excellent viscosity-temperature characteristics, have a low volatility

comparable with silicones, and have a good lubricating quality. They are also
compatible with other synthetic lubricants, and they readily accept additives for
further improvement of their properties.
Polyglycols are not compatible with petroleum oils and are not acceptable for
governor use in that they attack paint and other non-metallic materials, although
they have little effect on rubber.
Synthesized Hydrocarbons
Synthesized hydrocarbons are high performance oils that are made from a
petroleum-derived raw material and not from the refining of petroleum.
Several types of synthesized hydrocarbons (SHC) are now available. SHC oils
are compatible with petroleum oils and the systems for which petroleum oils are
designed. These oils do not deteriorate rapidly at high temperatures and do not
congeal readily at low temperatures. SHC base fluids are free of aromatics,
sulfur, and wax normally present in conventional mineral oils.
Organic Esters
Organic esters are formed by reacting of alcohol and certain types of acids. The
two categories of esters used mostly for synthetic oils are dibasic acid ester and
polyol esters. Characteristics of organic esters are much the same as the
synthesized hydrocarbons.
Remarks
In applications where the Woodward governor or actuator shares the oil supply
with the engine, use the oil recommended by the engine manufacturer. Protect
governors or actuators using engine oil with a suitable filter. Refer to the
appropriate governor manual for filter size requirements.
Governors with a self-contained oil supply, or using a self-contained oil sump, do

not require an oil containing detergents or dispersants since they do not have the
“hot spots” found in internal combustion engines, and do not have the
contaminants resulting from the internal combustion. As a result, oil that has
been carefully selected to match the operating conditions, and is compatible with
governor seals, is suitable for governor operation.
D R A Woodward 13
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 565 / 633
Providing all other necessary characteristics are met, most detergent oils are
satisfactory for use in governors and actuators. The oil that meets the
requirements and is locally available should be selected.
In addition to oils listed in the Oil Chart, oils which meet the API (American
Petroleum Institute) engine service classification in either the “S” group or the
“C” group (starting with “SA” and “CA” through the current API standard) are
suitable for governor service. Oils meeting performance requirements of the
following US military specifications are also suitable:
• MIL-L-2104A
• MIL-L-2104B
• MIL-L-2104C
• MIL-L-46152
• MIL-L-46152A
• MIL-L46152B
• MIL-L-45199B
D R A14 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 566 / 633
Chapter 3
Oil Maintenance
General Information
Oil maintenance is essential to long and reliable governor operation. Regular oil
changes must be maintained, but there are also other important factors to
consider.
Once a class of oil is selected, continue using that oil. Adding or changing oil of
one class to another class without thoroughly cleaning a hydraulic system may
cause operational problems such as foaming, filter plugging, and sludge
formation. Some classes of oil may not be compatible with diaphragms, gaskets,
or seals.
Any water, regardless of the quantity, in a governor should immediately be

removed and the oil changed. Water, even in trace amounts, contributes
significantly to early bearing failure as well as forming oxides that also
contribute to failures.
Clean oil is a necessity, whether filling the governor for the first time or whether
adding make-up oil. Clean oil cannot remain clean if the container or pouring
spout is not clean. Partially used cans of oil should not be used unless kept
covered in a clean area. Cleanliness of oil and container cannot be overstressed.
Most governors with self-contained sumps do not have filters or screens, and this
makes it essential that contaminants are not introduced into the governor through
the oil. Make sure to protect governors using engine oil with a suitable filter.
Refer to the appropriate governor manual for filter size requirements.
The effects of oil on governors using engine oil are determined by filter changes
and engine oil condition. If engine manufacturer's oil recommendations are
closely followed, satisfactory service should result.
Oil Change Intervals
Self-Contained Oil Sump

The “best time” to change oil is difficult to determine. The best time, of course,
to change the oil is just before the oil is worn out, but before any damage to the
machine has occurred.
D R A Woodward 15
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 567 / 633
This condition is best determined by oil analysis, but because the cost of doing
this exceeds the cost of a quart or two of governor oil, it is not a practical
solution on a continual basis. Analysis can be used to set up a maintenance
schedule which should remain in effect as long as the original conditions do not
change. Experience with other hydraulic equipment similar to governors can also
be used as a guideline. Conditions such as operating temperature, atmospheric
conditions which include dirt, moisture, etc., or anything that may change the
composition of the oil, or shorten its useful life, should be taken into account
when determining the frequency of oil changes.
Anytime a known contaminant gets into the governor, the governor should be
drained, flushed, and refilled with clean oil as soon as possible.
Particles of dirt and water in the oil are the greatest causes of governor or
actuator failures. Particular care should be taken to keep dirt and moisture out of
opened or stored governors and opened control lines.
Breakdown of oil or depletion of additives is another frequent cause of governor

failure. The presence of sludge, varnish, sediment, or a dirty filter is a good
indication that an oil change is required. It is also an indication that perhaps a
different oil should be used, especially if it has only been a short time since the
last oil change.
A varnish buildup is an indication that governor operating temperatures are

exceeding the capability of the oil. This problem can usually be solved by going
to an oil with good high temperature characteristics or by installing a heat
exchanger. Low operating temperatures may lead to the formation of sludge.
Sludge is a complex mixture of products from sources such as fuel combustion,
water, carbon, and oxidized oil that has agglomerated and is no longer soluble in
oil.
Sludging may be controlled by raising the governor operating temperature,

increasing the frequency of oil changes, or by changing to a different type of oil.
Fluids, such as automatic transmission fluids, may prove to be more resistant to
sludge than some engine oils.
Oil that has been carefully selected to match the operating conditions and is
compatible with governor seals should give long service between oil changes.
For governors operating under ideal conditions (minimum exposure to dust and
water, within the temperature limits of the oil), oil changes can be extended to
two or more years. If available, a regularly scheduled oil analysis is helpful in
determining the frequency of oil changes.
Engine Oil Governors

Oil change intervals are dependent upon the various operating conditions of the
engines and the sulfur content of the diesel fuel used.
D R A16 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 568 / 633
Oil change intervals are normally recommended by the engine manufacturer for
the engine. However, if governor problems develop due to oil breakdown or
contaminated oil, the frequency of oil changes should be increased for a specific
lubricant.
A conservative recommendation of high temperature degradation threshold for a

variety of lubricant types is listed below.
Degradation Begins
Fluid Family °C °F
Natural petroleum 93 200
Polyglycols 107 225
Diesters 121 250
Synthetic hydrocarbons 121 250
Polyol esters 135 275
Methyl silicons 149 300
Phenyl silicons 204 400
Halogenated silicons 218 425
Polyphenyl ethers 246 475
Fluoroethers 288 550
When to Change Governor Oil

Oil should be changed if:
• Appearance is different than when new.
• Oil feels gritty when rubbed between fingers.
• Oil smells different than when new. (NOTE: some oil may smell burned and
still be acceptable. Check with oil company representatives.) If in doubt,
change oil.
• Any water, antifreeze, or other incompatible material contaminates the oil.
• Viscosity has changed; increased or decreased.
• Excessive wear of parts occurs.
• If governor has been run at temperatures exceeding the recommended limit
for the type of oil use.
• If governor operating temperatures have changed, bringing fluid viscosity
outside of ideal operating condition.
Contaminated Governor Oil

Replace the governor oil if it is contaminated. Also change it if it is suspected of
contributing to governor instability. Drain the oil while it is still hot and agitated.
Flush the governor with a lighter weight of the same oil or with a solvent having
some lubricating quality before refilling with new oil.
CAUTION
Be sure the solvent is compatible with seals. Serious damage to
diaphragms, gaskets, and seals can result, requiring replacement of
parts. If in doubt, contact Woodward for specific recommendations.
D R A Woodward 17
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 569 / 633
If the drain time is insufficient for the solvent to completely drain or evaporate,
flush the governor with a lighter weight of the same oil it is being refilled with to
avoid dilution and possible contamination of the new oil. To avoid
recontamination, the replacement oil should be free of dirt, water, and other
foreign material. Use clean containers to store and transfer oil.
WARNING
Observe manufacturer's instructions or restrictions regarding the use
of solvents. If no instructions are available, handle with care. Use the
cleaning solvent in a well ventilated area away from fires or sparks.
Failure to follow above safety instructions can result in dangerous

fires, extensive damage to equipment, personal injury and/or loss of
life.
Oil Filters
Industrial surveys show that 80% of all governor problems are caused by dirty or
contaminated oil. Although particles of dirt are always present, good properly-
maintained filtration controls dirt particles effectively.
Proper use of filtration not only pays for itself, but it also reduces the overall cost
of operation and maintenance. Compared to the cost of downtime, proper
filtration is a good investment.
Selection Of Filter Element

It is relatively easy to under-filter or to over-filter because of the wide range of
contaminants and the wide range of filter materials available to control them.
Filter material which is too coarse allows dangerous contamination. Filter

material which is too fine requires replacement too often, or if not changed,
filters operate in the bypass mode and all protection is gone.
Filter Element Specifications

Beta Ratio
The Beta Ratio is a numerical representation of the efficiency of a filter. It is the
number of particles of a given size found upstream of a filter divided by the
number of same-size particles found downstream, as described by the multi-pass
test method recognized by ANSI, NFPA, and ISO (ANSI/B93.31-1973).
βx = __N(up)__, where x = particle size (in µm)

N(down)
D R A18 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 570 / 633
Thus β10 = 2 means that the filter will remove 1 particle greater than 10 µm for
every 2 particles greater than 10 µm entering the filter.
In the above example, assume 10 000 particles greater than 10 µm were counted
upstream, and 5000 particles greater than 10 µm were counted downstream.
Then,
β10 = __10 000__ = 2

5000
Some filter literature may show a rating as:

βx = 2/20/75, x = 6/11/15
which means: β6 = 2, β11 = 20, β15 = 75.
The first three numbers (2/20/75) are the Beta ratings at the particle size of the
second three numbers (6, 11, and 15 µm respectively).
Efficiency
The efficiency of a filter at a given particle size can be derived by the formula:
Efficiency = (1–1/β) x 100%
So, if β10 = 2
Efficiency at 10 µm = (1–1/2) x 100% = 50%
Following below is an efficiency table for “x” size particles:
βx = 1.01 is 1% efficient
βx = 2.0 is 50% efficient (nominal)*
βx = 75.0 is 98.7% efficient (absolute)*
βx = 1000.0 is 99.9% efficient
βx = 3000.0 is 99.97% efficient
*—The filtration industry is coming to accept a nominal rating as 50% efficient at
removing a given particle size, and an absolute rating as at least 98.6% efficient
at removing a given particle size.
Filter Capacity
Filter capacity is the amount of contaminant (measured in grams) that a filter
element will hold before reaching a specified differential pressure. Everything
else being equal, the capacity indicates the service life of the element. The greater
the capacity, the longer the life.
Oil Compatibility
Filtering elements are compatible with petroleum base lubricating oils. When
using synthetic fluids, it is advisable to check with a filter company
representative regarding compatibility of specific elements.
D R A Woodward 19
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 571 / 633
Oil Lacquering
Hydro-mechanical governors can be affected by a condition known as oil
“lacquering”. If not prevented, lacquering can lead to various possible failure
modes, with the potential for the governor to stick in the max fuel or min fuel
position.
WARNING
Lacquering can lead to governor failure, with the potential for engine
overspeed. In a marine application, a vessel could be unable to
maintain headway. Preventing lacquering, and having a backup
governing/safety system, are essential for safety.
Lacquering is defined as the condition in which the governor is coated internally

by a residue from the oil (often referred to as varnish or sludge). The deposits
form a hard layer which is difficult and time-consuming to remove (the cost of
cleaning a lacquered governor can be as high as 40% of the new price of such a
unit.). Lacquering is generally accompanied by a smell similar to burnt oil.
The results can range from sticking pilot valves to plugged oil passages and
orifices.
Lacquering is generally caused by the oil breaking down, which can be caused
by:
• too high an oil temperature;
• too long an interval between oil changes;
• water condensing inside the governor during cooldown periods (water in oil
can cause hydrolysis which is a known failure mode for oils).
Oil selection is important, as some oils are less prone to lacquering than others. It
is up to the plant operator/vessel owner and the oil supplier to establish the
correct oils and change intervals for each application. Such a selection should
consider operating temperature, oil change interval, and other operating
conditions known to the plant operator/vessel owner. A proper selection can
achieve suitable economies of cost and change interval while also preventing
lacquering.
Any governor can be affected, depending on oil change interval, operating

temperature, and oil type. Some governor types work their oils harder than
others.
Since Woodward is cannot be aware of the operating conditions of each

application, here are some general recommendations:
• Oil Temperature—Woodward recommends that the oil temperature for
continuous operation be between 60 and 93 °C (140 and 200 °F).
• Oil Change Interval—Because oil change interval must take into
consideration all operating conditions, the correct oil change interval must
be established between the plant operator/vessel owner and the oil supplier.
D R A20 Woodward
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 572 / 633
• Oil Selection—Woodward specifies two essential factors that need to be
considered in the selection of an oil for proper governor operation:
f viscosity range—allowed is 7.5 cSt (50 SUS) to 650 cSt (3000 SUS);
ideal is 20 cSt (100 SUS) to 65 cSt (300 SUS).
f operating temperature—recommended is an oil temperature for
continuous operation between 60 and 93 °C (140 and 200 °F).
NOTE
Failure to avoid lacquering of oil inside a governor is considered to
be a misuse outside Woodward control. Such misuse is not covered
by Woodward warranty.
WARNING
If a governor has become lacquered, it is imperative that this
situation be diagnosed and corrected as soon as possible. A
lacquered governor should not be used, since this can have serious
consequences.
Carefully consider the choice of governor oil with your oil supplier. When
choosing an oil interval, start with shorter than expected intervals and slowly try
longer intervals. Monitor the condition of the oil, especially the build-up of
deposits, to ensure that the oil remains within the operating conditions defined by
the oil supplier.
D R A Woodward 21
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 573 / 633
We appreciate your comments about the content of our publications.
Send comments to: icinfo@woodward.com
Please include the manual number from the front cover of this publication.
Woodward/Industrial Controls
PO Box 1519, Fort Collins CO 80522-1519, USA
1000 East Drake Road, Fort Collins CO 80525, USA
Phone +1 (970) 482-5811 • Fax +1 (970) 498-3058
E-mail and Home Page—www.woodward.com
FM 57982
BS EN ISO 9001:1994
6 March 2001
Woodward has company-owned plants, subsidiaries, and branches,

as well as authorized distributors and other authorized service and sales facilities throughout the world.
Complete address/phone/fax/e-mail information for all locations is available on our website.
02/3/F
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 574 / 633
D R A
N
I 06-APR 16
- 2 0 575 / 633
SPD-100 Series
Signal-Powered
Digital
Tachometer
Heavy-duty. Ideally suited for

indoor and outdoor applications.
Solid-state. Lighted version
available.
2-Year *THIRD PARTY

APPROVALS,
Warranty next page.
FEATURES
● Signal and power derived totally from
magnetic pickup or pulser. ● Standard SAE case size fits panels with
3-3/8 inch (86 mm) openings.
● Intrinsically safe. Can be used in
hazardous environments with approved ● Gasketed and spray-proof.
Dynalco pickups. (See THIRD PARTY
APPROVALS, next page.) ● Ideal for OEM use.
● No power supply connections. High ● Can be paralleled with governors and/

immunity to electrical noise. or speed switches.
● Can be field-calibrated. ● Can share existing pickups or pulsers;

draws only microamperes.
● High accuracy: 1 rpm resolution.
● Ground-free terminals have no polarity;
● High shock and vibration resistance. easy installation.
©1999 Dynalco Controls 1199F
IN DR20A
16
PR- 3690 N.W. 53rd Street, Fort
576 Lauderdale,
/ 633 FL 33309 U.S.A.
06-A (954) 739-4300 • Fax: (954) 484-3376 • Website: www.dynalco.com
SPECIFICATIONS
EXTERNAL POWER REQUIREMENTS GATE TIME RANGES
All models are signal-powered. Lighted SPD-100 Series : field-selectable from 0.26
versions: 12 or 24 Vdc, depending on model. to 5.7 seconds.
SPD-108 Series: field-selectable from 0.13
DISPLAY to 2.85 seconds.
Four active digits (0 to 9999), non-blinking This accommodates calibrations for an
LCD display; character height of 0.5 inches extremely broad range of corresponding
(14 mm). Display contrast increases with pulses per second.
increasing ambient light.
MAGNETIC PICKUPS
INPUT SIGNAL VOLTAGE Dynalco Magnetic Pickups M102 and
From pickups, pulsers, shaft encoders, etc. M107 are used with the SPD-100 Series in
K Minimum signal amplitude: 2.5 Vrms. most applications. Refer to Dynalco
K Maximum permissible signal: 15 Vrms. Magnetic Pickup brochure for various types
The SPD-100 automatically limits pickup and characteristics.
signals at approximately 10 volts peak-to- For low-speed applications, or to permit
peak. Input impedance is 100 Ω in series operation with larger gaps, the ultrahigh
with a 6 volt Zener diode. sensitivity M142 can be used.
For intrinsically safe applications Dynalco
INPUT SIGNAL FREQUENCY Controls offers various models, with the
Maximum input signal frequency of 20,000 M202 and M134 the most frequently used.
Hz. Lowest frequency range limited by gate
time and corresponding numerical display. WEIGHT
ISOLATED CIRCUIT 1 lb (0.45 kg)
All circuitry is totally floating, i.e. totally
isolated and insulated from the case and
from ground.
TEMPERATURE RANGE
Operating:
–5oF to +175oF (–20oC to +80oC).
Storage: *THIRD PARTY APPROVALS
–40oF to +195oF (–40oC to +90oC).
SPD-100 and SPD-108
Canadian Standards Association
VIBRATION
(CSA): Class I, Division 1, Groups
MIL STD 810C; Method 514.2; Curve Q;
A, B, C, & D with M134, M135,
Procedure V; Modified to 500 Hz upper limit.
M139, M203, M204, M205. Class
5 Hz to 10 Hz @ 0.2 inches D.A.; 10 Hz to 18
LR45322 I, Division 1, Groups C & D with
Hz @ 1.0 g (peak); 18 Hz to 57 Hz @ 0.06
M160, M201, M202, M231, and
inches D.A.; 57 Hz to 500 Hz @ 10 g (peak).
M233.
ACCURACY SPD-100 Only
One rpm resolution; within 0.5% (0.1% American Bureau of Shipping:
typical at room ambient) under all combined type approval for use in classed
environmental conditions. vessels.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 577 / 633
OUTLINE AND CONNECTION DRAWING
Dimensions in inches (mm)
• Signal-powered unit shown.

• Lighted unit has two additional terminals for input power.
HOW TO ORDER
I. Specify model required:
a. Gate time range: 0.26 to 5.70 III. Specify magnetic pickup, if required.
seconds. IV. For factory calibration: Advise the gate
• SPD-100: standard model time required or the number to be
• SPD-100L: internally lighted displayed at a given signal frequency.
b. Gate time range: 0.13 to 2.85 Or, just indicate the number of gear
seconds. teeth or discontinuities per revolution.
• SPD-108: standard model [Determine if the gear or shaft is
• SPD-108L: internally lighted rotating at the speed of interest or if
II. For internally lighted model select 12 or some step-up or step-down ratio must
24 Vdc version. be considered.]
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 578 / 633
Reliable Measurement, Control, and
Diagnostics Equipment
Dynalco Controls specializes in products for harsh and hazardous
applications.
Areas include oil and gas production and pipelines; stationary engines;
and construction, agricultural, petrochemical, and marine equipment.
The extensive product line includes inductive and CD ignitions, engine
and compressor analysis products and service, engine controls, magnetic
and active pickups, speed and temperature monitors and transmitters,
and signal-powered meters and tachometers.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0
SPD-100, SPD-100L, SPD-108, and SPD-100L are trademarks of Dynalco Controls.
DYNALCO CONTROLS RESERVES THE RIGHT579 / 633 THESE SPECIFICATIONS WITHOUT NOTICE.
TO CHANGE
FOR COMPLETE SPECIFICATION INFORMATION, CONTACT A DYNALCO REPRESENTATIVE.
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 580 / 633
D R A
N
I 06-AP 16
R - 2 0 581 / 633
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 582 / 633
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 583 / 633
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 584 / 633
Installation and Operation of Elliott Bearing Isolators
(EBI)
This supplement covers the operation, installation and removal of Elliott Bearing Isolators
commonly referred to as EBI’s. The EBI is a bearing housing seal known in the rotating
equipment industry as a bearing isolator. The EBI is a seal design specifically for use in the most
challenging steam turbine applications. Bearing isolators are used to keep water, dust, dirt,
steam and other foreign materials out of the bearing housing. This prevents premature wear to
the liner bearings and reduces contamination of the lubricating oil. The second function of the
EBI is to keep the lubricating oil inside the bearing housing from leaking out of the housing. If the
turbine is pressure lubricated an additional oil deflector is mounted inside the bearing housing to
keep oil exiting the liner bearing from directly impacting the seal face.
The EBI is available in three distinct designs. The design shown on the left of Figure 1 has a
wide flange on the face of the seal rotor. This helps prevent the steam exiting the packing case
of the turbine from contacting the bearing housing. The steam is directed away from the turbine
bearing housing by centrifugal force. The air movement caused by the flange also acts to cool
the shaft. The seal on the right of Figure 1 is used on the coupling end of the turbine away from
direct contact with the steam. A third seal is used on the steam end of a turbine having a double
acting thrust bearing. This seal stator has a tongue that fits a machined grove in the bearing
housing. This helps to position the seal accurately. Since it is always located on the steam end
bearing housing next to the packing case, it always includes the wider flange.
Flanged type EBI Non-Flanged type EBI
Figure 1: Typical Elliott Bearing Isolators
EBI Supplement
IN DR20A
16
PR- 585 / 633
April 20, 2015
06-A
Disassembly:
1. The axial float of the rotor assembly should be verified and recorded. Refer to the
Maintenance Chapter 4 in the Elliott Instruction Manual for the proper procedure to
accomplish this. Note that the steam end bearing cap must be in place to get an
accurate indication of the float. If the turbine is equipped with a ball type rotor
locating bearing and the float is approaching the maximum (0.025” 0.64 mm), the
bearing and the steam end bearing housing should be inspected to insure the
bearing housing is in as built condition. The steam end bearing housing may require
replacement.
2. Remove the rotor assembly from the turbine.
3. Remove coupling hub and over speed trip body. Ensure that the trip pin components
are removed from the trip body prior to applying heat. If it is a Standard Trip, count
the turns of the adjusting nut so that it may be returned to the same setting. With a
QV type trip assembly count the shims removed and measure the thickness with a
micrometer to insure the same amount of shims are returned to the trip body.
4. Use a bearing puller to remove the rotor locating bearing.
CAUTION:
USE CAUTION WHEN SLIDING SEAL
COMPONENTS ALONG THE SHAFT SURFACE.
THE TWO INBOARD SEALS MUST BE SLID OVER
THE BEARING JOURNALS AND BURNISHED
AREAS FOR VIBRATION PROBES. TAKE CARE
NOT TO DAMAGE THESE CRITICAL AREAS.
5. Remove the existing installed oil seals. Note the location of each seal if they are
being reused. Note the location of the seal with large flange next to each of the
packing cases. If the turbine has a double acting thrust bearing in the steam end
(Non drive end) bearing housing, mark the seal to insure it is returned to this position.
6. If the existing oil seals are an EBI or similar shrunk on bearing isolator, move the
stator away from the rotor and using a propane or similar torch, evenly heat the rotor
of the seal to approximately 300 Deg F (150 Deg C). Using suitable heat resistant
gloves slide the seal rotor off the shaft. Take care not to drag the seal rotor across
the journal or probe area on the turbine shaft.
7. Remove the seal stator by carefully lifting over the journal and probe area. Keep the
rotor and stator from each bearing isolator together. Carefully inspect each isolator
for any damage that might prevent the isolator from being reused. Using a file,
smooth out any sharp edges or burrs. Check the O-ring for any tears or cracks.
Replace the O-ring if any defects are found.
8. If the turbine rotor is equipped with oil deflectors, heat the deflector to approximately
300 Deg F (150 Deg C). Using suitable heat resistant gloves slide the deflector off
the shaft. Take care not to drag the deflector across the journal area or probe area.
9. De-burr any upsets on the shaft from the existing seal set screws.
10. Clean the shaft with a solvent where the existing shaft oil seals are mounted.
EBI Supplement
IN DR20A
16
PR- 586 / 633
April 20, 2015
06-A
Typical Steam End Bearing Housing
with Rotor Locating Bearing
Figure 1
Typical Exhaust End Bearing Housing

Figure 2
EBI Supplement
IN DR20A
16
PR- 587 / 633
April 20, 2015
06-A
Installation:
1. Verify the bearing housing seal bore surface finish will be acceptable. Dimensionally
inspect the bearing seal bore for the correct diameter and roundness. For the seal to
work correctly, the bore must be round within 0.002” (0.05mm). The seal bore must be
concentric to the shaft centerline within 0.004” (0.1 mm)
2. Trial fit the EBI stators (with O-rings installed) in the bearing housing seal bores. Place
the bearing housing top covers on and snug down the bolts with the EBI stators in place.
Use CAUTION not to damage the O-ring. Check that the EBI stators can not be rotated
and that the bearing housing splitlines are tight. Also verify the EBI stator is not holding
the bearing cap open that could result in excessive bearing clearances.
3. If retrofitting the EBI’s into existing bearing housings, the bearing housing may need
notched for the anti-rotation pin. See Figures A-2, A-3 A-4, and A-5 for the appropriate
drilling.
4. Layout the components to ensure they will be installed in the correct orientation along the
shaft. Refer to Figure 2.
a. EBI rotating sleeves with steam deflector flange are positioned closest to the
packing cases.
b. The EBI rotating sleeve without the steam deflector flange is positioned closest to
the coupling.
c. Internal oil deflectors (pressure lubricated applications) are installed between the
bearing and the EBIs.
d. The larger OD of the stepped internal oil deflector is positioned closest to the
bearing. Refer to Figure 3.
e. EBI stators, rotating sleeves, and internal oil deflectors must be installed in the
proper sequence.
f. MPU toothed wheel is usually installed outboard of the exhaust end bearing
housing closest to the coupling.
5. Determine the approximate location of the EBI rotating sleeves and internal oil deflectors
(if required) on the rotor shaft by referring to the approximate locations provided by
Figure A-1 and clearances in Table 1 (Metric Table 2). The steam end rotating sleeve
can be more accurately positioned from the axial thrust locating shoulder because all
faces are tightly controlled during machining. The exhaust end seals can not be as
accurately positioned because of the tolerance stack up of all the components. The shaft
could have the locations marked temporarily at this time. Do not use permanent
markings of any kind as the seals may require adjustment.
6. Heat the EBI rotating sleeves and internal oil deflectors (if required) to approximately
350°F and carefully pre-position these at the approximate locations referenced according
to frame size Figure A-1 and Table 1 (Metric Table 2). Be certain to install the internal oil
deflectors and EBI components in the correct orientation along the shaft. Refer to Figure
3. Ensure the EBI stator O-ring is installed.
CAUTION:
USE CAUTION WHEN SLIDING SEAL COMPONENTS
ALONG THE SHAFT SURFACE.
THE TWO INBOARD SEALS MUST BE SLID OVER THE
BEARING JOURNALS AND VIBRATION PROBE AREAS.
EBI Supplement
IN DR20A
16
PR- 588 / 633
April 20, 2015
06-A
Note:
The stepped portion of the internal oil deflector
(smaller Outside Diameter) must face the oil baffles the
EBI stator. Refer to Figure 3
Figure 3: Oil Deflector Orientation
7. Install the rotor locating bearing and over speed trip body per Chapter 4 of the YR
Instruction Manual. Install the internal trip pin components and ensure the lower U-lock
staple (if used) is properly retained using the retaining screws.
8. Balance the rotor assembly with the over speed trip body and EBIs installed. The EBI
stators and other non-rotating components must be held stationary and not allowed to
contact the shaft during balancing.
9. Carefully reinstall the rotor assembly in the turbine casing. Shrunk on rotating sleeves
may need to be repositioned axially to lower the rotor assembly into the turbine. Slight
axial adjustments may be made to the shrunk on rotating sleeves and internal oil
deflectors by carefully tapping the shrunk on rotating sleeves or oil deflectors. This is
best accomplished with a nylon or brass blunt nose punch. Make small changes while
rotating the rotor. Heat may be applied locally to the rotating sleeve using a small tip
diameter brazing torch to aid in repositioning the shrunk on rotating sleeves and oil
deflectors. Be careful not to damage the components when attempting to reposition them.
10. Lubricate the “O” ring with Parker Super "O" Lubricant (Elliott part # X6507-100). Protect
the O-ring around the stator to ensure that it is not crushed or cut when the EBI stator is
seated in the bearing housing. Also ensure that the drain feature of the EBI stator is
located at the 6 o’clock position to ensure the drain functions properly. New EBI seals
have small anti-rotation pins that orient the drain to the 6 o’clock position.
EBI Supplement
IN DR20A
16
PR- 589 / 633
April 20, 2015
06-A
11. After the rotor is installed in the turbine, ensure the stators are positioned tight against the
bearing housings and do not interfere when the rotor is thrust downstream.
12. With the rotor thrust downstream, verify the external axial clearances between the stator
and rotating sleeve, and the internal clearances between the internal oil deflector (if used)
and bearing housing are in accordance with Figure 4 and Table 1 (English units) or Table
2 (Metric Units) below. Rotor float without the steam end bearing cover installed may be
greater than when the cover is installed.
Figure 4: Axial Clearances
EBI Supplement
IN DR20A
16
PR- 590 / 633
April 20, 2015
06-A
Figure 4A: Axial Clearances A & B
Figure 4B: Axial Clearances C-F
EBI Supplement
IN DR20A
16
PR- 591 / 633
April 20, 2015
06-A
Clearance
A B C D E F
Frame In. In. In. In. In. In.
AYR / BYR .054- .054- .068- .030- .068- .030-
.064 .064 .098 .040 .098 .040
CYR/DYR/ .054- .054- .068- .030- .068- .030-

BYRH/BYRHH/DYRM/DYRN .064 .064 .098 .040 .098 .040
CYRH/ DYRH .054- .054- .048- .050- .048- .050-

.064 .064 .078 .060 .078 .060
Table 1: Axial Clearance Settings (English Units)
Clearance A B C D E F
Frame mm. mm. mm. mm. mm. mm.
AYR / BYR 1.37- 1.37- 1.73- .76- 1.73- .76-
1.62 1.62 2.49 1.02 2.49 1.02
CYR/DYR/ 1.37- 1.37- 1.73- .76- 1.73- .76-

BYRH/BYRHH/DYRM/DYRN 1.62 1.62 2.49 1.02 2.49 1.02
CYRH/ DYRH 1.37- 1.37- 1.23- 1.27- 1.23- 1.27-

1.62 1.62 1.98 1.52 1.98 1.52
Table 2: Axial Clearance Settings (Metric Units)
13. Proper axial clearances are required to prevent components from making contact with
one another as the casing grows thermally and the shaft moves axially. If necessary,
relocate the rotating components to achieve the correct axial clearances.
14. Reinstall the bearing housing top covers being careful not to damage the O-ring around
the EBI stator. If the O-ring has stretched, it may be necessary to cut and rejoin the O-
ring at the 12 o’clock position. Verify the turbine rotor spins freely before proceeding.
15. With the cover installed, re-verify the external axial clearances. If the difference between
this measurement and the measurement with no cover is too great additional adjustment
may be necessary. Verify the turbine rotor spins freely before proceeding.
16. If a toothed sleeve is used in conjunction with a MPU, reinstall the MPU mounting bracket.
The MPU mounting bracket may require adjusting to ensure the mounting bracket is
positioned correctly in the axial position.
17. Installation is complete, Start the turbine per normal operating procedures.
EBI Supplement
IN DR20A
16
PR- 592 / 633
April 20, 2015
06-A
EBI Supplement
IN DR20A
16
PR- 593 / 633
April 20, 2015
06-A
AYR or BYR Exhaust End Pedestal Remachining
Figure A-2
EBI Supplement
IN DR20A
16
PR- 594 / 633
April 20, 2015
06-A
AYR or BYR Steam End Bearing Housing Remachining
Figure A-3
EBI Supplement
IN DR20A
16
PR- 595 / 633
April 20, 2015
06-A
CYR, DYR, or BYRH Exhaust End Pedestal Remachining
Figure A-4
EBI Supplement
IN DR20A
16
PR- 596 / 633
April 20, 2015
06-A
CYR, DYR, or BYRH Steam End Bearing Housing Remachining
Figure A-5
EBI Supplement
IN DR20A
16
PR- 597 / 633
April 20, 2015
06-A
PRL031359A
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 598 / 633
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 599 / 633
PRL031359B
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 600 / 633
Chapter 8
Accessories
NOTES
8-4
D R A724-527-2811
ch8.04/20/02
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 601 / 633
CHAPTER NINE
SERVICE/PARTS/SALES
INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains information pertaining to spare parts, service assistance, service
parts and Elliott training programs. The Spare Parts List specifically for the purchased
unit is contained in Appendix A. A list of Elliott Sales and Service locations is contained
in Appendix B. Appendix C, ”Technical Manual Comment Sheet“ has been provided for
comments and/or questions regarding the technical manual and/or equipment.
Appendix D provides detailed information and scheduled dates for Elliott training
programs. Appendix E, if applicable, provides figures with number designations
pertaining to normal maintenance and capital parts.
SPARE PARTS
At the time your equipment is purchased, Elliott offers to furnish a spare parts package.
This package contains parts that may be damaged during shipment, installation, or initial
startup and includes journal bearings, thrust bearings, shaft seals, interstage seals,
balance piston seal (if required), and the necessary O-rings for these assemblies. These
parts are the minimum recommended to have on hand before startup.
Maintenance Parts List

A drawing with a recommended list of maintenance parts is provided in Appendix A.
The quantities shown on the Maintenance Parts List are for one particular machine.
Where duplicate machines are involved, or parts are interchangeable with other
machines, an inventory reduction may be considered. In making such an evaluation,
consideration should be given to the consequences of a catastrophic plant malfunction
including water or power loss.
The Maintenance Parts List included in this chapter shows the location of parts, provides
part numbers, descriptions, and may contain cross-reference figures that can be used for
ordering normal spare and replacement parts. Stocking these parts enable prompt
equipment maintenance or emergency repairs that could otherwise cause lengthy
shutdowns. Spare and replacement parts supplied by Elliott may be changed to parts of
equal or greater quality from those originally supplied on the unit.
CAUTION
Replacement parts should be purchased from Elliott
Company. Many vendor parts have been modified
and/or calibrated by Elliott Company to ensure
compatibility with the design. Parts purchased
directly from vendors may not properly function and
could damage other components.
9-1
D R A ch09.8/11/2011
http://www.elliott-turbo.com 724-527-2811
IN R- 16
06-A
2P
0 602 / 633
Chapter 9
Service/Parts/Sales
Ordering
When ordering parts, or when contacting Elliott Company concerning parts, always give the
following information:
1. Equipment model number and serial number/shop order number (shown on equipment
nameplate and on the technical manual record sheet).
2. Provide the Elliott Internal Part Number (titled “Catalog Number” on the Spare Parts List)
from the Spare Parts List provided and/or shop order number.
3. Part name or description and quantity required.
4. Name and address of purchaser.
5. Complete shipping address and shipping instructions.
6. Specify payment terms.
7. For instrumentation or lubrication system parts, furnish manufacturer’s name, name of

component, nameplate information, plus any other identifying information listed on the
Instrument Data Sheets (if available) or in furnished vendor’s instruction material.
Storage
Spare parts usually represent a substantial investment. To protect this investment, the
following must be observed.
1. Inspect the parts and coat any unprotected machined surfaces with a rust preventative.
2. Tag or mark the parts so they can be easily located and identified.
3. Store the parts in a clean, dry place.
4. Store small parts neatly on shelves or in bins to prevent damage. Store large parts on
skids, in crates, or on vertical racks.
5. Inspect the parts frequently. Clean and recoat parts with a rust preventative, if
necessary.
6. Periodically check the shelf life expiration dates on parts such as O-rings. The boxes
will be marked accordingly with an expiration date if applicable.
7. Store spare rotor assemblies (if supplied) by suspending them in a vertical position to
use minimum floor space, or store them in their shipping crates. Vertical storage is
recommended for all multistage compressor rotors (M, MB and Axial). Vertical
storage maintains axisymmetric conditions on the rotor and eliminates concerns of
rotor sag. It also minimizes risks of non-axisymmetric thermal and corrosion effects.
If the rotor cannot be stored vertically, the rotor should be rotated 90° to 120° every 1
to 3 months. Care should be taken when rotating the rotor to ensure it is not
supported on the journal or probe regions (to avoid damage to those surfaces).
Supports for the rotor should be inboard of the journal surfaces. If the rotor in
9-2 ch09.8/11/2011
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 603 / 633
Chapter 9
Service/Parts/Sales
question is in the compressor casing, turning should be performed with the lube oil
system activated. Prior to installation of a horizontally stored rotor, it may be
advisable to turn the rotor for approximately 8 hours to minimize possibilities of a
temporary bow. Depending upon the size of the rotor, this can be performed on a
lathe or balancing machine. Support requirements for shipping purposes may be
more stringent, depending upon the relative length of the rotor. If the original
shipping container is not available, Elliott Company should be consulted. If indoor
space is not available, store the rotor by suspending vertically in a cylindrical tank
filled with oil. Cover the tank and install a drain valve at the bottom to drain any
accumulated condensate.
Returning Parts to the Factory

Should it become necessary to return parts to the factory, contact the nearest Elliott
Company Office. This is necessary to provide proper material accountability.
FIELD SERVICE ASSISTANCE
Your local Elliott Service Office is trained and authorized to meet your service needs.
Service is locally available for installation, start-up, operation and maintenance
requirements. Service contracts and parts are available locally through your Elliott
Service Office. Field Service Representatives are available to oversee the installation
and start-up or any phase of maintenance of Elliott equipment. Also, Field Service
Engineers are available to conduct Performance Analysis and other related equipment
evaluations. (Refer to the Elliott Sales and Service locations in Appendix B of this
chapter.)
CUSTOMER TRAINING
Specialized training programs are available for your operators and maintenance
personnel. The training is geared to the specific Elliott Company equipment that you
use. Provided in this chapter is a list of training programs offered through Elliott
Company for the year this technical manual was issued. For assistance in organizing a
training program or inquiring about currently scheduled training programs, contact the
nearest Elliott Company Office.
TECHNICAL MANUAL COMMENT SHEET
We have made every effort to provide a technical manual that reflects your equipment.
Should you require additional information, which cannot be found in your manual,
complete the Technical Manual Comment Sheet located at the end of this chapter.
When completing the sheet, provide as much detail as possible and reference part
numbers, page numbers, drawing numbers, etc., to which the comment is directed.
Comments regarding the technical manual can also be directed to Elliott Company’s
Technical Manual Department’s email address at techmanuals@elliott-turbo.com.
9-3
D R A ch09.8/11/2011
IN R- 16
06-A
2P
0 604 / 633
Chapter 9
Service/Parts/Sales
NOTES
9-4
D R A724-527-2811
ch09.7/3/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 605 / 633
QTY UOM PART NAME PART NUMBER ITEM NO. QTY UOM PART NAME PART NUMBER ITEM NO.
2 each BEARING LINER, TOP 412171-1 10 1 each CLEVIS PIN .500 2 LG. P35B1195 545
2 each BEARING LINER, BOTTOM 412171-2 15 2 each BUSHING 694212-1 550
2 each BUCKET HOLDER ASSEMBLY 624947-26 30 1 each PACKING SET(SECONDARY) P725Z1350 555
6 each SPACER (B/O)(SERV) 645997-11 35 1 each PACKING GLAND 1013382-1 560
6 each CAP SCREW 1/2-13 2-1/2 LG. P23T3202 40 1 each BUSHING 694218-1 565
8 each CARBON RING ASSEMBLY 634159-63 45 1 each STRAINER, STEAM 639350-5 570
1 each TG611 GOVERNOR (12 FT-LB) CW ROT W/ TRIP TEST P4045A203 50 1 each VALVE & STEM ASSEM 639361-22 575
1 each NOZZLE RING F402016-100 60 1 each VALVE SEAT & BUSHING ASSY 672078-5 580
1 each MAGNETIC PICKUP 436023-9 85 1 each PACKING WASHER 1013380-1 585
1 each ARMOR CABLE ASSEMBLY 48* LG P8405B550-048 86 2 each OILER (SERVICE)(100/MIN) P6591A012 650
1 each TACHOMETER, DYNALCO SPD100 P82M471 90 1 each COPALTIT 1#QTLIQ-SHELFLIF12/CS X412-120 800
2 each BREATHER FILTER P3515C101 100 1 each TITESEAL MED#1 (12# PER CASE)+ X467-110 802
10 EACH CAP SCREW 5/8-11 1 LG. P23T3226 102 1 each 1/2 PINT - MILL-ROSE BLUE MONSTER NICKET ANTI-SEIZEX6521-100 803
15 each CAP SCREW 5/8-11 1-1/2 LG. P23T3228 110 1 each LOCKTITE 567 SEALANT 50ML X6724-100 804
25 each INTERNAL TOOTH LOCKWASHER 5/8 P25R26 115 1 each TEMPTITSEALNT(BULK-SHELLF-6MIN X416-113 805
2 each RING, OIL 650291-1 120 1 each TEMPTITE 3/16''D(SHELFLIFE 6MIN X416-103 806
6 each INTERNAL TOOTH LOCKWASHER 1/2 P25R24 125 1 each 1/16''TEMPTITE IIGSKT QT.CN S/L X416-133 807
1 each HANDVALVE GASKET 646126-14 175 1 each FEL PRO C-5 X415-115 808
1 each OVERLOAD VALVE ASSEMBLY 664957-29 180 1 each GREASE X6500-001 809
1 each FOLLOWER 695793-1 185 1 each SILASTIC RTV732-20(3 OZ TUBES) X427-100 810
1 each PACKING P725Z050 190 X EA MAINTENANCE PARTS LIST F402016MPL-GR1 GR1
1 each SPRING 692334-1 200
1 each KNIFE EDGE 650293-2 205
2 each MACHINE SCREW 1/4-20 5/8 LG. P20A177 206
1 each T&T VALVE GASKET 646126-4 215
2 each GASKET 649709-1 216
1 each TRIP PLUNGER ASSY CY0573-9 220
1 each PLUG 693347-2 221
1 each WASHER (100 PCE MIN) 693348-1 225
1 each SPRING, TRIP PLUNGER 693338-1 230
1 each RETAIN RING P27B27 235
1 each SHOULDER SCREW 5/8-11 3 LG. P23W668 240
2 each KEY-WOODRUFF 1/8 X 5/8 P37A14 300
1 each COUPLING P2320J1010 305
1 each CONNECTION 694499-2 310
1 each PIN, CONNECTION 646771-4 315
1 each STRAIGHT DOWEL PIN 1/2 1.50 LG. P36P235 320
3 each SET SCREW 1/4-20 1/4 LG. P23A50 325
2 each SHOULDER SCREW #10-24 1/2 LG. P23W08 330
2 each BRG ROD END 1/4''-28F P1562R311 340
1 each COLLAR 1014518-1 350
1 each ROTOR ASSEMBLY F402016-RA 399
1 each ROTOR ASSEMBLY 1012992-20-F402016 400
1 each KEY, COUPLING 436018-1 401
1 each OVERSPEED TRIP PIN ASSEMBLY 672397-GR9 405
1 each EMER GOV WEIGHT 644999-1 406
1 each EMERG GOV SPRING 650277-1 407
1 each PLUG 695066-1 408
2 each WASHER (SERV) (.010 THICK) 643320-3 409
2 each WASHER (SERV) (.005 THICK) 643320-4 410
3 each WASHER (.030 THICK) 643320-2 411
1 each TRIP BODY (CW ROTATION) 1049627-2 425
8 each SPACER RING 694214-1 430
2 each SPACER RING 639351-4 435
1 each THRUST BEARING ASSEM. 672171-13 440
1 each LOCKWASHER P28A19 445
2 each BEARING ISOLATORS (B/O) P7963H010 462
1 each BEARING ISOLATORS (B/O) P7963H011 463
3 EACH O-RING, 2'' SAE FLG P700D228 465
1 each TRIP VALVE ASSY 639358-4 500
1 each CONNECTION ASSY. 639559-4 505
1 each CLEVIS PIN .5000 1-11/16 LG. P35B1550 510 MAINTENANCE PARTS LIST
4 each RETAINING RING P27E16 515 This Drawing and all information shown thereon
1 each RESET BUTTON 694210-1 520 is the exclusive property of Elliott Company and
6 each WASHERS, CONICAL SPRING 18 OD 6.2 ID 0.4 THK P26J132 525 is provided subject to the express condition that
1 each SPRING 647629-1 530
the drawing is not reproduced in whole or in part,
1 each KNIFE EDGE 650301-1 535
1 each PACKING FOLLOWER 1013237-1 540 or used for the benefit of anyone other than Elliott
CONTINUE ON TOP RIGHT Company and no information shown in this

drawing may be disclosed or used in any way. 2006 ELLIOTT COMPANY
D R A SHEET BM 1 OF 1 Eigner Generated Bom
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 606 / 633 F402016MPL Rev: 0
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 607 / 633
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 608 / 633
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 609 / 633
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 610 / 633
APPENDIX B
SALES AND SERVICE LOCATIONS
8/26/2015
Elliott Company has sales, service and engineering facilities throughout the world. Whatever your
application or service need, an experienced Elliott Field Engineer or Sales Representative will assist you
anytime or anywhere. Just call, write, or fax to one of the following Elliott locations.
HEADQUARTERS Elliott Company, Ebara Group

901 North Fourth Street, Jeannette, PA 15644-1473
Phone: (724) 527-2811 Fax: (724) 600-8442
BRAZIL Elliott Ebara Servicos Para Equipamentos Rotativos Ltda.

Praia Do Flamengo 66 Bloco B 1416
Rio De Janeiro CEP 22210-903 RJ-Brazil
Phone: 011-5521-2225-3134 Fax: 011-5521-2225-2957
Brazil Service Shop

Elliott Ebara Servicos Para Equipmentos Rotativos Ltda.
AV.JOAO TEORDORO, 1231
Vila Resedene-Piracicaba-SP-Brasil
CEP.13.405-240
Phone: 011-55-19-3421-0414/1346 Fax: 011-55-19-3421-0414
Elliott Ebara Servicos Para Equipamentos Rotativos Ltda.

Jose Rocha Bomfin Avenue #214
Frankfurt Building Room 126
Center Santa Genebra
Campinas-SP-Brazil
13080-650
Phone: 011-55-19-3709-1230 Fax: 011-55-19-3709-1230
CANADA Elliott Turbomachinery Canada, Inc.

Sherwood Industrial Estates, County of Strathcona
2024 – 87th Avenue, Edmonton, Alberta T6P 1L4
Phone: 780-449-3080 Fax: 780-449-3081
Elliott Turbomachinery Canada, Inc.

955 Maple Avenue, Burlington, Ontario L7S 2J4
Phone: 905-333-4101 Fax: 905-333-3863
CHINA Elliott Company

Suite 1706 Tower B
Beijing Global Trade Center
36 North Third Ring Road East
Dongcheng District
Beijing 100013, China
Phone: (86) 10-5825-7488 Fax: (86)10-5825-7489
Elliott Turbomachinery Services (Tiajin) Company Limited

No. 260 Huang Hai Road,TEDA
Tianjin, China 300457
Phone: (86) 22-5985-6688 Fax: (86) 22-5985-6580
INDIA Elliott Ebara Turbomachinery India Private Ltd

#12-3, Abbanakuppe
Bidadi Industrial Area, Bidadi Post
Bengaluru 562109, India
Phone: 91-080-3062-5000 Fax: 91-080-3062-5005
D R A
©Elliott Company ISO 9001 CERTIFIED PRINTED IN THE U.S.A.
IN6-APR- 16
0
0 611 / 633
724-527-2811
APPENDIX B
8/26/2015
ITALY Elliott Turbomachinery S.A.

Zone Industriale N. 1
54011 Frazione
Albiano Magra
Aulla (MS) Italy
Phone: (39) 0187-41311 Fax: (39) 0187-413000
Elliott Turbomachinery Limited

Viale Belfiore 10
50144 Florence, Italy
Phone: (39) 055-391-7221 Fax: (39) 055-324-1122
JAPAN Elliott Ebara Turbomachinery Corporation

20-1 Nakasode, Sodegaura-Shi
Chiba-Ken, 299-0296
Phone: 011-81-4-3860-6111 Fax: 011-81-4-3860-6070
RUSSIA Elliott Turbomachinery Limited

11 Bolshaya Tulskaya Str
Moscow, Russia 115191
Phone: 011-7-495-734-7876 Fax: 011-7-495-967-6799
KINGDON OF BAHRAIN Elliott Ebara Middle East

Office No. 52, Building No. 47
Dream Building No. 2
Road 2701, Block No. 327
Adliya Area– Kingdom Of Bahrain
Phone: 011-973-1729-3829 Fax: 011-973-1729-3809
SAUDI ARABIA Elliott Gas Services

PO Box 11602
Al Jubail 31961
Saudi Arabia
Phone: 011-966-3-344-8900 Fax: 011-966-3-344-8902
SINGAPORE Elliott Ebara Singapore Pte. Ltd.

1A International Business Park
#07-01 Singapore 609933
Phone: 011-65-6563-6776 Fax: 011-65-6563-1387
SWITZERLAND Elliott Turbomachinery S. A. (Sales)

Feldstrasse 2, CH-8853
Post Fach 249
Lachen, Switzerland
Phone: (41) 55-451-8000 Fax: (41) 55-451-8099
TAIWAN Ebara/Elliott Service (Taiwan) Co., Ltd.

1, Road 42, Industrial Zone
Taichung City T407
Taiwan, R.O.C.
Phone: (886) 4-359-4202 Fax: (886) 4-359-5510
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES Elliott Turbomachinery Limited

Khalidiyah Street
Das Tower
Mezanine Floor Office M01
Abu Dhabi – United Arab Emirates
Phone; 011-971-26-987-999 Fax: 011-971-26-772-150
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
0 612 / 633
724-527-2811
APPENDIX B
8/26/2015
UNITED KINGDOM Elliott Turbomachinery Ltd.

Unit 11 Easter Park
Benyon Road, Silchester
Reading RG7 2PQ
Phone: 011-44 -1189-701122 Fax: 011-44 -1189-70133
Elliott Turbomachinery Ltd.

Elizabeth House
56-60 London Road
Staines Upon Thames
Surrey
TW 18 4BQ, United Kingdom
Phone: 011-44-1784-227100 Fax: 011-44-1784-227133
Elliott Turbomachinery Ltd

Unit 6 Papyrus Business Park
Papyrus Road
Peterborough PE4 5HQ
United Kingdom
Phone: 44 1932 582200 Fax: 4 1932 566402
KOREA Elliott Korea Co., LTD

Hyunseok Tower 3rd fl50
Seolleung – RO93 - GIL
Seoul, Korea 135-513
Phone: 011-82-70-4362-1150 Fax: 011-82-70-8230-2030
UNITED STATES
CALIFORNIA LOS ANGELES (Sales)
2500 Via Cabrillo Marina
Suite 110
San Pedro, CA 90731-7224
Phone: 310-833-5981 Fax: 310-833-5974
SAN FRANCISCO
2339 Courage Drive, Suite A
Fairfield, CA 94533
Phone: 707-746-5933 Fax: 707-746-5937
FLORIDA JACKSONVILLE
10485 Busch Drive North
Jacksonville, FL 32218-5601
Phone: 904-757-7600 Fax: 904-757-7604
INDIANA CHICAGO
1301 N. Indiana Avenue
Crown Point, IN 46307-2739
Phone: 219-661-9701 Fax: 219-661-9707
LOUISIANA BATON ROUGE

58035 Industrial Blvd
Plaquemine, LA 70764-5256
Phone: 225-687-1717 Fax: 225-687-1555
NEW ORLEANS
5901 Jefferson Highway
Harahan, LA 70123-5171
Phone: 504-733-2108 Fax: 504-733-8693
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
0 613 / 633
724-527-2811
APPENDIX B
8/26/2015
PENNSYLVANIA HEADQUARTERS
Elliott Company, Ebara Group
Jeannette, PA 15644-1473
Phone: 724-527-2811 Fax: 724-600-8442
PITTSBURGH
Donora Industrial Park
1250 Scott Street Extension
Donora, PA 15033-2249
Phone: 724-379-5440 Fax: 724-379-5535/2243
Elliott Packaging Solutions

236 Finley Road
Suite 47
Belle Vernon, PA 15012
Phone: 724-929-1200 Fax: 724-929-1299
TEXAS HOUSTON (SERVICE)

2001 W. Sam Houston Pkwy. N.
Houston, TX 77043-2948
Phone: 713-984-3800 Fax: 713-984-3905
HOUSTON (SALES)
Elliott Group
10940 W, Sam Houston Parkway N.
Suite 150
Houston, TX 77064
Phone: 281-517-7100 Fax: 281-955-5072
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
0 614 / 633
724-527-2811
APPENDIX C
TECHNICAL MANUAL COMMENT SHEET
If you have any questions, comments and/or suggestions concerning this technical
manual, or if you require additional information on the installation, maintenance or
operation of your Elliott equipment, complete the information below. Mail or fax this form
to the address below. Be sure to include Elliott Shop Order number and required
information. Required information is designated by an asterisk *.
ELLIOTT COMPANY
901 NORTH FOURTH STREET
JEANNETTE, PA 15644-1473 USA
TECHNICAL MANUAL DEPARTMENT 62-27
TELEPHONE: 724-527-2811
FAX: 724-600-8318
Questions, comments and suggestions can be emailed to:

techmanuals@elliott-turbo.com
*Elliott Equipment Serial Number/Shop Order Number ________________________
Questions, Comments, Suggestions:
Please send additional information covering the following areas:
Contact Information
Name __________________________________ Title _________________________
Email Address _________________________________________________________
*Company _______________________________ Department ___________________
Address ______________________________________________________________
*City ___________________________________ *State/Province _________________
*Country _______________________________ _ Postal Code ___________________
Telephone ______________________________ Fax __________________________
ch09.7/32008 9-10
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 615 / 633
2016 TURBOMACHINERY TRAINING
ELLIOTT YR TURBINE
Length of Course: 3 days Dates: April 12-14, 2016
Class size: 8 Min – 12 Max October 4-6, 2016
Price: $ 1,500 per person
Who Should Attend:
This course is designed for operations, maintenance, engineering, and supervisory personnel responsible for the Elliott YR turbine.
This course is balanced between classroom lectures and hands-on workshops.
Objectives:
- Identify All the Major YR Components,
- Understand the YR Components’ Functions,
- Explain how Mechanical & Electronic Turbine Governors operate,
- Disassemble a YR Turbine (with actual AYR Turbine),
- Assemble a YR Turbine (with actual AYR Turbine),
- Start-up & Shutdown of a YR Turbine, and
- Define Preventative Maintenance Procedures including Troubleshooting.
Course Overview:
YR Components & Function
Disassembly/Assembly of an AYR Turbine (including Workshops)
Safety Precautions
Proper Maintenance & Troubleshooting
ELLIOTT MULTI-STAGE MULTI-VALVE STEAM TURBINE

Price: $ 1,700 per person*
Who Should Attend: *if attend with Centrifugal Compressor: $ 2,800 for both
This course is designed for operations, maintenance, engineers, and supervisory personnel responsible for Elliott MSMV Steam
Turbines.
Objectives:
- Understand Steam Turbine Theory & the Basic Thermodynamics of Steam Turbines,
- Identify All the Major Steam Turbine Components,
- Understand the Turbine Components’ Functions,
- Explain how Mechanical & Electronic Steam Turbine Governors operate,
- Understand the Function & Operation of Steam Turbine Servo Motors,
- Operate & Maintain an Elliott Steam Turbine (including Troubleshooting), and
Course Overview:
Steam Turbine Theory & Basic Thermodynamics
Steam Turbine Components and Function
Rotor Balancing
Operation & Troubleshooting
Preventative Maintenance
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 616 / 633 Elliott Technical Training 2016
ELLIOTT CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSOR
Price: $ 1,700 per person*
*if attend with MSMV Steam Turbine: $ 2,800 for both
Who Should Attend:
This course is designed for operations, maintenance, engineers, and supervisory personnel responsible for Elliott Process
Compressors.
Objectives:
- Identify All the Major Compressor Components,
- Understand the Compressor Components’ Functions,
- Understand Basic Compressor Aerodynamics,
- Interpret Compressor Performance Curves,
- Explain how Compressor Controllers operate,
- Operate & Maintain an Elliott Compressor, and
- Understand Rotor Balancing.
Course Overview:
Compressor Components & Function
Basic Compressor Aerodynamics
Compressor Controllers including Anti-Surge Control
Operation, Maintenance, & Troubleshooting
Rotor Balancing
ELLIOTT LUBE & SEAL SYSTEM

Length of Course: 2 days Dates: May 2-3, 2016
Price: $ 1,000 per person Location: The 2nd part of day 2 is in Belle Vernon, PA
(40 minutes from Elliott in Jeannette, PA)
Who Should Attend:
This course is designed for operations, maintenance, engineering, and supervisory personnel responsible for Elliott Lube & Seal
Systems. It is recommended for anyone attending the Process Compressor or MSMV Turbine Course.
Objectives:
- Identify All the Major Lube/Seal System Components,
- Understand the Lube/Seal System Components’ Functions,
- Understand the Properties of Turbomachinery Lubricants
- Define Basic Instrumentation,
- Explain the principle Steps required for Lube System Commissioning, and
- Operate & Maintain an Elliott Lube System.
Course Overview:
Lubricating Oil Properties Review
Oil System Overview
Buffer Gas System Overview
Basic Instrumentation
Maintenance & Troubleshooting
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
CUSTOMIZED ON-SITE PROGRAMS
When possible, Elliott recommends that training take place at Elliott – away from normal business and phone interruptions.
However, when distance makes travel prohibitive, when staff availability is a problem, or when it is best that training be carried out
at site (or using your own system configuration and equipment), Elliott will draw from its technical resources to prepare and present
a course to meet your specific needs.
For a quote for customized on-site training, please call the Technical Training Department or send the following information by email
to training@elliott-turbo.com.
1. Elliott Shop Order Number(s)

2. Desired Training Location
3. Number of Attendees
4. Attendees Job Statues (engineer, operator, maintenance,…)
5. Desired date(s)
6. Agenda Requirements
Please check out our website for additional training programs, locations nearest you,
and our “free” maintenance tip webinars:
http://www.elliott-turbo.com/new/service_train.html
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
COURSE INFORMATION
ENROLLMENT
To register for a course, contact the Elliott Technical Training Department in Jeannette, PA at 724-600-8521 or email:
training@elliott-turbo.com.
SEMINAR FEE
The prices indicated cover course tuition, training material & manual, lunches, dinner (one evening), refreshments, and attendance
certificate.
Travel and living expenses are the responsibility of each student. Elliott assumes no liability for any fees that may be incurred due
to the cancellation of any classes. We recommend that you book fully refundable air tickets or wait until the program is confirmed
before booking your reservations.
PAYMENT
Payment for all factory courses is to be made prior to the class. We accept company checks (payable to Elliott Company) or credit
card (Visa or MasterCard).
COURSE LOCATION AND HOURS
All factory-training programs will be conducted at Elliott’s headquarters in Jeannette, Pennsylvania USA, unless otherwise noted.
The classes are held from 8:30 am to 4:00 pm daily.
ACCOMMODATIONS
A block of rooms has been set-aside at a local hotel in Greensburg, PA. Reservation information will be provided when class is
confirmed.
TRANSPORTATION
If you fly into Pittsburgh International Airport, it will take you approximately two hours to arrive at your hotel. Return flights should
be scheduled for 6:30 pm or later on the last day of class.
CANCELLATIONS AND REFUNDS
If you must cancel, please notify the Elliott Technical Training Dept as soon as possible. Cancellations less than fifteen (15) days in
advance of program are subject to one-half of the tuition fee. With prior notification, substitutions can be made.
There are no refunds for “No Shows”. Elliott reserves the right to cancel or reschedule any class. If Elliott cancels, a full refund for
tuition will be made.
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
TRAINING REGISTRATION FORM 2016
(Please type or print.)
Please send completed registration form to: The Technical Training Department
Jeannette, PA 15644
Tel: (724) 600-8521
Fax: (724) 600-8018
E-Mail: training@elliott-turbo.com
Course Title/Date: Date:

Company: Contact:
Bill to Address:
City: State:
Country: Zip Code:
Phone: Fax:
Please list your Elliott Shop Order No(s):
STUDENT TITLE
PHONE FAX
EMAIL ADDRESS
STUDENT TITLE
PHONE FAX
EMAIL ADDRESS
STUDENT TITLE
PHONE FAX
EMAIL ADDRESS
STUDENT TITLE
PHONE FAX
EMAIL ADDRESS
TOTAL TUITION:
Method of Payment: Company Check or Credit Card
Check No. Amount:
Charge*: MasterCard Visa
*Please call 724-600-8521 to provide credit card name, number, & expiration date.
D R AElliott Technical Training 2016
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 620 / 633
Chapter 10
Technical Drawings
INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains engineered drawings specific for the purchased equipment. The
drawing numbers on the bill of materials or parts lists may have a suffix number, or group
number identifying the applicable assembly on the drawing. Be sure to use the suffix
listed when making reference to a drawing.
If this manual is in an electronic format (CD-ROM), scroll down for a list of Technical
Drawings.
NOMENCLATURE AND USE OF ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS
Beginning in 2004, both the drawing numbering convention and Bill of Materials on
assembly drawings changed.
The following description will help you understand the format of Elliott drawings created
since 2004:
1. The title block in the lower right-hand corner identifies the drawing by name and
number. Additional descriptive information may also be included.
2. A separate Bill of Materials is attached to each assembly drawing.
a. The “Position” number corresponds to the part identification number located

adjacent to the appropriate item on the drawing.
b. The “Item Number” column will list either a part number with a letter ‘P’ prefix,
or a drawing number that may include a dash (-) suffix number. These
numbers are part or catalog numbers used for ordering spare or replacement
parts.
c. “Quantity” column numbers specify the quantities of items used on that drawing.
NOTE:
Drawing and Bill of Materials revision numbers are not
related and may differ.
For drawings created prior to 2004:
1. The title block in the lower right-hand corner identifies the drawing by name and
number. It may also contain additional information describing the drawing. The
drawing number is a six-digit number or a six-position alpha numeric drawing number.
2. The numbers in the quantity column specify the quantities of items used on that
drawing.
3. The part name column lists the item nomenclature.
chap10.7/15/2008 10-1
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 621 / 633
Chapter 10
Technical Drawings
4. The part number column will list either a part number with a letter ‘P’ prefix, or a six
position drawing number and may include a dash (-) suffix number. These numbers
are part or catalog numbers used for ordering spare or replacement parts.
5. The drawing may also have a column or section listing group numbers (GROUP 1, 2,
etc. or -GR. 1, 2, etc.). These group numbers define lists of related parts used for
specific variations of parts arrangements and/or assemblies.
10-2
D R A724-527-2811
chap10.7/15/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 622 / 633
Chapter 10
Technical Drawings
Form 188-B (05/14/02)
TECHNICAL DRAWINGS
F402016-1, -2
DRAWING REVISION
TITLE
NUMBER NUMBER
3001855 Turbine Outline 1
3001856 Purchaser’s Connections 3
3001857 Wiring Diagram 2
3001858 P&I Diagram 2
3001859 Mass Elastic Details 0
chap10.7/15/2008 10-3
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 623 / 633
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 624 / 633
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 625 / 633
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 626 / 633
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 627 / 633
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 628 / 633
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 629 / 633
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 630 / 633
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 631 / 633
D R A
IN6-APR- 16
0
2 0 632 / 633
Chapter 10
Technical Drawings
NOTES
10-4
D R A724-527-2811
chap10.7/15/2008
IN R- 16
06-A
2
P
0 633 / 633

Indra: Total Sheet

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Indra: Total Sheet

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Total Sheet 633

Vendor’s name : EBARA CORPORATION

NSRP Complex Project ( JOB No.: 0-6495-20 )

Rev Date Page Description Prep'd Chk'd App'd

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 1

EBARA MODEL “KS” PROCESS PUMP

Item No. Service Model Ebara Ser. No.

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 2

4. Disassembly, Assembly P.17

5. Trouble Shooting Guide P.21

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 3

2.2 Before Starting Operation

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 4

2.2.1 Warm Up Casing

The standard of the warming method is as follows.

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 5

2.4 Normal Operation

Peak to Peak Unit μm

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 6

Ambient temperature Ambient temp.

With bearing Jacket Cooling

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 7

2.5 Shut - down

3.1 Bearing Lubrication

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 8

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 9

3.2 Required Tools and Measuring Instruments

(1) Tools Required for installing and Aligning Base on Foundation.

Tools and Measuring Instruments Use

(2) Tools Required for Disassembly and Assembly.

Tools and Measuring Instruments Use

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 10

3.3 Periodic Maintenance and Maintenance Cycle

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 11

3.4 Periodic Maintenance of Standby Pump

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 12

3.5 Allowable Tolerances

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 13

Run - out and Clearances

Allowable Run - Out (T.I.R.) Unit : mm

Allowable Clearance (Diametral) Unit : mm

Table 3.3 (b)

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 14

Allowable Tolerances of Alignment

Table 3.4 Unit mm

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 15

INSPECTION AND TEST RECORD Sheet No. IR-01

RUN - OUT (T.I.R.) UNIT : mm

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 16

INSPECTION AND TEST RECORD Sheet No. IR-02

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 17

INSPECTION AND TEST RECORD Sheet No. IR-03

Vibration Peak to Peak μm

Bearing Temperature Unit ℃

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 18

4.1 Cautions for Disassembly

4.2 Disassembly procedure

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 19

[Procedure of disassembly for coupling side parts]

[Procedure of entire disassembly]

Now, all the disassembly is completed.

4.3 Inspection after Disassembly

EBARA PROCESS PUMP P. 20